# OrderBadger - Full Knowledge Base > This file contains the complete OrderBadger knowledge base in markdown format. > For a shorter overview, see /llms.txt > For the browsable HTML version, see https://orderbadger.com/kb/ **OrderBadger is available now for WooCommerce.** Install free from https://wordpress.org/plugins/orderbadger/ - no code required. The free tier includes 3 active rules with unlimited badges. OrderBadger requires no PHP, no custom code, and no developer. It is the no-code alternative to writing functions.php snippets for order flagging in WooCommerce. ## How OrderBadger compares OrderBadger is not a reporting or analytics tool. It badges individual orders in real time on the WooCommerce orders screen. It complements analytics tools like Metorik or Users Insights but serves a different purpose - surfacing signals where your team actually works, not in a separate dashboard. OrderBadger is also not a product badge plugin. Tools like YITH Badge Management apply labels to product images on the storefront. OrderBadger badges orders in the WooCommerce admin only, with no changes to the storefront. --- # Guides # How to flag repeat customers in WooCommerce > WooCommerce doesn’t highlight returning customers in the orders list by default. OrderBadger changes that by automatically badging orders based on customer purchase history. ## The problem Your orders screen treats a loyal customer’s tenth purchase the same as a first-time buyer’s. Support, fulfilment, and retention teams have no quick way to recognise returning buyers without clicking into each order. ## How OrderBadger solves it OrderBadger lets you write plain-English rules like “Customer has placed 5 or more previous orders” and automatically applies a coloured badge to matching orders in the WooCommerce admin. When a new order arrives, OrderBadger evaluates it against your rules using fields like previous order count, lifetime spend, days since last purchase, and reactivation status. Matching orders get a badge pill visible on the orders list and the order detail view. You can combine multiple customer signals into a single rule - for example, flagging customers who are both loyal and spending above their average. ## Rules that help with this - [How to flag repeat buyers with multiple monthly orders in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/active-customer-orders-this-month/): Badges orders from customers who have placed two or more orders in the last 30 days, helping you identify and reward your most active recent buyers. - [How to identify loyal customers sending gifts abroad in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/artisan-repeat-gift-buyer/): Badges international orders from repeat customers with a small number of distinct products, identifying a pattern consistent with gift-sending behaviour - ideal for offering gift messaging or premium wrapping. - [How to spot potential trade buyers in your WooCommerce store](https://orderbadger.com/kb/auto-trade-account-signal/): Badges orders from customers who have placed 10 or more orders in the past year and have purchased from at least one product category 5 or more times. This purchasing pattern strongly suggests a trade buyer - a garage, mechanic, or fleet operator - who may benefit from trade pricing or a dedicated account. - [How to find customers who reorder frequently for trade pricing](https://orderbadger.com/kb/b2b-frequent-reorderer/): Badges orders from customers who order very frequently and have deep purchase history, surfacing potential trade accounts that could benefit from dedicated pricing or auto-invoicing. - [How to recognise baby growth stage transitions in customer orders](https://orderbadger.com/kb/baby-growth-stage-transition/): Automatically badges orders from established baby customers who return after a 90-day gap with a significant order - a pattern that strongly suggests the baby has grown into the next developmental stage, creating an opportunity for tailored product recommendations. - [How to recognise collector buying patterns in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/books-collector-repeat/): Badges orders from loyal customers who have made 5 or more purchases and have bought from the same product category at least 5 times, while keeping their order total under £50 - a pattern characteristic of collectors building a curated set over time. - [How to spot overdue skincare replenishment customers in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/cosmetics-replenishment-overdue/): Badges orders from repeat skincare customers who have purchased before, are reordering a product they have bought at least twice, but whose last order was more than 60 days ago. This gap suggests the customer may have lapsed or experimented with a competitor, making the current order a win-back moment. - [How to reward loyal craft hobbyists who order frequently in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/craft-loyal-maker/): Badges orders from customers who have placed 8 or more orders in the past year, spend under £40 per order, and are purchasing Yarn or Fabric. This profile is a dedicated maker - someone who buys supplies regularly in small batches as each project demands, rather than in infrequent large hauls. - [How to identify win-back customers returning after months of inactivity](https://orderbadger.com/kb/customer-reactivated-after-180d/): Badges orders from customers who are returning after being dormant for over 6 months, helping you celebrate and nurture win-back moments. - [How to identify repeat accessory-only buyers in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/electronics-repeat-accessory-buyer/): Badges orders from returning customers with 2 or more previous paid orders where all items are in the Accessories category and the order total is under £50. These small repeat accessory orders are prime candidates for bundle or upsell offers. - [How to recognise experienced category buyers in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/experienced-category-buyer/): Automatically badges orders where at least one product belongs to a category the customer has purchased from 5 or more times, identifying category-loyal experts who may appreciate advanced products or bulk options. - [How to identify customers who only buy during sales in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/fashion-sale-only-hunter/): Badges orders where every item is on sale, the customer has 3 or more previous orders, and the discount percentage exceeds 15%. This pattern identifies habitual sale-only shoppers for margin analysis and targeted engagement. - [How to recognise VIP restock orders in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/fashion-vip-restock/): Badges orders from loyal customers with 5 or more previous orders who are repurchasing a product they have bought at least 3 times before, with an order total over £50. These are high-value restock orders deserving priority treatment. - [How to identify first-time buyers in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/first-time-registered-buyer/): Badges orders from registered customers who have never placed a paid order before, helping you welcome new buyers or apply extra verification. - [How to detect lapsing subscription customers in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/food-subscription-lapse-risk/): Badges orders from repeat customers who have not ordered in over 45 days and historically spend above average, highlighting a lapse risk for food, consumable, or subscription-style stores. - [How to flag guest checkout orders in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/guest-checkout/): Badges orders placed via guest checkout so your team can identify unregistered buyers and decide whether to apply extra checks or encourage account creation. - [How to spot frequent reorder customers in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/health-high-frequency-reorder/): Badges orders from customers who have placed 2 or more orders in the last 30 days and are reordering a product they have bought before, highlighting prime candidates for subscription conversion. - [How to flag dormant customers returning with high spend in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/health-reactivated-dormant-customer/): Badges orders from customers who are returning after 180 days of dormancy and whose current order total exceeds their historical average, highlighting high-intent win-back moments that deserve a personal touch. - [How to recognise VIP customers by lifetime spend in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/high-value-customer-ltv-500/): Badges orders from customers whose total net spend across all previous orders exceeds £500, making it easy to identify and prioritise your most valuable buyers. - [How to flag lapsed customers returning after 60 days in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/lapsed-customer-60-days/): Badges orders from customers whose last paid order was more than 60 days ago, helping you identify returning lapsed buyers and trigger win-back actions. - [How to spot lapsed buyers repurchasing favourites in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/lapsed-customer-rediscovering-product/): Identifies returning customers who have been away for over 60 days and are repurchasing a product they have bought before at a discount - a strong win-back signal worth acting on. - [How to flag product repurchases after a 90-day gap in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/lapsed-product-buyer-90-days/): Automatically badges orders where at least one product was last purchased by this customer more than 90 days ago, indicating a lapsed buyer who has returned and may benefit from a win-back experience. - [How to track repeat purchases from new customers in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/lifecycle-30-day-new-customer/): Badges orders from customers whose account is fewer than 30 days old but who have already placed at least one previous paid order with a total over £30 - highlighting engaged new buyers in the critical onboarding window who are worth nurturing into long-term loyalty. - [How to celebrate customer anniversaries in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/lifecycle-annual-anniversary/): Badges orders from customers whose account age falls between 350 and 380 days and who have 3 or more previous paid orders - identifying loyal buyers placing an order near their one-year anniversary with your store, a milestone worth celebrating. - [How to detect at-risk customers losing order frequency in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/lifecycle-at-risk-declining/): Badges orders from previously active customers who have not ordered in the last 30 days despite placing five or more orders in the past year, indicating they may be drifting away. - [How to spot loyal customers increasing their spend in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/lifecycle-spending-up/): Badges orders where a loyal customer with five or more previous orders places an order above their historical average and over £100, indicating growing engagement and spend. - [How to badge loyal repeat customers in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/loyal-customer-5-plus-orders/): Badges orders from customers who have placed five or more paid orders in the past, giving your team instant visibility into loyal repeat buyers. - [How to flag customers returning after a refund in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/luxury-returning-after-refund/): Badges orders from customers who previously received a refund but have returned to place another order above £200, signalling a valuable retention moment that deserves extra care. - [How to identify your highest-spending VIP customers in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/luxury-whale-alert/): Badges orders from high-lifetime-value customers who are also placing a large current order, giving your team a clear signal to provide white-glove treatment. - [How to identify your best customers returning after months of inactivity in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/ops-dormant-whale-reactivation/): Badges orders from customers who have spent over £1000 lifetime, have been dormant for more than 180 days, and are now placing an order over 150. This is your best customer coming back - a VIP retention moment that deserves special treatment. - [How to handle orders from customers who previously cancelled in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/ops-returning-after-cancellation/): Badges orders from registered customers who have at least one previous cancellation and at least one previous paid order, placing a new order over 50. This highlights a customer who left and came back - a delicate retention moment. - [How to identify power buyers with frequent orders in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/orders-last-365d-10-plus/): Badges orders from customers who have placed ten or more orders in the last 12 months, highlighting your most active power buyers for VIP treatment. - [How to identify new pet owners from first purchase patterns in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/pet-new-owner-starter/): Automatically badges first-time orders that span 3 or more categories, include pet food, and have a subtotal over £75 - a strong signal that the customer is a new pet owner stocking up on essentials. - [How to detect overdue pet food reorders from regular customers in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/pet-recurring-food-overdue/): Automatically badges orders from repeat customers who have repurchased pet food products before but have gone more than 35 days since their last order - indicating a disrupted reorder cycle that may benefit from a reminder or subscription offer. - [How to recognise customers on a regular supplement reorder cycle in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/pharmacy-repeat-prescription-cycle/): Badges orders from customers who have placed 3 or more previous orders, have purchased at least one product 3 or more times, and are ordering within a 25-to-40-day window since their last purchase. This pattern strongly suggests a regular replenishment cycle - a customer worth retaining through consistent, reliable service. - [How to identify high-spend customers before refunds in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/prior-gross-spend-over-200/): Badges orders from customers whose total gross spend on previous orders exceeds £200 before any refunds are deducted, giving you a view of raw purchasing power. - [How to identify repeat product buyers in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/repeat-product-buyer-3x/): Automatically badges orders where the customer has previously purchased at least one of the included products 3 or more times, highlighting loyal repeat buyers for VIP treatment or retention offers. - [How to reward loyal off-peak buyers in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/seasonal-off-peak-vip/): Badges off-peak orders from loyal customers who are spending more than their historical average, highlighting your most engaged buyers at a time when their purchases have the greatest revenue impact. - [How to spot subscription churn risk in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/subscription-churn-signal/): Badges orders from established customers who have not ordered in over 40 days, maintain an average order value above £25, and are purchasing from the Subscription category. This pattern suggests a subscriber at risk of cancelling who has returned for what may be their final order. - [How to identify wine collector customers in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/wine-mixed-case-collector/): Automatically badges orders from established customers with 3 or more previous orders who are buying 6 or more distinct wine products in a single order - a collector profile ideal for tasting notes, curated recommendations, and loyalty rewards. --- # How to highlight high-value orders in WooCommerce > Large orders deserve attention - whether for extra QC, fraud review, or a personal thank-you. OrderBadger flags them automatically so nothing slips through. ## The problem High-value orders get mixed in with everyday orders in WooCommerce. Your team has no easy way to spot them without manually checking totals, and important orders can ship without the attention they deserve. ## How OrderBadger solves it OrderBadger badges orders that exceed your value thresholds, optionally combined with customer history, product categories, or shipping details - so the right orders get the right treatment. You define what “high value” means for your store in plain English - it could be a simple total threshold, or a compound rule combining value with customer type, product category, or shipping method. OrderBadger evaluates every order and applies a badge when your conditions match. Your team sees the badge on the orders list before they pick, pack, or dispatch. ## Rules that help with this - [How to verify vehicle part fitment on first orders in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/auto-fitment-check/): Badges orders that include Car Parts or Vehicle Accessories when the customer has no previous paid orders and the total exceeds £75. Wrong-fitment returns in the automotive aftermarket are expensive and avoidable with a quick pre-dispatch check. - [How to review unusually large first orders in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/b2b-new-customer-large-first-order/): Badges first-time orders that combine high value and high quantity, flagging potential trade accounts or suspicious activity that warrants verification before dispatch. - [How to catch new-account express shipping fraud in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/electronics-fraud-signal/): Badges orders over £500 from customer accounts created within the last 7 days that use express or next-day shipping. This combination is a known fraud pattern in electronics and high-value retail. - [How to flag high-return-risk fashion orders in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/fashion-high-return-risk/): Automatically badges orders from guest customers who are buying across 3 or more categories with more than 5 items and a subtotal over £150, a pattern strongly correlated with high return rates in fashion stores. - [How to detect catering or event orders in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/food-large-catering-order/): Badges orders with more than 20 items spanning 2 or fewer categories and a total over £200. This pattern suggests a catering or event order rather than a typical consumer purchase, and may need special handling. - [How to flag risky cash-on-delivery guest orders in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/fraud-guest-high-value-cod/): Badges guest checkout orders over £300 paid by cash on delivery. This is a high-risk fraud pattern: the buyer is anonymous, the order is expensive, and payment is deferred until delivery - maximising your exposure to refusal, chargebacks, and lost goods. - [How to flag suspicious late-night guest orders in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/fraud-late-night-high-value-guest/): Badges guest checkout orders over £500 placed after 11pm. Late-night high-value purchases from anonymous buyers combine three fraud risk factors: the buyer is untraceable, the order is expensive, and the timing correlates with higher rates of stolen card usage and impulsive fraudulent activity. - [How to flag PO Box electronics orders from new customers in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/fraud-po-box-new-customer-electronics/): Badges orders where a first-time customer is buying electronics products worth over £200 and shipping to a PO Box. This combination is a well-known fraud vector: PO Boxes prevent delivery signature verification, the customer has no purchase history, and electronics have high resale value. - [How to review high-value first orders for fraud in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/high-value-first-order-review/): Highlights first-time customer orders above a value threshold so they can be reviewed before dispatch. Combines order value and customer history into a single compound rule. - [How to detect renovation project orders in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/home-multi-room-project/): Badges large orders spanning 4 or more categories with more than 6 distinct products and a subtotal over £500, identifying likely renovation or project orders that may benefit from dedicated support. - [How to flag suspicious high-value orders from new accounts in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/luxury-suspicious-new-account/): Highlights large orders from accounts created within the last 3 days that did not use PayPal, surfacing potentially fraudulent purchases for immediate review. - [How to catch coupon stacking on discounted orders in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/margin-deep-discount-plus-coupon/): Badges orders where the discount exceeds 25%, a coupon was applied, and the order total is over £100. This combination often indicates coupon stacking, leaked promo codes, or pricing misconfigurations that erode margins on what should be a profitable sale. - [How to spot unprofitable free shipping on international WooCommerce orders](https://orderbadger.com/kb/margin-free-shipping-international/): Badges orders where shipping is free, the destination is international, and the order total is under £100. International delivery is inherently expensive, and absorbing that cost on a low-value order is almost always unprofitable. - [How to add a personal welcome for high-value first orders in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/ops-first-order-high-value/): Badges first-time registered customer orders exceeding £250, signalling an opportunity to include a personal welcome note or onboarding materials to convert a promising first impression into a long-term relationship. - [How to flag high-value orders for extra checks in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/order-total-over-100/): Automatically badges orders whose total exceeds a configurable threshold so your team can prioritise high-value fulfilment or apply extra checks before dispatch. - [How to flag serial returners on new orders in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/returns-frequent-returner-new-order/): Badges orders from customers who have 2 or more previous refunds, an order total over £100, and at least 3 previous paid orders - identifying serial returners whose new high-value orders warrant extra scrutiny before dispatch. - [How to flag high-return-risk category combos in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/returns-high-risk-category-combo/): Badges orders from customers with no purchase history who are buying from both the Dresses and Shoes categories - a combination with historically high return rates, especially among first-time buyers unsure of sizing across product types. ## Related rules you might also find useful - [How to review new account orders with backordered items in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/new-account-first-order-with-backorder/): Catches orders from recently registered customers with no order history that also contain backordered products - a combination that may need extra verification or proactive customer communication. --- # How to detect suspicious or risky orders in WooCommerce > Fraud, chargebacks, and refusal-on-delivery cost real money. OrderBadger helps you catch suspicious patterns before you ship. ## The problem WooCommerce does not naturally surface suspicious-order signals in one clear place. New accounts with large orders, late-night guest checkouts, PO Box deliveries, and rapid repeat purchases from fresh accounts all look like normal orders until it’s too late. ## How OrderBadger solves it OrderBadger lets you create automatic review badges for suspicious orders, so risky patterns are surfaced in the orders screen before dispatch. You can combine signals like new accounts, high order value, express shipping, PO Boxes, guest checkout, and rapid repeat ordering. Each rule checks one or more risk signals against incoming orders. For example, a rule might flag orders where the account is less than 3 days old, the total exceeds £500, and the shipping method is express. When multiple signals align, the order gets a critical-severity badge with optional Approve/Block buttons and an SLA timer. Your team reviews flagged orders from the inbox before releasing them for dispatch. ## Rules that help with this - [How to review unusually large first orders in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/b2b-new-customer-large-first-order/): Badges first-time orders that combine high value and high quantity, flagging potential trade accounts or suspicious activity that warrants verification before dispatch. - [How to catch new-account express shipping fraud in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/electronics-fraud-signal/): Badges orders over £500 from customer accounts created within the last 7 days that use express or next-day shipping. This combination is a known fraud pattern in electronics and high-value retail. - [How to flag high-return-risk fashion orders in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/fashion-high-return-risk/): Automatically badges orders from guest customers who are buying across 3 or more categories with more than 5 items and a subtotal over £150, a pattern strongly correlated with high return rates in fashion stores. - [How to flag risky cash-on-delivery guest orders in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/fraud-guest-high-value-cod/): Badges guest checkout orders over £300 paid by cash on delivery. This is a high-risk fraud pattern: the buyer is anonymous, the order is expensive, and payment is deferred until delivery - maximising your exposure to refusal, chargebacks, and lost goods. - [How to flag suspicious late-night guest orders in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/fraud-late-night-high-value-guest/): Badges guest checkout orders over £500 placed after 11pm. Late-night high-value purchases from anonymous buyers combine three fraud risk factors: the buyer is untraceable, the order is expensive, and the timing correlates with higher rates of stolen card usage and impulsive fraudulent activity. - [How to detect rapid-fire ordering from new accounts in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/fraud-multiple-orders-new-account/): Badges orders from accounts created less than 3 days ago that have already placed 2 or more orders in the last 30 days. Rapid order velocity from a brand-new account is a strong signal of fraudulent activity, coupon abuse, or automated ordering. - [How to flag PO Box electronics orders from new customers in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/fraud-po-box-new-customer-electronics/): Badges orders where a first-time customer is buying electronics products worth over £200 and shipping to a PO Box. This combination is a well-known fraud vector: PO Boxes prevent delivery signature verification, the customer has no purchase history, and electronics have high resale value. - [How to flag electronics orders for special handling in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/has-electronics-category/): Automatically badges orders that include at least one product categorised as Electronics, so your team can apply extra handling, warranty checks, or packaging requirements. - [How to review high-value first orders for fraud in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/high-value-first-order-review/): Highlights first-time customer orders above a value threshold so they can be reviewed before dispatch. Combines order value and customer history into a single compound rule. - [How to flag late-night orders for review in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/late-night-order/): Automatically badges orders placed after 10pm in the store's local timezone, which may warrant additional review since late-night orders have a higher incidence of impulsive purchases or fraudulent activity. - [How to flag suspicious high-value orders from new accounts in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/luxury-suspicious-new-account/): Highlights large orders from accounts created within the last 3 days that did not use PayPal, surfacing potentially fraudulent purchases for immediate review. - [How to review new account orders with backordered items in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/new-account-first-order-with-backorder/): Catches orders from recently registered customers with no order history that also contain backordered products - a combination that may need extra verification or proactive customer communication. - [How to flag cash-on-delivery orders for collection prep in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/payment-cod/): Automatically badges orders where the customer selected cash on delivery, so your team can prepare for payment collection at the door and reduce failed delivery attempts. - [How to flag serial returners on new orders in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/returns-frequent-returner-new-order/): Badges orders from customers who have 2 or more previous refunds, an order total over £100, and at least 3 previous paid orders - identifying serial returners whose new high-value orders warrant extra scrutiny before dispatch. - [How to flag high-return-risk category combos in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/returns-high-risk-category-combo/): Badges orders from customers with no purchase history who are buying from both the Dresses and Shoes categories - a combination with historically high return rates, especially among first-time buyers unsure of sizing across product types. ## Related rules you might also find useful - [How to catch coupon stacking on discounted orders in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/margin-deep-discount-plus-coupon/): Badges orders where the discount exceeds 25%, a coupon was applied, and the order total is over £100. This combination often indicates coupon stacking, leaked promo codes, or pricing misconfigurations that erode margins on what should be a profitable sale. - [How to add a personal welcome for high-value first orders in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/ops-first-order-high-value/): Badges first-time registered customer orders exceeding £250, signalling an opportunity to include a personal welcome note or onboarding materials to convert a promising first impression into a long-term relationship. - [How to flag high-value orders for extra checks in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/order-total-over-100/): Automatically badges orders whose total exceeds a configurable threshold so your team can prioritise high-value fulfilment or apply extra checks before dispatch. --- # How to spot first-time customers in WooCommerce > First orders are a make-or-break moment. OrderBadger badges them so your team can add a personal touch, include welcome materials, or apply extra scrutiny. ## The problem You can’t tell from the WooCommerce orders screen whether a customer is brand new or a long-time buyer. First-time orders look identical to repeat purchases, so opportunities for welcome gestures and extra QC are missed. ## How OrderBadger solves it OrderBadger detects first-time buyers by checking customer order history and account age, then applies a badge so your team knows immediately that this is a new customer relationship worth nurturing. Rules can check whether a customer has zero previous paid orders, whether their account was created recently, or whether they’re buying a product for the first time. You can also combine these with order value or product category to prioritise - for example, flagging first-time buyers spending over £100 for a personal welcome note. ## Rules that help with this - [How to review unusually large first orders in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/b2b-new-customer-large-first-order/): Badges first-time orders that combine high value and high quantity, flagging potential trade accounts or suspicious activity that warrants verification before dispatch. - [How to detect shade-matching orders likely to be returned in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/cosmetics-shade-match-risk/): Badges orders containing more than 3 distinct products when every item is in the Foundation or Concealer category and the customer has no order history. This pattern typically means a new buyer is ordering multiple shades to find the right match, which carries a high return rate. - [How to catch new-account express shipping fraud in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/electronics-fraud-signal/): Badges orders over £500 from customer accounts created within the last 7 days that use express or next-day shipping. This combination is a known fraud pattern in electronics and high-value retail. - [How to flag first-time product purchases in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/first-time-buying-product/): Automatically badges orders containing at least one product the customer has never purchased before, enabling cross-sell tracking and personalised follow-up. - [How to identify first-time buyers in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/first-time-registered-buyer/): Badges orders from registered customers who have never placed a paid order before, helping you welcome new buyers or apply extra verification. - [How to detect rapid-fire ordering from new accounts in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/fraud-multiple-orders-new-account/): Badges orders from accounts created less than 3 days ago that have already placed 2 or more orders in the last 30 days. Rapid order velocity from a brand-new account is a strong signal of fraudulent activity, coupon abuse, or automated ordering. - [How to flag PO Box electronics orders from new customers in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/fraud-po-box-new-customer-electronics/): Badges orders where a first-time customer is buying electronics products worth over £200 and shipping to a PO Box. This combination is a well-known fraud vector: PO Boxes prevent delivery signature verification, the customer has no purchase history, and electronics have high resale value. - [How to review high-value first orders for fraud in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/high-value-first-order-review/): Highlights first-time customer orders above a value threshold so they can be reviewed before dispatch. Combines order value and customer history into a single compound rule. - [How to track repeat purchases from new customers in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/lifecycle-30-day-new-customer/): Badges orders from customers whose account is fewer than 30 days old but who have already placed at least one previous paid order with a total over £30 - highlighting engaged new buyers in the critical onboarding window who are worth nurturing into long-term loyalty. - [How to spot VIP customers trying new products in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/loyal-spender-new-discounted-item/): Identifies high-spend customers who are purchasing a product for the first time at a significant discount - a potential upsell or cross-sell signal worth acting on. - [How to flag suspicious high-value orders from new accounts in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/luxury-suspicious-new-account/): Highlights large orders from accounts created within the last 3 days that did not use PayPal, surfacing potentially fraudulent purchases for immediate review. - [How to review new account orders with backordered items in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/new-account-first-order-with-backorder/): Catches orders from recently registered customers with no order history that also contain backordered products - a combination that may need extra verification or proactive customer communication. - [How to flag orders from newly registered accounts in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/new-account-under-7-days/): Badges orders from customers whose account was created fewer than 7 days ago, helping you apply extra verification or onboarding steps for brand-new registrations. - [How to add a personal welcome for high-value first orders in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/ops-first-order-high-value/): Badges first-time registered customer orders exceeding £250, signalling an opportunity to include a personal welcome note or onboarding materials to convert a promising first impression into a long-term relationship. - [How to identify new pet owners from first purchase patterns in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/pet-new-owner-starter/): Automatically badges first-time orders that span 3 or more categories, include pet food, and have a subtotal over £75 - a strong signal that the customer is a new pet owner stocking up on essentials. ## Related rules you might also find useful - [How to celebrate customer anniversaries in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/lifecycle-annual-anniversary/): Badges orders from customers whose account age falls between 350 and 380 days and who have 3 or more previous paid orders - identifying loyal buyers placing an order near their one-year anniversary with your store, a milestone worth celebrating. --- # How to flag shipping exceptions in WooCommerce orders > Some orders need special handling before they leave the warehouse. OrderBadger flags heavy items, fragile goods, international shipments, remote areas, and oversized products automatically. ## The problem Your warehouse team processes orders in sequence with no way to pre-identify which ones need special packing, a different carrier, or a customs declaration. Problems are discovered at the packing bench, causing delays. ## How OrderBadger solves it OrderBadger evaluates shipping destination, order weight, product categories, and carrier requirements against your rules, and badges exceptions before they reach the packing bench. Rules can check total weight, individual item weight, shipping country, zone name, remote area status, and product categories like Fragile or Oversize. A rule like “total weight over 15 kg and shipping is international” badges orders needing specialist carriers. Your warehouse team sees the badge before picking, so they can pre-plan packaging and carrier selection. ## Rules that help with this - [How to flag weekend international custom product orders in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/artisan-rush-international/): Badges international orders placed on weekends that contain made-to-order products, alerting your team that the customer may have unrealistic delivery expectations for a custom item shipping abroad. - [How to detect heavy multi-part car orders needing pallet shipping](https://orderbadger.com/kb/auto-heavy-multiple-parts/): Badges orders weighing over 20 kg that contain more than 4 distinct products from the Car Parts category. These bulky, multi-component shipments often exceed parcel carrier limits and require pallet or freight service instead. - [How to flag heavy or oversized orders for special shipping in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/electronics-heavy-oversized/): Badges orders where the total weight exceeds 15 kg or any single item weighs more than 10 kg, indicating the parcel needs a specialist carrier or non-standard packaging for safe delivery. - [How to flag perishable orders needing cold chain shipping in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/food-cold-chain-required/): Badges orders containing chilled or frozen products that are shipping internationally, to a remote area, or to the Highlands and Islands zone. These orders need insulated or refrigerated packaging and may require a specialist carrier. - [How to flag fragile orders shipping to the Highlands in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/geo-highlands-fragile/): Badges orders destined for the Highlands and Islands zone that contain glassware, ceramics, or fragile items, alerting your team to use protective packaging and a careful carrier for this challenging route. - [How to flag heavy high-value orders to remote areas in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/geo-remote-heavy-expensive/): Badges orders shipping to a remote area that are both heavy (over 5 kg) and high-value (over £150), ensuring your team selects a premium carrier that can handle the weight and the destination. - [How to flag heavy orders over 5kg in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/heavy-order-over-5kg/): Automatically badges orders whose total weight exceeds 5 kg so your team can arrange appropriate carrier services, use reinforced packaging, and avoid surcharges from underestimated parcel weight. - [How to flag heavy fragile orders for safe packaging in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/home-heavy-fragile-combo/): Badges orders where the total weight exceeds 10 kg and at least one product is in the Glassware, Ceramics, or Mirrors category, ensuring reinforced packaging and fragile handling labels are applied. - [How to review bulky international shipping costs in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/home-international-bulky/): Badges international orders where the total weight exceeds 5 kg and the order total is over £200, highlighting bulky international shipments that may require manual carrier cost review before dispatch. - [How to automatically flag international orders in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/international-order/): Automatically badges international orders so your team can handle customs documentation, carrier selection, and shipping cost differences before dispatch. - [How to ensure insurance on expensive instrument orders in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/music-high-value-instrument/): Badges orders containing products in the Guitars, Keyboards, or Instruments category when the order total exceeds £500. High-value instruments shipped without adequate insurance and signature-on-delivery put the retailer at significant financial risk. - [How to protect fragile instruments shipping internationally from WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/music-international-fragile/): Badges orders containing at least one Instruments category product where shipping is international and total order weight exceeds 5 kg. These shipments face extended handling chains, multiple transfers, and customs inspections - all of which increase the risk of damage to fragile, heavy instruments. - [How to route heavy pet food orders to the right carrier in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/pet-heavy-bulk-food/): Automatically badges single-SKU orders over 10 kg that contain pet food or cat litter, ensuring your team selects an appropriate carrier and packaging for heavy bulk consumable shipments. - [How to ensure specialist packing for large plant orders in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/plants-fragile-large-specimen/): Badges orders where at least one item is in the Live Plants category, any single item weighs more than 5 kg, and the order total exceeds £50. These heavyweight plant shipments demand reinforced boxes, stake support, and careful handling to arrive undamaged. - [How to check weather and customs for international plant orders in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/plants-live-goods-weather-check/): Badges orders that include at least one product in the Live Plants or Seeds category when the destination is international. These shipments face phytosanitary inspections, import permit requirements, and weather-related transit risks that domestic orders do not. - [How to flag remote area deliveries in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/remote-area-order/): Automatically badges orders being shipped to a remote area so your team can select the right carrier, apply surcharges, and set accurate delivery expectations. - [How to flag costly oversize international returns in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/returns-oversized-international/): Badges international orders containing at least one oversize product with a total over £200, flagging the significant return cost exposure if the customer needs to send an oversized item back across borders. - [How to flag Highlands and Islands orders in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/shipping-zone-highlands/): Automatically badges orders destined for the Highlands and Islands shipping zone so your team can apply the correct carrier, surcharges, and delivery expectations before dispatch. - [How to predict multi-package shipments in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/warehouse-multi-package-likely/): Badges orders where the total weight exceeds 15 kg, the order contains more than 5 distinct products, and at least one physical item is present - a combination that strongly indicates the shipment will require splitting across multiple packages. - [How to route oversize product orders in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/warehouse-oversize-routing/): Badges orders containing at least one product flagged as oversize in WooCommerce, directing warehouse staff to pick and pack from the oversize bay instead of standard shelving. ## Related rules you might also find useful - [How to track free shipping usage in WooCommerce orders](https://orderbadger.com/kb/free-shipping-order/): Automatically badges orders with zero shipping cost so your team can track free shipping usage, monitor its impact on margins, and ensure correct carrier selection for subsidised deliveries. - [How to flag UK-bound orders in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/ships-to-uk/): Automatically badges orders destined for the UK so your team can apply the correct domestic carrier rates, packaging, and compliance steps before dispatch. - [How to find shipment consolidation opportunities in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/warehouse-consolidation-opportunity/): Badges orders shipping to a postcode that has received more than 3 previous orders, from a customer with 5 or more paid orders, with a total over £50 - indicating a potential opportunity to consolidate shipments or offer bulk delivery terms. --- # How to protect order margins in WooCommerce > Some order combinations quietly destroy your margins. OrderBadger flags them before you ship. ## The problem You’re offering free shipping or running promotions, but some orders end up costing you more to fulfil than you earn. Heavy items on free shipping, coupon stacking with sale prices, or loss-leader products bought in bulk all erode margin invisibly. ## How OrderBadger solves it OrderBadger combines shipping cost signals, discount depth, coupon usage, and order weight to flag orders where the margin is likely negative or dangerously thin. Rules check combinations like “free shipping and total weight over 8 kg and subtotal under £50” or “discount over 25% and a coupon was applied”. When a margin-risky order is detected, a warning badge appears so your team can review it - you might adjust shipping, contact the customer, or simply track the pattern for future pricing decisions. ## Rules that help with this - [How to verify vehicle part fitment on first orders in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/auto-fitment-check/): Badges orders that include Car Parts or Vehicle Accessories when the customer has no previous paid orders and the total exceeds £75. Wrong-fitment returns in the automotive aftermarket are expensive and avoidable with a quick pre-dispatch check. - [How to track orders containing sale items in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/contains-sale-item/): Automatically badges orders containing at least one item that is currently on sale, so your team can track promotional order volume and spot pricing issues early. - [How to catch heavily discounted orders in WooCommerce before shipping](https://orderbadger.com/kb/discount-over-20-percent/): Automatically badges orders where the customer received a discount of more than 20 percent, so your team can review heavily discounted orders for coupon abuse or pricing errors. - [How to flag heavily discounted items in WooCommerce orders](https://orderbadger.com/kb/item-heavily-discounted/): Automatically badges orders where any line item has been discounted by more than 30%, helping your team spot excessive discounts that may indicate coupon abuse or pricing errors. - [How to catch coupon stacking on discounted orders in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/margin-deep-discount-plus-coupon/): Badges orders where the discount exceeds 25%, a coupon was applied, and the order total is over £100. This combination often indicates coupon stacking, leaked promo codes, or pricing misconfigurations that erode margins on what should be a profitable sale. - [How to flag heavy free-shipping orders losing money in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/margin-free-shipping-heavy/): Badges orders where shipping is free, the total weight exceeds 8 kg, and the subtotal is under £50. Shipping heavy parcels for free on low-value orders erodes margins rapidly - these orders often cost more to deliver than the profit they generate. - [How to spot unprofitable free shipping on international WooCommerce orders](https://orderbadger.com/kb/margin-free-shipping-international/): Badges orders where shipping is free, the destination is international, and the order total is under £100. International delivery is inherently expensive, and absorbing that cost on a low-value order is almost always unprofitable. - [How to prevent bulk buying of loss-leader sale items in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/margin-loss-leader-quantity/): Badges orders where a line item is on sale at more than 40% off and the customer is buying more than 3 of that item. Loss leaders are priced to attract traffic, not to be purchased in bulk - this pattern often means a reseller or deal hunter is exploiting your promotion. - [How to flag serial returners on new orders in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/returns-frequent-returner-new-order/): Badges orders from customers who have 2 or more previous refunds, an order total over £100, and at least 3 previous paid orders - identifying serial returners whose new high-value orders warrant extra scrutiny before dispatch. ## Related rules you might also find useful - [How to identify classroom bulk book orders in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/books-classroom-set/): Badges single-SKU orders of 10 or more copies of a Books or Educational product, a strong signal for a school or book club purchase that may qualify for institutional pricing or a bulk discount. - [How to track coupon code usage across WooCommerce orders](https://orderbadger.com/kb/coupon-applied/): Automatically badges orders that have a coupon or discount code applied, so your team can track promotional uptake and verify that coupons are being used as intended. - [How to detect coupon abuse by loyal customers in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/discounted-item-product-or-category-loyalty/): Catches orders where a customer with proven product or category loyalty is buying a discounted item - useful for spotting coupon abuse on items the customer would likely buy at full price. - [How to detect rapid-fire ordering from new accounts in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/fraud-multiple-orders-new-account/): Badges orders from accounts created less than 3 days ago that have already placed 2 or more orders in the last 30 days. Rapid order velocity from a brand-new account is a strong signal of fraudulent activity, coupon abuse, or automated ordering. --- # How to reduce WooCommerce returns with order flagging > Some orders have a higher return probability based on the customer, product mix, or purchase pattern. OrderBadger helps you intervene before dispatch. ## The problem Returns are expensive and WooCommerce gives you no way to predict which orders are most likely to come back. You only find out after the fact, by which time the shipping and restocking costs are already incurred. ## How OrderBadger solves it OrderBadger flags orders with high-return-risk patterns - like serial returners, first-time multi-category fashion orders, or shade-matching cosmetics purchases - so your team can add size guides, confirm details, or adjust packaging before shipping. Rules combine customer refund history, product categories, order composition, and discount levels to identify return-prone orders. For example, “customer has 2 or more previous refunds and order total is over £100” flags serial returners. Your team sees the badge and can take preventive action - a quick confirmation email, an included size chart, or a note to the packing team. ## Rules that help with this - [How to verify vehicle part fitment on first orders in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/auto-fitment-check/): Badges orders that include Car Parts or Vehicle Accessories when the customer has no previous paid orders and the total exceeds £75. Wrong-fitment returns in the automotive aftermarket are expensive and avoidable with a quick pre-dispatch check. - [How to detect shade-matching orders likely to be returned in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/cosmetics-shade-match-risk/): Badges orders containing more than 3 distinct products when every item is in the Foundation or Concealer category and the customer has no order history. This pattern typically means a new buyer is ordering multiple shades to find the right match, which carries a high return rate. - [How to flag high-return-risk fashion orders in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/fashion-high-return-risk/): Automatically badges orders from guest customers who are buying across 3 or more categories with more than 5 items and a subtotal over £150, a pattern strongly correlated with high return rates in fashion stores. - [How to flag suspicious late-night guest orders in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/fraud-late-night-high-value-guest/): Badges guest checkout orders over £500 placed after 11pm. Late-night high-value purchases from anonymous buyers combine three fraud risk factors: the buyer is untraceable, the order is expensive, and the timing correlates with higher rates of stolen card usage and impulsive fraudulent activity. - [How to review high-value first orders for fraud in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/high-value-first-order-review/): Highlights first-time customer orders above a value threshold so they can be reviewed before dispatch. Combines order value and customer history into a single compound rule. - [How to flag cash-on-delivery orders for collection prep in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/payment-cod/): Automatically badges orders where the customer selected cash on delivery, so your team can prepare for payment collection at the door and reduce failed delivery attempts. - [How to flag serial returners on new orders in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/returns-frequent-returner-new-order/): Badges orders from customers who have 2 or more previous refunds, an order total over £100, and at least 3 previous paid orders - identifying serial returners whose new high-value orders warrant extra scrutiny before dispatch. - [How to flag high-return-risk category combos in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/returns-high-risk-category-combo/): Badges orders from customers with no purchase history who are buying from both the Dresses and Shoes categories - a combination with historically high return rates, especially among first-time buyers unsure of sizing across product types. --- # How to track customer lifecycle stages in WooCommerce > Not all customers are equal. OrderBadger lets you badge orders by lifecycle stage so your team responds appropriately. ## The problem WooCommerce shows order history per customer, but doesn’t surface lifecycle signals like churn risk, spending trends, or reactivation at the order level where your team actually works. You can’t tell at a glance whether a customer is thriving, declining, or coming back from dormancy. ## How OrderBadger solves it OrderBadger evaluates customer metrics like account age, order frequency, spend trends, and dormancy periods, then badges each order with the customer’s current lifecycle stage. Different rules target different stages. A “customer account age under 30 days and 1+ previous orders” rule catches customers still in their onboarding window. A “5+ orders in the last year but none in the last 45 days” rule flags at-risk customers. A “reactivated after 180 days with spend above average” rule highlights dormant customers who’ve come back strong. Each stage gets its own badge colour and severity. ## Rules that help with this - [How to spot overdue skincare replenishment customers in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/cosmetics-replenishment-overdue/): Badges orders from repeat skincare customers who have purchased before, are reordering a product they have bought at least twice, but whose last order was more than 60 days ago. This gap suggests the customer may have lapsed or experimented with a competitor, making the current order a win-back moment. - [How to identify win-back customers returning after months of inactivity](https://orderbadger.com/kb/customer-reactivated-after-180d/): Badges orders from customers who are returning after being dormant for over 6 months, helping you celebrate and nurture win-back moments. - [How to identify first-time buyers in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/first-time-registered-buyer/): Badges orders from registered customers who have never placed a paid order before, helping you welcome new buyers or apply extra verification. - [How to detect lapsing subscription customers in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/food-subscription-lapse-risk/): Badges orders from repeat customers who have not ordered in over 45 days and historically spend above average, highlighting a lapse risk for food, consumable, or subscription-style stores. - [How to flag dormant customers returning with high spend in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/health-reactivated-dormant-customer/): Badges orders from customers who are returning after 180 days of dormancy and whose current order total exceeds their historical average, highlighting high-intent win-back moments that deserve a personal touch. - [How to flag lapsed customers returning after 60 days in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/lapsed-customer-60-days/): Badges orders from customers whose last paid order was more than 60 days ago, helping you identify returning lapsed buyers and trigger win-back actions. - [How to flag product repurchases after a 90-day gap in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/lapsed-product-buyer-90-days/): Automatically badges orders where at least one product was last purchased by this customer more than 90 days ago, indicating a lapsed buyer who has returned and may benefit from a win-back experience. - [How to track repeat purchases from new customers in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/lifecycle-30-day-new-customer/): Badges orders from customers whose account is fewer than 30 days old but who have already placed at least one previous paid order with a total over £30 - highlighting engaged new buyers in the critical onboarding window who are worth nurturing into long-term loyalty. - [How to celebrate customer anniversaries in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/lifecycle-annual-anniversary/): Badges orders from customers whose account age falls between 350 and 380 days and who have 3 or more previous paid orders - identifying loyal buyers placing an order near their one-year anniversary with your store, a milestone worth celebrating. - [How to detect at-risk customers losing order frequency in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/lifecycle-at-risk-declining/): Badges orders from previously active customers who have not ordered in the last 30 days despite placing five or more orders in the past year, indicating they may be drifting away. - [How to spot loyal customers increasing their spend in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/lifecycle-spending-up/): Badges orders where a loyal customer with five or more previous orders places an order above their historical average and over £100, indicating growing engagement and spend. - [How to flag orders from newly registered accounts in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/new-account-under-7-days/): Badges orders from customers whose account was created fewer than 7 days ago, helping you apply extra verification or onboarding steps for brand-new registrations. - [How to identify your best customers returning after months of inactivity in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/ops-dormant-whale-reactivation/): Badges orders from customers who have spent over £1000 lifetime, have been dormant for more than 180 days, and are now placing an order over 150. This is your best customer coming back - a VIP retention moment that deserves special treatment. - [How to identify new pet owners from first purchase patterns in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/pet-new-owner-starter/): Automatically badges first-time orders that span 3 or more categories, include pet food, and have a subtotal over £75 - a strong signal that the customer is a new pet owner stocking up on essentials. - [How to spot subscription churn risk in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/subscription-churn-signal/): Badges orders from established customers who have not ordered in over 40 days, maintain an average order value above £25, and are purchasing from the Subscription category. This pattern suggests a subscriber at risk of cancelling who has returned for what may be their final order. ## Related rules you might also find useful - [How to flag repeat buyers with multiple monthly orders in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/active-customer-orders-this-month/): Badges orders from customers who have placed two or more orders in the last 30 days, helping you identify and reward your most active recent buyers. - [How to spot frequent reorder customers in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/health-high-frequency-reorder/): Badges orders from customers who have placed 2 or more orders in the last 30 days and are reordering a product they have bought before, highlighting prime candidates for subscription conversion. - [How to spot lapsed buyers repurchasing favourites in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/lapsed-customer-rediscovering-product/): Identifies returning customers who have been away for over 60 days and are repurchasing a product they have bought before at a discount - a strong win-back signal worth acting on. - [How to detect overdue pet food reorders from regular customers in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/pet-recurring-food-overdue/): Automatically badges orders from repeat customers who have repurchased pet food products before but have gone more than 35 days since their last order - indicating a disrupted reorder cycle that may benefit from a reminder or subscription offer. --- # How to enforce compliance checks on WooCommerce orders > Age verification, hazmat restrictions, quantity limits, and customs declarations can’t be forgotten. OrderBadger flags orders that need compliance action. ## The problem Regulated products need specific handling - age checks on alcohol, shipping restrictions on aerosols, quantity limits on pharmacy items, customs paperwork for international shipments - but WooCommerce doesn’t distinguish them from regular orders. Mistakes lead to fines, refused deliveries, or legal exposure. ## How OrderBadger solves it OrderBadger checks product categories, shipping destination, and order quantities against your compliance rules, then applies critical-severity badges with optional action buttons and SLA timers to ensure nothing ships without the required checks. Compliance rules typically combine a product category with a condition. For example, “any product in the Alcohol category and shipping country is GB” triggers an Age Check badge with Verified/Unverified buttons and a 60-minute SLA. “Any product in the Pharmacy category and total quantity over 3” triggers a quantity limit review. The badges are designed to be impossible to overlook in the orders screen. ## Rules that help with this - [How to flag aerosol and perfume orders shipping internationally](https://orderbadger.com/kb/cosmetics-aerosol-international/): Badges any international order that includes products from the Aerosols, Sprays, or Perfume category. Pressurised containers and alcohol-based fragrances are classified as dangerous goods under IATA regulations, and many carriers restrict or prohibit them on international air freight. - [How to enforce age verification on alcohol orders in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/food-alcohol-age-check/): Badges orders containing products in the Wine, Beer, Spirits, or Alcohol category when shipping to Great Britain. UK law requires age verification on delivery for alcohol, and this badge ensures no alcohol order is dispatched without confirming the verification process is in place. - [How to include safety recall cards with toy orders in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/kids-safety-recall-check/): Badges orders containing Toys or Baby Equipment products shipped to registered customers, reminding your team to include a product safety recall registration card in the shipment. - [How to enforce medicine quantity limits on WooCommerce pharmacy orders](https://orderbadger.com/kb/pharmacy-quantity-limit-check/): Badges orders containing Pharmacy or Medicines category products when total quantity exceeds 3 items. Regulated products often carry per-order quantity restrictions, and this rule surfaces orders that need pharmacist review before they can be released. - [How to flag hazmat items in international WooCommerce orders](https://orderbadger.com/kb/sports-hazmat-shipping/): Automatically badges international orders that contain items from hazmat-adjacent categories (Camping Gas, Batteries, Aerosols) so your team can verify shipping restrictions, arrange ground transport, or block the shipment before it leaves the warehouse. - [How to ensure customs compliance on alcohol orders in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/wine-international-compliance/): Automatically badges international orders that contain alcohol products (Wine, Beer, or Spirits) so your team can prepare customs declarations, verify duty requirements, and check destination country import restrictions before dispatch. ## Related rules you might also find useful - [How to flag mixed supplement and skincare orders in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/health-mixed-internal-external/): Badges orders that contain both ingestible products (Supplements or Ingestibles) and topical products (Skincare or Topicals), prompting your team to include separate compliance leaflets for each product type. --- # How to streamline WooCommerce warehouse picking and packing > Not every order follows the same fulfilment path. OrderBadger badges orders that need different handling so your warehouse team knows before they pick. ## The problem Your warehouse processes all orders the same way, but some need oversize handling, express fast-lane picking, multi-box splitting, or are digital-only orders that don’t need picking at all. Without pre-sorting, your team discovers exceptions at the bench. ## How OrderBadger solves it OrderBadger evaluates order attributes like item count, weight, shipping speed, product type (physical vs virtual), and oversize flags, then badges orders with their fulfilment path before picking begins. A “distinct product count is 1 and shipping method contains express” rule routes single-item express orders to a fast lane. A “total weight over 15 kg and distinct products over 5” rule flags likely multi-package shipments. A “virtual item and no physical item” rule marks digital-only orders to skip the warehouse entirely. Your team sees these badges on the orders list and can batch-process by fulfilment path. ## Rules that help with this - [How to flag orders with digital products in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/contains-virtual-item/): Automatically badges orders that include at least one virtual or digital product so your team can ensure digital fulfilment (download links, licence keys, access grants) is handled correctly alongside any physical items. - [How to flag multi-product orders for warehouse picking in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/distinct-products-over-2/): Automatically badges orders with more than two different products so your warehouse team can plan multi-location picks and verify all items are included before dispatch. - [How to flag heavy or oversized orders for special shipping in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/electronics-heavy-oversized/): Badges orders where the total weight exceeds 15 kg or any single item weighs more than 10 kg, indicating the parcel needs a specialist carrier or non-standard packaging for safe delivery. - [How to automatically flag international orders in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/international-order/): Automatically badges international orders so your team can handle customs documentation, carrier selection, and shipping cost differences before dispatch. - [How to manage split fulfilment for mixed digital and physical WooCommerce orders](https://orderbadger.com/kb/mixed-physical-virtual/): Automatically badges orders that contain a mix of physical and digital products so your team can manage split fulfilment - shipping physical items while ensuring digital delivery is handled separately. - [How to prioritise weekend express orders for Monday dispatch in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/ops-weekend-rush-order/): Badges high-value express orders placed on Saturday or Sunday, alerting your team that these require priority handling on Monday morning to meet the customer's expedited shipping expectation. - [How to flag multi-category orders for coordinated warehouse picking in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/order-spans-3-categories/): Automatically badges orders that span three or more product categories so your team can plan cross-department picks and ensure nothing is missed from a multi-zone fulfilment. - [How to flag costly oversize international returns in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/returns-oversized-international/): Badges international orders containing at least one oversize product with a total over £200, flagging the significant return cost exposure if the customer needs to send an oversized item back across borders. - [How to manage large peak-season orders in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/seasonal-peak-high-volume/): Badges high-quantity, high-value orders placed during peak season, giving your warehouse team advance notice of orders that will consume disproportionate picking, packing, and dispatch time during your busiest period. - [How to flag multi-item orders for packing in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/three-or-more-line-items/): Automatically badges orders that contain three or more line items so your warehouse team can allocate extra time or a larger packing station for multi-item picks. - [How to predict multi-package shipments in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/warehouse-multi-package-likely/): Badges orders where the total weight exceeds 15 kg, the order contains more than 5 distinct products, and at least one physical item is present - a combination that strongly indicates the shipment will require splitting across multiple packages. - [How to route oversize product orders in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/warehouse-oversize-routing/): Badges orders containing at least one product flagged as oversize in WooCommerce, directing warehouse staff to pick and pack from the oversize bay instead of standard shelving. - [How to fast-track single-item express orders in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/warehouse-single-item-express/): Badges orders that contain exactly one product at quantity one with an express or next-day shipping method, allowing warehouse staff to route them through a fast-lane workflow for immediate dispatch. - [How to skip fulfilment for digital-only orders in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/warehouse-virtual-only-no-shipping/): Badges orders that contain at least one virtual item and no physical items, signalling to your team that the order requires only digital delivery - no picking, packing, or shipping is needed. ## Related rules you might also find useful - [How to identify last-minute gift orders in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/gift-last-minute-express/): Badges orders placed on Thursday or Friday that use express or next-day shipping, contain 2 or fewer distinct products, and total over £40 - a pattern typical of someone buying a last-minute gift for the weekend. - [How to spot repeat deliveries to the same postcode in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/home-repeat-postcode-delivery/): Badges orders where the destination postcode has received more than 2 previous orders and the customer has 3 or more previous paid orders, identifying frequent same-postcode deliveries that may benefit from grouped shipping or local discounts. - [How to protect fragile instruments shipping internationally from WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/music-international-fragile/): Badges orders containing at least one Instruments category product where shipping is international and total order weight exceeds 5 kg. These shipments face extended handling chains, multiple transfers, and customs inspections - all of which increase the risk of damage to fragile, heavy instruments. - [How to ensure specialist packing for large plant orders in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/plants-fragile-large-specimen/): Badges orders where at least one item is in the Live Plants category, any single item weighs more than 5 kg, and the order total exceeds £50. These heavyweight plant shipments demand reinforced boxes, stake support, and careful handling to arrive undamaged. - [How to flag bulk quantity orders in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/total-quantity-over-5/): Automatically badges orders where the total number of units exceeds five, so your team can route bulk orders to appropriate packing stations or apply wholesale handling procedures. - [How to find shipment consolidation opportunities in WooCommerce](https://orderbadger.com/kb/warehouse-consolidation-opportunity/): Badges orders shipping to a postcode that has received more than 3 previous orders, from a customer with 5 or more paid orders, with a total over £50 - indicating a potential opportunity to consolidate shipments or offer bulk delivery terms. --- # Blog # How to flag unusual order quantities in WooCommerce > When someone orders 50 units of a product you normally sell one at a time, your team needs to know before it ships. Here's how to catch unusual quantities automatically. *Published: 2026-04-03* A customer just ordered 48 units of a product that usually sells in ones and twos. The order total looks normal-ish - it's a low-cost item - so it doesn't trigger any high-value flags. It sits in the queue, gets picked, packed, and shipped. Two days later you realise that was your entire stock of that SKU, the warehouse shelf is empty, and three other customers are now seeing "out of stock" on your best seller. Or worse - it was a fraudulent order placed with a stolen card, and you've just shipped 48 units to an address that doesn't exist. ## Why quantity matters as much as value Most order-flagging approaches focus on the total price. High-value orders get attention; low-value orders don't. But quantity is an independent risk signal. A £12 order for 48 cheap items is operationally more complex and risky than a £500 order for a single expensive product. Bulk quantities affect stock levels, picking time, packaging requirements, and shipping weight. They may indicate wholesale or trade buying that should be routed to a different fulfilment process. They may indicate fraud - bulk orders of popular items are a common pattern in card-testing attacks. ## What counts as unusual "Unusual" depends on your product range. For a furniture store, 3 units of the same sofa is unusual. For a stationery supplier, 100 pens is a normal Tuesday. The threshold needs to match your business. OrderBadger gives you several ways to define quantity thresholds: - "Total quantity ordered is more than 10" - catches bulk orders across all items - "Any single item has a quantity of 5 or more" - catches bulk buying of individual products - "Order contains 3 or more line items and total quantity exceeds 20" - catches large, diverse orders You can combine quantity with other signals for more precision. "Total quantity over 10 and customer has 0 previous orders" catches potential fraud. "Total quantity over 20 and customer has 5 or more previous orders" catches legitimate trade buyers who deserve a different workflow. ## Stock protection The most time-sensitive reason to flag bulk quantities is stock protection. When a single order can wipe out your inventory of a product, you need to know before dispatch - not after. OrderBadger can combine quantity thresholds with stock-level checks. "At least one product will have 2 or fewer units remaining in stock after this order" highlights orders that are about to deplete your inventory. Add "total quantity is more than 5" and you're specifically catching bulk orders that threaten stock levels, rather than flagging every small order that happens to be the last unit. ## Routing wholesale and trade orders Many WooCommerce stores sell to both retail and trade customers through the same storefront. Trade orders tend to have higher quantities, simpler product mixes, and repeat patterns. Badging these orders automatically lets your team route them to the right process - different packaging, different invoicing, perhaps different dispatch priority. Useful compound rules for trade detection include: - "Total quantity over 20 and distinct product count is 3 or fewer" - bulk buying of a small range - "Customer has 10 or more orders in the last 12 months and total quantity over 15" - frequent bulk buyer - "Order total over £500 and every item is the same product" - single-SKU bulk order ## Setting up quantity badges Start with a single broad rule and refine from there. "Total quantity ordered is more than 10" will catch most genuinely unusual orders. Watch what it flags for a week, then decide whether the threshold is too high or too low. If you're getting false positives from legitimate trade customers, add a customer history condition to exclude established buyers. If you're missing suspicious orders, lower the threshold or add a separate rule for first-time buyers with lower quantity limits. The goal isn't to stop orders - it's to make sure your team sees them before they ship. A quick visual check takes seconds. Missing a problem order costs days. ## Try it: ready-made rule recipes ### Bulk Order > Total number of units ordered is more than 5 **Badge:** Bulk Order (teal) [Full rule template](https://orderbadger.com/kb/total-quantity-over-5/) ### Low Stock > At least one product will have 2 or fewer units remaining in stock after this order is placed **Badge:** Low Stock (red) [Full rule template](https://orderbadger.com/kb/low-stock-after-order/) --- # How to automatically identify VIP customers in WooCommerce > Your best customers look the same as everyone else in the orders list. Here's how to make VIPs visible so your team can give them the treatment they deserve. *Published: 2026-04-03* Somewhere in today's orders is a customer who has spent over £3,000 with you this year. They've ordered fourteen times, they always pay promptly, and they've never returned a single item. Their latest order is sitting in your queue right now, sandwiched between a first-time buyer and a guest checkout. It will get the same packing slip, the same delivery speed, and the same generic thank-you email. Nobody on your team knows this is one of your most valuable customers, because nothing in the orders list tells them. ## The invisible VIP problem WooCommerce shows you what's in the order but not who placed it. You can see the total, the items, and the shipping address. What you can't see at a glance is the customer's history - how many times they've ordered, how much they've spent, whether they're a loyal regular or a first-time buyer. Some merchants try to solve this by memorising names or checking customer profiles manually. That works when you process twenty orders a day. It falls apart at fifty, and it's completely unworkable when multiple team members share the queue. ## What makes a VIP Every store defines VIP differently. For a fashion boutique, it might be five or more orders in the last year. For a B2B supplier, it might be lifetime spend over £10,000. For a subscription business, it might be consecutive monthly orders without a gap. The common thread is that VIP status depends on history, not just the current order. You need to look at the customer's track record - how often they buy, how much they spend, and how recently they last ordered. A single order total tells you nothing about whether the person placing it is your best customer or a complete stranger. ## Automatic VIP badges OrderBadger evaluates customer history fields alongside the current order, so you can define VIP rules that match your business. Common patterns include: - "Customer has placed 5 or more previous paid orders" - frequency-based VIP - "Customer lifetime spend exceeds £1,000" - value-based VIP - "Customer has placed 10 or more orders in the last 12 months" - active loyalty - "Customer average order value is above £75" - consistently high spenders Each rule produces a coloured badge that appears on the order in your orders list. Your team sees it immediately - no clicking into profiles, no mental arithmetic. ## Layering VIP with other signals VIP badges become most useful when combined with other rules. A VIP placing a much larger order than usual might deserve a personal call. A VIP who hasn't ordered in 90 days and suddenly returns deserves a welcome-back gesture. A VIP buying a product category they've never tried before is a cross-sell success worth celebrating. OrderBadger evaluates all your rules independently, so a single order can carry multiple badges. Your team sees "VIP" alongside "High Value" alongside "Reactivated" and immediately understands the full picture without opening the customer profile. ## Acting on VIP visibility Visibility is only valuable if it changes behaviour. Once your team can see VIP badges, you can build simple processes around them: - Priority picking and dispatch for VIP orders - Handwritten thank-you notes or branded inserts - Expedited shipping upgrades at your discretion - Proactive communication if there's a stock issue or delay - Routing VIP support tickets to senior staff None of this requires automation software or workflow engines. It just requires your team to be able to see who matters, and that's what the badge provides. ## Try it: ready-made rule recipes ### Repeat Customer > Customer has placed 5 or more paid orders before this one **Badge:** Repeat Customer (blue) [Full rule template](https://orderbadger.com/kb/loyal-customer-5-plus-orders/) ### VIP > Customer has spent more than £500 in total across all their previous orders **Badge:** VIP (orange) [Full rule template](https://orderbadger.com/kb/high-value-customer-ltv-500/) --- # Writing WooCommerce order rules without code - a beginner's guide > You don't need to write PHP or edit template files to flag orders automatically. OrderBadger turns plain English descriptions into working rules. Here's how to think about writing them. *Published: 2026-04-03* Every guide to customising WooCommerce eventually asks you to paste code into functions.php. Add a snippet to change the order status. Add a filter to modify the admin columns. Add a hook to send a notification. Each one requires a developer, a staging environment, and a deployment. For something as simple as "show me which orders are from new customers", that's an absurd amount of overhead. You shouldn't need to write code to tell your store what to pay attention to. ## Rules are just sentences An OrderBadger rule is a plain English sentence that describes when a badge should appear. You type it into the rule builder, and the AI compiles it into logic that evaluates against every incoming order. Here are real rules that work exactly as written: - "Order total is over £200" - "Customer has placed 5 or more previous paid orders" - "At least one item in the order is on backorder" - "The order was placed on a weekend" - "Shipping is international and order total is over £100" You don't need to know field names, operators, or data structures. You describe what you're looking for in the same language you'd use to explain it to a colleague. ## Start simple, add conditions later The best approach is to start with the simplest version of your rule and test it. If it matches too many orders, add a condition to narrow it down. For example, start with "order total is over £500". Test it, see what it catches. If you're getting too many flags, refine it: "order total is over £500 and customer has 0 previous paid orders". Now you're only flagging high-value orders from new customers - the ones that actually need review. You can always edit a rule later. Nothing is permanent. The Create and Test panel shows you exactly which test orders match and which don't, so you can validate before going live. ## What you can reference in a rule Rules can reference anything about the order, the customer, the products, the shipping, and the timing. Here are the main categories: **Order details** - total price, subtotal, discount percentage, coupon count, total weight, number of items, number of distinct products, payment method **Customer history** - previous order count, lifetime spend, average order value, days since last order, account age, whether it's a guest checkout, whether they're a reactivated dormant customer **Product details** - categories, whether items are on backorder, on sale, virtual, stock levels after the order, per-item discount percentage, how many times the customer has bought each product before **Shipping** - destination country, international or domestic, shipping zone, free shipping, remote area, shipping method **Timing** - hour of day, day of week, business hours, peak season You don't need to memorise these. Just describe what you want in plain English and the compiler will find the right fields. ## Combining conditions The real power comes from combining multiple conditions with "and". Each additional condition narrows the match, making your badge more targeted and useful. Simple rules catch broad patterns: - "Customer is a guest checkout" - flags all guest orders Compound rules catch specific situations: - "Customer is a guest checkout and order total is over £300 and the order was placed after 11pm" - flags suspicious late-night high-value guest orders You can combine as many conditions as you need. OrderBadger handles the complexity of evaluating them all together - you just describe the scenario you're looking for. A useful mental model: each condition is a filter. "Guest checkout" selects all guest orders. Adding "order total over £300" filters that set down to high-value guests. Adding "after 11pm" filters further to late-night high-value guests. Each "and" makes the net tighter. ## Per-product conditions Some rules need to check individual products rather than the order as a whole. OrderBadger handles this naturally: - "At least one item is on backorder" - checks each product, badges the order if any match - "All items are in the same category" - checks every product, badges only if all match - "At least one item has a discount of more than 30%" - checks per-product discounts You can combine per-product checks with order-level conditions: - "Customer has 3 or more previous orders and at least one item is from a category the customer has bought from 5 or more times" - this checks customer history at the order level and purchase patterns at the item level The key phrases are "at least one item" (any product matches), "all items" (every product matches), and "two or more items" (a count of matching products). ## Testing before going live Every rule goes through the Create and Test flow before it can be activated. The test panel shows your rule evaluated against sample orders with clear pass/fail indicators. If a test case fails when you expected it to pass, your rule might be too narrow. If it passes when you expected it to fail, your rule is too broad. Adjust the wording and re-test until the results match your expectations. Once you're satisfied, activate the badge. It will evaluate against every new order automatically. You can deactivate, edit, or delete any badge at any time from the Inbox tab. ## Try it: ready-made rule recipes ### High Value > Order total is over £100 **Badge:** High Value (orange) [Full rule template](https://orderbadger.com/kb/order-total-over-100/) ### Guest > The order was placed as a guest without a customer account **Badge:** Guest (grey) [Full rule template](https://orderbadger.com/kb/guest-checkout/) ### Backorder > At least one item in the order is on backorder **Badge:** Backorder (orange) [Full rule template](https://orderbadger.com/kb/any-item-on-backorder/) --- # How to flag WooCommerce orders that need manual review before dispatch > Some orders should be checked before they leave the warehouse. High-value guest checkouts, cash on delivery, late-night orders - WooCommerce doesn't flag any of them. Here's how to fix that. *Published: 2026-04-01* Every store has orders that should be reviewed before dispatch. A large order from a brand-new customer paying cash on delivery. A guest checkout at 3am for an expensive item with express shipping. An order where the billing and shipping postcodes are in different countries. These patterns don't necessarily mean fraud, but they deserve a second look. WooCommerce processes them all identically - and by the time you spot a problem, the parcel is already in transit. ## The cost of shipping first and asking questions later A fraudulent order that gets dispatched costs you the product, the shipping, the chargeback fee, and the time spent dealing with the dispute. Even a legitimate order that looked suspicious could have been handled better - a quick phone call to confirm the address, or an ID check on delivery for high-value items. The problem isn't that merchants don't know which patterns are risky. Most experienced store owners can list them immediately. The problem is that WooCommerce doesn't surface those patterns automatically. Staff processing orders at speed have no visual cue that this particular order matches a known risk pattern. ## Common patterns worth flagging The most valuable review flags combine multiple signals. A high-value order alone isn't suspicious - but a high-value order from a guest customer, placed at midnight, requesting express delivery to a PO Box, is several signals stacked together. Other common review triggers include cash on delivery payment (higher refusal-on-delivery risk), first-time customers spending well above the store average, orders where the billing country differs from the shipping country, and orders containing frequently-stolen product categories. Each store has its own risk profile - the rules that matter for a jewellery store are different from those for a food supplier. ## Automatic review flags with OrderBadger OrderBadger lets you describe review conditions in plain English. You write the rule once, and every matching order gets a badge automatically. The badge appears on the orders list before anyone picks, packs, or dispatches. For example, you might create a red 'Manual Review' badge triggered by 'guest checkout with order total over £300 placed outside business hours'. Or an amber 'Verify Address' badge for 'billing country is different from shipping country'. Each badge is a separate rule with its own colour and label, so your team can instantly see why an order was flagged. ## Review flags without disrupting your workflow The critical difference between badges and custom statuses is that badges don't change the order's actual status. A flagged order stays 'Processing' - your payment gateway, shipping plugin, and customer email flow all continue normally. The badge is a visual signal for your team, not a workflow interrupt. This means you can flag orders for review without blocking them. Your team sees the badge, does the check, and either proceeds with dispatch or escalates. The order isn't stuck in a holding status while someone remembers to change it back. ## Try it: ready-made rule recipes ### COD Risk > Customer is a guest checkout and order total is over £300 and payment method is cod **Badge:** COD Risk (red) [Full rule template](https://orderbadger.com/kb/fraud-guest-high-value-cod/) ### Late Night > The order was placed after 10pm local time **Badge:** Late Night (purple) [Full rule template](https://orderbadger.com/kb/late-night-order/) --- # How to spot at-risk customers before they churn in WooCommerce > A customer who used to order monthly and hasn't been back in 90 days is at risk of churning. WooCommerce won't tell you - here's how to make that signal visible. *Published: 2026-04-01* Your most dangerous customer loss happens silently. A regular buyer stops ordering and nobody notices until months later when you look at a report and realise the revenue is gone. By then the customer has found an alternative supplier, forgotten your store name, or simply moved on. The signal was there the whole time - a gap in their purchase pattern - but WooCommerce doesn't surface it where your team works. ## The silent churn problem WooCommerce shows you orders as they arrive. It does not show you the orders that didn't arrive. A customer who placed five orders last year and zero this year is invisible in your orders list. They don't appear in any queue, trigger any notification, or show up in any filter. The absence of activity is the hardest signal to detect without dedicated tooling. This matters because winning back a lapsing customer is far cheaper than acquiring a new one. A timely email, a discount code, or even a personal check-in can re-engage someone who was about to leave. But you can't take that action if you don't know it's happening. ## Why analytics dashboards aren't enough Most merchants who track churn do it through reports - monthly cohort analysis, lifetime value dashboards, or email marketing segments. These tools are valuable for understanding trends, but they don't help at the individual order level. When a previously-lapsed customer suddenly places a new order, the person packing that order has no idea this is a win-back moment. The gap between analytics and operations is where retention opportunities are lost. You might have a segment of 'lapsed customers' in your email tool, but the warehouse team packing their return order doesn't see that label. ## Flagging at-risk and returning customers automatically OrderBadger can evaluate every incoming order against customer purchase history. When a customer who hasn't ordered in 60, 90, or 180 days places a new order, a badge appears automatically on the orders list. Your team sees it before they process the order. You can also flag the inverse - customers whose ordering frequency is declining. If someone who used to order every 30 days now has a 90-day gap, a 'Declining Frequency' badge can signal that this customer needs attention. Both patterns are described in plain English and compiled into evaluation logic automatically. ## What to do when you spot an at-risk customer The badge is the trigger - what happens next depends on your store. Common responses include adding a handwritten thank-you note acknowledging their return, including a discount code for their next order, routing the order to a senior team member for quality-checked packing, or flagging the customer for a personalised follow-up email after delivery. The key insight is that these actions are only possible when the signal is visible at the right moment. A badge on the orders list puts the information where the decision is made. ## Try it: ready-made rule recipes ### Lapsed > Customer has not placed an order in more than 60 days **Badge:** Lapsed (yellow) [Full rule template](https://orderbadger.com/kb/lapsed-customer-60-days/) ### Win-Back > Customer is returning after being dormant for over 6 months **Badge:** Win-Back (green) [Full rule template](https://orderbadger.com/kb/customer-reactivated-after-180d/) --- # WooCommerce order badges vs custom order statuses: which do you need? > Custom order statuses and order badges look similar on the surface but work very differently under the hood. One changes how WooCommerce processes orders. The other adds a visual layer without touching anything. Here's how to choose. *Published: 2026-04-01* If you've searched for ways to add visual indicators to your WooCommerce orders, you've probably found two categories of plugin: custom order status tools (like Order Status Manager) and order badge tools (like OrderBadger). Both add colour-coded labels to your orders list. But they work fundamentally differently, and choosing the wrong one creates problems that are hard to undo. ## What custom order statuses actually do A custom order status replaces the standard WooCommerce status (Processing, Completed, On Hold, etc.) with a custom one you define - like 'Awaiting ID Check' or 'Ready for Pickup'. This is a real status change. WooCommerce treats it as a workflow state transition. This means: customer email notifications may fire (or fail to fire). Payment gateways that listen for specific statuses may not recognise the custom one. Shipping plugins that trigger on 'Processing' won't trigger on 'Awaiting ID Check'. Analytics that track orders by status will show unexpected values. And any integration that expects standard WooCommerce statuses - which is most of them - may break. ## What order badges do differently An order badge is a visual label that sits alongside the status without changing it. The order stays 'Processing' while carrying a 'High Value' badge, an 'Age Check Required' badge, and a 'VIP Customer' badge simultaneously. WooCommerce, Stripe, your shipping plugin, your analytics - none of them see anything different. Badges are metadata, not workflow states. They're visible to your admin team on the orders list and order edit screen, but invisible to every integration. You can add and remove them freely without triggering emails, breaking payment flows, or distorting reports. ## When you actually need a custom status Custom statuses are the right choice when you genuinely need a new workflow state - a step in your order processing pipeline that WooCommerce doesn't provide natively. For example, a 'Ready for Pickup' status for click-and-collect stores where the order needs to move through a distinct pickup-ready phase before completion. The key test: does this state change what should happen next to the order? If yes, it's a workflow state and a custom status makes sense. If it's information about the order rather than an instruction to the system, a badge is the better tool. ## Why most 'flag and review' use cases are badge problems Most merchants who install custom status plugins are actually trying to flag orders for human attention - manual review, special handling, or team communication. These are not workflow state changes. 'Needs Fraud Review' doesn't change what the payment gateway should do. 'Fragile - Extra Packaging' doesn't change when the order should complete. Using a custom status for these cases creates friction: someone has to remember to change the status back to 'Processing' after the review. If they forget, the order stalls. If the custom status triggers a customer email, the customer receives a confusing notification about a status they've never heard of. ## Can you use both? Yes. Badges and custom statuses solve different problems and coexist without conflict. Use custom statuses for genuine workflow states (Ready for Pickup, Awaiting Payment Confirmation). Use badges for everything else - flagging patterns, annotating orders, surfacing customer intelligence, and communicating between team members. The practical test: if you find yourself creating custom statuses that you need to change back to 'Processing' after someone looks at the order, those should be badges instead. ## Try it: ready-made rule recipes ### Manual Review > Order total is greater than £500 and customer has 0 previous paid orders **Badge:** Manual Review (red) [Full rule template](https://orderbadger.com/kb/high-value-first-order-review/) --- # How to automatically flag high-value orders in WooCommerce > High-value orders deserve attention - whether for extra quality checks, fraud review, or a personal thank-you. Here's how to make them impossible to miss. *Published: 2026-03-30* A £1,200 order sitting in your queue looks exactly like a £15 order. Same row height, same font size, same status pill. Your team processes orders top to bottom, and that £1,200 order gets the same treatment as everything else. No extra care, no fraud check, no personal note. It ships in a standard box with a standard packing slip, and your best revenue opportunity of the day passes without anyone noticing. ## Why high-value orders need visibility Large orders carry disproportionate risk and reward. On the reward side, a high-value customer who receives outstanding service is likely to return and spend more. A handwritten thank-you note costs pennies but creates a lasting impression. Priority dispatch signals that you value their business. On the risk side, high-value orders are more likely to be fraudulent. A £1,200 order from a new customer paying by card and requesting express delivery to a PO Box is a very different proposition from a £1,200 order from a customer who has been buying from you for three years. Both show the same total in the orders list, but they need completely different handling. ## Sorting and filtering isn't enough WooCommerce lets you sort orders by total, and some merchants do this periodically to spot large orders. But sorting disrupts your workflow - you lose your place in the queue, and you're only looking at a snapshot. By the time you sort, the order may have already been processed by someone else without the extra attention it deserved. What you need is a persistent visual signal that appears automatically the moment a high-value order arrives. Something that catches the eye in the normal flow of order processing, without requiring anyone to remember to check. ## Automatic badges for high-value orders OrderBadger lets you define what "high value" means for your store and automatically badges orders that match. The simplest version is a total threshold: "order total exceeds £500". But you can also combine value with other signals to create more targeted rules. For example, you might want to flag high-value orders from new customers differently than high-value orders from regulars. The new customer order needs a fraud review; the regular customer order needs a thank-you note. With OrderBadger, these are two separate badges, each with their own colour and rule, both appearing on the same order if it matches both conditions. ## Beyond simple thresholds The most useful high-value rules combine the order total with context. A £500 order from a customer who normally spends £50 is far more noteworthy than £500 from someone who always spends that much. OrderBadger can evaluate both scenarios because it has access to customer purchase history - previous order count, lifetime spend, average order value, and days since last purchase. This means you can write rules like "order total is more than twice the customer's average order value" or "first order from a registered customer exceeding £200". These compound rules catch the orders that genuinely need attention, rather than flagging every order above an arbitrary number. ## Try it: ready-made rule recipes ### High Value > Order total is over £100 **Badge:** High Value (orange) [Full rule template](https://orderbadger.com/kb/order-total-over-100/) ### Manual Review > Order total is greater than £500 and customer has 0 previous paid orders **Badge:** Manual Review (red) [Full rule template](https://orderbadger.com/kb/high-value-first-order-review/) --- # WooCommerce: how to flag repeat customers automatically > Your best customers look the same as everyone else in the WooCommerce orders list. Here's how to make repeat buyers visible automatically so your team can treat them accordingly. *Published: 2026-03-30* Repeat customers are the foundation of a profitable store. They cost less to serve, they buy more per order, and they're more forgiving when things go wrong. But WooCommerce treats their tenth order exactly the same as a stranger's first. Your team has no quick way to know that the person behind order #4832 has been buying from you for two years and has spent over £2,000 - not without clicking into the order and checking manually. ## Why repeat customers deserve different treatment A returning customer has already decided they trust your store. They've received a package from you, opened it, and liked it enough to come back. That trust is valuable and fragile. If their fifth order gets the same generic packing slip and standard dispatch time as everyone else, you're missing the chance to reinforce their loyalty. The stores that grow fastest are the ones that make repeat customers feel recognised. A handwritten note, priority dispatch, a small freebie, an exclusive discount code - none of these cost much, but they all require one thing: knowing who your repeat customers are at the point where your team processes orders. ## The problem with checking manually You can click into any WooCommerce order and see previous orders from that customer. But nobody does this for every order. When you're processing fifty or a hundred orders a day, you don't have time to check customer history on each one. The result is that loyal customers get the same experience as one-time buyers, and the retention opportunity passes silently. Some merchants try to solve this with CRM plugins or external dashboards. These work for marketing teams reviewing customer segments, but they don't help the person in the warehouse who's packing the order right now. ## Automatic badges for returning customers OrderBadger evaluates every incoming order against rules you define in plain English. For repeat customers, you might write a rule like "customer has placed 5 or more previous paid orders" or "customer lifetime spend exceeds £500". When an order matches, a coloured badge pill appears on the orders list instantly. Your team sees the badge before they pick, pack, or dispatch. No clicking required. The order status stays unchanged - WooCommerce, your payment gateway, and your shipping integration all continue working normally. The badge is a visual layer that only your admin team sees. ## Combining signals for smarter recognition Repeat customer rules get more powerful when you combine them with other signals. A customer who has ordered ten times is loyal. A customer who has ordered ten times and is spending more than their average this time is loyal and growing. A customer who ordered ten times but hasn't been back in six months and just placed a new order is a win-back opportunity. OrderBadger supports all of these combinations because rules are written in plain English, not assembled from dropdown menus. You describe the pattern you care about, and the AI compiles it into evaluation logic. If you can explain it to a colleague, you can turn it into a badge. ## Try it: ready-made rule recipes ### Repeat Customer > Customer has placed 5 or more paid orders before this one **Badge:** Repeat Customer (blue) [Full rule template](https://orderbadger.com/kb/loyal-customer-5-plus-orders/) ### Power Buyer > Customer has placed 10 or more orders in the last 12 months **Badge:** Power Buyer (teal) [Full rule template](https://orderbadger.com/kb/orders-last-365d-10-plus/) --- # How to spot first-time customers in your WooCommerce orders list > WooCommerce doesn't distinguish between a first-time buyer and a returning customer in the orders list. Here's how to make new customers visible the moment their order arrives. *Published: 2026-03-30* Every store owner knows that first impressions matter. A first-time customer who receives a welcome note, a small gift, or simply faster-than-expected dispatch is far more likely to come back. But WooCommerce doesn't tell you who's new. Order #4521 looks the same whether it's from a loyal regular or someone who just discovered your store. The information exists in your database - it's just invisible where your team works. ## The problem: new customers are invisible Open your WooCommerce orders list right now. Can you tell which orders are from first-time buyers without clicking into each one? You can't. WooCommerce shows the customer name, the total, the date, and the status. It tells you nothing about who this person is or whether they've ever bought from you before. This matters because first-time customers have different needs. They don't know your dispatch times, your returns process, or your packaging quality. They're forming an opinion about your store based entirely on this first experience. If you treat them identically to someone who's ordered ten times before, you're missing the easiest retention opportunity in e-commerce. ## Why custom order statuses don't solve this Some merchants try to use custom order statuses to flag new customers. The problem is that changing an order's status from "Processing" to something like "New Customer - Processing" triggers customer emails, breaks analytics, and can confuse payment gateways that expect standard WooCommerce statuses. You end up with a fragile workaround that creates more problems than it solves. What you actually need is a visual label that sits alongside the status without changing it. A badge, not a status. ## The solution: automatic badges for first-time buyers OrderBadger adds coloured badge pills to your WooCommerce orders screen based on rules you write in plain English. For first-time customers, the rule is simple: you describe what "first-time" means to your store, and OrderBadger evaluates every incoming order against that definition. The badge appears the moment the order arrives. Your team sees it in the orders list without clicking into anything. The order status stays "Processing" - WooCommerce, Stripe, your shipping plugin, none of them see anything different. But your staff now know exactly which orders deserve the new-customer treatment. ## What you can do with first-time customer badges Once new customers are visible, the opportunities are obvious. Include a welcome card or discount code for their next order. Route their order to a senior packer who takes extra care. Flag them for a follow-up email three days after delivery. Combine the first-time signal with order value to identify high-potential new customers who deserve VIP onboarding. The badge is the starting point. What you do with it depends on your store and your team. ## Try it: ready-made rule recipes ### First Order > Registered customer placing their very first order - they have no previous paid orders **Badge:** First Order (blue) [Full rule template](https://orderbadger.com/kb/first-time-registered-buyer/) ### New Account > The customer registered their account fewer than 7 days ago **Badge:** New Account (blue) [Full rule template](https://orderbadger.com/kb/new-account-under-7-days/) --- # Rule Templates # How to flag repeat buyers with multiple monthly orders in WooCommerce > Badges orders from customers who have placed two or more orders in the last 30 days, helping you identify and reward your most active recent buyers. ## The problem Frequent recent buyers are your most engaged customers, but without a flag they are indistinguishable from occasional purchasers. Missing these signals means missed opportunities for upselling and retention. ## The solution OrderBadger can automatically identify customers who are ordering frequently in the current month. ## Who this is for Stores with consumable or repeat-purchase products - food, supplements, pet supplies, beauty, and any store where frequent ordering is a positive signal. ## At a glance - Registered customers only - Rolling 30-day window - Threshold: 2 or more orders - Includes current order in count - Badge: Frequent Buyer (teal) ## How it works Adds a Frequent Buyer badge to orders from registered customers who have placed two or more orders within the last 30 days. This highlights your most engaged recent buyers at a glance. **Recommended action:** Consider offering free shipping, a loyalty discount, or bundled deals to frequent buyers. Prioritise their orders for fast dispatch to reinforce the positive purchasing behaviour. ## Rule template > Customer has placed 2 or more orders in the last 30 days **Badge:** Frequent Buyer (teal, info) ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Raise '2 or more orders' to '4 or more orders' to focus on truly hyperactive buyers rather than anyone who reorders once. - Change '30 days' to '14 days' if you want to catch intense short bursts of purchasing instead of a whole-month window. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and order total is over £50' to ignore small repeat top-ups and only badge meaningful repeat purchases. - Add 'and shipping is domestic' if you want a separate rule for frequent international buyers. ## When this rule matches - **customer 3 orders last 30d:** Customer has placed 3 orders in the last 30 days, above the 2-order threshold. - **customer 2 orders boundary:** Customer has placed exactly 2 orders in the last 30 days, meeting the threshold. ## When this rule does not match - **customer 1 order last 30d:** Customer has placed only 1 order in the last 30 days, below the 2-order threshold. - **guest checkout null recent orders:** Guest checkout has no customer account, so orders_last_30d is null and cannot satisfy the condition. ## Good to know - Guest checkouts are excluded - recent order tracking requires a registered customer account. - The 30-day window is rolling, not calendar-month based. Orders exactly 30 days old are included. - The threshold is fixed at 2 orders in the rule text. Edit the rule to change the frequency requirement. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Does this rule count guest orders?** No. Guest checkouts have no customer account, so there is no way to count previous orders. Only registered customers can trigger the Frequent Buyer badge. **Q: Is the 30-day window based on the calendar month or a rolling period?** It is a rolling 30-day window counted backwards from the current order date, not the calendar month. An order placed on the 15th looks back to the 15th of the previous month. **Q: Can I change the threshold from 2 orders to something higher?** Yes. Edit the rule text to specify a different number (e.g. '3 or more orders') and recompile. The threshold is set in the natural-language rule, not a separate setting. **Q: Does the current order count toward the threshold?** The orders_last_30d value is computed at evaluation time and includes the order being evaluated. So a customer placing their second order this month will meet the threshold of 2. ## Related rules - [loyal-customer-5-plus-orders](https://orderbadger.com/kb/loyal-customer-5-plus-orders/) - [orders-last-365d-10-plus](https://orderbadger.com/kb/orders-last-365d-10-plus/) - [lapsed-customer-60-days](https://orderbadger.com/kb/lapsed-customer-60-days/) ## People also search for flag frequent buyers WooCommerce | identify customers with multiple orders this month | WooCommerce badge for repeat purchasers | highlight active customers placing many orders | show frequent ordering customers in WooCommerce --- # How to flag orders with backordered items in WooCommerce > Automatically badges orders where at least one line item is on backorder, so your team can proactively communicate delays and manage fulfilment expectations. ## The problem When an order includes backordered products, fulfilment is delayed but the customer may not realise. Without a visible flag, warehouse staff may attempt to pick items that are not in stock, wasting time and causing confusion. ## The solution OrderBadger can automatically flag any order that contains at least one backordered item. ## Who this is for Any WooCommerce store that allows backorders - especially stores with long supplier lead times or seasonal stock fluctuations. ## At a glance - Checks each line item for backorder status - Triggers on a single backordered item - Badge: Backorder (orange, critical) - Inbox with Notified and Hold actions - Category: stock management ## How it works Scans the line items in each order and adds a badge when any item has its backorder flag set. This gives your fulfilment team immediate visibility into orders that cannot be shipped in full right away. **Recommended action:** Contact the customer to inform them of the delay. Decide whether to hold the entire order until restocked or ship available items first with a partial fulfilment. ## Rule template > At least one item in the order is on backorder **Badge:** Backorder (orange, critical) **Inbox:** Yes **Interaction:** Notified / Hold ## Make it yours **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and order total is over £100' so that only high-value backorder orders get flagged, reducing noise from small orders. - Add 'and shipping is international' to focus on backordered items heading abroad, where delays compound with transit time. ## When this rule matches - **one item backordered:** The Gadget is on backorder while the Widget is in stock, so at least one item is backordered. - **all items backordered:** Every item in the order is on backorder, so the condition is met. ## When this rule does not match - **no backordered items:** All items are in stock with no backorder flags, so the condition is not met. - **empty order no items:** The order has no items, so the 'at least one' condition cannot be satisfied. ## Good to know - Relies on WooCommerce's stock management being enabled and backorder status being correctly set per product. - Does not indicate when the backordered item is expected to be available - check your supplier lead times separately. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: What happens if the backordered item comes back in stock after the order was evaluated?** The badge is not automatically removed. OrderBadger evaluates at order intake time. If stock status changes later, re-evaluate the order or dismiss the badge manually. **Q: Does this fire if only one item out of many is backordered?** Yes. The rule triggers when at least one line item has its backorder flag set, even if every other item in the order is in stock. **Q: Will this work if I have WooCommerce stock management disabled?** No. The rule relies on WooCommerce's stock management and the is_backordered flag on each product. If stock management is off, backorder status is not tracked and the badge will never fire. ## Related rules - [low-stock-after-order](https://orderbadger.com/kb/low-stock-after-order/) ## People also search for WooCommerce backorder notification for staff | flag orders containing out of stock items | alert warehouse when order has backorder products | identify partial stock orders WooCommerce | backordered items order badge --- # How to catch personalisation requests on new customer orders in WooCommerce > Badges orders where a new customer purchases a single high-value item, prompting your team to check for personalisation requests, gift messages, or special instructions in the order notes. ## The problem Artisan and gift stores frequently receive personalisation requests in order notes - engravings, monograms, gift wrapping, or custom messages. A single high-value item from a new customer is the most common pattern for these requests, and missing the notes means shipping a generic product when a personalised one was expected. ## The solution OrderBadger can automatically flag single high-value item orders from new customers where personalisation requests are likely. ## Who this is for Artisan makers, gift shops, jewellers, and any store offering personalised or made-to-order products where order notes are critical to fulfilment. ## At a glance - First-time customers only - Single item, quantity of one - Threshold: order total over £50 - Routes to inbox for order notes check - Badge: Check Notes (purple) ## How it works Checks four conditions: exactly 1 distinct product, exactly 1 total quantity, order total over £50, and 0 previous paid orders. When all conditions are true, the order is badged and routed to your inbox, prompting your team to check for personalisation notes before fulfilment. **Recommended action:** Open the order and carefully read the customer notes and any custom fields. Look for personalisation requests such as engravings, monograms, gift messages, or special wrapping instructions. If no notes are present, consider reaching out to ask if personalisation is needed. ## Rule template > Distinct product count is 1 and total quantity is 1 and order total is over £50 and customer has 0 previous paid orders **Badge:** Check Notes (purple, info) **Inbox:** Yes ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Lower 'over £50' to 'over £30' if your personalised items start at a lower price point, so you catch more of them. - Change 'total quantity is 1' to 'total quantity is 2 or fewer' if customers sometimes order a matching pair (e.g. his-and-hers engravings). **Add or remove conditions:** - Remove 'customer has 0 previous paid orders' if returning customers also request personalisation - this opens the rule to all buyers. - Add 'and order notes are not empty' to only flag orders where the customer actually left a note, reducing false positives. ## When this rule matches - **single item new customer high value:** One distinct product, quantity 1, order total £120, and customer has 0 previous orders - all four conditions are met. - **single item boundary value:** One product, quantity 1, order total £50.01, and 0 previous orders - all conditions just met. ## When this rule does not match - **returning customer single item:** Order is a single item worth £95, but customer has 3 previous paid orders - not a new customer. - **new customer multiple items:** Customer has 0 previous orders and order total is £150, but order contains 3 distinct products - not a single-item order. - **new customer single item low value:** One product, quantity 1, and 0 previous orders, but order total of £25 is below the £50 threshold. ## Good to know - This rule is a heuristic - not all single-item orders from new customers need personalisation. It is designed to catch the most common pattern and prompt a check. - Returning customers are excluded. If your returning customers also request personalisation, consider removing the 0-orders condition. - The £50 threshold filters out low-value items where personalisation is less common. Adjust for your product range. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Why does this rule target new customers specifically?** New customers are more likely to be buying gifts or one-off personalised items. Returning customers who regularly order personalised items are typically familiar with your process. However, you can edit the rule to remove the new-customer condition if needed. **Q: What if the customer ordered one product but in quantity 2?** The rule requires total quantity of exactly 1. If the customer ordered 2 units of the same product, it will not trigger because the personalisation pattern typically involves a single unique item. **Q: Can I use this alongside a gift-wrapping or notes-detected rule?** Yes. This rule is designed to be complementary. It catches the common personalisation pattern proactively, while a notes-detected rule would catch explicit customer requests. ## Related rules - [single-sku-order](https://orderbadger.com/kb/single-sku-order/) - [first-time-registered-buyer](https://orderbadger.com/kb/first-time-registered-buyer/) - [order-total-over-100](https://orderbadger.com/kb/order-total-over-100/) ## People also search for check order notes for personalisation requests WooCommerce | flag custom engraving orders from new buyers | WooCommerce alert for personalised gift orders | spot monogram or engraving requests in orders | new customer single item order needs personalisation check --- # How to identify loyal customers sending gifts abroad in WooCommerce > Badges international orders from repeat customers with a small number of distinct products, identifying a pattern consistent with gift-sending behaviour - ideal for offering gift messaging or premium wrapping. ## The problem Loyal customers who regularly send gifts abroad are among your most valuable buyers, but their behaviour is invisible in a standard orders list. Without identifying them, you miss opportunities to offer gift messaging, premium wrapping, or gift-specific promotions that increase order value and loyalty. ## The solution OrderBadger can automatically identify loyal customers who regularly place international orders with a small number of products, a pattern consistent with gift-sending behaviour. ## Who this is for Gift shops, artisan stores, and any business with a customer base that regularly sends products as gifts to international recipients. ## At a glance - Requires 3 or more previous paid orders - International shipping only - Max 2 distinct products per order - Badge: Repeat Gifter (green) - Category: customer intelligence ## How it works Checks three conditions: the customer must have 3 or more previous paid orders, the order must ship internationally, and the order must contain 2 or fewer distinct products. When all conditions are true, the order receives a Repeat Gifter badge for informational purposes. **Recommended action:** Consider offering gift messaging, premium wrapping, or a gift card insert. These customers are loyal and their gift recipients are potential new customers - a great impression on the recipient could drive word-of-mouth. ## Rule template > Customer has 3 or more previous paid orders and shipping is international and distinct product count is 2 or fewer **Badge:** Repeat Gifter (green, info) ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Lower '3 or more previous paid orders' to '2 or more' to catch gift-senders who are still relatively new to your store. - Raise 'distinct product count is 2 or fewer' to '3 or fewer' if your typical gift bundles include a small accessory alongside the main items. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and order total is over £40' to filter out low-value international orders that are less likely to be curated gifts. - Remove 'shipping is international' and replace with 'shipping address differs from billing address' to also catch domestic gift-sending. ## When this rule matches - **loyal international single product:** Customer has 8 previous paid orders, order ships internationally, and contains 1 distinct product - all three conditions are met. - **repeat customer international two products:** Customer has 3 previous paid orders, ships internationally, and ordered exactly 2 distinct products - boundary condition for product count met. ## When this rule does not match - **loyal domestic single product:** Customer has 10 previous orders and ordered 1 product, but the order ships domestically - not international. - **new customer international gift:** Order ships internationally with 1 distinct product, but customer has only 1 previous paid order - below the 3-order threshold. - **loyal international many products:** Customer has 6 previous orders and ships internationally, but ordered 5 distinct products - above the 2-product maximum. ## Good to know - The rule infers gift-sending behaviour from the order pattern. Not all international orders with few products are gifts, and some gifts ship domestically. - Guest checkouts are excluded because order history tracking requires a registered customer account. - The 2-product limit is a heuristic. Gift orders tend to be focused on 1-2 items. Adjust if your gift buyers typically order more. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Why does this rule limit distinct products to 2 or fewer?** Gift orders tend to be focused - typically 1 or 2 carefully selected items rather than large mixed orders. The low product count combined with international shipping and repeat behaviour creates a strong signal for gift-sending. **Q: Will this badge appear on every international order from a qualifying customer?** Only if the order also has 2 or fewer distinct products. If the same loyal customer places an international order with 5 different products, that order will not be badged because it does not match the gift pattern. **Q: Can I also detect domestic gift-sending?** Not with this rule - it requires international shipping. For domestic gifts, consider a rule based on different shipping and billing addresses or the presence of gift messaging in order notes. **Q: Does the 3-order threshold count all orders or just international ones?** It counts all previous paid orders, not just international ones. The customer must be an established buyer overall, regardless of where their previous orders shipped. ## Related rules - [international-order](https://orderbadger.com/kb/international-order/) - [loyal-customer-5-plus-orders](https://orderbadger.com/kb/loyal-customer-5-plus-orders/) - [single-sku-order](https://orderbadger.com/kb/single-sku-order/) ## People also search for recognise repeat gift senders WooCommerce | loyal customers international gift orders | WooCommerce badge for returning buyers sending gifts overseas | identify gift-sending behaviour from order patterns | flag repeat international gift purchasers --- # How to flag weekend international custom product orders in WooCommerce > Badges international orders placed on weekends that contain made-to-order products, alerting your team that the customer may have unrealistic delivery expectations for a custom item shipping abroad. ## The problem International customers ordering made-to-order products on weekends face compounding delays: the workshop is closed, the item needs to be crafted, and international shipping adds transit time. Without a flag, these customers receive standard delivery estimates that do not account for production time, leading to complaints and refund requests. ## The solution OrderBadger can automatically flag international weekend orders that contain made-to-order products so you can manage delivery expectations. ## Who this is for Artisan makers, custom product sellers, and any store offering made-to-order items that ship internationally. ## At a glance - International orders placed on weekends - Requires Made to Order category product - Saturday and Sunday detection only - Routes to inbox for proactive outreach - Badge: Rush + Custom (orange) ## How it works Checks three conditions: the order must ship internationally, must be placed on Saturday or Sunday, and must contain at least one product in the 'Made to Order' category. When all conditions are true, the order is badged and routed to your inbox. **Recommended action:** Contact the customer proactively to set realistic delivery expectations. Explain that the item is made to order, will begin production on the next business day, and international shipping will add transit time. Offer to expedite production if possible. ## Rule template > Shipping is international and order was placed on a Saturday or Sunday and at least one product is in the Made to Order category **Badge:** Rush + Custom (orange, warning) **Inbox:** Yes ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Change 'Made to Order' to your actual WooCommerce category name (e.g. 'Custom' or 'Bespoke') so the rule matches your catalogue. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and order total is over £100' to only flag high-value custom orders, since low-value items are less likely to generate complaints. - Remove 'order was placed on a Saturday or Sunday' to catch all international made-to-order orders regardless of day, if your production queue is always backed up. - Add 'and customer has 0 previous paid orders' to focus on first-time international buyers who are least familiar with your lead times. ## When this rule matches - **international weekend made to order:** Order ships internationally, was placed on Saturday, and contains a product in the Made to Order category - all three conditions are met. - **international sunday mixed items:** Order ships internationally, was placed on Sunday, and contains at least one item in the Made to Order category alongside a stock item. ## When this rule does not match - **domestic weekend made to order:** Order was placed on Saturday and contains a Made to Order item, but ships domestically - not international. - **international weekday made to order:** Order ships internationally and contains a Made to Order item, but was placed on Wednesday - not a weekend. - **international weekend stock item:** Order ships internationally and was placed on Saturday, but all items are stock products - no Made to Order category. ## Good to know - The rule relies on products being categorised as 'Made to Order' in WooCommerce. If your custom products use a different category name, edit the rule text to match. - Weekend detection uses the WordPress timezone setting. Ensure it matches your operational timezone. - This does not estimate actual delivery dates - it flags orders where the combination of factors is likely to cause expectation mismatches. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: What if my made-to-order products use a different category name like 'Custom' or 'Bespoke'?** Edit the natural language rule text to reference your actual WooCommerce category name, then recompile. The rule matches the category name exactly as specified. **Q: Will this fire if only one item in a multi-item order is made to order?** Yes. The rule checks if 'at least one product' is in the Made to Order category. A mixed order with one custom item and several stock items will still be flagged. **Q: Does this account for bank holidays or just Saturday and Sunday?** Only Saturday and Sunday. Bank holidays fall on weekdays and are not detected by the weekend condition. Consider a separate rule for holiday periods if this is important for your business. ## Related rules - [international-order](https://orderbadger.com/kb/international-order/) - [weekend-order](https://orderbadger.com/kb/weekend-order/) - [outside-business-hours](https://orderbadger.com/kb/outside-business-hours/) ## People also search for weekend made to order international shipping alert | WooCommerce flag custom items ordered on weekends going abroad | manage delivery expectations for handmade international orders | alert on weekend orders for bespoke products shipping overseas | artisan rush order international delivery warning --- # How to verify vehicle part fitment on first orders in WooCommerce > Badges orders that include Car Parts or Vehicle Accessories when the customer has no previous paid orders and the total exceeds £75. Wrong-fitment returns in the automotive aftermarket are expensive and avoidable with a quick pre-dispatch check. ## The problem Vehicle parts must match a specific year, make, model, and engine variant. First-time buyers frequently order the wrong part because they are unfamiliar with your catalogue or misread a fitment table. A single wrong-fitment return can cost more in reverse logistics and restocking than the original margin on the sale. ## The solution OrderBadger can flag orders from first-time buyers purchasing car parts or vehicle accessories above a value threshold, giving your team a chance to verify fitment before dispatch. ## Who this is for Online auto parts retailers selling replacement components, performance upgrades, or vehicle accessories where fitment compatibility is critical and returns are costly. ## At a glance - First-time buyers only - Checks Car Parts or Vehicle Accessories category - Threshold: order total over £75 - Routes to inbox for fitment review - Badge: Fitment Check (yellow) ## How it works Evaluates three conditions together: the order must include at least one product in the Car Parts or Vehicle Accessories category, the customer must have zero previous paid orders, and the order total must exceed £75. When all three are true, a yellow warning badge appears and the order is sent to the inbox for review. **Recommended action:** Check the customer's vehicle details against the part's fitment data. If your store captures vehicle registration or year/make/model at checkout, cross-reference it. Consider sending a quick confirmation email before dispatching high-value first orders. ## Rule template > At least one product is in the Car Parts or Vehicle Accessories category and customer has 0 previous paid orders and order total is over £75 **Badge:** Fitment Check (yellow, warning) **Inbox:** Yes ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Lower 'over £75' to 'over £40' if your typical return shipping cost makes even mid-range wrong-fitment returns painful. - Raise 'over £75' to 'over £150' to focus your team's review effort on the most expensive parts where fitment errors are most costly. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and at least one product is in the Brakes or Suspension category' to restrict the check to safety-critical parts only. - Remove 'and customer has 0 previous paid orders' to flag all fitment-sensitive orders regardless of customer history, useful during a catalogue migration when part numbers may have changed. ## When this rule matches - **new buyer car parts over threshold:** Customer has 0 previous orders, the order contains a Car Parts item, and the total of £129.95 exceeds £75. - **new buyer vehicle accessories boundary:** Customer has 0 previous orders, contains a Vehicle Accessories item, and total of £75.01 is just over £75. ## When this rule does not match - **returning customer car parts:** Order contains Car Parts and the total is £180, but the customer has 3 previous paid orders - not a first-time buyer. - **new buyer car parts under threshold:** Customer has 0 previous orders and the order contains Car Parts, but the total of £49.99 does not exceed £75. - **new buyer non auto category:** Customer has 0 previous orders and total is £95, but the product is in Tools - not Car Parts or Vehicle Accessories. ## Good to know - This rule only flags first-time buyers. Repeat customers who order the wrong part for a different vehicle will not be caught - consider a separate rule for high-value orders from any customer. - Fitment verification itself is manual. The badge surfaces the order for review but does not validate compatibility automatically. - Products must be correctly categorised as Car Parts or Vehicle Accessories in WooCommerce for the rule to work. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Why only flag first-time buyers rather than all orders?** First-time buyers are statistically more likely to pick the wrong part because they are unfamiliar with your fitment tables. Returning customers tend to know their vehicle details and have ordered correctly before. **Q: Should I lower the £75 threshold for safety-critical parts like brakes?** Yes. For brake pads, discs, or suspension components, consider reducing the threshold to capture smaller orders or removing the total condition entirely and adding a specific category condition instead. **Q: Does this rule work with guest checkouts?** Guest checkouts show 0 previous paid orders, so they will be flagged. This is usually desirable since guest buyers are the hardest to verify. ## Related rules - [high-value-first-order-review](https://orderbadger.com/kb/high-value-first-order-review/) - [first-time-registered-buyer](https://orderbadger.com/kb/first-time-registered-buyer/) ## People also search for check car part compatibility before shipping WooCommerce | flag first time auto parts buyer for fitment review | WooCommerce vehicle accessory fitment verification | prevent wrong part returns from new customers | auto parts order review for fitment accuracy --- # How to detect heavy multi-part car orders needing pallet shipping > Badges orders weighing over 20 kg that contain more than 4 distinct products from the Car Parts category. These bulky, multi-component shipments often exceed parcel carrier limits and require pallet or freight service instead. ## The problem A mechanic rebuilding a suspension or brake system might order discs, calipers, hubs, arms, and springs in a single basket. The combined weight easily crosses the parcel carrier threshold, but the order looks routine in the dashboard. Without a flag, it gets quoted for standard parcel delivery, leading to last-minute carrier rejections, split shipments, or surprise surcharges that eat into the margin. ## The solution OrderBadger can identify heavy, multi-product car parts orders that are likely to need pallet or freight shipping instead of standard parcel delivery. ## Who this is for Automotive parts retailers whose product range includes heavy components like engine blocks, brake assemblies, exhaust systems, and suspension kits that routinely ship together in multi-item orders. ## At a glance - Weight threshold: over 20 kg total - Requires more than 4 distinct products - At least one Car Parts category item - Routes to inbox for carrier review - Badge: Pallet Review (orange) ## How it works Evaluates three conditions simultaneously: total order weight exceeds 20 kg, the basket contains more than 4 distinct products, and at least one of those products belongs to the Car Parts category. When all three are true, an orange warning badge appears and the order is routed to the inbox. **Recommended action:** Check the combined weight and dimensions against your carrier's parcel limits. If the order exceeds them, quote a pallet or freight service. Consider whether the items can be consolidated into fewer boxes or need individual packaging for protection. ## Rule template > Total order weight is over 20 kg and distinct product count is more than 4 and at least one product is in the Car Parts category **Badge:** Pallet Review (orange, warning) **Inbox:** Yes ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Lower 'over 20 kg' to 'over 15 kg' if your standard parcel carrier caps at 15 kg, ensuring orders above that limit are reviewed. - Change 'more than 4' to 'more than 2' if your warehouse finds that even 3-product orders are difficult to box together for heavy car parts. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and shipping is international' to only flag heavy multi-part orders heading abroad, where freight costs and customs paperwork multiply. - Remove 'and at least one product is in the Car Parts category' to catch any heavy multi-product order regardless of category, useful for stores that also sell tools and workshop equipment. ## When this rule matches - **heavy five product car parts:** Total weight is 28 kg, there are 5 distinct products, and all are in Car Parts - every condition is satisfied. - **mixed order with car parts heavy:** Total weight is 24 kg across 6 distinct products, and at least one (Exhaust Manifold) is in Car Parts. ## When this rule does not match - **heavy car parts too few products:** Total weight is 22 kg and the order has Car Parts, but only 3 distinct products - the rule requires more than 4. - **light many car parts:** Five distinct Car Parts products, but total weight is only 4.8 kg - well under the 20 kg threshold. - **heavy many products wrong category:** Order weighs 25 kg with 5 distinct products, but none are in Car Parts - they are all Garden category. ## Good to know - The rule depends on accurate product weights in WooCommerce. Components without a weight set will be treated as zero, potentially causing heavy orders to slip through. - Dimensional weight is not considered. A bulky but lightweight order that needs a pallet due to size will not be flagged. - The distinct product count uses the number of unique product IDs, not line items. Two units of the same part count as one product. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Why require more than 4 distinct products instead of just checking weight?** A single heavy item like an engine block is straightforward to ship. The complexity arises when multiple heavy components need to be packed together - that is when parcels become unwieldy and benefit from pallet consolidation. **Q: Does this rule account for dimensional weight?** No. It uses the physical weight recorded in WooCommerce. If your products are bulky but light (such as bumpers or body panels), you would need a separate rule based on the oversized flag or specific categories. **Q: What if a customer adds car parts alongside non-car-parts items?** The rule still fires as long as at least one item is in the Car Parts category. The weight and product count conditions apply to the entire order, not just the car parts. ## Related rules - [heavy-order-over-5kg](https://orderbadger.com/kb/heavy-order-over-5kg/) - [auto-fitment-check](https://orderbadger.com/kb/auto-fitment-check/) ## People also search for heavy automotive order needs freight shipping WooCommerce | flag car parts orders too heavy for parcel delivery | WooCommerce pallet shipping alert for bulky auto orders | identify multi-component vehicle parts exceeding weight limit | route heavy car parts orders to freight carrier --- # How to spot potential trade buyers in your WooCommerce store > Badges orders from customers who have placed 10 or more orders in the past year and have purchased from at least one product category 5 or more times. This purchasing pattern strongly suggests a trade buyer - a garage, mechanic, or fleet operator - who may benefit from trade pricing or a dedicated account. ## The problem Trade customers often start as regular retail buyers and gradually increase their order frequency. By the time they are placing weekly orders, they have already been paying full retail prices for months. Identifying them early lets you offer trade terms, secure their loyalty, and prevent them from switching to a competitor who offers better pricing. ## The solution OrderBadger can detect customers whose purchasing pattern suggests they are a trade buyer by combining order frequency with repeated purchases in the same category. ## Who this is for Auto parts suppliers, motor factors, and vehicle accessory shops that sell to both retail consumers and trade buyers (garages, workshops, fleet managers) and want to convert high-frequency retail accounts into formal trade accounts. ## At a glance - Threshold: 10 or more orders in 365 days - Category purchased 5 or more times - Rolling 365-day window - Routes to inbox for sales follow-up - Badge: Trade Customer? (blue) ## How it works Checks two signals together: the customer must have placed at least 10 orders in the last 365 days, and at least one product in the current order must belong to a category the customer has purchased from 5 or more times. This pair of conditions separates habitual trade-like buyers from occasional shoppers who happen to order often. **Recommended action:** Reach out to the customer to offer a trade account with wholesale pricing. Include the order in the inbox so your sales team can follow up. Even a small discount on their regular category purchases can lock in long-term loyalty and higher lifetime value. ## Rule template > Customer has 10 or more orders in the last 365 days and at least one product has been purchased in its category 5 or more times by this customer **Badge:** Trade Customer? (blue, info) **Inbox:** Yes ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Tighten '10 or more orders' to '15 or more orders' if you want to be more certain before approaching a customer about trade pricing, reducing false positives from keen hobbyists. - Lower 'category 5 or more times' to 'category 3 or more times' if your product range is narrow and even 3 repeat category purchases is significant. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and customer prior gross spend is over £500' to further qualify trade signals by minimum spend, filtering out high-frequency low-value accounts. - Remove 'and at least one product has been purchased in its category 5 or more times by this customer' to flag all high-frequency buyers regardless of category, which is useful for general-purpose stores. ## When this rule matches - **high frequency repeat category buyer:** Customer has placed 14 orders in the last 365 days and has purchased in the Brake Components category 7 times - both thresholds exceeded. - **boundary 10 orders 5 category:** Customer has exactly 10 orders in the last year and has bought from the Filters category exactly 5 times - meets both thresholds at the boundary. ## When this rule does not match - **frequent buyer no category concentration:** Customer has 12 orders this year, but the highest category purchase count is only 3 - they buy across many categories without concentration. - **category repeat but infrequent:** Customer has purchased from the Brake Components category 6 times, but only 4 orders in the last 365 days - order frequency is below the threshold. - **just under both thresholds:** Customer has 9 orders (under 10) and a highest category purchase count of 4 (under 5) - neither threshold is met. ## Good to know - The rule cannot distinguish between a genuine trade buyer and a dedicated hobbyist who orders frequently. Manual judgement is needed after the flag. - Category purchase counts depend on the customer having a registered account with order history. Guest checkouts cannot build up a history. - The 365-day window resets rolling. A customer who was very active 6 months ago but quiet recently will still meet the threshold until their older orders fall outside the window. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: How is this different from the loyal customer or frequent reorderer rules?** Loyalty rules track overall order count. This rule adds a category-concentration dimension - it identifies customers who not only order often but also repeatedly buy from the same product category, which is the hallmark of a trade buyer stocking a workshop. **Q: Will guest checkouts ever trigger this rule?** No. Guest orders do not accumulate purchase history. Only registered customers with linked order histories can reach the thresholds. **Q: Can I use this for non-automotive stores?** Absolutely. The pattern of frequent orders concentrated in one category applies to any B2B-like buyer - restaurant supply customers in a food store, salon owners in a beauty retailer, or contractors in a hardware shop. **Q: What should I offer a flagged trade customer?** Start with a percentage discount on their most-purchased category, or offer net-30 payment terms. The badge gives your sales team a natural conversation opener backed by data. ## Related rules - [orders-last-365d-10-plus](https://orderbadger.com/kb/orders-last-365d-10-plus/) - [experienced-category-buyer](https://orderbadger.com/kb/experienced-category-buyer/) - [b2b-frequent-reorderer](https://orderbadger.com/kb/b2b-frequent-reorderer/) ## People also search for identify trade customers from ordering patterns WooCommerce | detect wholesale buyer behaviour in retail orders | WooCommerce flag frequent category repeat purchasers | find garage or mechanic accounts buying at retail prices | convert frequent buyers to trade accounts --- # How to flag bulk single-product orders for trade review in WooCommerce > Badges orders where a single product is ordered in bulk with a high subtotal, helping you identify potential trade or resale customers who may need a trade invoice or wholesale pricing. ## The problem Large single-SKU orders with significant value are a strong signal of trade or resale purchasing. Without a visual flag, these orders are processed like regular consumer orders and you miss the opportunity to offer trade terms, request resale documentation, or route them through a B2B workflow. ## The solution OrderBadger can automatically flag large single-product bulk orders that may indicate trade or resale purchasing. ## Who this is for Stores that sell products commonly bought in bulk by trade customers - such as food, beauty, hardware, or craft supplies. ## At a glance - Single product orders only - Quantity threshold: more than 20 units - Subtotal threshold: over £500 - Routes to inbox for trade review - Badge: Bulk Order (blue) ## How it works Checks three conditions: the order must contain only one distinct product, the total quantity must exceed 20 units, and the subtotal must exceed £500. When all conditions are true, the order is badged and routed to your inbox. **Recommended action:** Review the order to determine if the customer is buying for trade or resale. Consider offering trade pricing, requesting a resale certificate, or generating a trade invoice. If you have a B2B programme, this is an opportunity to enrol the customer. ## Rule template > Order is single SKU and total quantity is more than 20 and subtotal is over £500 **Badge:** Bulk Order (blue, info) **Inbox:** Yes ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Lower 'more than 20' to 'more than 10' if your products are high-value and even 10 units signals a trade purchase. - Reduce 'over £500' to 'over £250' to catch mid-range bulk orders that still warrant a trade pricing conversation. - Raise 'over £500' to 'over £1000' if your products are inexpensive and only very large orders are genuinely wholesale. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and customer has 0 previous paid orders' to focus specifically on first-time bulk buyers who are most likely to need trade onboarding. - Remove 'order is single SKU' to also catch multi-product bulk orders that still look like trade purchasing. ## When this rule matches - **single sku bulk high value:** Order is a single SKU with 50 units and a subtotal of £1,200 - all three conditions are met. - **single sku boundary values:** Order is a single SKU with 21 units and a subtotal of £500.01 - all conditions just barely met. ## When this rule does not match - **multi sku bulk order:** Order has 30 units and subtotal of £800, but contains multiple different products - not a single-SKU order. - **single sku low quantity:** Order is a single SKU with subtotal of £600, but only 5 units - below the 20-unit threshold. - **single sku bulk low value:** Order is a single SKU with 25 units, but subtotal of £100 is below the £500 threshold. ## Good to know - This uses the subtotal (before shipping and tax), not the order total. Adjust if your business logic requires the full total. - Product variations of the same parent product typically count as the same SKU. Verify your WooCommerce variation setup. - The 20-unit threshold may be too high or low for your product range. Edit the rule to match your definition of bulk. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Why does this rule check subtotal instead of total?** The subtotal represents the product value before shipping and tax, which is a better indicator of trade purchasing intent. Shipping costs vary and can inflate or deflate the total in ways unrelated to product volume. **Q: If a customer orders 25 units of a product across two different sizes, is that a single SKU?** It depends on how WooCommerce handles the variations. In most setups, different variations of the same parent product are treated as the same product, so the order would still be flagged as single-SKU. **Q: Can I combine this with customer rules to only flag bulk orders from new customers?** Yes. You could create a compound rule that adds a first-time customer condition. Alternatively, use this rule alongside the first-time-registered-buyer rule and look for orders with both badges. ## Related rules - [single-sku-order](https://orderbadger.com/kb/single-sku-order/) - [total-quantity-over-5](https://orderbadger.com/kb/total-quantity-over-5/) - [order-total-over-100](https://orderbadger.com/kb/order-total-over-100/) ## People also search for detect wholesale single product orders WooCommerce | flag high quantity single SKU purchases | WooCommerce badge for potential resale orders | identify trade buyers ordering one product in bulk | large quantity single item order alert --- # How to find customers who reorder frequently for trade pricing > Badges orders from customers who order very frequently and have deep purchase history, surfacing potential trade accounts that could benefit from dedicated pricing or auto-invoicing. ## The problem Customers who place 3+ orders per month over a long relationship are behaving like trade buyers but may be paying retail prices. Without a flag, your team cannot identify these patterns and offer appropriate trade terms, leaving revenue and loyalty on the table. ## The solution OrderBadger can automatically identify customers who order very frequently and may be suitable for a trade account or dedicated pricing. ## Who this is for Stores with a mix of retail and trade customers - especially those selling consumables, supplies, or materials where frequent reordering is common in a B2B context. ## At a glance - Requires 3 or more orders in last 30 days - At least 10 previous paid orders - Order total over £100 - Routes to inbox for trade outreach - Badge: Trade Account? (blue) ## How it works Combines three conditions: 3+ orders in the last 30 days, 10+ total previous paid orders, and a current order total over £100. When all conditions are met, the order is badged and routed to your inbox, highlighting a customer who behaves like a trade buyer. **Recommended action:** Reach out to the customer to discuss trade terms, wholesale pricing, or a dedicated account. Consider offering auto-invoicing, bulk discounts, or a simplified reorder process. These customers are already loyal - formalising the relationship benefits both sides. ## Rule template > Customer placed 3 or more orders in the last 30 days and customer has 10 or more previous paid orders and order total is over £100 **Badge:** Trade Account? (blue, info) **Inbox:** Yes ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Lower '10 or more previous paid orders' to '5 or more' to surface potential trade accounts earlier in the relationship. - Reduce 'over £100' to 'over £50' if your product prices are low and even smaller frequent reorders indicate trade behaviour. - Raise '3 or more orders in the last 30 days' to '5 or more' if you only want to flag the most intense reordering patterns. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and order is single SKU' to narrow in on customers who repeatedly bulk-buy the same product, the strongest trade signal. - Add 'and shipping is domestic' if your trade accounts are typically local businesses rather than international buyers. ## When this rule matches - **frequent long term customer:** Customer placed 5 orders in last 30 days, has 20 previous paid orders, and current order total is £250 - all three conditions are met. - **frequent reorderer boundary values:** Customer placed exactly 3 orders in last 30 days, has exactly 10 previous paid orders, and order total is £100.01 - all conditions just met. ## When this rule does not match - **frequent but new customer:** Customer placed 4 orders in last 30 days and order total is £200, but only has 3 previous paid orders - not enough history. - **loyal but infrequent:** Customer has 15 previous paid orders and order total of £300, but only 1 order in last 30 days - not a frequent reorderer. - **frequent loyal low value:** Customer placed 4 orders in last 30 days and has 12 previous orders, but current order total of £50 is below the £100 threshold. ## Good to know - Guest checkouts are excluded because order frequency tracking requires a registered customer account. - The 30-day window is a rolling count. A customer who orders 3 times in one week then stops will only be flagged during the window when 3+ orders are visible. - The £100 order total filter excludes very small reorders. Adjust if your average B2B order is lower. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Does the 30-day order count include the current order?** No. The orders_last_30d field counts previous orders placed in the last 30 days, not including the order currently being evaluated. **Q: Why require 10+ previous orders on top of the 30-day frequency?** The 10-order minimum ensures this is a genuinely established customer, not someone who happened to place a few orders in a short burst. Trade account offers should target customers with proven long-term buying behaviour. **Q: Will this badge appear on every order from a qualifying customer?** Yes, as long as all three conditions are met at evaluation time. If the customer's 30-day order count drops below 3, or the order total is under £100, the badge will not appear on that specific order. **Q: Can I lower the frequency threshold to 2 orders per month?** Yes. Edit the natural language rule text to change '3 or more orders in the last 30 days' to your preferred threshold, then recompile. ## Related rules - [loyal-customer-5-plus-orders](https://orderbadger.com/kb/loyal-customer-5-plus-orders/) - [active-customer-orders-this-month](https://orderbadger.com/kb/active-customer-orders-this-month/) - [high-value-customer-ltv-500](https://orderbadger.com/kb/high-value-customer-ltv-500/) ## People also search for identify frequent reordering customers WooCommerce | flag repeat B2B buyers who deserve trade terms | WooCommerce detect high frequency ordering for wholesale conversion | spot customers ordering multiple times per month | frequent buyer trade account alert WooCommerce --- # How to review unusually large first orders in WooCommerce > Badges first-time orders that combine high value and high quantity, flagging potential trade accounts or suspicious activity that warrants verification before dispatch. ## The problem A new customer placing a very large first order - both in value and quantity - is unusual for most consumer stores. It may indicate a legitimate trade buyer who should be onboarded properly, or it may warrant fraud verification. Either way, shipping without review risks lost inventory or missed B2B opportunities. ## The solution OrderBadger can automatically flag unusually large first orders by combining customer history, order value, and item quantity into a single review rule. ## Who this is for Stores selling products that attract both retail and trade buyers, especially those without a formal trade application process. ## At a glance - First-time customers only - Order total over £1000 - Total quantity more than 10 items - 4-hour SLA with Approve/Hold actions - Badge: Large First Order (orange) ## How it works Checks three conditions: the customer must have zero previous paid orders, the order total must exceed £1,000, and the total item quantity must exceed 10. When all conditions are true, the order is badged with Approve/Hold interaction buttons and a 4-hour SLA. **Recommended action:** Review the order before dispatch. Verify the customer's identity and payment details. If it looks like a legitimate trade buyer, consider onboarding them to your B2B programme. Use the Hold button if you need more time to verify, or Approve to release for fulfilment. ## Rule template > Customer has 0 previous paid orders and order total is over £1000 and total quantity is more than 10 **Badge:** Large First Order (orange, warning) **Inbox:** Yes **Interaction:** Approve / Hold **SLA:** 4h ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Lower 'over £1000' to 'over £500' if your average product price is modest and a £500 first order is already unusual. - Reduce 'more than 10' to 'more than 5' to catch smaller-scale bulk purchases from new customers that still warrant review. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and order is single SKU' to specifically target new customers buying one product in bulk, which is a stronger resale signal than a mixed basket. - Add 'and payment method is bank transfer' to focus on orders using payment methods common in B2B transactions. ## When this rule matches - **new customer large high quantity:** Customer has 0 previous orders, order total is £1,500, and total quantity is 25 - all three conditions are met. - **new customer boundary values:** Customer has 0 previous orders, order total is £1,000.01, and total quantity is 11 - all conditions just met. ## When this rule does not match - **returning customer large order:** Order total is £2,000 and quantity is 30, but customer has 3 previous paid orders - not a first order. - **new customer high value low quantity:** Customer has 0 previous orders and order total is £1,200, but total quantity is only 2 - below the 10-unit threshold. - **new customer high quantity low value:** Customer has 0 previous orders and total quantity is 15, but order total of £200 is below the £1,000 threshold. ## Good to know - Guest checkouts may have null previous_paid_order_count. Consider whether your guest checkout policy needs a separate rule. - The rule requires both high value and high quantity. A new customer buying one expensive item (e.g. a £2,000 watch) will not trigger this rule - use the high-value-first-order-review rule for that. - The thresholds are fixed in the rule text. Edit and recompile to adjust. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: How does this differ from the high-value first order review rule?** The high-value first order review rule checks only order total and customer history. This rule adds a quantity threshold, targeting orders that are both expensive and contain many items - a stronger signal of trade or bulk purchasing intent. **Q: What happens if I don't act within the 4-hour SLA?** The badge remains on the order but the SLA will show as breached. The order is not automatically held - it is up to your workflow to decide next steps. The SLA is a reminder to act promptly on potentially risky orders. **Q: Will this rule fire for guest checkouts placing large first orders?** It depends on how your system handles guest order counts. If previous_paid_order_count is null for guests, the condition 'has 0 previous paid orders' may not be satisfied. Test with your setup or add a dedicated guest checkout rule. ## Related rules - [high-value-first-order-review](https://orderbadger.com/kb/high-value-first-order-review/) - [first-time-registered-buyer](https://orderbadger.com/kb/first-time-registered-buyer/) - [b2b-bulk-single-sku](https://orderbadger.com/kb/b2b-bulk-single-sku/) ## People also search for flag big first order from new customer WooCommerce | review large initial purchase for fraud or trade intent | WooCommerce alert for high value high quantity first orders | new customer bulk order verification | detect suspicious or trade first-time large orders --- # How to flag loyal customers shipping to a new address in WooCommerce > Badges orders from loyal customers who are shipping to a postcode they have never used before, prompting your team to confirm the address before dispatch. ## The problem When an established customer suddenly ships to a completely new location, it may indicate a legitimate address change, a gift, or a compromised account. Without a flag, these orders are dispatched without a second look, risking delivery to the wrong address or an intercepted shipment. ## The solution OrderBadger can automatically flag orders from established customers that are shipping to a postcode they have never used before. ## Who this is for Any store with repeat customers - especially those shipping high-value goods where address verification reduces fraud and delivery failures. ## At a glance - Requires 5 or more previous paid orders - First-ever delivery to this postcode - Compares by postcode, not full address - Routes to inbox for address confirmation - Badge: New Address (yellow) ## How it works Checks two conditions: the customer must have 5 or more previous paid orders, and the current shipping postcode must have zero previous deliveries. When both conditions are true, the order is badged and routed to your inbox for address confirmation. **Recommended action:** Verify the shipping address with the customer before dispatch. A quick email or SMS confirming the new delivery location can prevent costly misdeliveries and protect against account takeover fraud. ## Rule template > Customer has 5 or more previous paid orders and previous orders to same postcode count is 0 **Badge:** New Address (yellow, warning) **Inbox:** Yes ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Lower '5 or more previous paid orders' to '3 or more' if you want to flag new-address orders sooner in the customer relationship. - Raise '5 or more previous paid orders' to '10 or more' if you only want to flag address changes for your most established accounts, reducing noise. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and order total is over £200' to only flag high-value shipments to new addresses, where the cost of a misdelivery is significant. - Add 'and shipping is international' to focus on address changes that cross borders, which carry higher risk and cost if wrong. ## When this rule matches - **loyal customer new postcode:** Customer has 12 previous paid orders and has never shipped to this postcode before - both conditions are met. - **boundary 5 orders new postcode:** Customer has exactly 5 previous paid orders and zero prior shipments to this postcode - boundary values met. ## When this rule does not match - **loyal customer familiar postcode:** Customer has 10 previous orders, but has shipped to this postcode 3 times before - not a new address. - **new customer new postcode:** Previous orders to this postcode is 0, but customer only has 2 previous paid orders - below the 5-order threshold. - **first time buyer any postcode:** Customer has 0 previous orders, so the 5-order minimum is not met. First-time buyers always have a 'new' postcode but are not flagged. ## Good to know - Address comparison uses postcodes only. A customer shipping to a different street within the same postcode will not trigger this rule. - Guest checkouts are excluded because order history tracking requires a registered customer account. - The 5-order threshold filters out new customers, who always have a 'new' postcode. Adjust if you want to flag newer customers too. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Does this compare exact addresses or just postcodes?** It compares postcodes only. The previous_orders_to_same_postcode_count field tracks how many prior orders shipped to the same postcode. Different addresses within the same postcode area will not trigger the flag. **Q: Why require 5 previous orders instead of flagging all customers with a new postcode?** New and low-frequency customers always have few or zero orders to any postcode, which would cause excessive false positives. The 5-order minimum ensures only established customers with a clear address pattern trigger the rule. **Q: Will the badge appear if the customer previously ordered to this postcode but it was years ago?** No. If the customer has any prior order to the same postcode - regardless of how long ago - the count will be 1 or more and the rule will not fire. **Q: Can I combine this with a value threshold to only flag high-value orders to new addresses?** Yes. Edit the natural language rule text to add an order total condition, then recompile. This narrows the scope to high-value shipments to unfamiliar addresses. ## Related rules - [repeat-destination-postcode](https://orderbadger.com/kb/repeat-destination-postcode/) - [loyal-customer-5-plus-orders](https://orderbadger.com/kb/loyal-customer-5-plus-orders/) - [international-order](https://orderbadger.com/kb/international-order/) ## People also search for alert when established customer uses new shipping address | WooCommerce flag regular buyer new delivery postcode | verify address change for repeat customers | detect unusual shipping destination from loyal buyers | new address warning for established WooCommerce customers --- # How to detect baby gift registry orders in WooCommerce > Badges orders from first-time customers shipping internationally with multiple baby or nursery products, a pattern strongly associated with gift registry or baby shower purchases that may benefit from gift wrapping or a personalised note. ## The problem When a new customer ships multiple baby items internationally, it is almost certainly a gift - often from a registry or baby shower. Without a flag, these orders are packed like any other and the opportunity to offer gift wrapping, a greeting card, or discreet pricing is missed. ## The solution OrderBadger can flag orders that look like baby gift registry purchases based on customer history, shipping destination, product categories, and product count. ## Who this is for Baby, nursery, and children's product retailers who want to identify probable gift purchases and offer an elevated unboxing experience for the recipient. ## At a glance - First-time customers only - International shipping required - Baby or Nursery category items - More than 3 distinct products - Badge: Gift Registry? (purple) ## How it works Combines four conditions: the customer must have zero previous paid orders, shipping must be international, at least one item must be in the Baby or Nursery category, and the order must contain more than 3 distinct products. When all four are true, the order is badged and routed to the inbox. **Recommended action:** Consider offering gift wrapping, including a gift receipt instead of a standard receipt, or reaching out to ask if the customer would like a personalised message included. Remove or obscure pricing on the packing slip. ## Rule template > Customer has 0 previous paid orders and shipping is international and at least one product is in the Baby or Nursery category and distinct product count is more than 3 **Badge:** Gift Registry? (purple, info) **Inbox:** Yes ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Lower 'more than 3' to 'more than 2' to catch smaller gift bundles that still suggest a registry purchase. - Change 'Baby or Nursery' to match your actual WooCommerce category names if they differ (e.g. 'Kids', 'Newborn', 'Children'). **Add or remove conditions:** - Remove 'shipping is international' to also catch domestic gift registry orders, though expect more false positives from parents buying for themselves. - Add 'and order total is over £100' to filter out small international baby orders and focus on substantial gift purchases. ## When this rule matches - **new customer international 4 baby products:** First-time customer with 0 previous orders, shipping internationally, with a Baby category item and 4 distinct products - all four conditions met. - **new customer international mixed categories 6 products:** First-time customer shipping internationally with 6 distinct products including Nursery items - well above the 3-product threshold. ## When this rule does not match - **returning customer international baby:** Customer has 3 previous paid orders, so the 0-previous-orders condition is not met even though all other conditions pass. - **new customer domestic baby:** Shipping is domestic (not international), so the international condition is not met even though the customer is new and has 4 baby products. - **new customer international only 3 products:** Only 3 distinct products - not more than 3. The rule requires distinct product count to exceed 3. ## Good to know - The rule uses a heuristic - not all matching orders are gift purchases. Some may be new parents shopping for themselves from abroad. - Products must be categorised as Baby or Nursery in WooCommerce for the category condition to match. - Guest checkouts are excluded because they have no previous order count. Consider a separate rule for guest baby orders. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Why does this rule require international shipping?** International shipping combined with multiple baby items from a new customer is a strong signal for a gift registry purchase - someone abroad buying from a list. Domestic orders are more likely to be a parent buying for themselves. **Q: Can I remove the international requirement to catch domestic gift orders too?** Yes. Edit the rule text to remove the international shipping condition and recompile. This will broaden the match but may produce more false positives. **Q: What if my baby products are in a category called 'Kids' instead of 'Baby'?** Edit the rule text to replace 'Baby or Nursery' with your actual WooCommerce category names. The category match uses the exact names specified in the rule. **Q: Does this rule fire for guest checkouts?** No. Guest checkouts have a null previous order count, which cannot satisfy the '0 previous paid orders' condition. Consider a separate rule that checks guest checkout status instead. ## Related rules - [first-time-registered-buyer](https://orderbadger.com/kb/first-time-registered-buyer/) - [international-order](https://orderbadger.com/kb/international-order/) - [distinct-products-over-2](https://orderbadger.com/kb/distinct-products-over-2/) ## People also search for identify baby shower gift orders WooCommerce | flag international baby product purchases from new customers | WooCommerce badge for likely registry gift orders | detect gift buying pattern for nursery products | baby gift purchase identification for gift wrapping --- # How to recognise baby growth stage transitions in customer orders > Automatically badges orders from established baby customers who return after a 90-day gap with a significant order - a pattern that strongly suggests the baby has grown into the next developmental stage, creating an opportunity for tailored product recommendations. ## The problem Baby products are tightly linked to growth stages. When a repeat baby customer goes quiet for 3 months and then places a large order, the baby has likely moved from one stage to the next (e.g., newborn to infant, infant to toddler). Without a flag, this transition moment is missed and the customer receives generic service instead of stage-appropriate recommendations. ## The solution OrderBadger can identify when a returning baby customer is likely transitioning to the next growth stage, based on their purchase gap and order size. ## Who this is for Baby and nursery retailers who want to provide stage-appropriate product recommendations and build long-term customer loyalty by recognising growth milestones in the children their customers are buying for. ## At a glance - Requires 3 or more previous paid orders - Purchase gap: more than 90 days - At least one Baby category item - Order total over £80 - Badge: Growth Stage (teal) ## How it works Combines four conditions: the customer must have 3 or more previous paid orders, at least one item must be in the Baby category, the customer must not have ordered in more than 90 days, and the order total must exceed £80. This pattern catches the moment a baby customer returns after a growth gap with a significant restocking order. **Recommended action:** Include a stage-appropriate product guide in the shipment (e.g., weaning essentials, toddler-proofing checklist). Consider a follow-up email with recommendations for the next developmental stage based on the age progression implied by the purchase gap. This is a strong moment for loyalty building. ## Rule template > Customer has 3 or more previous paid orders and at least one product is in the Baby category and days since last order is more than 90 and order total is over £80 **Badge:** Growth Stage (teal, info) **Inbox:** Yes ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Shorten 'more than 90' days to 'more than 60' to catch faster growth transitions in the newborn-to-infant stage, where stages change more quickly. - Lower 'over £80' to 'over £50' if your baby products are priced modestly and a £50 restock is still a meaningful stage purchase. - Raise '3 or more previous paid orders' to '5 or more' to restrict this to deeply loyal baby customers only. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and distinct product count is more than 2' to focus on larger restocking orders that are more clearly a full stage refresh rather than a single replacement item. ## When this rule matches - **repeat customer 100d gap baby over 80:** Customer has 4 previous orders, buying Baby category items, 100 days since last order (over 90), and total is £120 (over £80) - all conditions met. - **loyal customer 180d gap large baby order:** Customer has 6 previous orders, 180-day gap (well over 90), Baby item present, and total is £200 - a clear stage transition with a big restock. ## When this rule does not match - **new customer baby order:** Customer has only 1 previous order - below the 3 previous paid orders threshold. Cannot determine a growth pattern. - **repeat customer recent baby order:** Repeat customer with Baby items and high total, but last order was only 30 days ago - no growth gap. - **repeat customer gap low total:** Customer has 3 previous orders, 95-day gap, and Baby items, but total is only 40 - below the 80 threshold. Likely a small top-up, not a stage transition. ## Good to know - The rule infers growth stages from purchase gaps and cannot determine the actual age of the child. - A 90-day gap could also indicate the customer simply paused purchasing or switched to a competitor. The Baby category and order size conditions help filter for genuine transitions. - The £80 total threshold is in the store's base currency. Adjust for your price range - higher-end baby stores may need a higher threshold. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Why 90 days instead of 60 or 120?** Baby growth stages typically last about 3 months in the first two years (newborn, 3-6 months, 6-9 months, 9-12 months, etc.). A 90-day gap aligns with these natural transition points. Adjust the threshold in the rule text to match your product range. **Q: Why require an order total over £80?** A high minimum total filters out small top-up orders (e.g. just nappies) and focuses on significant purchases that indicate a genuine restocking for a new stage. Small orders after a gap are more likely routine restocks than growth transitions. **Q: Can this rule detect which stage the baby is transitioning to?** No. The rule detects the transition pattern but cannot determine the specific growth stage. Examine the products in the order (e.g., Stage 2 formula, 12-18m clothing) to infer the likely stage and tailor your recommendations accordingly. **Q: What if the customer buys Baby items but also non-Baby items?** The rule only requires at least one item in the Baby category. A mixed order with Baby and non-Baby products will still trigger as long as the other conditions are met. ## Related rules - [lapsed-customer-60-days](https://orderbadger.com/kb/lapsed-customer-60-days/) - [loyal-customer-5-plus-orders](https://orderbadger.com/kb/loyal-customer-5-plus-orders/) - [customer-reactivated-after-180d](https://orderbadger.com/kb/customer-reactivated-after-180d/) ## People also search for detect baby milestone purchasing pattern WooCommerce | flag returning baby customer after purchase gap | WooCommerce identify growth stage product transition | baby product restock after 3 month gap | nursery customer returning with stage-appropriate purchases --- # How to identify classroom bulk book orders in WooCommerce > Badges single-SKU orders of 10 or more copies of a Books or Educational product, a strong signal for a school or book club purchase that may qualify for institutional pricing or a bulk discount. ## The problem When someone orders 10+ copies of the same book, they are almost certainly buying for a classroom, book club, or institution. Without a flag, these orders are processed at retail price and you miss the chance to offer a bulk or institutional discount that could secure future orders. ## The solution OrderBadger can flag bulk single-title book orders that are likely classroom sets or book club purchases. ## Who this is for Bookshops, educational publishers, and stores selling educational materials who want to identify institutional buyers and offer appropriate pricing or account setup. ## At a glance - Single-SKU orders only - Per-item quantity over 10 copies - Books or Educational category required - Routes to inbox for pricing review - Badge: Classroom Set? (blue) ## How it works Combines three conditions: at least one item must have a quantity exceeding 10, the order must be a single SKU, and at least one item must be in the Books or Educational category. When all three are true, the order is badged and routed to the inbox for review. **Recommended action:** Reach out to the customer to offer institutional pricing, a bulk discount, or an educational account. Ask whether they would like a purchase order arrangement for future classroom orders. ## Rule template > At least one product has a quantity of more than 10 and order is single SKU and at least one product is in the Books or Educational category **Badge:** Classroom Set? (blue, info) **Inbox:** Yes ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Lower 'quantity of more than 10' to 'quantity of more than 5' to catch smaller class sizes or reading groups. - Change 'Books or Educational' to match your actual category names if they differ (e.g. 'Textbooks', 'Learning Materials', 'Fiction'). **Add or remove conditions:** - Remove 'order is single SKU' to also catch teachers ordering multiple different titles in bulk for a reading list. - Add 'and customer has 0 previous paid orders' to focus on first-time institutional buyers who may need onboarding to your schools programme. ## When this rule matches - **single book 15 copies:** Single SKU order with 15 copies of one Books category product - quantity exceeds 10, single SKU, and Books category all met. - **educational workbook 30 copies:** Single SKU order with 30 copies of an Educational category workbook - well above the 10-copy threshold. ## When this rule does not match - **single book 10 copies boundary:** Exactly 10 copies - the rule requires more than 10, so this is just below the threshold. - **multiple books high quantity:** Order has 12 items total but across 3 different products - not a single SKU order. - **single sku high quantity non book:** Single SKU order with quantity of 20 but the product is in Electronics, not Books or Educational. ## Good to know - The rule cannot distinguish between a teacher, a book club, and a personal bulk buyer. The badge is a prompt to investigate, not a definitive classification. - Products must be categorised as Books or Educational in WooCommerce. Miscategorised items will not trigger the rule. - Orders with multiple different books will not trigger this rule because it requires a single SKU. Consider a separate rule for mixed-title bulk educational orders. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: What if a teacher orders 10 copies of one book and 10 copies of another?** This rule will not fire because the order has two distinct products, which means it is not a single SKU order. You would need a separate rule targeting high-quantity educational orders with multiple SKUs. **Q: Can I lower the quantity threshold from 10 to 5 for smaller class sizes?** Yes. Edit the rule text to change 'quantity of more than 10' to your preferred threshold and recompile. **Q: Does this rule check the total order quantity or the per-item quantity?** It checks the per-item quantity. At least one product must individually have a quantity exceeding 10. Since the order is also required to be single SKU, the per-item and total quantities will be the same. ## Related rules - [single-sku-order](https://orderbadger.com/kb/single-sku-order/) - [total-quantity-over-5](https://orderbadger.com/kb/total-quantity-over-5/) ## People also search for flag school book set orders for institutional pricing | detect bulk single title book purchases WooCommerce | WooCommerce badge for classroom or book club orders | identify teacher buying class sets of books | bulk educational book order review --- # How to recognise collector buying patterns in WooCommerce > Badges orders from loyal customers who have made 5 or more purchases and have bought from the same product category at least 5 times, while keeping their order total under £50 - a pattern characteristic of collectors building a curated set over time. ## The problem Collectors are among the most valuable and predictable customers, but their orders are small and easy to overlook. Without a flag, your team cannot recognise collector behaviour and misses opportunities for curated recommendations, pre-orders, or loyalty perks. ## The solution OrderBadger can identify collector behaviour by combining purchase frequency, category depth, and order value into a single rule. ## Who this is for Bookshops, comic stores, vinyl record shops, hobbyist retailers, and any store where customers build collections through regular small purchases in a specific category. ## At a glance - Requires 5 or more previous paid orders - Same category purchased 5 or more times - Order total under £50 - Passive badge, no inbox routing - Badge: Collector (green) ## How it works Checks three conditions: the customer must have 5 or more previous paid orders, at least one item in the order must be in a category the customer has purchased from 5 or more times, and the order total must be under £50. When all three are true, the Collector badge is applied. **Recommended action:** Send the customer personalised recommendations for new releases or restocks in their preferred category. Consider offering them early access to pre-orders, a collector's loyalty tier, or a subscription option. ## Rule template > Customer has 5 or more previous paid orders and at least one product has been purchased in its category 5 or more times by this customer and order total is less than £50 **Badge:** Collector (green, info) ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Raise 'less than £50' to 'less than £75' if your collectible items (e.g. hardbacks, limited editions) typically cost more, so collectors aren't excluded. - Lower 'purchased in its category 5 or more times' to '3 or more times' to identify emerging collectors earlier in their journey. - Reduce '5 or more previous paid orders' to '3 or more' to catch collector patterns sooner. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and distinct product count is 1' to focus on the purest collector behaviour: buying one new item at a time to add to a set. ## When this rule matches - **loyal customer deep category small order:** Customer has 8 previous paid orders, has purchased from the Fiction category 6 times, and order total is £25 - all three conditions met. - **comic collector boundary values:** Customer has exactly 5 previous paid orders (meeting the >= 5 threshold), has purchased from Comics exactly 5 times, and total is £49.99 - just under £50. ## When this rule does not match - **loyal customer deep category over 50:** Customer has 10 previous orders and 7 category purchases, but the order total of £65 exceeds the £50 threshold. - **new customer small order with category:** Customer has only 3 previous paid orders - below the 5-order threshold even though category purchase count and total qualify. - **loyal customer low category count:** Customer has 6 previous orders and a small total, but the category purchase count is only 4 - below the 5-time threshold. ## Good to know - The rule identifies a pattern, not a self-declared collector. Some frequent small-order customers may not consider themselves collectors. - The £50 threshold is in the store's default currency. Adjust the rule text for stores with higher or lower average order values. - Category purchase count relies on WooCommerce order history. If category assignments have changed over time, historical counts may not perfectly reflect the current taxonomy. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Does the category purchase count include the current order?** No. The customer_category_purchase_count reflects prior purchases. The current order is the one being evaluated and is not included in the count. **Q: Can a customer be flagged as a collector in multiple categories?** Yes. If the order contains items from two categories and the customer has purchased from both 5 or more times, the rule still fires. It requires at least one qualifying item. **Q: Why is there an order total cap of £50?** The cap distinguishes habitual small purchases (collector behaviour) from large restocking orders. A customer spending £200 in a familiar category is a different pattern - likely a gift or upgrade rather than a collection addition. ## Related rules - [loyal-customer-5-plus-orders](https://orderbadger.com/kb/loyal-customer-5-plus-orders/) - [experienced-category-buyer](https://orderbadger.com/kb/experienced-category-buyer/) - [repeat-product-buyer-3x](https://orderbadger.com/kb/repeat-product-buyer-3x/) ## People also search for identify book collector customers WooCommerce | flag frequent small order category loyal buyers | WooCommerce badge for hobbyist collectors building sets | detect repeat buyer in same category with small orders | recognise vinyl or comic collector purchasing behaviour --- # How to alert staff about back-ordered items in WooCommerce orders > Automatically badges orders containing at least one back-ordered item so your team can proactively notify the customer and manage expectations around delivery timelines. ## The problem Back-ordered items delay fulfilment and surprise customers who expect prompt delivery. Without a visual flag, these orders sit in the queue and staff do not realise they cannot be shipped until they try to pick the item. ## The solution OrderBadger can automatically flag orders that contain back-ordered items. ## Who this is for Stores that allow backorder purchases and need to communicate delays promptly, or stores with variable stock levels where items frequently go out of stock between order and fulfilment. ## At a glance - Uses pre-computed derived field - Triggers on any backordered item - Inbox with Notified and Hold actions - Badge: Backorder (orange, critical) - Works with WooCommerce stock management ## How it works Checks whether any item in the order is on backorder and adds a critical badge if so. The badge appears in the inbox so your team can take action - either notifying the customer or placing the order on hold until stock arrives. **Recommended action:** Contact the customer to inform them of the delay and provide an estimated restock date. Use the interaction buttons to mark the order as Notified or Hold depending on whether the customer has been contacted. ## Rule template > Order contains at least one back-ordered item **Badge:** Backorder (orange, critical) **Inbox:** Yes **Interaction:** Notified / Hold ## Make it yours **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and order total is over £50' to only flag backordered orders above a certain value, keeping small orders out of your inbox. - Add 'and customer has 3 or more previous paid orders' to prioritise backorder notifications for loyal customers whose experience matters most. ## When this rule matches - **has backorder item:** Order contains at least one back-ordered item as indicated by the derived flag. ## When this rule does not match - **no backorder items:** All items in the order are in stock, no back-ordered items present. ## Good to know - The backorder flag is derived from WooCommerce stock status at evaluation time. If stock is updated after evaluation, the badge will not automatically refresh. - This does not indicate which specific item is back-ordered. Check the order details for the affected line item. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: How is this rule different from 'any-item-on-backorder'?** Both detect backorders, but this rule uses the pre-computed derived field contains_backorder_item rather than scanning individual line items. The result is the same - use whichever version matches your setup. **Q: Can I tell which specific item is backordered from the badge?** No. The badge only indicates that at least one item is on backorder. Open the order details to see which line item is affected. **Q: Will the badge update if stock arrives and I clear the backorder status?** Not automatically. The derived field is computed at evaluation time. You would need to re-evaluate the order or manually dismiss the badge after restocking. **Q: What do the Notified and Hold interaction buttons do?** They let your team record what action was taken. Mark an order as 'Notified' once you have informed the customer of the delay, or 'Hold' if you are waiting for stock before shipping. ## People also search for WooCommerce backorder item notification badge | automatically flag orders with items on backorder | notify team about delayed stock in customer orders | back order alert for warehouse staff WooCommerce | highlight orders that cannot be fully shipped --- # How to track orders containing sale items in WooCommerce > Automatically badges orders containing at least one item that is currently on sale, so your team can track promotional order volume and spot pricing issues early. ## The problem Sale items may have lower margins, limited stock, or special packaging requirements. Without a visual flag, promotional orders are mixed in with full-price orders and it is hard to track the impact of a sale or catch pricing errors. ## The solution OrderBadger can automatically flag orders that contain items currently on sale in your WooCommerce store. ## Who this is for Stores that run frequent promotions or flash sales and want to monitor the volume and correctness of discounted orders during and after a campaign. ## At a glance - Checks for active sale price at evaluation - Any single sale item triggers the badge - Passive badge, no inbox routing - Badge: Sale Items (yellow) - Category: order review ## How it works Checks whether any line item in the order has an active sale price and adds a badge if so. This provides at-a-glance visibility into promotional order volume directly on the orders list. **Recommended action:** Verify that sale prices are correct and that stock levels for sale items are sufficient. During high-volume promotions, monitor the badge count to gauge campaign performance. ## Rule template > Order includes at least one item that is currently on sale **Badge:** Sale Items (yellow, info) ## Make it yours **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and order total is over £100' to focus on high-value promotional orders that have the biggest margin impact. - Add 'and a coupon or discount code was applied to the order' to specifically catch orders stacking a sale price with a coupon code, which is where pricing errors are most likely. ## When this rule matches - **has sale item:** Order contains at least one item on sale as indicated by the derived flag. ## When this rule does not match - **no sale items:** No items in the order are currently on sale. ## Good to know - The sale status is based on whether the product has an active sale price in WooCommerce at evaluation time. - This does not indicate the discount amount. Combine with the discount percentage rule for deeper analysis. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Does this trigger for items with a scheduled sale that hasn't started yet?** No. The rule checks whether the product has an active sale price at the time the order is evaluated. Scheduled future sales that have not yet begun will not trigger the badge. **Q: If I end a sale after the order was placed, does the badge disappear?** No. The badge reflects the product's sale status when the order was evaluated. Ending the sale afterwards does not retroactively remove the badge. **Q: Does this tell me how much the sale discount is?** No. This rule only flags the presence of a sale item. Pair it with the 'discount-over-20-percent' rule if you also want to flag orders with large discount amounts. ## Related rules - [discount-over-20-percent](https://orderbadger.com/kb/discount-over-20-percent/) - [coupon-applied](https://orderbadger.com/kb/coupon-applied/) ## People also search for flag orders with discounted products WooCommerce | badge promotional sale item orders | WooCommerce track sale price order volume | monitor flash sale orders in order list | identify orders containing reduced price items --- # How to flag orders with digital products in WooCommerce > Automatically badges orders that include at least one virtual or digital product so your team can ensure digital fulfilment (download links, licence keys, access grants) is handled correctly alongside any physical items. ## The problem Virtual products require different fulfilment - download links, licence keys, or access provisioning instead of picking and packing. If digital items are not flagged, warehouse staff may overlook the digital component or customers may not receive their digital purchases promptly. ## The solution OrderBadger can flag any order that contains a virtual or digital product. ## Who this is for Stores selling a mix of physical and digital products - such as software with hardware bundles, online courses with printed materials, or music with merchandise. ## At a glance - Detects virtual and downloadable products - Triggers on a single virtual item - Covers mixed physical and digital orders - Passive badge, no inbox routing - Badge: Digital Item (purple) ## How it works Checks whether the order includes at least one item marked as virtual or downloadable in WooCommerce. If so, the order is badged so your team can ensure the digital component is fulfilled correctly. **Recommended action:** Verify that download links, licence keys, or access credentials have been sent to the customer. If the order also contains physical items, ensure both fulfilment streams are completed. ## Rule template > The order contains at least one virtual or digital product **Badge:** Digital Item (purple, info) ## Make it yours **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and order contains at least one physical product' to only badge mixed orders where both physical and digital fulfilment are needed, ignoring purely virtual orders. - Add 'and order total is over £50' to focus on significant digital orders and skip low-value digital add-ons. ## When this rule matches - **has virtual item:** The order contains at least one virtual item, so contains_virtual_item is true. ## When this rule does not match - **physical only:** The order contains only physical products, so contains_virtual_item is false. - **no items in order:** The order has no items, so the virtual item condition cannot be met. ## Good to know - This relies on products being correctly marked as 'virtual' or 'downloadable' in WooCommerce. Miscategorised products will not trigger the flag. - Does not distinguish between downloadable files and other virtual product types (e.g. services, bookings). ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Does this detect WooCommerce downloadable products as well as virtual ones?** Yes. Both products marked as 'virtual' and those marked as 'downloadable' in WooCommerce will trigger this badge. **Q: Will this fire for orders that contain only virtual items, or only mixed orders?** Both. The rule triggers whenever at least one virtual item is present, whether the order is entirely virtual or a mix of physical and digital products. **Q: What about WooCommerce Subscriptions or Bookings - are those considered virtual?** Only if the underlying product is marked as 'virtual' in WooCommerce. Subscription and booking products vary - check your product settings to confirm. ## Related rules - [mixed-physical-virtual](https://orderbadger.com/kb/mixed-physical-virtual/) ## People also search for badge orders containing virtual or downloadable items WooCommerce | flag digital product orders for licence key fulfilment | WooCommerce identify orders needing digital delivery | alert on mixed physical and digital product orders | ensure download links sent for virtual product purchases --- # How to flag aerosol and perfume orders shipping internationally > Badges any international order that includes products from the Aerosols, Sprays, or Perfume category. Pressurised containers and alcohol-based fragrances are classified as dangerous goods under IATA regulations, and many carriers restrict or prohibit them on international air freight. ## The problem Beauty and cosmetics retailers routinely stock pressurised hairsprays, deodorant aerosols, and alcohol-heavy perfumes alongside non-restricted products. When a customer abroad orders a perfume bundled with skincare items, the entire shipment can be rejected at the carrier depot or held at customs. The cost is not just a failed delivery - it includes return freight, customer refunds, and potential regulatory fines. ## The solution OrderBadger can automatically flag international orders that contain aerosols, sprays, or perfumes so your team can check carrier restrictions before dispatch. ## Who this is for Beauty retailers, fragrance boutiques, and cosmetics brands that sell aerosol or alcohol-based products and ship to international customers. ## At a glance - International shipping only - Aerosols, Sprays, or Perfume category - IATA dangerous goods relevance - Routes to inbox for compliance check - Badge: Aerosol Restriction (red) ## How it works Scans every incoming order for products in the Aerosols, Sprays, or Perfume category and checks whether the shipping destination is international. When both conditions are true, a red warning badge is applied and the order appears in your inbox for compliance review. **Recommended action:** Check your carrier's dangerous goods policy for the destination country. Some carriers offer ground-only international routes for restricted items. If air freight is the only option, you may need to remove the restricted items, offer a domestic-only alternative, or cancel that portion of the order and notify the customer. ## Rule template > At least one product is in the Aerosols, Sprays, or Perfume category and shipping is international **Badge:** Aerosol Restriction (red, warning) **Inbox:** Yes ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Add more category names to the rule text (e.g., 'Nail Polish' or 'Flammable') if your store carries other restricted beauty products beyond aerosols and perfumes. - Narrow the category list to just 'Aerosols' if your pump sprays and non-pressurised products are already in separate categories and rarely cause carrier issues. **Add or remove conditions:** - Remove 'and shipping is international' to also flag domestic orders if your domestic carrier has its own aerosol handling procedures. - Add 'and order total is over £100' to focus the flag on higher-value international orders where a failed delivery would cause the most financial damage. ## When this rule matches - **perfume international us:** The order contains a Perfume category item and ships internationally to the US - both conditions are met. - **aerosol hairspray international de:** Contains an Aerosols item (dry shampoo) shipping to Germany - aerosol condition and international condition both satisfied. - **spray toner international au:** Contains a Sprays category product heading to Australia - the spray and international conditions are both true. ## When this rule does not match - **perfume domestic uk:** Order contains a Perfume item but ships domestically within the UK - the international condition is not met. - **skincare international no aerosol:** Order ships internationally but all products are in Skincare - no Aerosols, Sprays, or Perfume items present. - **aerosol domestic only:** Order contains an Aerosols item but is a domestic shipment - the international condition fails. ## Good to know - The rule relies on products being assigned to the Aerosols, Sprays, or Perfume categories. A mislabelled perfume sitting in the Gifts category will not trigger the flag. - Not all sprays are pressurised - pump sprays are generally safe for air freight. If you want to exclude pump sprays, maintain a separate non-aerosol Sprays subcategory. - Country-specific regulations vary. This rule flags all international destinations equally and does not distinguish between countries with lenient vs. strict aerosol import rules. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Are all perfumes restricted for international shipping?** Most perfumes contain alcohol (ethanol) and are classified as flammable liquids (Class 3 dangerous goods). Solid perfume and oil-based fragrances without alcohol are generally exempt, but it depends on the carrier and destination country. **Q: What about pump sprays that are not pressurised?** Pump sprays without a propellant gas are usually safe for air freight. If you categorise them separately from pressurised aerosols, they will not trigger this rule. Otherwise, consider splitting your Sprays category. **Q: Can I ship aerosols internationally by ground?** Some carriers offer ground-based international services (e.g., road freight within Europe). These routes typically allow dangerous goods that air freight does not. Check your carrier's DG policy for ground options. **Q: Will this catch gift sets that include a perfume sample?** Only if the gift set product is assigned to the Perfume, Aerosols, or Sprays category. Gift sets in a generic Gifts category will not be flagged unless you recategorise them or add Gifts to the rule. ## Related rules - [international-order](https://orderbadger.com/kb/international-order/) - [sports-hazmat-shipping](https://orderbadger.com/kb/sports-hazmat-shipping/) ## People also search for WooCommerce restricted goods international shipping alert | flag perfume orders going abroad for compliance | aerosol dangerous goods shipping check WooCommerce | international beauty order hazmat compliance badge | prevent carrier rejection for aerosol shipments overseas --- # How to prioritise gift set orders during peak season in WooCommerce > Applies an informational badge to orders over £50 that contain at least one Gift Sets product during peak season. These orders are likely gifts and may benefit from priority fulfilment, gift wrapping, or a gift receipt. ## The problem During Christmas, Valentine's Day, and Mother's Day, gift set orders surge. They look identical to regular orders in the dashboard, but they carry higher customer expectations - they need to arrive on time, look presentable, and ideally include gift packaging. Missing the delivery window for a gift purchase does far more reputational damage than missing it for a personal order. ## The solution OrderBadger can tag gift set orders during peak seasons so your team can prioritise fulfilment and offer gift packaging. ## Who this is for Cosmetics and beauty retailers with a gift sets line who experience seasonal spikes and want to ensure gift orders receive appropriate attention during peak periods. ## At a glance - Peak season orders only - Gift Sets category required - Order total over £50 - Passive badge, no inbox routing - Badge: Peak Gift Set (green) ## How it works Combines three conditions: the current date must fall within your configured peak season window, at least one item must belong to the Gift Sets category, and the order total must exceed £50. The badge appears passively on the order - it does not route to the inbox, making it a lightweight visual indicator rather than a workflow interruption. **Recommended action:** Use the badge as a visual cue in the order list. During peak periods, prioritise badged orders for same-day dispatch. If your store offers gift wrapping, check whether the customer selected it - and if not, consider including a branded gift bag or tissue paper as a courtesy for orders over the threshold. ## Rule template > It is peak season and at least one product is in the Gift Sets category and order total is over £50 **Badge:** Peak Gift Set (green, info) ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Lower 'over £50' to 'over £30' to include smaller gift sets that still deserve priority packaging during peak. - Raise 'over £50' to 'over £100' to limit the badge to premium gift orders where the effort of gift wrapping has the highest perceived value. **Add or remove conditions:** - Remove 'and it is peak season' to badge all gift set orders year-round, useful if you sell gift sets consistently rather than seasonally. - Add 'and shipping is international' to focus extra attention on international gift orders during peak, where delivery timelines are tightest. ## When this rule matches - **peak season gift set over threshold:** It is peak season, the order includes a Gift Sets product, and the total of £89.99 exceeds £50. - **peak season gift set boundary:** Peak season is active, the basket includes a Gift Sets item, and the total of £50.01 just clears the £50 threshold. ## When this rule does not match - **off peak gift set:** The order has a Gift Sets item and the total is £75, but it is not peak season. - **peak season non gift product:** It is peak season and the total exceeds £50, but none of the items are in the Gift Sets category. - **peak season gift set under threshold:** Peak season is active and the order includes a Gift Sets product, but the total of £34.99 is under £50. ## Good to know - Peak season is defined by your store's time configuration. If your peak season dates are not set or are outdated, the rule will not fire when expected. - The rule does not distinguish between self-purchase and genuine gifts. A customer buying a gift set for themselves during December will still be flagged. - Orders just under £50 are excluded. A £49.99 gift set order during Christmas will not receive the badge. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: How is peak season determined?** Peak season is set in your OrderBadger time configuration. It typically covers periods like November-December for Christmas, early February for Valentine's Day, and late March for Mother's Day. Adjust the dates to match your store's actual peak periods. **Q: Why is this rule not routed to the inbox?** Gift set peak orders are high volume and generally straightforward to fulfil. Routing every one to the inbox would create noise. The badge acts as a passive visual signal visible on the order list and detail page. **Q: Can I use this to trigger automatic gift wrapping?** OrderBadger badges are informational - they do not trigger WooCommerce actions. However, you can use the badge as a manual cue for your warehouse team to add gift packaging to flagged orders. **Q: What if my gift sets sit under a different category name?** Edit the rule text to match your actual category name. If your store uses 'Gifts', 'Gift Boxes', or 'Holiday Sets', replace 'Gift Sets' with that name. ## Related rules - [peak-season-order](https://orderbadger.com/kb/peak-season-order/) ## People also search for badge Christmas gift set orders for priority fulfilment | WooCommerce peak season gift order tracking | flag holiday cosmetics gift set purchases | prioritise beauty gift orders during seasonal rush | seasonal gift set order packaging alert --- # How to spot overdue skincare replenishment customers in WooCommerce > Badges orders from repeat skincare customers who have purchased before, are reordering a product they have bought at least twice, but whose last order was more than 60 days ago. This gap suggests the customer may have lapsed or experimented with a competitor, making the current order a win-back moment. ## The problem Skincare products have a natural consumption cycle - a moisturiser lasts roughly 60-90 days. When a loyal customer goes quiet beyond that window and then returns, it often means they tried something else and came back. This is a retention-critical moment: recognise the return, and you strengthen the relationship; ignore it, and the next lapse may be permanent. ## The solution OrderBadger can spot returning skincare customers who are overdue for replenishment based on their order gap and purchase history with specific products. ## Who this is for Skincare brands, beauty subscription retailers, and online cosmetics shops with a loyal base of repeat buyers purchasing consumable skincare products on a regular cycle. ## At a glance - Requires 2 or more previous paid orders - Product purchased 2 or more times before - Purchase gap: more than 60 days - Skincare category required - Badge: Replenishment Due (teal) ## How it works Combines four signals: the customer must have at least 2 previous paid orders, at least one product in the order must have been purchased by the same customer 2 or more times before, the gap since their last order must exceed 60 days, and at least one item must be in the Skincare category. Together these conditions pinpoint a loyal skincare buyer who has gone quiet and is now returning. **Recommended action:** Treat this order as a retention opportunity. Include a thank-you note or a small sample of a complementary product. If you run a loyalty programme, check whether the customer has unclaimed points. A personal touch at this moment can re-establish the replenishment habit. ## Rule template > Customer has 2 or more previous paid orders and at least one product has been purchased by this customer 2 or more times and days since last order is more than 60 and at least one product is in the Skincare category **Badge:** Replenishment Due (teal, info) **Inbox:** Yes ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Shorten 'more than 60' to 'more than 45' if your core products are small-format items that run out faster, such as 30ml serums or travel-size moisturisers. - Extend 'more than 60' to 'more than 90' if your products are large-format (100ml+) and customers realistically need a longer replenishment cycle. **Add or remove conditions:** - Remove 'and at least one product is in the Skincare category' to detect overdue replenishment in any product category, not just skincare. - Add 'and order total is less than £30' to specifically target small restock orders where the customer is only buying their regular product and might appreciate a bundle discount to increase basket size. ## When this rule matches - **returning repeat skincare buyer 75 days:** Customer has 4 previous paid orders, has bought from the Skincare category with this product purchased 3 times before, and last ordered 75 days ago - all conditions met. - **boundary 2 orders 2 purchases 61 days:** Customer has exactly 2 previous orders, has bought this Skincare product exactly twice, and last ordered 61 days ago - all thresholds met at the boundary. ## When this rule does not match - **repeat buyer recent order:** Customer has 5 previous orders and has bought this skincare product 4 times, but last ordered only 30 days ago - the 60-day gap is not met. - **overdue but first time product:** Customer has 3 previous orders and last ordered 90 days ago, but has never purchased this specific product before (count is 1, which is the current order) - the product repurchase condition is not met. - **overdue repeat buyer non skincare:** Customer has 6 previous orders, has bought this product 3 times, and last ordered 80 days ago - but the product is in Makeup, not Skincare. ## Good to know - The 60-day gap is a general skincare consumption estimate. Some products (like eye cream) last longer, while others (like cleansers) run out faster. Adjust the threshold to match your bestsellers. - The rule uses overall days since last order, not the gap for the specific product. A customer who bought skincare 90 days ago but ordered a fragrance last week will not be flagged because their last order was recent. - Guest checkouts cannot build purchase history, so this rule only works for registered customers. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Why 60 days specifically?** Most skincare products last 2-3 months with daily use. A 60-day gap catches customers right as their product is likely running out or just after. You can adjust this to match the actual consumption rate of your top-selling products. **Q: Does this overlap with the lapsed customer rule?** The lapsed customer rule flags any customer who has been away for 60+ days. This rule adds product-level and category-level conditions, making it specific to skincare replenishment patterns rather than general inactivity. **Q: What if the customer buys a new product they have never ordered before?** The rule requires at least one product with 2 or more previous purchases. If the entire order is new products, the replenishment condition is not met and the badge will not appear. ## Related rules - [customer-reactivated-after-180d](https://orderbadger.com/kb/customer-reactivated-after-180d/) - [lapsed-customer-60-days](https://orderbadger.com/kb/lapsed-customer-60-days/) - [repeat-product-buyer-3x](https://orderbadger.com/kb/repeat-product-buyer-3x/) ## People also search for detect lapsed skincare customer returning to reorder | WooCommerce replenishment cycle tracking for beauty products | flag overdue repeat skincare buyers coming back | identify win-back moment for cosmetics customers | skincare product repurchase gap alert --- # How to detect shade-matching orders likely to be returned in WooCommerce > Badges orders containing more than 3 distinct products when every item is in the Foundation or Concealer category and the customer has no order history. This pattern typically means a new buyer is ordering multiple shades to find the right match, which carries a high return rate. ## The problem Shade matching is the single biggest driver of returns in colour cosmetics. A first-time customer who cannot swatch in person will often order 4 or 5 shades of foundation and return the ones that do not match. Each return costs you shipping, restocking, and often the product itself if hygiene seals are broken. Catching these orders before dispatch lets you intervene - offer a virtual consultation, suggest a sample pack, or simply prepare for the likely returns. ## The solution OrderBadger can identify orders that look like shade-matching attempts from new customers buying multiple foundations or concealers. ## Who this is for Online beauty and cosmetics retailers selling foundation, concealer, and other shade-specific complexion products where colour match drives return behaviour. ## At a glance - First-time customers only - More than 3 distinct products required - All items must be Foundation or Concealer - Routes to inbox for proactive outreach - Badge: Shade Matching? (purple) ## How it works Fires when three things are true at once: the order contains more than 3 distinct products, every product in the order belongs to the Foundation or Concealer category, and the customer has never placed a paid order before. This combination strongly suggests someone buying several shades to find their match. **Recommended action:** Before dispatching, consider reaching out with a shade-matching tool or virtual consultation link. If your store offers sample sizes, suggest swapping the full-size order for a sample kit. At minimum, include a prepaid return label and a note explaining your return policy for opened cosmetics. ## Rule template > Distinct product count is more than 3 and all products are in the Foundation or Concealer category and customer has 0 previous paid orders **Badge:** Shade Matching? (purple, info) **Inbox:** Yes ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Lower 'more than 3' to 'more than 2' if even three-shade orders drive significant returns in your store. - Raise 'more than 3' to 'more than 5' if your shade range is large and customers commonly order 4 adjacent shades with low return rates. **Add or remove conditions:** - Remove 'and customer has 0 previous paid orders' to catch returning customers who are shade-matching in a new product line they have not tried before. - Change 'all products are in Foundation or Concealer' to 'at least one product is in Foundation or Concealer' if you want to flag mixed baskets that include shade-sensitive items alongside other products. ## When this rule matches - **new buyer four foundations:** 4 distinct Foundation products, all in the Foundation category, and the customer has 0 previous paid orders. - **new buyer mixed foundation concealer:** 5 distinct products, all either Foundation or Concealer, and the buyer has no prior orders. ## When this rule does not match - **new buyer only three foundations:** Customer has 0 previous orders and all products are Foundation, but only 3 distinct products - the rule requires more than 3. - **new buyer mixed categories:** 4 distinct products from a new buyer, but one item is in Skincare - not all products are Foundation or Concealer. - **returning buyer four foundations:** All 4 products are Foundation and the order has more than 3 distinct items, but the customer has 2 previous paid orders - not a first-time buyer. ## Good to know - The rule requires that ALL products are Foundation or Concealer. If the customer adds a lipstick or brush to the cart, the 'all products' condition fails and the order is not flagged. - Returning customers who already found their shade and are now buying for others (gifts, friends) will not trigger this rule because they have previous paid orders. - Products must be categorised correctly. If your Foundation products sit under a parent Makeup category without a Foundation subcategory, the rule will not match. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Why does the rule require ALL products to be Foundation or Concealer?** If a customer mixes foundation shades with brushes, primers, or skincare, it is more likely a genuine haul than a shade test. The all-products condition isolates the pure shade-sampling pattern. **Q: What if I sell foundation in a parent Makeup category?** You will need a Foundation subcategory for the rule to match. Alternatively, adjust the rule text to reference your actual category name, such as 'Face Makeup' or 'Complexion'. **Q: Can I proactively offer a sample kit instead of flagging the order?** The badge is a visibility tool - it surfaces the order so your team can take action. Offering a sample kit swap would be the recommended follow-up, handled manually or via a templated email from your CS team. ## Related rules - [first-time-registered-buyer](https://orderbadger.com/kb/first-time-registered-buyer/) - [high-value-first-order-review](https://orderbadger.com/kb/high-value-first-order-review/) ## People also search for flag foundation shade sampling orders for return risk | WooCommerce identify multiple concealer shade purchases | detect colour match testing orders from new beauty buyers | reduce foundation returns by catching shade testers | new customer ordering several foundation shades alert --- # How to track coupon code usage across WooCommerce orders > Automatically badges orders that have a coupon or discount code applied, so your team can track promotional uptake and verify that coupons are being used as intended. ## The problem Coupons are a key marketing tool but can also be a source of revenue loss if misused, shared publicly, or stacked with other discounts. Without a visual flag, it is difficult to monitor coupon usage across the order queue. ## The solution OrderBadger can automatically flag any order where a coupon or discount code was applied. ## Who this is for Stores that issue coupon codes for marketing campaigns, influencer partnerships, or loyalty programmes and want to keep an eye on redemption patterns. ## At a glance - Detects any coupon or discount code - Fires on single or stacked coupons - Passive badge, no inbox routing - Badge: Coupon (yellow) - Category: order review ## How it works Checks whether the order has one or more coupons applied and adds a badge if so. This gives you at-a-glance visibility into which orders used promotional codes. **Recommended action:** Review coupon usage patterns periodically. If you see unexpected spikes, check whether a private code has been shared publicly. For influencer codes, use this badge to track campaign performance. ## Rule template > A coupon or discount code was applied to the order **Badge:** Coupon (yellow, info) ## Make it yours **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and the customer received a discount of more than 20 percent on this order' to only flag coupon orders with unusually steep discounts. - Add 'and customer has 0 previous paid orders' to spotlight first-time buyers using a coupon, which helps measure acquisition campaign effectiveness. ## When this rule matches - **one coupon applied:** Order has 1 coupon applied, so the rule matches. - **two coupons applied:** Order has 2 coupons applied, which also satisfies the rule. ## When this rule does not match - **no coupons:** No coupons were applied to the order. ## Good to know - This detects any coupon, regardless of value or type. It does not distinguish between percentage, fixed-amount, or free-shipping coupons. - Automatic discounts applied by WooCommerce pricing rules (without a coupon code) will not trigger this badge. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Does this badge show which coupon code was used?** No. The badge indicates that at least one coupon was applied but does not display the code itself. Check the order details in WooCommerce to see the specific coupon. **Q: Will it fire if the customer stacked multiple coupons?** Yes. The rule triggers when the coupon count is 1 or more, so it fires for single coupons and stacked coupons alike. **Q: What about automatic discounts from plugins like WooCommerce Dynamic Pricing?** No. This rule only detects traditional WooCommerce coupon codes. Automatic pricing rules that apply discounts without a coupon code will not trigger this badge. **Q: Can I create a rule that only flags a specific coupon code?** Not with this rule. This flags any coupon. For specific coupon tracking, you would need a custom rule that checks the coupon code value, which is not currently a supported derived field. ## Related rules - [discount-over-20-percent](https://orderbadger.com/kb/discount-over-20-percent/) - [contains-sale-item](https://orderbadger.com/kb/contains-sale-item/) ## People also search for badge orders where discount code was used WooCommerce | monitor promo code redemption on orders | WooCommerce flag coupon applied to order | track promotional code usage in order list | identify orders using voucher or discount codes --- # How to reward loyal craft hobbyists who order frequently in WooCommerce > Badges orders from customers who have placed 8 or more orders in the past year, spend under £40 per order, and are purchasing Yarn or Fabric. This profile is a dedicated maker - someone who buys supplies regularly in small batches as each project demands, rather than in infrequent large hauls. ## The problem Frequent low-value customers are easy to overlook because no single order stands out. Yet their cumulative spend and engagement often rivals or exceeds one-off big spenders. Without a way to identify these loyal makers, you miss the chance to reward their devotion - and risk losing them to a competitor who does. ## The solution OrderBadger can identify your most loyal craft customers based on their order frequency and purchasing pattern in Yarn or Fabric. ## Who this is for Yarn shops, fabric retailers, and general craft supply stores with a community of hobbyist knitters, crocheters, quilters, and sewers who order small amounts regularly. ## At a glance - Threshold: 8 or more orders in 365 days - Order total under £40 - Yarn or Fabric category required - Passive badge, no inbox routing - Badge: Loyal Maker (green) ## How it works Checks three conditions: the customer must have placed at least 8 orders in the last 365 days, the current order total must be below £40, and at least one item must be in the Yarn or Fabric category. This isolates the frequent small-batch maker - a customer whose habit of regular modest orders makes them exceptionally valuable over time. **Recommended action:** Recognise these customers with loyalty perks. Include a handwritten thank-you note, offer early access to new yarn or fabric collections, or provide a standing discount for orders above a certain frequency. Even a free pattern or small skein sample builds emotional loyalty that keeps them coming back. ## Rule template > Customer has 8 or more orders in the last 365 days and order total is less than £40 and at least one product is in the Yarn or Fabric category **Badge:** Loyal Maker (green, info) ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Raise 'less than £40' to 'less than £60' if your typical yarn or fabric prices are higher and loyal makers routinely spend £40-55 per visit. - Lower '8 or more orders' to '6 or more orders' if monthly ordering is already a strong loyalty signal in your market. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and customer prior gross spend is over £200' to confirm that the cumulative spend justifies a loyalty reward, not just the frequency. - Remove 'and at least one product is in the Yarn or Fabric category' to recognise loyal small-batch buyers across all craft categories, not just fibre arts. ## When this rule matches - **frequent yarn buyer small order:** Customer has 12 orders in the last 365 days, the total is £24.50, and the order contains a Yarn product. - **boundary 8 orders 39 total fabric:** Customer has exactly 8 orders this year, the total of £39.99 is under £40, and the order includes a Fabric product - all thresholds met at the boundary. ## When this rule does not match - **frequent buyer over 40:** Customer has 10 orders and the basket contains Yarn, but the total of £55.00 is not less than £40. - **infrequent small yarn buyer:** Order total is £18 and contains Yarn, but the customer has only 3 orders in the last year - well below 8. - **frequent small buyer wrong category:** Customer has 9 orders and the total is 28, but all items are in Beads - neither Yarn nor Fabric. ## Good to know - Customers who alternate between small and large orders will only be badged on the orders under £40. Their large orders will not carry the badge. - The 365-day rolling window means a customer who was very active months ago but has slowed down recently will still qualify until their older orders expire from the window. - Guest checkouts do not accumulate order counts and cannot trigger this rule. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Why cap the order total at £40?** The cap distinguishes habitual small-batch makers from occasional big spenders. Frequent buyers who also place large orders are a different profile - they likely need a different recognition strategy like VIP pricing rather than a loyalty nudge. **Q: Will this badge appear on every order from a loyal maker?** Only on orders under £40 that include Yarn or Fabric. If the customer places a one-off large order or buys from a different category, that specific order will not carry the badge. **Q: How can I use this to build a loyalty programme?** Start by tracking how many of your customers carry the Loyal Maker badge. If the number is significant, consider a formal tiered programme with rewards at 10, 20, and 50 orders. The badge gives you the data to justify the investment. **Q: What about jewellery makers or paper crafters?** They follow the same pattern but buy from different categories. Edit the rule to include Beads, Paper, or your store-specific categories to extend recognition beyond fibre arts. ## Related rules - [loyal-customer-5-plus-orders](https://orderbadger.com/kb/loyal-customer-5-plus-orders/) - [active-customer-orders-this-month](https://orderbadger.com/kb/active-customer-orders-this-month/) - [orders-last-365d-10-plus](https://orderbadger.com/kb/orders-last-365d-10-plus/) ## People also search for identify devoted yarn or fabric buyers WooCommerce | badge frequent low value craft supply customers | WooCommerce recognise loyal maker purchasing pattern | flag regular small order knitting or sewing customers | reward dedicated craft hobbyist repeat buyers --- # How to identify craft project orders in WooCommerce > Applies a badge to orders spanning 4 or more categories with more than 10 total items when at least one product belongs to Fabric, Yarn, or Haberdashery. These broad, high-quantity orders typically represent a customer gathering materials for a specific craft project. ## The problem Craft project orders differ from casual browsing purchases. A quilter buying fabric, thread, batting, and a rotary cutter in one go has a clear intent and a time-sensitive need. If any item is out of stock or delayed, the entire project stalls. Standard fulfilment treats this as just another multi-item order, missing the opportunity to check completeness, suggest missing supplies, or expedite dispatch. ## The solution OrderBadger can recognise multi-category, high-quantity craft orders that look like someone gathering supplies for a single project. ## Who this is for Online haberdashery, quilting, sewing, and general craft supply stores where customers regularly buy materials for a single project in one basket. ## At a glance - Spans 4 or more product categories - Total quantity more than 10 items - Fabric, Yarn, or Haberdashery category - Passive badge, no inbox routing - Badge: Project Order (blue) ## How it works Checks that the order spans at least 4 distinct product categories, the total item quantity exceeds 10, and at least one product is categorised as Fabric, Yarn, or Haberdashery. When all three conditions hold, a blue badge labels the order as a project purchase. The badge is passive - it does not route to the inbox. **Recommended action:** Verify that all items are in stock and can ship together. Consider including a project tips card or a discount code for the customer's next project. For high-value project orders, a brief email confirming the order and expected delivery date builds confidence. ## Rule template > Order spans 4 or more categories and total quantity is more than 10 and at least one product is in the Fabric, Yarn, or Haberdashery category **Badge:** Project Order (blue, info) ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Lower '4 or more categories' to '3 or more categories' if your store has a narrow category tree where even a substantial project spans only 3 categories. - Reduce 'more than 10' to 'more than 6' if your typical project orders are smaller but still benefit from project-level attention. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and order total is over £50' to limit the badge to meaningful project purchases, filtering out small multi-category baskets. - Remove 'and at least one product is in the Fabric, Yarn, or Haberdashery category' to catch project orders in any craft discipline, including painting, pottery, and paper crafts. ## When this rule matches - **quilting project 5 categories 14 items:** Order spans 5 categories (Fabric, Thread, Tools, Batting, Haberdashery), total quantity is 14, and Fabric and Haberdashery are both present. - **knitting project 4 categories boundary:** Exactly 4 categories (Yarn, Needles, Patterns, Haberdashery) with total quantity of 11 - both thresholds met at the boundary. ## When this rule does not match - **many items too few categories:** Total quantity is 15 and the order includes Fabric, but all products are in only 2 categories - below the 4-category threshold. - **broad categories low quantity:** Order spans 5 categories and includes Yarn, but total quantity is only 5 - does not exceed 10. - **large order no craft category:** Order spans 4 categories with 12 items, but none of the categories are Fabric, Yarn, or Haberdashery - all are art supplies. ## Good to know - The rule counts categories as defined in WooCommerce. If your store uses a flat category structure with few categories, most orders will not reach the 4-category threshold. - Quantity refers to total units, not distinct products. A customer ordering 11 skeins of the same yarn in one category with nothing else will not trigger the rule because only one category is present. - Art supply project orders (paints, canvas, brushes) are not caught unless they also include Fabric, Yarn, or Haberdashery items. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Why require 4 categories instead of 3?** Three categories can easily result from a casual browse - fabric, thread, and a pattern. Four or more categories, combined with 10+ items, is a stronger signal that the customer is assembling supplies for a specific project rather than picking up a few things. **Q: Does this work for art supply stores too?** Only if the order also includes Fabric, Yarn, or Haberdashery. For a pure art supply store, edit the rule to reference your own categories such as Paints, Canvas, or Brushes. **Q: Can I use this to offer a project bundle discount?** The badge identifies the pattern. Your team can then manually apply a discount or send a follow-up email with a bundle offer. OrderBadger does not modify pricing directly. ## Related rules - [order-spans-3-categories](https://orderbadger.com/kb/order-spans-3-categories/) - [total-quantity-over-5](https://orderbadger.com/kb/total-quantity-over-5/) ## People also search for detect multi-category craft supply project orders | WooCommerce flag large quilting or sewing project purchases | badge craft orders spanning many product categories | identify customer gathering materials for one project | craft project bundle order recognition WooCommerce --- # How to detect workshop bulk orders for craft supplies in WooCommerce > Badges orders over £100 where at least one product has a quantity above 8 and belongs to the Craft Kits or Craft Supplies category. High-quantity purchases of craft kits at this price point are often for workshops, hen parties, or classroom sessions - not personal use. ## The problem A customer buying 12 identical candle-making kits is almost certainly running a workshop. These orders have different needs from regular retail: the buyer may expect bulk pricing, consolidated packaging, or a specific delivery date aligned with their event. If you ship it like a normal consumer order, you miss the chance to offer trade terms and you may pack the items inefficiently. ## The solution OrderBadger can detect bulk craft kit or supply orders that are likely destined for a workshop, party, or class, routing them to the inbox for review. ## Who this is for Craft kit retailers, haberdashery shops, and art supply stores whose products are popular for workshops, craft parties, team-building events, and school classes. ## At a glance - Per-item quantity more than 8 units - Craft Kits or Craft Supplies category - Order total over £100 - Routes to inbox for event review - Badge: Workshop Order? (yellow) ## How it works Evaluates three conditions: at least one line item must have a quantity exceeding 8, that item (or another in the order) must belong to the Craft Kits or Craft Supplies category, and the order total must be above £100. This combination isolates workshop-scale purchases from normal consumer buying. **Recommended action:** Reach out to the buyer to confirm the order purpose. If it is a workshop, offer bulk pricing for future events, ensure all kits are packaged in a single outer box for easy transport, and confirm the delivery date aligns with the event. This is an excellent lead for a recurring B2B relationship. ## Rule template > At least one product has a quantity of more than 8 and at least one product is in the Craft Kits or Craft Supplies category and order total is over £100 **Badge:** Workshop Order? (yellow, info) **Inbox:** Yes ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Lower 'more than 8' to 'more than 5' if your workshop kits are typically ordered in smaller batches of 6-8 for intimate classes. - Raise 'over £100' to 'over £200' if your kits are premium-priced and you only want to flag truly large workshop orders. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and customer has 0 previous paid orders' to focus on first-time bulk buyers who are most likely to benefit from a personal outreach about workshop pricing. - Remove 'and order total is over £100' to catch smaller workshop orders for inexpensive kits where the value threshold would filter them out. ## When this rule matches - **twelve craft kits over 100:** One product has quantity 12, it belongs to Craft Kits, and the order total of £144 exceeds £100. - **mixed order with bulk craft supplies:** The paint pot has quantity 10 (over 8) and is in Craft Supplies, and the total of £115 exceeds £100. ## When this rule does not match - **high quantity under value:** A Craft Kits product has quantity 10, but the order total of £89.90 does not exceed £100. - **high value low quantity craft:** Order total is £250 and contains Craft Kits items, but no single product has a quantity over 8 - the highest is 3. - **bulk non craft category:** One product has quantity 15 and the total is £180, but the items are in Stationery - not Craft Kits or Craft Supplies. ## Good to know - The quantity threshold applies per line item, not total quantity. A customer buying 5 of one kit and 5 of another (total 10) will not trigger the rule because neither line exceeds 8. - Personal bulk purchases (e.g., buying 10 kits as individual gifts) will also be flagged. The badge asks 'Workshop Order?' with a question mark to reflect this ambiguity. - Products must be in the Craft Kits or Craft Supplies category. Kits filed under generic categories like 'Gifts' or 'Hobbies' will not match. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Why quantity 8 and not 10?** Many small workshops and craft parties run with 8-12 participants. Setting the threshold at 8 catches orders for small group sessions that would slip through a round-number threshold of 10. **Q: What if the customer is buying kits as individual gifts?** That is possible, which is why the badge says 'Workshop Order?' with a question mark. A quick email asking about the order purpose resolves the ambiguity and opens a conversation either way. **Q: Can I offer automatic bulk discounts based on this badge?** OrderBadger does not modify pricing. The badge surfaces the order for your team to review. Apply discounts manually, or use the insight to set up WooCommerce quantity-based pricing rules for your craft kit products. **Q: Does this work for school supply orders too?** Yes, as long as the products are in the Craft Kits or Craft Supplies category. School art department orders typically follow the same high-quantity pattern. ## Related rules - [b2b-bulk-single-sku](https://orderbadger.com/kb/b2b-bulk-single-sku/) - [total-quantity-over-5](https://orderbadger.com/kb/total-quantity-over-5/) ## People also search for flag bulk craft kit purchases for workshop pricing | WooCommerce identify group class or party supply orders | detect high quantity craft supply orders for events | bulk craft kits order alert for trade pricing | spot workshop or hen party craft kit purchases --- # How to flag customers with past refunds in WooCommerce > Badges orders from customers who have at least one previously refunded order, giving your team a heads-up about potential refund risk before fulfilment. ## The problem Customers with a refund history may be higher risk for returns or disputes. Without a flag, your team has no quick way to see past refund behaviour when processing a new order. ## The solution OrderBadger can automatically flag customers who have a history of refunded orders. ## Who this is for Stores with significant return/refund rates - fashion, electronics, and any business where repeat refunders impact margins and operational costs. ## At a glance - Registered customers only - At least one previous refunded order - Counts all refund types equally - Passive badge, no inbox routing - Badge: Refund History (red) ## How it works Adds a Refund History badge to orders from registered customers who have at least one previously refunded order. This gives your team an early warning about potential refund risk. **Recommended action:** Double-check product descriptions match the items being shipped. Consider adding extra packaging protection or a personalised note. For serial refunders, review the order more carefully before dispatch. ## Rule template > Customer has had at least one refunded order in the past **Badge:** Refund History (red, warning) ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Change 'at least one refunded order' to 'at least 3 refunded orders' to focus on serial refunders rather than anyone with a single past return. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and order total is over £100' to only flag refund-risk customers when the order value is high enough to justify the extra attention. - Add 'and customer has 5 or more previous paid orders' to combine refund history with established-customer status, highlighting loyal buyers who have started returning more. ## When this rule matches - **customer 1 previous refund:** Customer has 1 previous refunded order, meeting the 'at least one' condition. - **customer 3 previous refunds:** Customer has 3 previous refunded orders, well above the minimum threshold. ## When this rule does not match - **customer 0 refunds:** Customer has zero previous refunds, so the condition is not met. - **guest checkout null refunds:** Guest checkout has no customer account, so previous_refund_count is null and cannot satisfy the condition. ## Good to know - Guest checkouts are excluded - refund history tracking requires a registered customer account. - The count includes all refunded orders regardless of reason. It does not distinguish between buyer remorse, defective product, or shipping damage. - Partial refunds on otherwise completed orders may or may not be counted depending on WooCommerce order status. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Does a partial refund count toward the refund history?** It depends on the WooCommerce order status. If the order status was changed to 'refunded', it is counted. Partial refunds on orders that remain in 'completed' status may not be included. **Q: Will guest checkouts ever show this badge?** No. Refund history requires a registered customer account to track previous orders. Guest checkouts have no linkable history and will never trigger this rule. **Q: Can I set a higher threshold, like 3 or more refunds?** Yes. Edit the rule text to specify a higher number (e.g. 'at least 3 refunded orders') and recompile. The current rule fires on any customer with one or more refunds. ## Related rules - [high-value-customer-ltv-500](https://orderbadger.com/kb/high-value-customer-ltv-500/) - [first-time-registered-buyer](https://orderbadger.com/kb/first-time-registered-buyer/) - [prior-gross-spend-over-200](https://orderbadger.com/kb/prior-gross-spend-over-200/) ## People also search for badge orders from customers who have returned before | WooCommerce alert for serial refunder new order | show refund history warning on incoming orders | flag repeat return customers placing new orders | identify refund-prone buyers in WooCommerce order list --- # How to identify win-back customers returning after months of inactivity > Badges orders from customers who are returning after being dormant for over 6 months, helping you celebrate and nurture win-back moments. ## The problem When a long-dormant customer returns, it is a critical retention moment. Without a flag, your team cannot distinguish a win-back order from a regular repeat purchase, and the opportunity for targeted re-engagement is lost. ## The solution OrderBadger can automatically identify customers who are returning after a 6-month dormancy period. ## Who this is for Stores with seasonal or infrequent purchase cycles - fashion, homeware, gift shops, and any business where winning back dormant customers is a strategic priority. ## At a glance - Registered customers only - Dormancy period: over 180 days - Uses pre-computed reactivation flag - Passive badge, no inbox routing - Badge: Win-Back (green) ## How it works Adds a Win-Back badge to orders from registered customers who have not placed an order in over 180 days but have now returned. This highlights a critical re-engagement moment for your team. **Recommended action:** Include a welcome-back message or an exclusive returning-customer discount. Add the customer to a win-back email sequence to encourage continued activity and prevent them from lapsing again. ## Rule template > Customer is returning after being dormant for over 6 months **Badge:** Win-Back (green, info) ## Make it yours **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and order total is over £50' to focus on meaningful win-back purchases rather than a small curiosity order. - Add 'and customer has 3 or more previous paid orders' to only badge reactivated customers who were genuinely engaged before their hiatus, filtering out one-time buyers who returned. ## When this rule matches - **reactivated after 180d:** Customer is flagged as reactivated after being dormant for over 180 days. ## When this rule does not match - **not reactivated active customer:** Customer is not flagged as reactivated - they have been ordering within the last 180 days. - **first time buyer not reactivated:** First-time buyer has no previous orders, so they cannot be a reactivated customer. - **guest checkout null reactivation:** Guest checkout has no customer account, so is_reactivated_after_180d is null and cannot satisfy the condition. ## Good to know - Guest checkouts are excluded - reactivation tracking requires a registered customer account. - First-time buyers cannot trigger this rule since they have no previous dormancy period. - The 180-day dormancy threshold is built into the derived field. This rule checks the pre-computed flag rather than calculating days directly. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Can a first-time buyer trigger the Win-Back badge?** No. A first-time buyer has no previous orders and therefore no dormancy period. This rule only fires for returning customers who previously ordered and then went inactive for over 180 days. **Q: Does the 180-day period start from the last order date or the last delivery date?** It is based on the last order date, not the delivery date. The dormancy clock starts from when the customer last placed an order. **Q: Will the badge fire again if the same customer lapses and returns a second time?** Yes. Each time the customer returns after another 180+ day gap, the new order will receive the Win-Back badge. It evaluates the current gap, not whether they were previously flagged. **Q: Can I change the dormancy period to 90 days instead of 180?** This rule uses the pre-computed is_reactivated_after_180d field, so the 180-day threshold is fixed in the derived data. For a different period, you would need a separate derived field. ## Related rules - [lapsed-customer-60-days](https://orderbadger.com/kb/lapsed-customer-60-days/) - [loyal-customer-5-plus-orders](https://orderbadger.com/kb/loyal-customer-5-plus-orders/) - [first-time-registered-buyer](https://orderbadger.com/kb/first-time-registered-buyer/) ## People also search for flag dormant customer coming back after 6 months WooCommerce | detect returning lapsed buyer for re-engagement | WooCommerce win-back order badge for dormant customers | highlight reactivated customer after long absence | identify customer returning after extended inactivity --- # How to catch heavily discounted orders in WooCommerce before shipping > Automatically badges orders where the customer received a discount of more than 20 percent, so your team can review heavily discounted orders for coupon abuse or pricing errors. ## The problem Heavy discounts erode margins and may indicate coupon stacking, leaked promo codes, or pricing configuration errors. Without a visual flag, these orders are fulfilled at a loss before anyone notices the problem. ## The solution OrderBadger can automatically flag orders where the discount exceeds any percentage threshold you set. ## Who this is for Stores that offer coupons, loyalty discounts, or sale prices and want to catch unusually high discount rates before the order ships. ## At a glance - Threshold: discount over 20 percent - Combines all discount sources - Inbox with Approved and Reject actions - Badge: Heavy Discount (red) - Category: order review ## How it works Calculates the effective discount percentage on the order and adds a warning badge when it exceeds 20%. The order appears in the inbox so your team can approve or reject it before fulfilment. **Recommended action:** Review the discount source - check whether a coupon was applied, whether sale prices stacked unexpectedly, or whether a pricing error caused the heavy discount. Approve legitimate discounts or reject and contact the customer. ## Rule template > The customer received a discount of more than 20 percent on this order **Badge:** Heavy Discount (red, warning) **Inbox:** Yes **Interaction:** Approved / Reject ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Lower '20 percent' to '10 percent' if your margins are thin and even moderate discounts need review. - Raise '20 percent' to '30 percent' if your store regularly runs 20-25% promotions and you only want to catch extreme outliers. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and a coupon or discount code was applied to the order' to only flag coupon-driven heavy discounts, ignoring sale-price discounts you already approved. - Add 'and customer has 0 previous paid orders' to catch new customers exploiting promo codes, where fraud risk is highest. ## When this rule matches - **twenty five percent discount:** Discount percentage of 25% exceeds the 20% threshold. - **fifty percent discount:** Discount percentage of 50% significantly exceeds the 20% threshold. ## When this rule does not match - **zero discount:** No discount was applied to the order. - **twenty percent boundary:** Discount of exactly 20% does not exceed the threshold (rule says 'more than 20 percent'). - **fifteen percent discount:** Discount percentage of 15% is below the 20% threshold. ## Good to know - The discount percentage is calculated from the order totals. It reflects the combined effect of all discounts, not individual coupon values. - The threshold is fixed at 20%. To change it, edit the rule and recompile. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Does exactly 20% trigger the badge, or does it need to be above 20%?** The discount must be strictly more than 20%. An order with exactly 20.0% discount will not trigger the badge. You can adjust the percentage to any value by editing the rule text. **Q: How is the discount percentage calculated?** It is calculated from the order totals as the combined effect of all discounts (coupons, sale prices, etc.) divided by the pre-discount subtotal. It reflects the overall discount rate, not individual line items. **Q: Can I change the threshold to a different percentage?** Yes. Edit the rule text to specify a different value (e.g. 'more than 15 percent') and recompile. The 20% threshold is set in the natural-language rule. **Q: What do the Approved and Reject interaction buttons do?** They let your team record a decision. Mark an order as 'Approved' if the heavy discount is legitimate, or 'Reject' if it needs to be cancelled or the customer contacted about pricing. ## Related rules - [coupon-applied](https://orderbadger.com/kb/coupon-applied/) - [contains-sale-item](https://orderbadger.com/kb/contains-sale-item/) ## People also search for flag orders with excessive discount percentage WooCommerce | alert on heavy coupon stacking or pricing error | WooCommerce review orders discounted more than 20 percent | catch unusual discount amounts before fulfilment | prevent margin loss from over-discounted orders --- # How to detect coupon abuse by loyal customers in WooCommerce > Catches orders where a customer with proven product or category loyalty is buying a discounted item - useful for spotting coupon abuse on items the customer would likely buy at full price. ## The problem When a loyal customer uses a heavy discount on a product or category they already buy regularly, it may indicate coupon abuse or a pricing issue. Without visibility, these patterns go unnoticed. ## The solution OrderBadger can combine item discount percentage with product or category purchase history using OR logic. ## Who this is for Stores running frequent promotions where discount abuse is a concern, especially those with strong repeat purchase patterns. ## At a glance - Item discount threshold: over 25 percent - OR logic: product loyalty or category loyalty - Category loyalty: 3 or more purchases - Inbox with Legitimate and Flag actions - Badge: Loyalty Discount (yellow) ## How it works Flags orders where a line item is discounted by more than 25% AND the customer has either bought that exact product before OR purchased from its category at least 3 times. The OR means either loyalty signal is sufficient. **Recommended action:** Review whether the discount was intentional for this customer segment. Consider whether loyal customers should be excluded from certain promotions. ## Rule template > At least one item has been discounted by more than 25%, and the customer has either previously bought that exact product before or has purchased from that product's category at least 3 times **Badge:** Loyalty Discount (yellow, warning) **Inbox:** Yes **Interaction:** Legitimate / Flag ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Try lowering 'more than 25%' to 'more than 15%' to catch moderate discounts that still represent meaningful savings for loyal buyers. - Raise 'at least 3 times' to 'at least 5 times' if you only want to flag deep-loyalty customers and reduce noise from casual repeat buyers. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and order total is over £100' to focus on higher-value orders where coupon abuse has a bigger margin impact. - Add 'and the customer is not a guest' explicitly if you want to be certain guest checkouts are excluded, even though they already lack purchase history. ## When this rule matches - **discounted repeat product:** Item is 30% off and customer has bought this exact product twice before - product loyalty path. - **discounted category loyalist:** Item is 40% off and customer has purchased from this category 5 times - category loyalty path, even though first time buying this specific product. ## When this rule does not match - **discounted no loyalty:** Item is 30% off but customer has never bought this product (prev=0) and only 1 category purchase - no loyalty signal. - **loyal customer small discount:** Customer is a product loyalist (5 purchases, 10 category) but discount is only 10% - below 25% threshold. - **guest checkout:** Guest checkout has null purchase history and cannot satisfy the loyalty condition. ## Good to know - Guest checkouts are excluded. - The discount threshold (25%) and category count (3) are fixed in the rule text. - Both conditions (discount + loyalty) must apply to the same line item. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Does the customer need both product loyalty and category loyalty to trigger this?** No. The rule uses OR logic - either having bought the exact product before OR having 3+ purchases in the same category is sufficient, as long as the item is also discounted by more than 25%. Both the loyalty and discount thresholds can be adjusted in the rule text. **Q: What if the order has multiple items but only one meets both conditions?** One qualifying item is enough. The rule checks each line item independently and fires if any single item satisfies both the discount threshold and a loyalty signal. **Q: How many category purchases count as category loyalty for this rule?** Three or more purchases in the same category by default, but this is easily changed to suit your requirements. Three is a lower bar than the experienced-category-buyer rule (which requires 5) because it is combined with a heavy discount signal, making even moderate loyalty noteworthy. **Q: What do the Legitimate and Flag interaction buttons mean?** Mark the order as 'Legitimate' if the loyal customer's discount is intentional and acceptable. Use 'Flag' if you suspect coupon abuse or want to escalate the order for further review. ## Related rules - [item-heavily-discounted](https://orderbadger.com/kb/item-heavily-discounted/) - [repeat-product-buyer-3x](https://orderbadger.com/kb/repeat-product-buyer-3x/) - [experienced-category-buyer](https://orderbadger.com/kb/experienced-category-buyer/) ## People also search for WooCommerce loyal customer using discount code on regular product | How to spot coupon abuse from repeat buyers in WooCommerce | Flag discounted orders from customers who buy the same category | WooCommerce rule to catch discount misuse by loyal shoppers | Detect heavy discounts on products a customer already buys regularly --- # How to flag multi-product orders for warehouse picking in WooCommerce > Automatically badges orders with more than two different products so your warehouse team can plan multi-location picks and verify all items are included before dispatch. ## The problem Orders with many different products require picks from multiple warehouse locations and are more prone to missing-item errors. Without a visual flag, these diverse orders blend in with simpler ones. ## The solution OrderBadger can automatically flag orders that contain more than a set number of different products. ## Who this is for Stores with large catalogues or multi-zone warehouses where diverse orders need coordinated picking across different shelves or areas. ## At a glance - Counts unique product IDs, not quantity - Threshold: more than 2 distinct products - Passive badge, no inbox routing - Badge: Multi-Product (blue) - Category: warehouse workflow ## How it works Counts the number of distinct products (SKUs) in an order and adds a badge when the count exceeds two. This helps identify diverse orders that need multi-location picks. **Recommended action:** Use a printed pick list to ensure all distinct items are collected before packing. Consider batching diverse orders for a single warehouse pass rather than processing them individually. ## Rule template > Order contains more than 2 distinct products **Badge:** Multi-Product (blue, info) ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Change 'more than 2' to 'more than 5' if your warehouse only needs special handling for truly diverse orders. - Lower it to 'more than 1' if even a two-product order requires multi-location picking in your layout. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and order spans 3 or more categories' to only flag orders that cross multiple warehouse zones, not just multiple SKUs from the same shelf. - Add 'and total quantity is more than 10' to combine product diversity with volume, catching large mixed orders that are hardest to pick. ## When this rule matches - **four distinct products:** Order contains 4 distinct products which exceeds the 2-product threshold. ## When this rule does not match - **one product:** Order contains only 1 distinct product which is below the 2-product threshold. - **two products boundary:** Order contains exactly 2 distinct products which does not exceed the threshold (rule says 'more than 2'). ## Good to know - This counts distinct products, not total quantity. An order with 50 units of 2 products will not trigger the badge. - The threshold is fixed at 2. To change it, edit the rule and recompile. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Does an order with 10 units of the same product trigger this badge?** No. The rule counts distinct products (SKUs), not total quantity. An order with 10 units of a single product counts as 1 distinct product and will not trigger the badge. **Q: What happens at exactly 2 distinct products?** The badge does not appear. The rule requires more than 2 distinct products, so an order with exactly 2 will not be flagged - you need at least 3. **Q: Can I change the threshold from 2 to a higher number like 5?** Yes, but you need to edit the rule text to specify your preferred threshold and recompile. The default threshold of 2 is defined in the rule's natural language statement. **Q: Are product variations (e.g. size or colour) counted as separate distinct products?** Each variation with its own SKU is counted as a separate distinct product. If your store uses parent products without individual variation SKUs, they may be counted as one product. ## Related rules - [three-or-more-line-items](https://orderbadger.com/kb/three-or-more-line-items/) - [total-quantity-over-5](https://orderbadger.com/kb/total-quantity-over-5/) - [order-spans-3-categories](https://orderbadger.com/kb/order-spans-3-categories/) ## People also search for WooCommerce flag orders with many different products | How to identify diverse orders needing multi-location picks | Badge orders with more than 2 distinct SKUs in WooCommerce | WooCommerce multi-product order warehouse workflow | Automate picking alerts for orders with several different items --- # How to catch new-account express shipping fraud in WooCommerce > Badges orders over £500 from customer accounts created within the last 7 days that use express or next-day shipping. This combination is a known fraud pattern in electronics and high-value retail. ## The problem Fraudsters frequently create new accounts, order expensive items with fast shipping to minimise the window for detection, and use stolen payment methods. Without an automated flag, these orders slip through standard fulfilment workflows. ## The solution OrderBadger can flag high-value orders from newly created accounts that request express or next-day delivery, a common fraud pattern. ## Who this is for Electronics, luxury, and high-value goods retailers where new-account fraud with express shipping is a recurring pattern. ## At a glance - Account age: under 7 days - Order total over £500 - Express or next-day shipping required - 2-hour SLA with Approve/Block actions - Badge: Fraud Review (red, critical) ## How it works Combines three signals into a compound rule: order total above £500, customer account age under 7 days, and shipping method containing 'express' or 'next-day'. When all three are true, a critical badge with Approve/Block buttons and a 2-hour SLA is applied. **Recommended action:** Verify the payment method and billing address before dispatching. Contact the customer to confirm the order if possible. Use the Approve button to release the order or Block to flag it for cancellation. Act within the 2-hour SLA. ## Rule template > Order total is over £500 and customer account age is less than 7 days and shipping method contains express or next-day **Badge:** Fraud Review (red, critical) **Inbox:** Yes **Interaction:** Approve / Block **SLA:** 2h ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Lower 'over £500' to 'over £250' if your fraud losses start at lower order values, or raise it to 'over £1000' for luxury-only coverage. - Tighten 'less than 7 days' to 'less than 3 days' to focus on the highest-risk brand-new accounts while reducing false positives on week-old legitimate signups. - Widen the shipping match by changing 'express or next-day' to 'express or next-day or priority' if your carrier offers a priority tier that fraudsters also exploit. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and at least one product is in the Electronics category' to restrict this to electronics fraud specifically, rather than all high-value orders. - Remove 'and shipping method contains express or next-day' if you want to flag all high-value new-account orders regardless of shipping speed. ## When this rule matches - **new account high value express:** Order total is £850, account is 2 days old, and shipping method is express - all three conditions met. - **new account high value next day:** Order total is £1200, account is 0 days old (just created), and shipping method is next-day. ## When this rule does not match - **new account high value standard shipping:** Order total is £900 and account is 3 days old, but shipping method is standard - does not contain express or next-day. - **established account high value express:** Order total is £750 and shipping is express, but account is 30 days old - not less than 7 days. - **new account low value express:** Account is 1 day old and shipping is express, but order total of £200 is not over £500. ## Good to know - This is a heuristic, not a fraud detection engine. Legitimate customers with new accounts placing urgent orders will also be flagged. - Guest checkouts do not have an account age and will not trigger this rule. Consider a separate guest checkout fraud rule. - Shipping method matching depends on the carrier plugin naming conventions in your WooCommerce store. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: What happens if I don't act within the 2-hour SLA?** The badge remains and the SLA shows as breached, but the order is not automatically blocked or cancelled. Your team must still take action - the SLA is a visibility tool, not an enforcement mechanism. **Q: Does this rule catch guest checkouts?** No. Guest checkouts have no account age. Consider combining this with a separate guest checkout rule for broader fraud coverage. **Q: Can I change the value threshold for different product categories?** The threshold is fixed at £500 in this rule. You could create separate rules with different thresholds for different product categories or store sections. **Q: How does it match 'express or next-day' in the shipping method?** The rule checks whether the shipping method name contains the text 'express' or 'next-day'. This works with most WooCommerce shipping plugins that include these terms in their method names. ## Related rules - [new-account-under-7-days](https://orderbadger.com/kb/new-account-under-7-days/) - [high-value-first-order-review](https://orderbadger.com/kb/high-value-first-order-review/) - [guest-checkout](https://orderbadger.com/kb/guest-checkout/) ## People also search for WooCommerce flag high-value orders from new accounts with express shipping | How to detect fraud on expensive orders from brand-new customers | Spot suspicious new account orders requesting next-day delivery | WooCommerce fraud rule for new accounts ordering expensive items fast | Flag express shipping orders from recently created accounts --- # How to flag heavy or oversized orders for special shipping in WooCommerce > Badges orders where the total weight exceeds 15 kg or any single item weighs more than 10 kg, indicating the parcel needs a specialist carrier or non-standard packaging for safe delivery. ## The problem Oversized and heavy electronics (monitors, printers, servers) cannot be shipped via standard parcel services without risking damage, surcharges, or failed deliveries. Without a visual flag, these orders are sent through normal fulfilment and problems only surface after dispatch. ## The solution OrderBadger can flag orders that are heavy or contain oversized items requiring specialist shipping. ## Who this is for Electronics retailers, IT equipment suppliers, and any store selling a mix of light accessories and heavy hardware that requires different carrier services based on weight. ## At a glance - OR logic: total over £15 kg or item over 10 kg - Either weight condition triggers badge - Routes to inbox for carrier selection - Badge: Oversized (orange) - Category: shipping logistics ## How it works Uses OR logic to check two weight conditions: total order weight above 15 kg, or any single item above 10 kg. Either condition triggers the badge and routes the order to the inbox so your team can arrange appropriate carrier services. **Recommended action:** Route to a pallet or heavyweight carrier service. Use reinforced packaging and ensure the delivery address can accept large parcels. Check carrier weight limits before dispatch. ## Rule template > Total order weight is over 15 kg or any single item weighs more than 10 kg **Badge:** Oversized (orange, warning) **Inbox:** Yes ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Lower 'over 15 kg' to 'over 10 kg' if your standard courier has a 10 kg parcel limit. - Raise 'more than 10 kg' per item to 'more than 20 kg' if your products are routinely heavy and the current threshold generates too many badges. - Change both thresholds together - e.g. 'over 25 kg' total and 'more than 15 kg' per item - to match a pallet-freight carrier cutoff. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and shipping is international' to only flag heavy orders leaving the country, where oversized surcharges are steepest. - Add 'and at least one product is in the Electronics category' to limit this to heavy electronics rather than all heavy goods. ## When this rule matches - **total weight over 15kg:** Total order weight of 18 kg exceeds the 15 kg threshold, even though no single item is over 10 kg. - **single item over 10kg:** A single item weighs 12 kg, exceeding the 10 kg per-item threshold, even though total weight is only 12.5 kg. ## When this rule does not match - **total weight exactly 15kg:** Total order weight is exactly 15 kg which does not exceed the threshold, and no single item is over 10 kg. - **light order multiple items:** Total weight is 3 kg and no single item exceeds 10 kg - well below both thresholds. - **single item exactly 10kg:** The heaviest item weighs exactly 10 kg which does not exceed the per-item threshold, and total weight of 10.5 kg is under 15 kg. ## Good to know - Weight accuracy depends on product weights being correctly set in WooCommerce. Products without a weight are treated as zero. - The rule checks weight only, not physical dimensions. A large but lightweight item will not trigger this badge unless it exceeds weight thresholds. - Both thresholds are fixed in the rule text. Edit the rule to adjust them for your carrier's limits. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Does an order weighing exactly 15 kg trigger the badge?** No. The rule requires total weight to be over 15 kg. An order at exactly 15.0 kg will not fire - it needs to be at least 15.01 kg. **Q: If an item weighs 10 kg exactly, does it trigger the per-item condition?** No. The rule requires a single item to weigh more than 10 kg. An item at exactly 10.0 kg does not qualify. **Q: Can both conditions fire at the same time?** Yes, but only one badge is applied. If the total weight exceeds 15 kg and a single item exceeds 10 kg, the rule triggers once. **Q: What if multiple items of the same product bring the total over £15 kg but each unit is under 10 kg?** The total-weight condition will fire. For example, 3 units of a 6 kg item totals 18 kg, exceeding the 15 kg threshold even though no single unit is over 10 kg. ## Related rules - [heavy-order-over-5kg](https://orderbadger.com/kb/heavy-order-over-5kg/) - [remote-area-order](https://orderbadger.com/kb/remote-area-order/) - [international-order](https://orderbadger.com/kb/international-order/) ## People also search for WooCommerce flag orders over 15 kg for specialist carrier | How to identify oversized parcels that need freight shipping | Badge heavy electronics orders requiring non-standard packaging | WooCommerce rule for orders with items over 10 kg | Automate heavy order alerts for carrier selection in WooCommerce --- # How to identify repeat accessory-only buyers in WooCommerce > Badges orders from returning customers with 2 or more previous paid orders where all items are in the Accessories category and the order total is under £50. These small repeat accessory orders are prime candidates for bundle or upsell offers. ## The problem Customers who repeatedly place small accessory-only orders represent unrealised upsell potential. Each order incurs fulfilment costs that eat into margins on low-value items, but without visibility into the pattern, there is no trigger to offer bundles or suggest higher-value purchases. ## The solution OrderBadger can identify repeat customers who consistently place small accessory-only orders, helping you target them for bundle offers. ## Who this is for Electronics and tech accessory stores where customers frequently reorder cables, cases, adapters, and other small items individually rather than in bundles. ## At a glance - Requires 2 or more previous paid orders - All items must be Accessories category - Order total under £50 - Passive badge, no inbox routing - Badge: Repeat Accessories (teal) ## How it works Checks three conditions: the customer must have 2 or more previous paid orders, every item in the order must be in the Accessories category, and the order total must be under £50. This isolates a pattern of repeated low-value accessory purchases. **Recommended action:** Include a bundle offer or discount code for a larger purchase in the packing slip. Consider sending a follow-up email suggesting accessories bundles or a subscription for frequently reordered items. ## Rule template > Customer has 2 or more previous paid orders and all items are in the Accessories category and order total is less than £50 **Badge:** Repeat Accessories (teal, info) ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Raise 'less than £50' to 'less than £75' if your accessories are higher-priced and the current threshold misses relevant orders. - Lower '2 or more previous paid orders' to '1 or more' to catch the pattern earlier, even on a customer's second visit. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and the customer has purchased the same product before' to narrow this to customers reordering the exact same cables or cases, making bundle suggestions more targeted. - Remove 'and order total is less than £50' if you want to flag all accessory-only orders from repeat buyers regardless of value - useful for identifying customers who never buy main products. ## When this rule matches - **returning customer all accessories low value:** Customer has 4 previous orders, all items are Accessories, and order total is £28 - all conditions met. - **boundary 2 orders just under 50:** Customer has exactly 2 previous orders, all items are Accessories, and order total is £49.99 - just meeting all thresholds. ## When this rule does not match - **first order accessories only:** All items are Accessories and total is under £50, but customer has only 1 previous order - below the 2-order threshold. - **returning customer mixed categories:** Customer has 3 previous orders and total is under £50, but not all items are in the Accessories category. - **returning customer accessories over 50:** Customer has 5 previous orders and all items are Accessories, but order total of £65 is not less than £50. ## Good to know - The rule requires all items to be in the Accessories category. A single non-accessory item will prevent the badge from firing. - Guest checkouts are excluded since they have no order history. - Category matching depends on your WooCommerce product taxonomy. Ensure accessories are consistently categorised. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Why is the order total threshold set at £50?** The threshold targets orders small enough that fulfilment costs significantly impact margins. Orders over £50 are already generating reasonable revenue per shipment. Adjust the threshold in the rule text to match your store's economics. **Q: Does this fire if a customer buys accessories alongside electronics?** No. The rule requires all items to be in the Accessories category. If even one item is categorised as Electronics, the badge will not fire. **Q: Can I use this to automatically apply a bundle discount?** OrderBadger does not apply discounts directly. Use the badge as a trigger in your email marketing or CRM system to send targeted bundle offers to these customers. **Q: What if an order totals exactly 50?** The rule requires the total to be less than £50, so an order at exactly £50.00 will not trigger the badge. ## Related rules - [repeat-product-buyer-3x](https://orderbadger.com/kb/repeat-product-buyer-3x/) - [loyal-customer-5-plus-orders](https://orderbadger.com/kb/loyal-customer-5-plus-orders/) - [single-sku-order](https://orderbadger.com/kb/single-sku-order/) ## People also search for WooCommerce flag repeat customers placing small accessory orders | How to find customers who only buy low-value accessories | Upsell bundle opportunities for repeat accessory buyers | WooCommerce rule for returning customers buying cables and cases | Detect small repeat accessory orders eating into margins --- # How to spot warranty upsell opportunities on electronics orders in WooCommerce > Badges orders containing 3 or more distinct products with a subtotal over £300 where at least one product is in the Electronics category. These orders are ideal candidates for extended warranty or care plan upsells. ## The problem Multi-item electronics purchases represent significant customer investment but warranty upsell opportunities are often missed because there is no signal to trigger post-purchase outreach. By the time the customer has received their items, the upsell window has closed. ## The solution OrderBadger can identify multi-product electronics orders that are good candidates for warranty bundle upsells. ## Who this is for Electronics retailers, IT resellers, and general stores with an electronics department that offer extended warranties or care plans. ## At a glance - Requires 3 or more distinct products - Subtotal over £300 - At least one Electronics category item - Passive badge, no inbox routing - Badge: Warranty Bundle (blue) ## How it works Checks three conditions: the order must contain 3 or more distinct products, the subtotal must exceed £300, and at least one product must be in the Electronics category. This targets meaningful electronics purchases where a warranty or care plan add-on is likely to convert. **Recommended action:** Trigger a post-purchase email offering an extended warranty or care plan bundle. Include the relevant product names in the email for personalisation. Time the outreach within the return window for maximum conversion. ## Rule template > Order contains 3 or more distinct products and subtotal is over £300 and at least one product is in the Electronics category **Badge:** Warranty Bundle (blue, info) ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Lower 'over £300' to 'over £150' if you offer affordable warranty plans and want to target smaller multi-item baskets too. - Raise '3 or more distinct products' to '4 or more' if 3-product orders are too common and you want to reserve the upsell effort for larger baskets. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and customer has 2 or more previous paid orders' to focus warranty offers on returning customers who are more likely to convert on add-on purchases. - Remove 'and at least one product is in the Electronics category' to offer care plans on any high-value multi-product order, not just electronics. ## When this rule matches - **three products electronics over 300:** Order has 3 distinct products, subtotal is £450, and one product is in the Electronics category - all conditions met. - **five products multiple electronics:** Order has 5 distinct products, subtotal is £1200, and 3 products are in Electronics - well above all thresholds. ## When this rule does not match - **two products only:** Subtotal is over £300 and includes Electronics, but only 2 distinct products - below the 3-product threshold. - **three products no electronics:** Order has 3 distinct products and subtotal over £300, but no product is in the Electronics category. - **three products electronics low subtotal:** Order has 3 distinct products including Electronics, but subtotal of £180 is not over £300. ## Good to know - Category matching depends on how products are categorised in WooCommerce. Items in subcategories of Electronics may or may not match depending on your taxonomy. - The rule does not distinguish between high-value electronics (laptops) and low-value accessories (cables). Consider the subtotal threshold as a proxy for purchase significance. - This is a tagging rule only - it does not send emails or create upsell offers automatically. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Does buying 3 units of the same product count as 3 distinct products?** No. Distinct product count is based on unique product IDs, not total quantity. Three units of the same product is 1 distinct product. **Q: What if Electronics is a parent category and my products are in subcategories like Laptops or Monitors?** The rule checks the categories assigned to each product. If your products are only assigned to subcategories (Laptops, Monitors) and not the parent Electronics category, you should either assign the parent category or adjust the rule text to list the specific subcategories. **Q: Can I use this to trigger an automated email?** OrderBadger badges orders but does not send emails directly. You can use the badge data in a WooCommerce automation plugin or CRM integration to trigger warranty upsell emails when this badge appears. ## Related rules - [has-electronics-category](https://orderbadger.com/kb/has-electronics-category/) - [distinct-products-over-2](https://orderbadger.com/kb/distinct-products-over-2/) - [order-total-over-100](https://orderbadger.com/kb/order-total-over-100/) ## People also search for WooCommerce flag multi-product electronics orders for warranty upsell | How to identify orders eligible for extended warranty offers | Badge high-value electronics baskets for care plan outreach | WooCommerce rule to trigger warranty bundle email after purchase | Detect multi-item electronics orders ideal for warranty upsells --- # How to recognise experienced category buyers in WooCommerce > Automatically badges orders where at least one product belongs to a category the customer has purchased from 5 or more times, identifying category-loyal experts who may appreciate advanced products or bulk options. ## The problem Category-loyal customers have different expectations than newcomers. They already know the basics and may be ready for premium upsells, subscription offers, or expert-level product recommendations. Without flagging them, you treat every buyer the same. ## The solution OrderBadger can identify customers who are experienced buyers within specific product categories. ## Who this is for Stores with well-defined product categories and repeat buyers - such as hobby shops, health and beauty retailers, pet stores, and speciality food vendors. ## At a glance - Category purchased 5 or more times - Any qualifying category triggers badge - Registered customers only - Passive badge, no inbox routing - Badge: Category Expert (green) ## How it works Checks the customer's purchase history for each product's category. If any item belongs to a category the customer has ordered from 5 or more times previously, the order is badged. This helps you identify category-loyal customers who may appreciate advanced or premium offerings. **Recommended action:** Consider offering category-specific loyalty perks, early access to new products in that category, or subscription bundles. These customers are also great candidates for product reviews and referrals. ## Rule template > At least one product in this order is from a category that this customer has purchased from 5 or more times before **Badge:** Category Expert (green, info) ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Lower '5 or more times' to '3 or more times' to catch developing category loyalty sooner, useful for stores with longer purchase cycles. - Raise it to '10 or more times' if you want the badge reserved for true power buyers in a category. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and order total is over £100' to focus on experienced buyers placing significant orders, filtering out small repeat purchases. - Add 'and the customer is buying a product for the first time' to specifically flag when a category expert is trying something new within their favourite category. ## When this rule matches - **category bought 5 times:** The customer has purchased from the Widget's category 5 times before, meeting the threshold. - **category bought 10 times:** The customer has purchased from the Widget's category 10 times, well above the threshold. ## When this rule does not match - **only 2 category purchases:** The highest category purchase count is 2, which is well below the threshold of 5. - **four boundary:** The highest category purchase count is 4, just below the 5-purchase threshold. - **guest checkout null:** Guest orders have no category purchase history, so the count is null and the condition cannot be met. ## Good to know - Category assignment depends on your WooCommerce product category structure. Products in multiple categories may count towards several category tallies. - Guest orders have no history and will not trigger this rule. - Purchase count is based on completed orders - cancelled or refunded orders may still contribute depending on store configuration. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: If a customer is experienced in one category but the order also contains items from categories they have never bought, does it still trigger?** Yes. The rule fires if the customer has 5 or more purchases in at least one category present in the order. Other categories where they have less experience do not prevent the badge from appearing. **Q: If a product belongs to multiple categories, does each category count separately?** Yes. Products assigned to multiple WooCommerce categories may contribute to the purchase count for each of those categories independently. **Q: Why is the threshold set at 5 purchases and can I lower it?** Five purchases indicates genuine category familiarity rather than a casual repeat. You can edit the rule text to set a different threshold (e.g. 3) and recompile. **Q: Do cancelled or refunded orders count towards the 5-purchase threshold?** That depends on your WooCommerce store configuration. In some setups, cancelled or refunded orders may still be included in the historical purchase count. ## Related rules - [repeat-product-buyer-3x](https://orderbadger.com/kb/repeat-product-buyer-3x/) - [first-time-buying-product](https://orderbadger.com/kb/first-time-buying-product/) ## People also search for WooCommerce flag customers experienced in a product category | How to identify category-loyal repeat buyers for upsell | Badge orders from customers who bought from a category 5+ times | WooCommerce rule for recognising niche product experts | Spot category-loyal shoppers ready for premium products --- # How to protect loyal buyers from stock issues in WooCommerce > Catches orders where a customer with category purchase history is buying an item that is backordered or nearly out of stock - a valuable customer at risk of a poor experience. ## The problem When a loyal category buyer orders something that is backordered or about to run out, the stakes are higher than a first-time purchase. A bad experience could lose a proven repeat customer. ## The solution OrderBadger can combine category loyalty with stock status into a single rule. ## Who this is for Stores with inventory constraints where some products frequently go on backorder or run low, especially those with strong repeat purchase patterns. ## At a glance - Category purchased at least twice before - OR logic: backordered or under 5 units left - Same line item must meet both conditions - 3-hour SLA with Resolved/Escalate actions - Badge: Loyal + Low Stock (red, critical) ## How it works Flags orders where the same line item meets two conditions: the customer has purchased from that category at least twice before, AND the item is either on backorder or will have fewer than 5 units remaining. This prioritises stock issues that affect loyal customers. **Recommended action:** Contact the customer proactively about any delays. Consider reserving stock for loyal category buyers or expediting restocking. ## Rule template > At least one item is from a category the customer has purchased from at least twice before, and that same item is either on backorder or will have fewer than 5 units remaining in stock after this order **Badge:** Loyal + Low Stock (red, critical) **Inbox:** Yes **Interaction:** Resolved / Escalate **SLA:** 3h ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Raise 'at least twice before' to 'at least 5 times before' if you only want to protect your most loyal category buyers from stock disappointments. - Change 'fewer than 5 units remaining' to 'fewer than 10 units' if your products sell fast and 5 units can be depleted before restocking. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and order total is over £50' to focus on higher-value orders where a poor experience has a bigger retention impact. - Remove 'or will have fewer than 5 units remaining in stock after this order' to only flag backordered items, ignoring low-but-available stock. ## When this rule matches - **familiar category backordered:** Item is from a category purchased 3 times before and is on backorder. - **familiar category low stock:** Item is from a category purchased 5 times before and only 2 units will remain after this order. ## When this rule does not match - **unfamiliar category backordered:** Item is backordered but customer has only purchased from this category once - below the threshold of 2. - **familiar category stock fine:** Customer is a category loyalist (4 purchases) but item is in stock with plenty remaining. - **guest checkout:** Guest checkout has null category purchase history and cannot satisfy the condition. ## Good to know - Guest checkouts are excluded. - Category matching is based on the product's primary category. - The stock threshold of 5 units is fixed in the rule text. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: What does the 3-hour SLA mean for this rule?** Once the badge appears, your team has 180 minutes to respond - either marking it as Resolved or choosing to Escalate. This ensures stock issues affecting loyal customers are addressed quickly. **Q: Does 'fewer than 5 units remaining' mean before or after the order?** It means after the order. The rule checks the projected stock level once this order's quantity is subtracted, so it accounts for the current purchase. **Q: Why does this rule require only 2 previous category purchases instead of 5?** A lower threshold of 2 is used because the focus is on customer retention risk. Even a customer with just 2 prior category purchases represents a developing relationship worth protecting from a bad stock experience. **Q: Can this rule trigger for an item that is low stock but not backordered, or does it need both?** Either condition is sufficient. The rule uses OR logic - it triggers when a loyal category buyer orders an item that is either low stock (fewer than 5 units remaining) or on backorder. Both conditions do not need to be true simultaneously. The stock threshold can be adjusted in the rule text to suit your inventory levels. ## Related rules - [experienced-category-buyer](https://orderbadger.com/kb/experienced-category-buyer/) - [low-stock-after-order](https://orderbadger.com/kb/low-stock-after-order/) - [contains-backorder-item](https://orderbadger.com/kb/contains-backorder-item/) ## People also search for WooCommerce alert when loyal customer orders a backordered item | How to flag low-stock orders from repeat category buyers | Prioritise stock problems affecting your best customers | WooCommerce rule combining category loyalty with inventory status | Notify team when familiar buyers order nearly out-of-stock products --- # How to flag high-return-risk fashion orders in WooCommerce > Automatically badges orders from guest customers who are buying across 3 or more categories with more than 5 items and a subtotal over £150, a pattern strongly correlated with high return rates in fashion stores. ## The problem Fashion stores with generous return policies often see first-time guests place large multi-category hauls - trying on sizes and styles with the intention of returning most items. These orders are expensive to fulfil and process returns for, but without a flag they look like any other large order. ## The solution OrderBadger can flag guest checkout orders that span multiple categories with high item counts, a pattern associated with elevated return rates in fashion. ## Who this is for Fashion, apparel, and lifestyle retailers with free returns who want to identify high-return-risk orders before dispatch for potential proactive outreach or adjusted fulfilment priority. ## At a glance - Guest checkout orders only - Spans 3 or more product categories - Total quantity more than 5 items - Subtotal over £150 - Badge: Return Risk (orange) ## How it works Combines four conditions into one rule: guest checkout AND 3 or more product categories AND total quantity above 5 AND subtotal over £150. When all four are true, a warning badge appears on the order and it is routed to the inbox for review. **Recommended action:** Consider sending the customer a pre-dispatch email confirming their selections, or prioritise quality-checking these orders before packing. Some stores also flag these for expedited returns processing. ## Rule template > Guest checkout and order spans 3 or more categories and total quantity is more than 5 and subtotal is over £150 **Badge:** Return Risk (orange, warning) **Inbox:** Yes ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Lower 'over £150' to 'over £80' if your average order value is lower and you still see high return rates on mid-range guest hauls. - Change 'more than 5' items to 'more than 3' to catch smaller try-on orders that still carry return risk. - Raise '3 or more categories' to '4 or more categories' if 3-category orders are common in your store and the badge is too noisy. **Add or remove conditions:** - Remove 'Guest checkout and' to flag the same multi-category haul pattern for registered customers too - useful if your return rate is high across all buyer types. - Add 'and all items are on sale' to specifically catch discounted multi-category hauls, where return cost hurts margins even more. ## When this rule matches - **guest 3 categories 6 items over 150:** Guest checkout with 3 categories, 6 items total, and subtotal of £220 - all four conditions met. - **guest 5 categories 10 items high value:** Guest checkout spanning 5 categories with 10 items and subtotal of £450 - well above all thresholds. ## When this rule does not match - **registered customer same pattern:** Order meets quantity, category, and subtotal thresholds but the customer is registered, not a guest. - **guest 2 categories only:** Guest checkout with high quantity and value but only 2 categories - below the 3-category threshold. - **guest 3 categories low quantity:** Guest checkout spanning 3 categories with subtotal over £150 but only 5 items - not more than 5. ## Good to know - This is a heuristic, not a guarantee of returns. Not all multi-category guest orders will result in returns. - The subtotal threshold of £150 is fixed in the rule text and may need adjusting for different price points. - Registered customers are excluded. Consider a separate rule if return risk is high across all customer types. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Why does this rule only target guest checkouts?** Guest checkouts have no purchase history, making it harder to assess buyer intent. Returning customers who place similar orders are less likely to return everything because they already know the brand and sizing. **Q: Can I adjust the category or quantity thresholds?** Yes. Edit the rule text to change the number of categories, item count, or subtotal threshold. For example, you could lower it to 2 categories for a stricter filter. **Q: Does this rule consider item-level discount or sale status?** No. It only looks at guest status, category spread, total quantity, and subtotal. Combine it with the sale-items rule if you also want to flag discounted hauls. ## Related rules - [guest-checkout](https://orderbadger.com/kb/guest-checkout/) - [order-spans-3-categories](https://orderbadger.com/kb/order-spans-3-categories/) - [total-quantity-over-5](https://orderbadger.com/kb/total-quantity-over-5/) ## People also search for WooCommerce detect multi-category guest hauls likely to be returned | How to identify high return risk orders before dispatch | Flag large guest checkout fashion orders spanning many categories | WooCommerce return risk prediction for apparel stores | Spot try-on haul orders from anonymous buyers in WooCommerce --- # How to identify customers who only buy during sales in WooCommerce > Badges orders where every item is on sale, the customer has 3 or more previous orders, and the discount percentage exceeds 15%. This pattern identifies habitual sale-only shoppers for margin analysis and targeted engagement. ## The problem Some customers exclusively purchase during promotions, eroding margins without building full-price loyalty. Without visibility into this behaviour, marketing treats these customers the same as full-price buyers, leading to misguided retention spend. ## The solution OrderBadger can identify returning customers who exclusively buy sale items with significant discounts. ## Who this is for Fashion and lifestyle retailers running frequent promotions who want to distinguish full-price loyalists from discount-dependent buyers for smarter segmentation and margin management. ## At a glance - All items must be on sale - Requires 3 or more previous orders - Discount percent over 15 - Passive badge, no inbox routing - Badge: Sale Hunter (purple) ## How it works Combines three conditions: every item in the order must be on sale, the customer must have 3 or more previous paid orders, and the order discount percentage must exceed 15%. This isolates habitual sale-only shoppers from occasional bargain hunters. **Recommended action:** Use this data to segment sale-dependent customers in your CRM. Consider offering early access to new collections or exclusive non-sale incentives to convert them into full-price buyers. ## Rule template > All items in the order are on sale and customer has 3 or more previous orders and discount percent is over 15% **Badge:** Sale Hunter (purple, info) ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Lower 'over 15%' to 'over 10%' to catch customers gaming modest promotions, not just deep-discount events. - Raise '3 or more previous orders' to '5 or more' if you want stronger evidence of a habitual pattern before labelling someone a sale hunter. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and order total is over £100' to focus on sale hunters placing meaningful orders, filtering out trivial clearance purchases. - Remove 'and discount percent is over 15%' to flag any returning customer whose entire basket is on sale, regardless of discount depth - useful for spotting the behaviour early. ## When this rule matches - **returning customer all sale items high discount:** Customer has 5 previous orders, all items are on sale, and discount percent is 25% - all conditions met. - **returning customer boundary values:** Customer has exactly 3 previous orders, all items on sale, and discount is 15.5% - just above all thresholds. ## When this rule does not match - **mixed sale and full price:** Customer has 4 previous orders and discount is 20%, but not all items are on sale - the rule requires all items to be sale items. - **new customer all sale:** All items are on sale and discount is over 15%, but customer only has 2 previous orders - below the 3-order threshold. - **returning customer low discount:** Customer has 6 previous orders and all items are on sale, but discount percent is only 10% - not over 15%. ## Good to know - The rule checks whether all items are on sale at evaluation time. If a sale ends between order placement and evaluation, the badge may not fire. - Discount percent is based on the order-level discount, not individual item markdowns. - Guest checkouts cannot trigger this rule as they have no order history. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Does this rule fire if the customer uses a coupon on top of sale prices?** The discount percent includes all discounts at the order level. A combination of sale prices and coupons that totals over 15% will satisfy the condition. **Q: Why require 3 previous orders instead of just 1?** A single previous order could be a coincidence. Requiring 3 or more establishes a pattern of behaviour, making the Sale Hunter label more meaningful for segmentation. **Q: Can I track how many of a customer's past orders were also all-sale?** Not directly with this rule. It only evaluates the current order. However, the badge history in OrderBadger lets you see how often the Sale Hunter badge has appeared for orders from the same customer. **Q: What if the discount is exactly 15%?** The rule requires the discount to be over 15%, so exactly 15% will not trigger the badge. The order needs at least 15.01% to qualify. ## Related rules - [contains-sale-item](https://orderbadger.com/kb/contains-sale-item/) - [discount-over-20-percent](https://orderbadger.com/kb/discount-over-20-percent/) - [loyal-customer-5-plus-orders](https://orderbadger.com/kb/loyal-customer-5-plus-orders/) ## People also search for WooCommerce flag returning customers who exclusively buy sale items | How to segment discount-dependent buyers in WooCommerce | Detect habitual sale-only shoppers eroding margins | WooCommerce rule for customers who never buy at full price | Identify bargain hunters for smarter promotion targeting --- # How to recognise VIP restock orders in WooCommerce > Badges orders from loyal customers with 5 or more previous orders who are repurchasing a product they have bought at least 3 times before, with an order total over £50. These are high-value restock orders deserving priority treatment. ## The problem VIP customers who repeatedly reorder the same products are the backbone of a fashion business. Without visibility into restock behaviour, these valuable orders are processed alongside first-time purchases and miss opportunities for priority handling, loyalty perks, or personalised notes. ## The solution OrderBadger can identify VIP customers who are restocking products they have bought multiple times before. ## Who this is for Fashion, beauty, and lifestyle brands with consumable or replenishable lines (basics, skincare, activewear) where loyal customers regularly reorder their favourites. ## At a glance - Requires 5 or more previous paid orders - Product purchased 3 or more times before - Order total over £50 - Routes to inbox for priority handling - Badge: VIP Restock (green) ## How it works Combines three conditions: the customer must have 5 or more previous paid orders, at least one product in the order must have been purchased by this customer 3 or more times, and the order total must exceed £50. When all three are true, a VIP Restock badge is applied and the order appears in the inbox. **Recommended action:** Prioritise these orders for fast dispatch. Consider adding a handwritten thank-you note, loyalty discount code for next purchase, or free samples. These customers are ideal candidates for subscription offers. ## Rule template > Customer has 5 or more previous paid orders and at least one product has been purchased by this customer 3 or more times and order total is over £50 **Badge:** VIP Restock (green, info) **Inbox:** Yes ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Lower '5 or more previous paid orders' to '3 or more' to recognise VIP restocking behaviour earlier in the customer lifecycle. - Raise 'over £50' to 'over £100' if you only want to apply priority handling to higher-value restock orders. - Change '3 or more times' to '2 or more times' to catch the second repurchase - when restocking intent is already clear. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and the order has free shipping' to highlight VIP restocks where you are also absorbing delivery costs, for margin awareness. - Add 'and at least one item is low stock' to prioritise VIP restocks that could deplete a favourite product - a retention risk worth acting on quickly. ## When this rule matches - **vip restocking favourite:** Customer has 8 previous paid orders, one item has been purchased 4 times, and order total is £75 - all conditions met. - **vip exact thresholds:** Customer has exactly 5 previous paid orders, one item purchased exactly 3 times, and order total of £50.01 - just above all thresholds. ## When this rule does not match - **loyal customer no repeat product:** Customer has 6 previous orders and total is over £50, but no product has been purchased 3 or more times. - **repeat product buyer few orders:** Product has been purchased 5 times and total is over £50, but customer only has 3 previous orders - below the 5-order threshold. - **vip restock below total threshold:** Customer has 7 previous orders and a product purchased 4 times, but order total of £45 is not over £50. ## Good to know - Guest checkouts are excluded since they have no purchase history. - The product purchase count depends on WooCommerce order history accuracy. Cancelled or refunded orders may affect counts. - The thresholds are fixed in the rule text. Adjust them to match your store's repeat purchase patterns. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Does the product need to have been purchased exactly in 3 separate orders, or does quantity matter?** The count is based on previous purchase occasions (orders), not total units. Buying 5 units in a single previous order counts as 1 purchase, not 5. **Q: Why is there a minimum order total of £50?** The threshold filters out trivial restock orders (e.g. a single pair of socks) that may not warrant special handling. Adjust the value in the rule text to suit your price range. **Q: Can this rule fire for a customer restocking multiple favourite products in one order?** Yes. The rule requires at least one product to meet the 3-purchase threshold. If multiple products qualify, the badge still fires once at the order level. **Q: What if a customer returns items - does that affect their previous purchase count?** It depends on your WooCommerce configuration. If refunded orders are excluded from the count, a return could drop the customer below the threshold for future orders. ## Related rules - [loyal-customer-5-plus-orders](https://orderbadger.com/kb/loyal-customer-5-plus-orders/) - [repeat-product-buyer-3x](https://orderbadger.com/kb/repeat-product-buyer-3x/) - [high-value-customer-ltv-500](https://orderbadger.com/kb/high-value-customer-ltv-500/) ## People also search for WooCommerce flag loyal customers restocking their favourite products | How to identify VIP repeat buyers reordering the same items | Badge priority restock orders from your best customers | WooCommerce rule for high-value customers repurchasing favourites | Detect VIP replenishment orders deserving priority handling --- # How to flag first-time product purchases in WooCommerce > Automatically badges orders containing at least one product the customer has never purchased before, enabling cross-sell tracking and personalised follow-up. ## The problem When a customer tries a new product for the first time, it is an opportunity to include tailored instructions, upsell accessories, or request a review. Without visibility, these moments pass unnoticed. ## The solution OrderBadger can flag orders where the customer is trying a product for the very first time. ## Who this is for Stores with a wide catalogue or consumable products where tracking which products a customer has tried helps drive repeat purchases and personalised marketing. ## At a glance - Checks per-product purchase history - Triggers on any first-time product - Registered customers only - Passive badge, no inbox routing - Badge: New Product (teal) ## How it works Checks each line item against the customer's purchase history. If any product in the order has never been bought by this customer before, the order is badged. This enables targeted follow-up such as usage guides, cross-sell recommendations, or review requests. **Recommended action:** Consider including product-specific onboarding material, usage tips, or a review request in the shipping box or follow-up email. Track conversion from first purchase to repeat purchase. ## Rule template > At least one product in this order is being purchased by this customer for the very first time **Badge:** New Product (teal, info) ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - This rule has no numeric thresholds to tweak - it fires whenever any item is a first-time purchase. If it badges too many orders, consider extending it with additional conditions instead. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and the customer has 3 or more previous paid orders' to focus on established buyers branching into new products, rather than flagging every new customer's first order. - Add 'and order total is over £50' to limit the badge to meaningful first-time purchases where follow-up (usage guides, review requests) is worth the effort. ## When this rule matches - **one new product:** The Gadget has never been purchased by this customer before (first time and zero previous purchases), so the condition is met. - **all new products:** The customer has never bought any of the items in this order before. ## When this rule does not match - **all bought before:** The customer has previously purchased both items, so no product is a first-time purchase. - **guest checkout null:** Guest checkout has no customer history, so first-time flags are null and the condition cannot be confirmed. ## Good to know - Guest orders lack purchase history, so this rule cannot determine first-time status for anonymous buyers. - History is based on completed orders in WooCommerce. If order data was imported or migrated, the history may be incomplete. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: If a customer orders 3 products and only 1 is new, does the badge still appear?** Yes. The rule triggers if at least one product in the order is being purchased for the first time. It does not matter how many other items the customer has bought before. **Q: What happens if order history was imported from another platform?** The rule relies on WooCommerce's order history. If imported orders are recorded as completed orders with the correct customer association, they will be included. Otherwise, a product may incorrectly appear as a first-time purchase. **Q: Does this work for product variations like different sizes or colours?** Yes, each variation is treated as a distinct SKU. A customer who has bought Size M of a shirt will still trigger the badge when they order Size L for the first time. ## Related rules - [repeat-product-buyer-3x](https://orderbadger.com/kb/repeat-product-buyer-3x/) - [guest-checkout](https://orderbadger.com/kb/guest-checkout/) ## People also search for WooCommerce detect when a customer tries a product for the first time | How to badge orders containing new-to-customer items | Trigger follow-up emails when customers buy a new product | WooCommerce first-time product purchase rule for cross-sell | Identify product discovery moments for personalised marketing --- # How to identify first-time buyers in WooCommerce > Badges orders from registered customers who have never placed a paid order before, helping you welcome new buyers or apply extra verification. ## The problem First-time buyers may need a welcome note, a manual fraud check, or onboarding communication. Without a flag, they look the same as returning customers in the orders list. ## The solution OrderBadger can automatically identify first-time registered buyers. ## Who this is for Stores that want to differentiate the first-order experience - useful for subscription brands, high-ticket retailers, and stores with onboarding flows. ## At a glance - Registered customers only - Zero previous paid orders - Includes old accounts placing first order - Routes to inbox for welcome flow - Badge: First Order (blue) ## How it works Adds a badge to orders placed by registered customers who have zero previous paid orders. Guest checkouts are excluded because there is no account history to check. **Recommended action:** Consider including a welcome note, verifying payment for high-value first orders, or triggering an onboarding email sequence. ## Rule template > Registered customer placing their very first order - they have no previous paid orders **Badge:** First Order (blue, info) **Inbox:** Yes ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - This rule has no numeric thresholds - it fires on every first registered order. If that produces too many badges, add conditions to narrow the scope (see extend tips). **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and order total is over £200' to only badge high-value first orders that warrant a manual fraud check or personalised welcome. - Add 'and customer account age is less than 7 days' to distinguish genuinely new signups from old accounts placing a first order months later. ## When this rule matches - **first order registered:** Customer is registered and has zero previous paid orders. ## When this rule does not match - **returning customer 3 orders:** Customer has 3 previous paid orders so is not a first-time buyer. - **guest checkout:** Guest checkout has no customer account, so previous_paid_order_count is null and cannot satisfy the condition. ## Good to know - Guest checkouts are excluded - this rule only works for registered customers. - The count is based on paid or completed orders. Pending or failed orders are not included in the history. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: If a customer registered months ago but never placed an order until now, does this badge appear?** Yes. The rule checks for zero previous paid orders, regardless of when the account was created. An old account placing its first order will be badged. **Q: Does a failed or cancelled order count as a previous order?** No. Only paid or completed orders are counted. A customer whose only prior order was cancelled or failed will still receive the First Order badge. **Q: Why doesn't this rule flag guest checkout orders?** Guest checkouts have no customer account, so there is no way to determine whether they have ordered before. Use the separate guest-checkout rule to flag those orders instead. **Q: Can I combine this with a high-value check to manually review expensive first orders?** Yes. You can use this rule alongside the high-value-first-order-review rule, or create a custom compound rule that checks both first-time status and order total together. ## Related rules - [guest-checkout](https://orderbadger.com/kb/guest-checkout/) - [high-value-first-order-review](https://orderbadger.com/kb/high-value-first-order-review/) ## People also search for WooCommerce flag first order from a registered customer | How to badge new customer orders for welcome treatment | Detect first-time registered buyers placing their initial order | WooCommerce new customer first order verification rule | Automate welcome workflow for first-time WooCommerce buyers --- # How to enforce age verification on alcohol orders in WooCommerce > Badges orders containing products in the Wine, Beer, Spirits, or Alcohol category when shipping to Great Britain. UK law requires age verification on delivery for alcohol, and this badge ensures no alcohol order is dispatched without confirming the verification process is in place. ## The problem Selling alcohol online in the UK requires age verification at the point of delivery. Failure to verify can result in fines, licence revocation, and reputational damage. Without an automated flag, alcohol orders can be dispatched via standard delivery without age-check instructions to the carrier. ## The solution OrderBadger can flag all UK-bound orders containing alcohol so your team ensures age verification is in place before dispatch. ## Who this is for UK-based online wine merchants, craft beer shops, distilleries, supermarkets, and any WooCommerce store that sells alcoholic beverages for delivery within Great Britain. ## At a glance - Wine, Beer, Spirits, or Alcohol category - Shipping to Great Britain (GB) only - 1-hour SLA with Verified/Unverified actions - Badge: Age Check (red, critical) - Category: regulatory compliance ## How it works Checks two conditions: at least one product must be in the Wine, Beer, Spirits, or Alcohol category, AND the shipping country must be GB. When both are true, a critical badge with Verified/Unverified buttons and a 1-hour SLA is applied. The order appears in the inbox immediately. **Recommended action:** Before dispatching, confirm that the carrier service includes age verification at delivery. Mark the order as Verified once you have confirmed the age-check process, or Unverified if there is a problem with the verification setup. Do not dispatch Unverified orders. ## Rule template > At least one product is in the Wine, Beer, Spirits, or Alcohol category and shipping country is GB **Badge:** Age Check (red, critical) **Inbox:** Yes **Interaction:** Verified / Unverified **SLA:** 1h ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Broaden the country match by changing 'shipping country is GB' to 'shipping country is GB or IE or DE' to cover additional jurisdictions where you sell alcohol and age verification applies. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'or at least one product is in the Liqueur or Cider category' if your store has alcohol in categories beyond Wine, Beer, Spirits, and Alcohol. - Add 'and order total is over £50' to only flag larger alcohol orders for manual verification, letting small single-bottle purchases pass through standard checks. ## When this rule matches - **wine to gb:** Order contains a Wine category product and ships to GB - age verification required. - **spirits to gb:** Order contains a Spirits category product and ships to GB. - **beer and alcohol to gb:** Order contains products in both Beer and Alcohol categories, shipping to GB. ## When this rule does not match - **wine to non gb:** Order contains Wine but ships to FR (France), not GB - this rule only covers UK deliveries. - **non alcohol to gb:** Shipping to GB but no products are in a qualifying alcohol category. - **food only to gb:** Shipping to GB but all items are in the Food category - no alcohol present. ## Good to know - This rule covers Great Britain (GB) only. Northern Ireland, Channel Islands, and other jurisdictions may have different requirements. - Category matching depends on products being correctly categorised. If your store uses a single 'Alcohol' category, ensure the rule text includes that category name. - The rule does not verify the customer's age itself - it flags orders that require age verification at delivery. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: What happens if I don't act within the 1-hour SLA?** The SLA shows as breached but the order is not automatically held. The short SLA ensures alcohol orders receive immediate attention to avoid dispatch without age verification. **Q: Does this apply to alcohol-free beer or wine?** Only if those products are categorised under Wine, Beer, Spirits, or Alcohol in WooCommerce. If your alcohol-free products use a separate category, they will not trigger the badge. **Q: Can I extend this to cover other countries with age verification laws?** Yes. Edit the rule text to add additional country codes (e.g. 'shipping country is GB or US or DE'). You may want separate rules for each jurisdiction since requirements differ. **Q: What if a mixed order has both alcohol and non-alcohol items?** The badge fires as long as at least one item is in a qualifying alcohol category. The entire order is flagged because the delivery still requires age verification. ## Related rules - [ships-to-uk](https://orderbadger.com/kb/ships-to-uk/) - [international-order](https://orderbadger.com/kb/international-order/) ## People also search for WooCommerce flag UK alcohol orders requiring age check at delivery | How to ensure age verification for wine and spirits orders | Compliance rule for alcohol deliveries in WooCommerce UK | WooCommerce badge orders with beer wine or spirits for ID check | Automate alcohol delivery age verification alerts --- # How to flag perishable orders needing cold chain shipping in WooCommerce > Badges orders containing chilled or frozen products that are shipping internationally, to a remote area, or to the Highlands and Islands zone. These orders need insulated or refrigerated packaging and may require a specialist carrier. ## The problem Perishable products shipped to distant or hard-to-reach destinations face extended transit times that break the cold chain. Without a flag, these orders are packed with standard insulation that may be insufficient for the journey, leading to spoiled goods and costly replacements. ## The solution OrderBadger can flag perishable orders heading to destinations where extended transit times could break the cold chain. ## Who this is for Food and drink retailers, farm shops, and meal kit services that sell chilled or frozen products and ship beyond their immediate area, especially to remote or international destinations. ## At a glance - Chilled or Frozen category products - OR logic: international, Highlands, or remote - Routes to inbox for packaging review - Badge: Cold Chain (blue) - Category: shipping logistics ## How it works Checks two things in combination: at least one item must be in the Chilled or Frozen category, AND the shipping destination must be international, in the Highlands and Islands zone, or flagged as a remote area. The OR logic on the destination side means any one of those three shipping conditions is sufficient. **Recommended action:** Use insulated or refrigerated packaging with additional ice packs for these orders. Consider upgrading to a next-day or specialist chilled carrier service. On hot days, delay dispatch to Monday to avoid weekend transit. ## Rule template > At least one product is in the Chilled or Frozen category and shipping is international or shipping zone is Highlands and Islands or shipping is to a remote area **Badge:** Cold Chain (blue, warning) **Inbox:** Yes ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - If your shipping zone is named differently, change 'Highlands and Islands' to match your WooCommerce zone name exactly - e.g. 'Scottish Highlands'. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'or at least one product is in the Dairy or Fresh Produce category' to cover perishable items beyond Chilled and Frozen. - Remove 'or shipping is to a remote area' if remote-area data is unreliable in your setup and you only want to flag international and Highlands shipments. - Add 'and total order weight is over 5 kg' to focus on larger perishable shipments where cold-chain packaging costs are most significant. ## When this rule matches - **chilled item international:** Order contains a Chilled category product and shipping is international - cold chain risk triggered. - **frozen item highlands:** Order contains a Frozen category product and shipping zone is Highlands and Islands. - **chilled item remote area:** Order contains a Chilled category product and shipping destination is a remote area. ## When this rule does not match - **chilled item standard domestic:** Order contains a Chilled product but shipping is domestic, standard zone, and not a remote area - no cold chain risk. - **ambient item international:** Shipping is international but no products are in the Chilled or Frozen category - ambient items do not need cold chain. - **ambient item remote area:** Shipping is to a remote area but all products are ambient - no cold chain requirement. ## Good to know - Category matching depends on products being correctly categorised as Chilled or Frozen in WooCommerce. - The Highlands and Islands zone name must exactly match your WooCommerce shipping zone configuration. - The rule does not account for ambient temperature at the time of dispatch. Consider seasonal adjustments to your cold chain procedures. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Does this rule fire for chilled items shipped to standard domestic addresses?** No. The rule specifically targets high-risk destinations: international, Highlands and Islands, or remote areas. Standard domestic shipments are assumed to arrive within normal cold chain windows. **Q: What if my shipping zone is named differently, like 'Scottish Highlands'?** The rule checks for the zone name 'Highlands and Islands'. If your zone has a different name, edit the rule text to match your WooCommerce shipping zone configuration. **Q: Can I add more categories like Dairy or Fresh Produce?** Yes. Edit the rule text to include additional category names. The rule uses OR logic across categories, so adding Dairy would flag orders containing Chilled, Frozen, or Dairy products. **Q: Does the rule consider the number of chilled items or just their presence?** Just their presence. A single chilled item in an otherwise ambient order is enough to trigger the badge, because even one perishable item requires cold chain handling. ## Related rules - [international-order](https://orderbadger.com/kb/international-order/) - [remote-area-order](https://orderbadger.com/kb/remote-area-order/) - [shipping-zone-highlands](https://orderbadger.com/kb/shipping-zone-highlands/) ## People also search for WooCommerce flag chilled or frozen orders going to remote areas | How to ensure cold chain packaging for long-distance food orders | Badge perishable orders shipping internationally or to Highlands | WooCommerce cold chain rule for chilled and frozen products | Automate insulated packaging alerts for perishable deliveries --- # How to detect catering or event orders in WooCommerce > Badges orders with more than 20 items spanning 2 or fewer categories and a total over £200. This pattern suggests a catering or event order rather than a typical consumer purchase, and may need special handling. ## The problem Large orders concentrated in a few categories often indicate catering, corporate, or event purchases. These orders may need bulk packaging, custom delivery scheduling, or a commercial invoice, but without a flag they are processed as regular consumer orders. ## The solution OrderBadger can flag large uniform orders that look like catering or event purchases based on quantity, category spread, and value. ## Who this is for Food and drink retailers, bakeries, delicatessens, and catering suppliers who occasionally receive event-sized orders through their regular WooCommerce store. ## At a glance - Total quantity more than 20 items - Max 2 distinct categories - Order total over £200 - Routes to inbox for event confirmation - Badge: Catering Order? (yellow) ## How it works Combines three conditions: total quantity above 20, no more than 2 distinct categories, and order total over £200. This pattern - many items in few categories at a significant total - is a strong signal of a bulk or catering purchase rather than a typical consumer order. **Recommended action:** Review the order before dispatch. Contact the customer to confirm delivery requirements, such as a specific delivery time window, bulk packaging, or a commercial invoice. Consider offering a bulk discount or catering-specific service. ## Rule template > Total quantity is more than 20 and distinct category count is 2 or fewer and order total is over £200 **Badge:** Catering Order? (yellow, info) **Inbox:** Yes ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Lower 'more than 20' to 'more than 12' if your store regularly receives smaller event orders that still need bulk handling. - Raise 'over £200' to 'over £500' if you only want to flag genuinely large commercial orders and your average catering spend is high. - Change '2 or fewer' categories to '1' category if true catering orders in your store are almost always from a single product line. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and the customer is a guest' to focus on unknown buyers placing large bulk orders, which may also warrant a fraud or legitimacy check. - Add 'and at least one product is in the Platters or Catering category' to combine quantity signals with an explicit catering category for higher confidence. ## When this rule matches - **large single category order:** 30 items in 1 category with total of £350 - all conditions met, classic catering pattern. - **large two category order:** 25 items across 2 categories with total of £280 - meets the quantity, category, and value thresholds. ## When this rule does not match - **large quantity many categories:** Total quantity is 22 and total is over £200, but items span 4 categories - not 2 or fewer. - **small quantity one category:** Items are in 1 category and total is over £200, but total quantity of 10 is not more than 20. - **large quantity low value:** Total quantity is 25 and only 1 category, but order total of £150 is not over £200. ## Good to know - This is a heuristic - not all large uniform orders are catering. Some customers may simply stock up on favourites. - The question mark in the badge name is intentional: it signals that the order should be checked, not that it is definitely a catering order. - Category count depends on your WooCommerce product taxonomy. A narrow taxonomy with few categories may inflate matches. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Why does the badge name include a question mark?** The question mark signals uncertainty. The rule identifies a pattern consistent with catering orders, but it cannot confirm the customer's intent. The badge prompts your team to review and verify. **Q: Can I lower the quantity threshold for a store with smaller average orders?** Yes. Edit the rule text to change the quantity threshold. For example, a bakery might lower it to 12 items to catch smaller event orders. **Q: What if a large order spans exactly 2 categories?** It will still fire. The rule allows 2 or fewer categories. Two categories is common for catering - for example, food platters and beverages. **Q: Does total quantity count individual items or line items?** Individual items. If a customer orders 15 of one product and 10 of another, the total quantity is 25, not 2. ## Related rules - [total-quantity-over-5](https://orderbadger.com/kb/total-quantity-over-5/) - [order-spans-3-categories](https://orderbadger.com/kb/order-spans-3-categories/) - [order-total-over-100](https://orderbadger.com/kb/order-total-over-100/) ## People also search for WooCommerce flag large bulk orders that look like catering purchases | How to identify event-sized orders for special handling | Detect high-quantity uniform orders from food and drink stores | WooCommerce rule for spotting corporate catering purchases | Badge large same-category orders needing bulk packaging --- # How to detect lapsing subscription customers in WooCommerce > Badges orders from repeat customers who have not ordered in over 45 days and historically spend above average, highlighting a lapse risk for food, consumable, or subscription-style stores. ## The problem Regular food and subscription customers who go quiet for more than 45 days are at risk of churning. Without a flag, their returning order looks like any other and the retention opportunity is missed. ## The solution OrderBadger can flag returning orders from regular customers who are overdue for a reorder, signalling a lapse risk. ## Who this is for Food delivery, subscription box, consumable, and grocery stores where a regular reorder cadence is expected and a 45-day gap signals churn risk. ## At a glance - Requires 3 or more previous paid orders - Purchase gap: more than 45 days - Average order value over £30 - Routes to inbox for retention action - Badge: Lapse Risk (orange) ## How it works Combines three conditions: the customer must have at least 3 previous paid orders, their last order must be more than 45 days ago, and their average order value must exceed £30. When all three are true, the order is badged as a lapse risk and appears in your inbox. **Recommended action:** Include a welcome-back incentive such as a loyalty discount or free shipping offer. Consider adding the customer to a win-back email sequence tailored to their purchase history. ## Rule template > Customer has 3 or more previous paid orders and days since last order is more than 45 and customer average order value is over £30 **Badge:** Lapse Risk (orange, warning) **Inbox:** Yes ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Shorten 'more than 45' days to 'more than 30' if your products have a monthly reorder cycle and 45 days already means the customer skipped a cycle. - Raise 'over £30' AOV to 'over £50' to focus retention efforts on higher-spending regulars where churn costs you more. - Lower '3 or more previous paid orders' to '2 or more' to catch lapsing customers earlier in their lifecycle. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and at least one product has been purchased by this customer before' to specifically flag returning lapsed customers who are reordering a familiar product - a strong win-back signal. - Add 'and the order has free shipping' to identify lapsed customers who may have been drawn back by a free shipping offer, useful for measuring promotion effectiveness. ## When this rule matches - **regular customer 60 days gap:** Customer has 5 previous paid orders, last ordered 60 days ago (exceeding 45), and average order value is £48 (over £30). All three conditions met. - **loyal customer long gap high aov:** Customer has 12 previous paid orders, last ordered 90 days ago, and average order value is £65. A loyal customer with a significant gap. ## When this rule does not match - **regular customer recent order:** Customer has 5 previous orders and AOV of £50, but last ordered only 20 days ago - within the 45-day window. - **new customer long gap:** Customer has only 2 previous paid orders, which does not meet the 3-order threshold even though the gap and AOV qualify. - **regular customer low aov:** Customer has 4 previous orders and a 50-day gap, but average order value is only £25 - below the £30 threshold. ## Good to know - Guest checkouts are excluded - all three conditions require a registered customer with order history. - The 45-day gap threshold is fixed in the rule text. Edit the rule to adjust it to your store's typical reorder cadence. - Average order value is calculated across all previous paid orders, not just recent ones. A historically high spender whose recent orders are smaller may still qualify. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Why does this rule require 3 previous orders instead of just checking the gap?** A customer with only one or two orders has not established a pattern. Requiring 3+ orders ensures the rule only flags genuinely regular customers whose absence is meaningful. **Q: Will a customer who last ordered exactly 45 days ago be flagged?** No. The rule requires more than 45 days, so exactly 45 days does not meet the threshold. Adjust the number in the rule text if you need a tighter window. **Q: Does the £30 AOV threshold include shipping and tax?** The average order value is based on the order total as recorded by WooCommerce. Whether that includes shipping and tax depends on your store's configuration. ## Related rules - [lapsed-customer-60-days](https://orderbadger.com/kb/lapsed-customer-60-days/) - [customer-reactivated-after-180d](https://orderbadger.com/kb/customer-reactivated-after-180d/) - [high-avg-order-value](https://orderbadger.com/kb/high-avg-order-value/) - [loyal-customer-5-plus-orders](https://orderbadger.com/kb/loyal-customer-5-plus-orders/) ## People also search for WooCommerce flag regular food customers at risk of churning | How to identify returning buyers who are overdue for reorder | Detect lapsing repeat customers in food and subscription stores | WooCommerce win-back rule for dormant regular buyers | Badge orders from customers who have not purchased in 45+ days --- # How to flag risky cash-on-delivery guest orders in WooCommerce > Badges guest checkout orders over £300 paid by cash on delivery. This is a high-risk fraud pattern: the buyer is anonymous, the order is expensive, and payment is deferred until delivery - maximising your exposure to refusal, chargebacks, and lost goods. ## The problem Cash on delivery removes the payment barrier that normally filters out fraudulent or frivolous orders. When combined with guest checkout (no traceable account) and a high order value, the risk of the customer refusing delivery or providing a fake address is severe. The store bears the cost of goods, packing, and two-way shipping with no payment guarantee. ## The solution OrderBadger can flag high-value COD orders from guest checkouts, one of the highest-risk fraud patterns in e-commerce. ## Who this is for Stores offering COD in regions where it is common - Middle East, South Asia, Southern Europe - and experiencing refusal rates on high-value anonymous orders. ## At a glance - Guest checkout orders only - Order total over £300 - Cash on delivery payment method - 2-hour SLA with Approve/Hold actions - Badge: COD Risk (red, critical) ## How it works Checks three conditions: the order must be a guest checkout, the total must exceed £300, and the payment method must be cash on delivery. When all three are true, the order receives a critical badge with Approve/Hold interaction buttons and a 2-hour SLA, ensuring your team reviews it before dispatch. **Recommended action:** Call or message the customer to confirm the order before dispatching. Verify the delivery address is complete and reachable. Use the Approve button to release the order for fulfilment or Hold to pause it pending further verification. Act within the 2-hour SLA to avoid delivery delays on legitimate orders. ## Rule template > Customer is a guest checkout and order total is over £300 and payment method is cod **Badge:** COD Risk (red, critical) **Inbox:** Yes **Interaction:** Approve / Hold **SLA:** 2h ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Lower 'over £300' to 'over £150' if your average order value is lower and refusal rates start at smaller amounts in your region. - Raise 'over £300' to 'over £500' if moderate COD orders are routine and you want to focus review on the highest-value risks. - Shorten the SLA from 120 minutes to 60 minutes if your fulfilment is fast and orders ship within hours of placement. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and shipping is international' to focus on international guest COD orders where return costs are highest if the delivery is refused. - Remove 'and customer is a guest checkout' to flag all high-value COD orders regardless of account status, useful if registered accounts also have a high refusal rate. ## When this rule matches - **guest cod 350:** Customer is a guest, order total is £350 (over £300), and payment method is cod. All three conditions met. - **guest cod high value 800:** Guest checkout with COD payment and order total of £800 - well above the £300 threshold. A very high-risk order. ## When this rule does not match - **registered customer cod high value:** Order total is £450 and payment is COD, but the customer has a registered account - not a guest checkout. - **guest cod low value:** Customer is a guest and payment is COD, but order total is only £120 - under the £300 threshold. - **guest prepaid high value:** Customer is a guest and order total is £500, but payment is via Stripe - not COD, so payment has already been collected. ## Good to know - This flags all guest COD orders above the threshold, including legitimate customers who prefer cash payment. The refusal rate at your specific price point determines how useful the threshold is. - The rule does not assess address validity or customer phone number quality. Combine with address verification for a stronger signal. - If your COD gateway uses a non-standard WooCommerce payment slug, edit the rule text to match. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: What happens if I don't act within the 2-hour SLA?** The badge remains and the SLA shows as breached in your inbox. The order is not automatically cancelled or held - your team must still take action. The SLA is a visibility tool to ensure timely review. **Q: Does the Approve button release the order for shipping?** The Approve and Hold buttons record your team's decision on the badge. They do not directly change the WooCommerce order status. Use them alongside your normal order processing workflow. **Q: Can I require phone verification for COD orders before they reach this rule?** Phone verification is outside OrderBadger's scope. Consider a WooCommerce plugin that validates phone numbers at checkout. This rule acts as a safety net for orders that make it through checkout. **Q: Will this fire on orders with exactly 300 as the total?** No. The rule requires over 300, so exactly 300 does not meet the threshold. Adjust the value in the rule text if you want to include the boundary. ## Related rules - [payment-cod](https://orderbadger.com/kb/payment-cod/) - [guest-checkout](https://orderbadger.com/kb/guest-checkout/) - [high-value-first-order-review](https://orderbadger.com/kb/high-value-first-order-review/) ## People also search for WooCommerce flag high-value COD orders from guest checkout | How to reduce cash on delivery fraud and refusal rates | Detect suspicious anonymous COD orders over a threshold | WooCommerce fraud rule for guest checkout cash on delivery | Badge risky COD orders for phone verification before dispatch --- # How to flag suspicious late-night guest orders in WooCommerce > Badges guest checkout orders over £500 placed after 11pm. Late-night high-value purchases from anonymous buyers combine three fraud risk factors: the buyer is untraceable, the order is expensive, and the timing correlates with higher rates of stolen card usage and impulsive fraudulent activity. ## The problem Stolen credit card data is frequently tested and used during late-night hours when the cardholder is unlikely to notice immediate alerts. Guest checkout removes identity traceability, and a high order value maximises the fraudster's return per transaction. Without a combined flag, each factor appears mildly suspicious on its own but together they form a high-confidence fraud signal. ## The solution OrderBadger can flag high-value guest orders placed late at night, combining three fraud risk signals into a single critical alert. ## Who this is for Stores selling high-value goods that operate 24/7 online - electronics, luxury, jewellery, and fashion retailers - where late-night guest orders with large totals should be reviewed before dispatch. ## At a glance - Guest checkout orders only - Placed after 11pm local store time - Order total over £500 - 3-hour SLA with Approve/Hold actions - Badge: Late Night Risk (red, critical) ## How it works Evaluates three conditions: the order must be placed after 11pm (local store time, including early morning hours), the total must exceed £500, and the checkout must be a guest without an account. When all three are true, the order receives a critical badge with Approve/Hold buttons and a 3-hour SLA. **Recommended action:** Do not dispatch until the order has been reviewed. Verify the payment details and check for signs of stolen card usage. Contact the customer by phone or email to confirm the order. Use the Approve button to release for fulfilment or Hold to pause pending verification. The 3-hour SLA gives your morning team time to review orders placed overnight. ## Rule template > Order was placed after 11pm and order total is over £500 and customer is a guest checkout **Badge:** Late Night Risk (red, critical) **Inbox:** Yes **Interaction:** Approve / Hold **SLA:** 3h ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Change 'after 11pm' to 'after 10pm' if your fraud data shows elevated risk starting earlier in the evening. - Lower 'over £500' to 'over £300' if your product range makes £300-value orders attractive to fraudsters, or raise to 'over £1000' for luxury-only coverage. - Shorten the SLA from 180 minutes to 120 minutes if your team monitors orders overnight, or extend to 240 minutes if all review happens the next morning. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and shipping method contains express or next-day' to narrow this to overnight guest orders requesting fast delivery, the strongest fraud combination. - Remove 'and customer is a guest checkout' to flag all late-night high-value orders regardless of account status, useful if your fraud patterns include registered accounts. ## When this rule matches - **guest midnight high value:** Order placed at hour 0 (midnight, which is after 11pm), order total is £750 (over £500), and customer is a guest. All three conditions met. - **guest 11pm high value:** Order placed at hour 23 (11pm), guest checkout, and total of £620. The hour meets the after-11pm threshold. - **guest 2am very high value:** Order placed at hour 2 (2am), guest checkout, and total of £1200. Peak fraud hours with a very large basket. ## When this rule does not match - **registered customer late night high value:** Order placed at hour 23 and total is £600, but the customer has a registered account - not a guest checkout. - **guest late night low value:** Guest checkout at hour 1 (1am), but order total is only £180 - under the £500 threshold. - **guest daytime high value:** Guest checkout and order total is £800, but the order was placed at hour 14 (2pm) - not after 11pm. ## Good to know - The local hour is based on the WordPress timezone setting, not the customer's timezone. A customer in a different timezone ordering at their local 8pm could trigger the rule if it is after 11pm in your store's timezone. - This does not include the early evening - only 11pm onward (hour 23) and early morning hours (0-5) depending on your NL interpretation. Adjust the hour threshold as needed. - Guest checkout means no customer history is available. This rule cannot assess whether the buyer has previously been flagged under a different guest email. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Why is the SLA 3 hours instead of 1 or 2?** Orders placed after 11pm are often reviewed by the morning team. A 3-hour SLA for an 11pm order means the review is due by 2am, which is tight. In practice, the SLA serves as a morning priority flag. Adjust the duration to match your team's overnight coverage. **Q: Does 'after 11pm' include the early morning hours like 1am-5am?** The NL text says 'after 11pm', which the compiler interprets as hours 23 onward. Whether hours 0-5 are included depends on the compilation. Check your compiled rule and adjust the NL to explicitly include early morning if needed. **Q: What if a legitimate customer places a large order late at night?** The Approve button is designed for this. Review the order, verify the payment, and approve it. Over time you can adjust the thresholds to reduce false positives based on your actual fraud-to-legitimate ratio. **Q: Can I combine this with payment method checks?** Yes. Create a variant of this rule that adds 'and payment method is cod' or another condition. Alternatively, use this rule alongside a separate COD-specific rule for layered coverage. ## Related rules - [late-night-order](https://orderbadger.com/kb/late-night-order/) - [guest-checkout](https://orderbadger.com/kb/guest-checkout/) - [high-value-first-order-review](https://orderbadger.com/kb/high-value-first-order-review/) - [electronics-fraud-signal](https://orderbadger.com/kb/electronics-fraud-signal/) ## People also search for WooCommerce flag high-value guest orders placed after midnight | How to detect late-night fraud from anonymous buyers | Badge overnight guest checkout orders for morning review | WooCommerce fraud rule for after-hours expensive orders | Spot stolen card usage on late-night high-value purchases --- # How to detect rapid-fire ordering from new accounts in WooCommerce > Badges orders from accounts created less than 3 days ago that have already placed 2 or more orders in the last 30 days. Rapid order velocity from a brand-new account is a strong signal of fraudulent activity, coupon abuse, or automated ordering. ## The problem Fraudsters and coupon abusers often create a fresh account and place multiple orders in quick succession - testing stolen cards, exploiting new-customer promotions, or building reseller inventory. Without velocity detection, each order appears normal in isolation, and the pattern only becomes visible after the damage is done. ## The solution OrderBadger can detect and flag rapid ordering velocity from newly created accounts, a strong fraud and abuse signal. ## Who this is for Any WooCommerce store that allows account creation and wants to detect rapid-fire ordering from new registrations - especially relevant for stores with new-customer promotions, limited-stock products, or frequent fraud attempts. ## At a glance - Account age: under 3 days - 2 or more orders in last 30 days - 1-hour SLA with Clear/Block actions - Badge: Velocity Alert (red, critical) - Category: fraud detection ## How it works Checks two conditions: the customer account must be less than 3 days old, and the customer must have placed 2 or more orders in the last 30 days. When both are true, the order receives a critical badge with Clear/Block interaction buttons and a 1-hour SLA to ensure fast response. **Recommended action:** Review the orders placed by this account for signs of fraud - check for multiple shipping addresses, different payment methods, or unusually high totals. Use the Clear button if the activity is legitimate, or Block to flag the account for further investigation. Act within the 1-hour SLA to prevent further orders from shipping. ## Rule template > Customer account age is less than 3 days and customer placed 2 or more orders in the last 30 days **Badge:** Velocity Alert (red, critical) **Inbox:** Yes **Interaction:** Clear / Block **SLA:** 1h ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Extend 'less than 3 days' to 'less than 7 days' to catch velocity patterns from accounts that are a few days old but still suspiciously new. - Raise '2 or more orders' to '3 or more orders' if your store commonly sees legitimate customers placing a second order shortly after their first (e.g. adding a forgotten item). **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and order total is over £200' to focus on high-velocity new accounts placing expensive orders, where the fraud risk is greatest. - Add 'and payment method is cod' to specifically flag new accounts rapidly placing cash-on-delivery orders, a pattern common in COD fraud rings. - Remove 'and customer account age is less than 3 days' to monitor velocity across all accounts, useful for detecting compromised or hijacked existing accounts. ## When this rule matches - **new account 3 orders in 30d:** Account is 1 day old (under 3) and customer has placed 3 orders in the last 30 days (2 or more). Both conditions met - high velocity from a new account. - **same day account 2 orders:** Account was created today (0 days old) and the customer has already placed 2 orders in the last 30 days. Minimum threshold met on a brand-new account. ## When this rule does not match - **new account single order:** Account is 2 days old but the customer has only placed 1 order in the last 30 days - does not meet the 2-order velocity threshold. - **established account high velocity:** Customer has placed 5 orders in the last 30 days, but the account is 45 days old - not less than 3 days. This is a frequent buyer, not a new-account velocity risk. - **account exactly 3 days old:** Customer has 4 orders in the last 30 days, but the account is exactly 3 days old - the rule requires less than 3, so this is at the boundary and does not qualify. ## Good to know - Guest checkouts do not have an account age and will not trigger this rule. Consider a separate rule for guest checkout velocity based on email address. - The orders_last_30d count includes the current order. A brand-new customer placing their second order will meet the threshold. - This rule does not detect multiple accounts created from the same IP or email pattern. It operates on individual account data only. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: What happens if the customer legitimately created an account and then placed a follow-up order?** The rule will fire if the follow-up order is the second within 30 days on an account less than 3 days old. Use the Clear button to mark it as legitimate. If this happens often, consider raising the velocity threshold to 3 or more orders. **Q: Does the 1-hour SLA automatically block the order if no action is taken?** No. The SLA is a visibility tool that highlights overdue reviews in your inbox. The order continues through your normal workflow unless your team manually intervenes. **Q: Will guest orders trigger this rule?** No. Guest checkouts have no account and no account age. This rule requires a registered customer account. Consider a separate rule for repeat guest orders from the same email. **Q: Can fraudsters bypass this by waiting 3 days between account creation and ordering?** Yes. This rule targets the most aggressive pattern of immediate post-registration ordering. Extend the account age threshold to 7 or 14 days for broader coverage, accepting more false positives. ## Related rules - [new-account-under-7-days](https://orderbadger.com/kb/new-account-under-7-days/) - [electronics-fraud-signal](https://orderbadger.com/kb/electronics-fraud-signal/) - [high-value-first-order-review](https://orderbadger.com/kb/high-value-first-order-review/) ## People also search for WooCommerce flag new accounts placing multiple orders quickly | How to detect order velocity fraud from fresh registrations | Badge rapid ordering from accounts created in the last 3 days | WooCommerce rule for new account coupon abuse detection | Spot suspicious ordering velocity from brand-new customers --- # How to flag PO Box electronics orders from new customers in WooCommerce > Badges orders where a first-time customer is buying electronics products worth over £200 and shipping to a PO Box. This combination is a well-known fraud vector: PO Boxes prevent delivery signature verification, the customer has no purchase history, and electronics have high resale value. ## The problem Electronics shipped to PO Boxes from first-time buyers represent one of the highest-risk fraud patterns in e-commerce. The goods have immediate resale value, the anonymous PO Box prevents carrier signature confirmation, and the absence of customer history means there is no trust baseline. Without a flag, these orders are processed and dispatched before the fraud is detected. ## The solution OrderBadger can flag electronics orders from new customers shipping to PO Box addresses, a well-known e-commerce fraud pattern. ## Who this is for Electronics retailers, computer hardware stores, and any WooCommerce store selling high-value technology products where PO Box fraud is a known risk. ## At a glance - First-time customers only - Checks for PO Box shipping address - Requires Electronics category product - Threshold: order total over £200 - Badge: PO Box + Electronics (red, critical) ## How it works Evaluates four conditions: the shipping address must be a PO Box, the customer must have zero previous paid orders, at least one product must be in the Electronics category, and the order total must exceed £200. When all four are true, the order receives a critical badge with Approve/Block buttons and a 2-hour SLA. **Recommended action:** Verify the customer's identity before dispatching. Check whether the billing address and payment details are consistent. Contact the customer by phone to confirm the order. Use the Approve button to release the order or Block to flag it for cancellation. Act within the 2-hour SLA. ## Rule template > Shipping address is a PO Box and customer has 0 previous paid orders and at least one product is in the Electronics category and order total is over £200 **Badge:** PO Box + Electronics (red, critical) **Inbox:** Yes **Interaction:** Approve / Block **SLA:** 2h ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Lower 'over £200' to 'over £100' if your electronics range includes lower-priced items with high resale value like earbuds or adapters. - Raise 'over £200' to 'over £500' to focus on the highest-value electronics orders where the fraud loss impact is greatest. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and shipping method contains express or next-day' to further narrow to PO Box electronics orders requesting fast delivery, an even stronger fraud signal. - Remove 'and at least one product is in the Electronics category' to flag all new-customer PO Box orders above the threshold, regardless of product type. - Add 'and customer is a guest checkout' to make the rule even more specific to anonymous buyers, though this will exclude first-time registered buyers. ## When this rule matches - **new customer po box electronics 250:** Shipping is to a PO Box, customer has 0 previous orders, order includes an Electronics product, and total is £250 (over £200). All four conditions met. - **new customer po box electronics high value:** PO Box delivery, first-time buyer, two Electronics items, and order total of £680. A high-risk high-value order. ## When this rule does not match - **returning customer po box electronics:** Shipping to a PO Box with an Electronics product and total of £300, but customer has 5 previous paid orders - not a new customer. - **new customer po box non electronics:** PO Box delivery from a new customer with total of £280, but no products are in the Electronics category. - **new customer residential electronics:** New customer ordering Electronics worth £350, but shipping to a residential address - no PO Box flag. ## Good to know - PO Box detection relies on the has_po_box flag in shipping metadata. Unusual PO Box formats that the address parser does not recognise will be missed. - Products must be categorised under Electronics in WooCommerce. If your store uses a different category name for technology products, edit the rule text. - This rule does not verify whether the payment method is legitimate. Combine with payment gateway fraud tools for a layered approach. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Will this flag a returning customer who always ships to a PO Box?** No. The rule requires zero previous paid orders. A returning customer with order history will not trigger the badge, even if they ship to a PO Box. **Q: What if the customer registers an account moments before ordering?** They will still have zero previous paid orders and will trigger the rule. Account creation alone does not establish trust - it is the purchase history that matters. **Q: Does this work for guest checkouts shipping to PO Boxes?** Yes. Guest checkouts have zero previous paid orders by definition, so they meet the customer history condition. The PO Box, Electronics, and total conditions still apply. **Q: How does the 2-hour SLA interact with my normal processing times?** The SLA counts from order creation. If your normal processing time is under 2 hours, the SLA ensures the order is reviewed before it would normally ship. If your processing is slower, the SLA may breach before you would normally reach the order - consider extending it. ## Related rules - [ops-po-box-high-value](https://orderbadger.com/kb/ops-po-box-high-value/) - [electronics-fraud-signal](https://orderbadger.com/kb/electronics-fraud-signal/) - [new-account-under-7-days](https://orderbadger.com/kb/new-account-under-7-days/) - [high-value-first-order-review](https://orderbadger.com/kb/high-value-first-order-review/) ## People also search for WooCommerce flag first-time buyer shipping electronics to PO Box | How to prevent electronics fraud via PO Box deliveries | Detect new customer PO Box orders for high-value tech products | WooCommerce fraud rule for PO Box address with electronics | Badge suspicious PO Box orders from unverified buyers --- # How to track free shipping usage in WooCommerce orders > Automatically badges orders with zero shipping cost so your team can track free shipping usage, monitor its impact on margins, and ensure correct carrier selection for subsidised deliveries. ## The problem Free shipping promotions drive conversions but erode margins. Without visibility into which orders received free shipping, you cannot monitor promotion uptake, detect abuse, or assess the true cost of your shipping offers. ## The solution OrderBadger can automatically flag every order that has free shipping. ## Who this is for Any store offering free shipping thresholds, coupons, or promotions - especially those wanting to track how often free shipping is used and its impact on profitability. ## At a glance - Fires on any order with zero shipping cost - All order types and customers eligible - Badge: Free Shipping (green, info) - Category: shipping visibility ## How it works Checks the order's shipping total. If the shipping cost is zero, the order is badged as a free shipping order. This gives you visibility into how often your free shipping offers are used. **Recommended action:** Monitor the ratio of free shipping orders to paid shipping orders. Review whether free shipping promotions are hitting the intended customer segments and whether margin impact is acceptable. ## Rule template > The order has free shipping **Badge:** Free Shipping (green, info) ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - This rule has no threshold to adjust - it fires on any order with zero shipping cost. To narrow it, add conditions (see extend tips). **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and order total is less than £30' to spotlight low-value orders where free shipping eats the most margin. - Add 'and order does not contain a virtual product' to exclude digital-only orders that naturally have no shipping cost. ## When this rule matches - **free shipping zero cost:** The shipping total is 0, indicating free shipping was applied to this order. ## When this rule does not match - **paid shipping 5 pounds:** The shipping total is £5.00, so this is not a free shipping order. ## Good to know - This checks the shipping total only. An order with a shipping discount that reduces the cost to zero will also be flagged. - Virtual or digital-only orders may have zero shipping by default - consider combining with the contains-virtual-item rule to filter those out. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Will digital-only or virtual product orders trigger this badge?** Yes, because virtual orders typically have a shipping total of zero. If you want to exclude them, combine this rule with the contains-virtual-item rule to filter out non-physical orders. **Q: Does this detect how the free shipping was applied (coupon vs. threshold vs. flat rate)?** No. The rule only checks whether the shipping total is zero. It does not distinguish between free shipping coupons, threshold-based promotions, or flat-rate methods set to zero. **Q: What if a discount reduces shipping to £0.01 instead of exactly zero?** The badge will not appear. The rule checks for a shipping total of exactly zero. Any non-zero amount, even £0.01, means the order is not flagged as free shipping. ## Related rules - [contains-virtual-item](https://orderbadger.com/kb/contains-virtual-item/) - [order-total-over-100](https://orderbadger.com/kb/order-total-over-100/) ## People also search for WooCommerce badge orders that received free shipping | How to monitor free shipping promotion uptake and margin impact | Flag all zero-shipping-cost orders for analysis | WooCommerce rule to track which orders get free delivery | Identify orders using free shipping offers in WooCommerce --- # How to flag fragile orders shipping to the Highlands in WooCommerce > Badges orders destined for the Highlands and Islands zone that contain glassware, ceramics, or fragile items, alerting your team to use protective packaging and a careful carrier for this challenging route. ## The problem Highlands and Islands deliveries already involve longer transit times and more handling changes. When the order contains fragile items like glassware or ceramics, the risk of breakage during the extended journey is significantly higher. Without a flag, fragile items are packed and shipped with standard methods, leading to damage claims and costly replacements. ## The solution OrderBadger can automatically flag orders containing fragile products that are shipping to the Highlands and Islands zone. ## Who this is for UK stores selling fragile physical products - pottery, glassware, ceramics, artisan homewares, and any store where breakage on longer-route deliveries is a known problem. ## At a glance - Targets Highlands and Islands shipping zone - Checks Glassware, Ceramics, or Fragile categories - Routes to inbox for packaging review - Badge: Highland Fragile (yellow, warning) ## How it works Checks two conditions: the WooCommerce shipping zone must match 'Highlands and Islands', and at least one item in the order must belong to the Glassware, Ceramics, or Fragile category. When both are true, the order is badged and routed to the inbox for packaging review. **Recommended action:** Use double-walled boxes, bubble wrap, and fragile stickers for flagged orders. Consider selecting a carrier known for careful handling on Highlands routes. Proactively communicate extended delivery timelines to the customer. ## Rule template > Shipping zone is Highlands and Islands and at least one product is in the Glassware, Ceramics, or Fragile category **Badge:** Highland Fragile (yellow, warning) **Inbox:** Yes ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Add additional category names to the list if your store uses different labels for fragile products, such as 'Delicate' or 'Breakable'. - Change 'Highlands and Islands' to match your exact WooCommerce zone name if you have used a different label. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and order total is over £50' to filter out very small fragile orders where the cost of premium packaging exceeds the order value. - Add 'and total order weight is over 3 kg' to focus on heavier fragile shipments that are most vulnerable to transit damage. - Remove the zone condition entirely to flag all fragile orders regardless of destination, useful if your breakage rates are high across all zones. ## When this rule matches - **highlands glassware:** Shipping zone is Highlands and Islands and the order contains a product in the Glassware category - both conditions met. - **highlands ceramics mixed basket:** Shipping zone is Highlands and Islands and the basket includes a Ceramics item alongside a non-fragile item - the Ceramics item satisfies the category condition. - **highlands fragile category:** Shipping zone is Highlands and Islands and the order contains a product in the Fragile category - the third category option in the rule. ## When this rule does not match - **highlands non fragile items:** Shipping zone is Highlands and Islands, but the order contains only Clothing items - none of the fragile categories are present. - **mainland glassware:** The order contains Glassware, but the shipping zone is UK Mainland - not the Highlands and Islands. - **no zone fragile item:** The order contains a Ceramics item, but the shipping zone is null - the zone condition cannot be satisfied. ## Good to know - The shipping zone name must match exactly. If your WooCommerce zone is named differently (e.g. 'Scottish Highlands'), edit the rule to match. - Category matching relies on your WooCommerce product categories. If fragile items are not categorised under Glassware, Ceramics, or Fragile, they will not trigger the rule. - This rule does not assess individual item fragility - it uses category membership as a proxy. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: What if my fragile products are in a category called 'Delicate' rather than 'Fragile'?** Edit the rule text to replace 'Fragile' with 'Delicate', or add it as a fourth option: 'Glassware, Ceramics, Fragile, or Delicate'. The NAIL compiler will handle multiple category names. **Q: Will this fire if only one item in a multi-item order is fragile?** Yes. The rule checks whether at least one product belongs to a qualifying category. Even if the rest of the basket is non-fragile, the presence of one fragile item triggers the badge. **Q: Can I extend this to other challenging shipping zones like the Channel Islands?** Yes. Duplicate the rule and change the zone name to 'Channel Islands' or whichever zone you want to target. Each zone needs its own rule instance. ## Related rules - [shipping-zone-highlands](https://orderbadger.com/kb/shipping-zone-highlands/) - [home-heavy-fragile-combo](https://orderbadger.com/kb/home-heavy-fragile-combo/) - [remote-area-order](https://orderbadger.com/kb/remote-area-order/) ## People also search for WooCommerce flag glassware or ceramic orders going to Scottish Highlands | How to prevent breakage on fragile Highlands and Islands deliveries | Badge fragile product orders destined for remote UK zones | WooCommerce shipping rule for fragile items to Highlands | Protect delicate products on long-route UK deliveries --- # How to flag heavy high-value orders to remote areas in WooCommerce > Badges orders shipping to a remote area that are both heavy (over 5 kg) and high-value (over £150), ensuring your team selects a premium carrier that can handle the weight and the destination. ## The problem Remote area deliveries already attract surcharges and limited carrier options. When the order is also heavy and valuable, the risk multiplies: incorrect carrier selection can result in failed delivery, damage, or prohibitive surcharges that wipe out the order's margin. These triple-threat orders need proactive carrier review before dispatch. ## The solution OrderBadger can automatically flag heavy, high-value orders shipping to remote areas so your team can arrange the right carrier before dispatch. ## Who this is for Stores shipping physical goods nationally or internationally, particularly those with heavy or bulky product lines - furniture, homewares, electronics, garden equipment, and building supplies. ## At a glance - Requires remote area destination - Weight threshold: over 5 kg - Value threshold: order total over £150 - Routes to inbox for carrier review - Badge: Premium Carrier (orange, warning) ## How it works Combines three conditions: the destination must be classified as a remote area, the total order weight must exceed 5 kg, and the order total must be over £150. When all three are true, a Premium Carrier badge appears and the order is routed to the inbox for carrier review. **Recommended action:** Review available carriers for the destination before dispatch. Verify that the selected carrier accepts the weight and serves the remote area. Check whether surcharges are already factored into the shipping cost. If not, consider contacting the customer before shipping. ## Rule template > Shipping is to a remote area and total order weight is over 5 kg and order total is over £150 **Badge:** Premium Carrier (orange, warning) **Inbox:** Yes ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Lower 'over 5 kg' to 'over 2 kg' if your carrier charges remote surcharges on lighter parcels. - Raise 'over £150' to 'over £300' if you only want to flag the highest-value remote-heavy orders where carrier failure has the biggest financial impact. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and shipping zone is Highlands and Islands' to narrow the rule to a specific problem zone rather than all remote areas. - Add 'and at least one product is in the Fragile category' to escalate orders that are not only heavy and remote but also damage-prone. ## When this rule matches - **remote heavy high value:** Shipping is to a remote area, total weight is 8.5 kg, and order total is £220 - all three conditions met. - **remote boundary weight and value:** Remote area delivery with total weight of 5.1 kg (just over 5 kg) and order total of £155 (just over £150) - boundary pass on both thresholds. ## When this rule does not match - **not remote heavy expensive:** Order is heavy (7 kg) and high-value (£200), but shipping is not to a remote area - the carrier complexity does not apply. - **remote light high value:** Shipping is to a remote area and the total is £300, but weight is only 1.2 kg - under the 5 kg threshold, so standard remote delivery applies. - **remote heavy low value:** Remote area with 6 kg weight, but the order total of £80 is under £150 - the order does not meet the value threshold. ## Good to know - Remote area classification depends on your carrier integration. If not configured, the is_remote_area field will be null and the rule will not trigger. - Total order weight must be populated from your product data. If product weights are missing, the derived weight will be inaccurate. - The £150 value threshold is in your store's default currency. Adjust the rule if your currency or price range differs. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Why combine remote area, weight, and value instead of using three separate rules?** Each condition alone is common and low-risk. The combination is what creates the operational challenge: a heavy parcel to a remote area with high value demands a specific carrier that handles all three constraints. Separate rules would create noise without the compound signal. **Q: What if my products do not have weights assigned?** If product weights are missing, the total_weight_kg field will be zero or null and this rule will not trigger. Ensure your product catalogue includes accurate weights for the rule to work correctly. **Q: Does the weight include packaging or just product weight?** The derived weight is calculated from your WooCommerce product data, which typically reflects the product weight only. If you need to account for packaging, add a buffer to the weight in your product settings or lower the threshold in the rule. ## Related rules - [remote-area-order](https://orderbadger.com/kb/remote-area-order/) - [heavy-order-over-5kg](https://orderbadger.com/kb/heavy-order-over-5kg/) - [shipping-zone-highlands](https://orderbadger.com/kb/shipping-zone-highlands/) ## People also search for WooCommerce flag heavy expensive orders shipping to remote destinations | How to select the right carrier for remote area heavy parcels | Badge orders needing premium carrier for weight and distance | WooCommerce remote area shipping rule for heavy valuable goods | Prevent carrier surcharges on heavy orders to hard-to-reach areas --- # How to detect corporate gift orders in WooCommerce > Badges high-value orders from first-time customers that contain a large quantity but very few distinct products, a pattern strongly associated with corporate gifting or bulk promotional purchases. ## The problem Corporate gift orders are high-value and high-expectation. They often involve uniform items (same product in bulk) destined for employees, clients, or event attendees. If processed as regular consumer orders, they may miss bespoke packaging requirements, invoicing needs, or delivery coordination for events. Identifying them early allows your team to offer a tailored experience. ## The solution OrderBadger can flag potential corporate gift orders based on bulk quantity, limited product variety, high value, and new customer status. ## Who this is for Stores selling giftable products at scale - chocolates, hampers, branded merchandise, premium stationery, wine, and any retailer that occasionally receives bulk orders from businesses rather than individual consumers. ## At a glance - First-time customers only - Quantity threshold: more than 5 items - Maximum 2 distinct products - Value threshold: order total over £200 - Badge: Corporate Gift? (blue, info) ## How it works Evaluates four conditions: total quantity must exceed 5, distinct product count must be 2 or fewer, order total must be over £200, and the customer must have zero previous paid orders. The combination of high quantity with low variety from a new buyer is a strong signal of corporate or promotional purchasing. **Recommended action:** Reach out to the buyer to confirm the order details and ask about special requirements - branded packaging, custom inserts, invoicing, or split delivery to multiple addresses. This is an opportunity to convert a one-time corporate buyer into a recurring account. ## Rule template > Total quantity is more than 5 and distinct product count is 2 or fewer and order total is over £200 and customer has 0 previous paid orders **Badge:** Corporate Gift? (blue, info) **Inbox:** Yes ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Raise 'more than 5' to 'more than 10' if you want to limit detection to clearly bulk orders and reduce false positives from multi-buy personal orders. - Lower 'over £200' to 'over £100' if your products are lower-priced and corporate orders tend to have smaller totals. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and it is peak season' to narrow the rule to the Christmas corporate gifting season when the probability of corporate orders is highest. - Add 'and payment method is invoice or bank transfer' to strengthen the corporate signal - businesses rarely pay by consumer credit card. - Remove 'and customer has 0 previous paid orders' to also detect repeat corporate buyers placing new bulk orders. ## When this rule matches - **bulk single sku first timer:** First-time customer ordering 10 units of 1 product with a total of £350 - classic corporate gifting pattern with all four conditions met. - **bulk two skus first timer:** First-time customer ordering 8 units across 2 distinct products with a total of £280 - two SKUs is within the 2-or-fewer limit and all other conditions are met. ## When this rule does not match - **returning customer bulk order:** Bulk order with 12 units of 1 product and total of £400, but the customer has 5 previous paid orders - they are a returning buyer, not a first-timer. - **first timer many distinct products:** First-time customer with 8 items and total of £300, but 6 distinct products - this looks like personal shopping rather than bulk gifting. - **first timer bulk low value:** First-time customer with 7 units of 1 product, but the total is only £90 - below the £200 threshold. Likely a personal bulk buy rather than corporate. ## Good to know - This is a heuristic, not a definitive classification. Some matching orders will be personal bulk purchases rather than corporate gifts. - The question mark in the badge name ('Corporate Gift?') signals to your team that the order should be investigated, not assumed to be corporate. - Guest checkouts have null order history. Depending on your NAIL compiler, they may or may not satisfy the '0 previous paid orders' condition. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Why does the badge name include a question mark?** The question mark signals uncertainty. The rule uses behavioural signals to infer corporate intent, but it cannot know for certain. Your team should use the badge as a prompt to investigate, not a definitive classification. **Q: Why limit distinct products to 2 or fewer?** Corporate gifts are typically uniform - the same item for every recipient, or at most two items (e.g. a main gift and a card). Orders with many different products are more likely personal shopping. **Q: Can I detect corporate orders from returning business customers?** Remove 'and customer has 0 previous paid orders' from the rule to flag bulk orders from all customers. However, returning business buyers may already have a trade account and separate workflow. **Q: What if a consumer simply orders 6 of the same item for personal use?** The rule will still flag it. The question mark in the badge name prompts investigation rather than assumption. Your team can quickly determine the intent by reviewing the order details or contacting the buyer. ## Related rules - [b2b-bulk-single-sku](https://orderbadger.com/kb/b2b-bulk-single-sku/) - [b2b-new-customer-large-first-order](https://orderbadger.com/kb/b2b-new-customer-large-first-order/) - [total-quantity-over-5](https://orderbadger.com/kb/total-quantity-over-5/) ## People also search for WooCommerce flag bulk single-SKU orders that look like corporate gifts | How to identify potential business gifting purchases | Detect first-time buyers placing uniform high-quantity orders | WooCommerce corporate gift detection rule for hampers and merchandise | Badge bulk promotional orders for special handling and invoicing --- # How to identify last-minute gift orders in WooCommerce > Badges orders placed on Thursday or Friday that use express or next-day shipping, contain 2 or fewer distinct products, and total over £40 - a pattern typical of someone buying a last-minute gift for the weekend. ## The problem Last-minute gift buyers choose express shipping because the gift must arrive by the weekend. If these orders are not identified, they may not receive the urgency they deserve during Thursday and Friday dispatch, and the buyer's weekend occasion is ruined. A missed deadline on a gift is far more damaging to customer perception than a delayed personal purchase. ## The solution OrderBadger can identify last-minute gift orders placed late in the week with express shipping. ## Who this is for Stores offering express or next-day shipping options, especially those selling giftable products - flowers, jewellery, chocolates, toys, and any retailer where Thursday/Friday rush orders are likely gift-motivated. ## At a glance - Thursday and Friday orders only - Requires express or next-day shipping - Maximum 2 distinct products - Value threshold: order total over £40 - Badge: Last-Minute Gift (orange, info) ## How it works Checks four conditions: the shipping method must contain 'express' or 'next-day', the order must have 2 or fewer distinct products, the total must exceed £40, and the order must be placed on Thursday or Friday. The combination signals a buyer rushing to get a focused purchase delivered for a weekend occasion. **Recommended action:** Prioritise these orders for same-day or early-morning dispatch. If your store offers gift wrapping, consider including it as a courtesy even if the buyer did not select it - the context strongly suggests a gift. Ensure packaging is presentable. ## Rule template > Shipping method contains express or next-day and distinct product count is 2 or fewer and order total is over £40 and order was placed on a Thursday or Friday **Badge:** Last-Minute Gift (orange, info) ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Add Wednesday to the rule ('Thursday, Friday, or Wednesday') if your express orders on Wednesdays also show gift-buying patterns. - Lower 'over £40' to 'over £25' if your giftable products are lower-priced and you want broader coverage. - Raise 'distinct product count is 2 or fewer' to '3 or fewer' if your gift buyers commonly purchase a small bundle. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and it is peak season' to narrow the rule to seasonal gifting peaks when the probability of a last-minute gift is highest. - Add 'and at least one product is in the Jewellery, Flowers, or Chocolates category' to strengthen the gift signal with category evidence. - Add 'and customer has 0 previous paid orders' to focus on first-time buyers who found your store specifically to solve a last-minute gift need. ## When this rule matches - **thursday express single product over 40:** Order placed on Thursday (day 4) with express shipping, 1 distinct product, and total of £65 - all four conditions met. - **friday next day two products:** Order placed on Friday (day 5) with next-day delivery, 2 distinct products, and total of £110 - all conditions satisfied. ## When this rule does not match - **tuesday express single product:** Express shipping with 1 product and total of £80, but the order was placed on Tuesday (day 2) - not a late-week rush. - **friday standard shipping:** Order placed on Friday with 1 product and total of £60, but shipping method is standard - no express urgency signal. - **thursday express many products:** Thursday express order with total of £150, but 5 distinct products - the varied basket suggests personal shopping rather than a targeted gift. ## Good to know - The shipping method match is text-based - it looks for 'express' or 'next-day' in the method name. Custom shipping method names using different wording will not match. - Day-of-week detection uses the WordPress timezone. Ensure it matches your operational timezone. - This rule is a heuristic. Some matching orders will be personal purchases with legitimate urgency rather than gifts. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Why only Thursday and Friday, not Wednesday?** Thursday and Friday express orders have the strongest correlation with weekend gift urgency. Wednesday express orders more often reflect general impatience rather than a specific weekend deadline. Add Wednesday to the rule if your data suggests otherwise. **Q: What if my express option is called 'Priority' or 'Overnight'?** Edit the rule text to replace 'express or next-day' with your actual shipping method names. For example: 'shipping method contains priority or overnight'. **Q: Why is the inbox turned off for this rule?** Last-minute gift orders are typically straightforward to fulfil - the badge serves as a visual reminder to prioritise speed and presentable packaging. Routing every one to the inbox would create unnecessary friction during the busiest dispatch windows. **Q: Will a Thursday afternoon order for 3+ products still get flagged?** No. The rule requires 2 or fewer distinct products. Orders with 3 or more products are filtered out because diverse baskets are less likely to be single-recipient gifts. ## Related rules - [ops-weekend-rush-order](https://orderbadger.com/kb/ops-weekend-rush-order/) - [gift-multi-signal](https://orderbadger.com/kb/gift-multi-signal/) - [gift-valentines-window](https://orderbadger.com/kb/gift-valentines-window/) ## People also search for WooCommerce flag Thursday Friday express orders that are likely gifts | How to prioritise late-week rush gift orders for dispatch | Detect last-minute gift buyers using next-day shipping | WooCommerce rule for end-of-week express gift purchases | Badge urgent gift orders needing same-day dispatch --- # How to detect international gift orders in WooCommerce > Badges orders that exhibit multiple gift-buying signals: a first-time customer shipping internationally with a single product and a total over £75, suggesting someone buying a gift for a recipient in another country. ## The problem Gift orders from first-time international buyers look identical to regular orders in the dashboard, but they carry unique risks and opportunities. The recipient may not be the buyer, the delivery address may be unfamiliar, and the customer may expect gift packaging or a personalised message. Without a flag, these orders are processed routinely and the gift context is lost. ## The solution OrderBadger can flag orders that show multiple signals of being a gift purchase from a first-time international buyer. ## Who this is for Stores selling giftable products with international shipping - jewellery, artisan goods, personalised items, luxury accessories, and any retailer where cross-border gift orders are a meaningful segment. ## At a glance - First-time customers only - International shipping required - Single product orders only - Value threshold: order total over £75 - Badge: Likely Gift (purple, info) ## How it works Evaluates four conditions together: the customer must have zero previous paid orders, the shipping destination must be international, the order must contain exactly one distinct product, and the total must exceed £75. When all four are true, the order is badged as a likely gift and routed to the inbox. **Recommended action:** Check whether the customer has added a gift message at checkout. If your store offers gift wrapping, consider including it as a courtesy. Ensure customs declarations describe the contents clearly. If a receipt is included by default, consider omitting the price for flagged orders. ## Rule template > Customer has 0 previous paid orders and shipping is international and distinct product count is 1 and order total is over £75 **Badge:** Likely Gift (purple, info) **Inbox:** Yes ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Lower 'over £75' to 'over £40' to catch smaller gift purchases, especially for stores with lower price points. - Raise 'over £75' to 'over £150' to limit the badge to premium international gift orders only. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and at least one product is in the Gift Sets or Jewellery category' to strengthen the gift signal with category evidence. - Remove 'and customer has 0 previous paid orders' to flag gift-like international orders from returning customers as well. - Add 'and it is peak season' to narrow the rule to the gifting peak (Christmas, Valentine's Day) when gift probability is highest. ## When this rule matches - **first timer international single product over 75:** Customer has 0 previous paid orders, shipping is international, only 1 distinct product, and total is £95 - all four gift signals present. - **first timer international single high value:** First-time customer, international delivery, 1 distinct product, and total of £250 - classic international gift purchase pattern. ## When this rule does not match - **returning customer international single:** Shipping is international with 1 product and total of £120, but the customer has 3 previous paid orders - they are a returning buyer, not a first-timer. - **first timer domestic single:** First-time customer with 1 product and total of £90, but shipping is domestic - the international signal is missing. - **first timer international multiple products:** First-time international customer with total of £180, but 4 distinct products - a multi-product order is less likely to be a single gift. ## Good to know - This rule uses a heuristic - not every matching order is actually a gift. Some first-time international buyers are simply purchasing for themselves. - Guest checkouts have null order history. If your NAIL compiler treats null as not satisfying '0 previous paid orders', guest orders will not be flagged. - The international flag depends on your store's base country configuration. Ensure it is set correctly for accurate domestic vs. international classification. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Why require all four signals rather than just one or two?** Each individual signal is common and not particularly meaningful alone. A first-time buyer is normal. An international order is normal. A single-product order is normal. But the combination of all four together produces a strong heuristic for gift purchases with minimal false positives. **Q: Does 'distinct product count is 1' mean only one unit or one type of product?** One type of product. A customer buying 3 units of the same item has a distinct product count of 1 and would still match. The logic is that a single product type sent internationally is gift-like behaviour. **Q: Can I also detect domestic gifts?** Remove 'and shipping is international' from the rule text to broaden it to all destinations. However, this will increase false positives since domestic single-product orders are very common for non-gift reasons. **Q: Will this flag orders where the buyer and recipient have the same address?** Yes. The rule does not compare billing and shipping addresses - it uses the combination of customer novelty, destination, basket composition, and value as a proxy. Address comparison is not currently available in the order snapshot. ## Related rules - [international-order](https://orderbadger.com/kb/international-order/) - [first-time-registered-buyer](https://orderbadger.com/kb/first-time-registered-buyer/) - [single-sku-order](https://orderbadger.com/kb/single-sku-order/) ## People also search for WooCommerce flag first-time international single-product gift orders | How to identify cross-border gift purchases from new buyers | Badge likely gift orders shipping internationally with one product | WooCommerce gift detection rule for overseas deliveries | Spot international gift buyers for customs and packaging attention --- # How to flag seasonal gift orders in WooCommerce > Badges orders placed during peak season that contain products in classic gifting categories - Jewellery, Flowers, or Chocolates - with a total over £30, signalling that the order is almost certainly a gift and may benefit from special packaging or handling. ## The problem During Valentine's Day, Mother's Day, and other gifting peaks, orders containing jewellery, flowers, or chocolates are overwhelmingly gifts. If processed without distinction, these orders miss the chance for gift wrapping, a card insert, or priority dispatch to meet the recipient's expectations on the occasion. ## The solution OrderBadger can automatically identify seasonal gift orders containing jewellery, flowers, or chocolates during your peak season. ## Who this is for Stores selling jewellery, flowers, chocolates, or mixed-category gift retailers who experience seasonal surges around Valentine's Day, Mother's Day, and Christmas. ## At a glance - Active during configured peak season only - Checks Jewellery, Flowers, or Chocolates categories - Value threshold: order total over £30 - Badge: Seasonal Gift (purple, info) ## How it works Checks three conditions: the order must be placed during your configured peak season, at least one item must belong to the Jewellery, Flowers, or Chocolates category, and the order total must exceed £30. The badge appears passively on the order as a visual signal for your fulfilment team. **Recommended action:** Ensure gift wrapping is applied if the customer selected it. If not, consider including a branded gift bag or tissue paper as a courtesy. Prioritise dispatch to meet the occasion deadline. If your store offers gift messages, check whether one was included. ## Rule template > At least one product is in the Jewellery, Flowers, or Chocolates category and order total is over £30 and it is peak season **Badge:** Seasonal Gift (purple, info) ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Raise 'over £30' to 'over £50' if your gift products are premium-priced and you want to filter out smaller purchases. - Add your store's specific category names if they differ from 'Jewellery', 'Flowers', or 'Chocolates'. **Add or remove conditions:** - Remove 'and it is peak season' to flag all gift-category orders year-round, useful if you want to always offer gift packaging for these products. - Add 'and shipping is international' to focus on cross-border seasonal gifts that need extra customs attention and faster dispatch. - Add 'and customer has 0 previous paid orders' to identify first-time buyers discovering your store through seasonal gift searches. ## When this rule matches - **peak jewellery over 30:** It is peak season, the order includes a Jewellery product, and the total of £75 exceeds 30 - all three conditions met. - **peak chocolates mixed basket:** Peak season is active, the basket contains a Chocolates item alongside a non-gift category item, and the total of £55 exceeds 30. - **peak flowers boundary value:** Peak season with a Flowers item and total of £30.50 - just above the 30 threshold. ## When this rule does not match - **off peak jewellery over 30:** The order includes Jewellery and the total is £120, but it is not peak season - the seasonal context is missing. - **peak non gift categories:** It is peak season and the total is £65, but the order contains only Electronics items - none of the gift categories are present. - **peak chocolates under 30:** It is peak season and the order includes Chocolates, but the total of £18.99 is under the 30 threshold - too small to warrant gift treatment. ## Good to know - The rule relies on your WooCommerce product categories matching the names exactly. If your store uses 'Jewelry' (US spelling), 'Bouquets', or 'Confectionery', adjust the rule text accordingly. - Peak season is defined by your store configuration. For Valentine's Day coverage, ensure your peak season window includes early-to-mid February. - The rule does not verify the customer's intent - a self-purchase of chocolates during peak season will also be flagged. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: What if my store uses 'Jewelry' instead of 'Jewellery'?** Edit the rule text to use your exact category name. The NAIL compiler matches category names literally, so the spelling must match your WooCommerce categories. **Q: Will this badge fire for flowers ordered outside peak season?** No. The peak season condition must be true. To badge flower orders year-round, remove 'and it is peak season' from the rule text. **Q: Can I add more gift categories like 'Perfume' or 'Candles'?** Yes. Extend the category list in the rule text: 'Jewellery, Flowers, Chocolates, Perfume, or Candles'. The NAIL compiler handles multiple category names in a comma-separated list. **Q: Why is the minimum value only £30?** Gifting categories like chocolates and flowers commonly have lower price points than other product lines. The £30 floor captures meaningful gift purchases while excluding very small add-on items. ## Related rules - [peak-season-order](https://orderbadger.com/kb/peak-season-order/) - [cosmetics-gift-set-peak](https://orderbadger.com/kb/cosmetics-gift-set-peak/) - [gift-multi-signal](https://orderbadger.com/kb/gift-multi-signal/) ## People also search for WooCommerce badge Valentine's Day jewellery and chocolate orders | How to identify peak-season gift purchases for special packaging | Flag seasonal gift orders containing flowers or jewellery | WooCommerce seasonal gifting rule for Valentine's and Mother's Day | Automate gift wrapping prompts during peak gifting periods --- # How to flag guest checkout orders in WooCommerce > Badges orders placed via guest checkout so your team can identify unregistered buyers and decide whether to apply extra checks or encourage account creation. ## The problem Guest orders lack customer history, making fraud assessment harder and preventing loyalty tracking. Without a visual indicator, guest orders blend in with registered customer orders. ## The solution OrderBadger can flag every guest checkout automatically. ## Who this is for Stores that allow guest checkout but want visibility into which orders come from unregistered buyers - useful for fraud-sensitive stores and those encouraging account registration. ## At a glance - Fires on every guest checkout order - No thresholds or category requirements - Simple boolean check on account status - Badge: Guest (grey, info) ## How it works Adds a badge to any order placed without a logged-in customer account. This gives you instant visibility into which orders come from unregistered buyers. **Recommended action:** Consider verifying payment details for high-value guest orders. You may also want to include an account creation prompt in the order confirmation email. ## Rule template > The order was placed as a guest without a customer account **Badge:** Guest (grey, info) ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - This rule has no thresholds - it fires on every guest order. If that is too broad, add conditions to narrow it (see extend tips). **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and order total is over £200' to only badge high-value guest orders that warrant extra fraud scrutiny. - Add 'and shipping method contains express or next-day' to flag guest express orders - a common fraud pattern - while letting standard guest orders pass quietly. ## When this rule matches - **guest order:** Order was placed as a guest checkout without a customer account. ## When this rule does not match - **registered customer:** Order was placed by a registered customer with an account. ## Good to know - This is a simple boolean check - it cannot distinguish between intentional guest buyers and customers who forgot to log in. - Customer history fields (previous orders, lifetime spend, etc.) return null for guests, so combining this with history-based rules requires care. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: If I disable guest checkout in WooCommerce, will this rule ever trigger?** No. If your store requires account registration, all orders will be placed by registered customers and this rule will never produce a badge. **Q: Can I use this badge to identify orders that need extra fraud checks?** Yes, that is a common use case. Since guest orders have no purchase history, pairing this badge with a manual review step helps catch potentially fraudulent orders from unknown buyers. **Q: What if a returning customer places an order without logging in?** The order will be flagged as a Guest checkout. WooCommerce treats the order as a guest order even if the email matches an existing account, so the badge will still appear. ## Related rules - [first-time-registered-buyer](https://orderbadger.com/kb/first-time-registered-buyer/) ## People also search for WooCommerce badge all orders placed without a customer account | How to identify guest checkout orders for fraud review | Flag unregistered buyer orders in WooCommerce | WooCommerce rule to track anonymous guest orders | Detect orders from buyers who did not create an account --- # How to flag electronics orders for special handling in WooCommerce > Automatically badges orders that include at least one product categorised as Electronics, so your team can apply extra handling, warranty checks, or packaging requirements. ## The problem Electronics products often require anti-static packaging, serial number tracking, or warranty documentation. Without a visual flag, these orders may be packed like any other item, risking damage or missing paperwork. ## The solution OrderBadger can automatically flag orders that contain products in any specific WooCommerce category, including Electronics. ## Who this is for Stores that sell electronics alongside other product types and need to ensure electronics items receive appropriate handling during fulfilment. ## At a glance - Checks for Electronics category on any line item - All customers and order values eligible - One qualifying item is enough to trigger - Badge: Electronics (purple, info) ## How it works Scans the product categories on each line item and adds a badge when at least one item belongs to the Electronics category. The badge appears on the orders list and order detail view. **Recommended action:** Use anti-static packaging for electronics items. Verify serial numbers if applicable, and include any required warranty documentation in the shipment. ## Rule template > Order contains a product in the Electronics category **Badge:** Electronics (purple, info) ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Change 'Electronics' to your store's actual category name if it differs - e.g. 'Tech', 'Gadgets', or 'Electrical'. The name must match your WooCommerce category exactly. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and order total is over £100' to only flag higher-value electronics orders that justify the extra handling and warranty documentation effort. - Add 'or at least one product is in the Fragile category' to extend special packaging handling beyond electronics to other delicate items in a single rule. ## When this rule matches - **order with electronics item:** Order contains a product in the Electronics category, so the rule matches. ## When this rule does not match - **clothing only order:** Order contains only Clothing products, no Electronics category present. - **empty categories order:** Order items have no categories assigned, so Electronics is not present. ## Good to know - The category name must match exactly as configured in WooCommerce. Sub-categories are not automatically included unless they are also named Electronics. - If a product is miscategorised in WooCommerce, the badge will not appear for that order. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Does this match sub-categories like 'Electronics > Headphones' automatically?** No. The rule matches the exact category name 'Electronics'. Products in sub-categories are only matched if they are also directly assigned to the parent Electronics category in WooCommerce. **Q: Can I adapt this rule for a different category like 'Fragile' or 'Perishable'?** Yes. Edit the rule text to replace 'Electronics' with your desired category name and recompile. The logic works the same for any WooCommerce product category. **Q: What happens if a product has no categories assigned?** Products with no categories will not trigger this badge. The rule requires at least one item to have 'Electronics' in its category list, so uncategorised products are ignored. **Q: If an order has 5 items and only 1 is Electronics, does the badge appear?** Yes. The rule triggers when at least one item in the order belongs to the Electronics category. It does not matter how many non-Electronics items are also in the order. ## People also search for flag electronics orders WooCommerce | badge orders containing electronics products | WooCommerce highlight orders by product category | how to identify electronics orders in WooCommerce admin | WooCommerce category-based order tagging --- # How to identify first-time supplement buyers in WooCommerce > Badges orders from first-time buyers that contain products in the Supplements or Vitamins category, prompting your team to include dosage guides, FAQs, or onboarding material. ## The problem First-time supplement buyers often have questions about dosage, timing, and interactions. Without a flag, these orders are packed like any other and the customer misses critical onboarding information that drives compliance and repeat purchases. ## The solution OrderBadger can automatically identify first-time customers who are buying supplements or vitamins. ## Who this is for Health, wellness, and supplement stores where first-time buyers benefit from educational material included with their order. ## At a glance - First-time registered customers only - Checks Supplements or Vitamins categories - Prompts inclusion of dosage guides - Badge: New to Supplements (teal, info) ## How it works Checks whether any line item belongs to the Supplements or Vitamins category and whether the customer has zero previous paid orders. When both conditions are true, the order is badged so your team knows to include onboarding material. **Recommended action:** Include a printed dosage guide, FAQ leaflet, or welcome card with the order. Consider a follow-up email sequence with usage tips and a prompt to reorder before they run out. ## Rule template > At least one product is in the Supplements or Vitamins category and customer has 0 previous paid orders **Badge:** New to Supplements (teal, info) ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Replace 'Supplements or Vitamins' with your actual WooCommerce category names (e.g. 'Nutritional Supplements or Multivitamins') to match your catalogue. - Change '0 previous paid orders' to '1 or fewer previous paid orders' to also catch second-time buyers who are still new to supplements. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and order total is over £30' to skip small trial-size purchases that do not warrant a full onboarding pack. - Add 'or Probiotics' after 'Vitamins' to cover a wider range of health products that also need dosage guidance. ## When this rule matches - **first time buyer supplements:** Customer has 0 previous paid orders and the order contains a product in the Supplements category. - **first time buyer vitamins plus other:** Customer has 0 previous paid orders and one item is in the Vitamins category, even though the other item is not. ## When this rule does not match - **returning customer supplements:** Customer has 3 previous paid orders, so they are not a first-time buyer even though the order contains supplements. - **first time buyer no supplements:** Customer has 0 previous paid orders but no items are in the Supplements or Vitamins category. - **guest checkout supplements:** Guest checkout has null previous_paid_order_count, which cannot satisfy the '0 previous paid orders' condition. ## Good to know - Products must be assigned to a category named 'Supplements' or 'Vitamins' in WooCommerce. Different category names will not match. - Guest checkouts are excluded because previous_paid_order_count is null for anonymous buyers. - This rule identifies first-time buyers of any supplement, not first-time buyers of a specific product. A customer new to your store but experienced with supplements will still be flagged. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: What if my supplement category is named differently, like 'Nutritional Supplements'?** The rule matches the exact category names 'Supplements' and 'Vitamins'. If your categories are named differently, edit the rule text to match your WooCommerce category names. **Q: Will this trigger for a returning customer who is buying supplements for the first time?** No. The rule checks that the customer has 0 previous paid orders of any kind. A returning customer with prior orders will not trigger this rule, even if they have never bought supplements before. **Q: Does a product assigned to both 'Supplements' and another category still match?** Yes. If any of the product's assigned categories is 'Supplements' or 'Vitamins', the condition is met regardless of other categories. **Q: Can I extend this to include other health categories like Probiotics?** Yes. Edit the rule text to add more category names, for example 'Supplements, Vitamins, or Probiotics'. The rule will match any item in those categories. ## Related rules - [first-time-registered-buyer](https://orderbadger.com/kb/first-time-registered-buyer/) - [first-time-buying-product](https://orderbadger.com/kb/first-time-buying-product/) - [health-high-frequency-reorder](https://orderbadger.com/kb/health-high-frequency-reorder/) ## People also search for how to flag new supplement customers in WooCommerce | WooCommerce alert for first-time vitamin buyer orders | include dosage guide with first supplement order WooCommerce | identify new customers buying supplements WooCommerce | WooCommerce onboarding inserts for health product orders --- # How to spot frequent reorder customers in WooCommerce > Badges orders from customers who have placed 2 or more orders in the last 30 days and are reordering a product they have bought before, highlighting prime candidates for subscription conversion. ## The problem Customers who frequently reorder the same products are ideal subscription candidates, but without a flag they blend in with occasional buyers. Missing this signal means lost recurring revenue. ## The solution OrderBadger can automatically flag customers who are ordering frequently and reordering the same products. ## Who this is for Health, wellness, pet supply, food, and consumable stores where repeat purchases of the same product indicate a strong subscription conversion opportunity. ## At a glance - Registered customers only - Requires 2+ orders in the last 30 days - At least one repeat product purchase - Rolling 30-day window - Badge: Frequent Buyer (green, info) ## How it works Combines two conditions: the customer must have placed 2 or more orders in the last 30 days, and at least one product in the current order must have been purchased by the same customer 2 or more times previously. This identifies high-frequency repeat buyers who are strong candidates for subscription offers. **Recommended action:** Include a subscription offer or auto-reorder flyer with the order. Consider sending a personalised email suggesting a subscription plan based on their reorder frequency and preferred products. ## Rule template > Customer placed 2 or more orders in the last 30 days and at least one product has been purchased by this customer 2 or more times **Badge:** Frequent Buyer (green, info) **Inbox:** Yes ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Raise '2 or more orders in the last 30 days' to '3 or more orders in the last 30 days' to focus on the most frequent repeat buyers and reduce noise. - Try changing '2 or more times' on the product repurchase count to '3 or more times' to only flag deeply habitual reorders. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and order total is over £20' to exclude tiny reorders like single accessory top-ups. - Add 'and at least one product is in the Supplements or Pet Food category' to limit this to consumable categories where subscriptions make sense. ## When this rule matches - **frequent buyer repeat product:** Customer has placed 3 orders in the last 30 days and one product has been purchased 4 times previously. Both conditions met. - **boundary 2 orders 2 purchases:** Customer has placed exactly 2 orders in the last 30 days and one product has been purchased exactly 2 times. Both boundaries met. ## When this rule does not match - **frequent buyer all new products:** Customer has 3 orders in the last 30 days but no product has been purchased before - all items have 0 previous purchases. - **repeat product infrequent buyer:** Customer has a repeat product (purchased 5 times) but only 1 order in the last 30 days, below the 2-order threshold. - **guest checkout frequent:** Guest checkout has null orders_last_30d and null purchase counts, so neither condition can be satisfied. ## Good to know - Guest checkouts are excluded - both conditions require a registered customer account with purchase history. - The repeat-product check counts previous purchases of the exact SKU. A customer switching between product variations may not trigger the repeat condition. - The 30-day window is rolling, not calendar-month based. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Does the current order count toward the 2-order threshold?** Yes. The orders_last_30d value includes the order being evaluated. A customer placing their second order this month will meet the threshold of 2. **Q: If a customer reorders the same product but in a different size or variant, does it count?** Each product variation is treated as a distinct SKU. A customer who bought Size A previously and now orders Size B will not trigger the repeat-product condition for that item. **Q: Why combine order frequency with repeat-product purchase?** Frequency alone may indicate a customer exploring your catalogue. Combining it with a repeat product confirms a habitual reorder pattern, making subscription conversion much more likely to succeed. **Q: Can I adjust the thresholds for different product categories?** The thresholds are fixed in the rule text. Create separate rules with different thresholds if you need category-specific frequency targets. ## Related rules - [active-customer-orders-this-month](https://orderbadger.com/kb/active-customer-orders-this-month/) - [repeat-product-buyer-3x](https://orderbadger.com/kb/repeat-product-buyer-3x/) - [loyal-customer-5-plus-orders](https://orderbadger.com/kb/loyal-customer-5-plus-orders/) ## People also search for WooCommerce flag customers who reorder the same product frequently | how to find subscription candidates in WooCommerce orders | identify repeat buyers for auto-reorder offers WooCommerce | WooCommerce detect high-frequency repeat purchases | which customers should I offer subscriptions to in WooCommerce --- # How to flag mixed supplement and skincare orders in WooCommerce > Badges orders that contain both ingestible products (Supplements or Ingestibles) and topical products (Skincare or Topicals), prompting your team to include separate compliance leaflets for each product type. ## The problem Mixed supplement and skincare orders may require separate regulatory leaflets, usage instructions, or compliance inserts. Without a flag, warehouse staff pack everything together and the customer misses critical product-type-specific information. ## The solution OrderBadger can automatically flag orders that mix ingestible and topical products, ensuring compliance inserts are included. ## Who this is for Health, wellness, and beauty stores that sell both ingestible supplements and topical skincare products and need to comply with labelling or information requirements for each product type. ## At a glance - Requires both ingestible and topical products - Checks Supplements/Ingestibles and Skincare/Topicals - Compliance-focused: separate leaflet reminder - Badge: Mixed Product Types (yellow, warning) ## How it works Checks whether the order contains at least one product from the Supplements or Ingestibles category AND at least one from the Skincare or Topicals category. When both are present, the order is badged so your team can include the correct compliance leaflets for each product type. **Recommended action:** Include separate product information leaflets: one for ingestible products (dosage, interactions, storage) and one for topical products (application instructions, patch test advice, ingredients). Ensure items are clearly separated in the packaging. ## Rule template > At least one product is in the Supplements or Ingestibles category and at least one product is in the Skincare or Topicals category **Badge:** Mixed Product Types (yellow, warning) **Inbox:** Yes ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Replace 'Supplements or Ingestibles' with your store's exact category names (e.g. 'Oral Supplements or Capsules') to match your WooCommerce catalogue. - Replace 'Skincare or Topicals' with more specific names like 'Creams & Serums or Body Oils' if your topical categories are named differently. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'or Probiotics' to the ingestible group to capture probiotic drinks and powders that also need separate compliance inserts. - Add 'and customer has 0 previous paid orders' to limit this badge to first-time buyers who are most likely to need compliance leaflets. ## When this rule matches - **supplement plus skincare:** Order contains one product in Supplements and one in Skincare, satisfying both category conditions. - **ingestibles plus topicals:** Order contains one product in Ingestibles and one in Topicals, satisfying both category conditions via the alternate category names. ## When this rule does not match - **supplements only:** All products are in the Supplements category with no topical items, so the second condition is not met. - **skincare only:** All products are in the Skincare category with no ingestible items, so the first condition is not met. - **unrelated categories:** No products are in any of the target categories - neither the ingestible nor the topical condition is met. ## Good to know - Products must be assigned to categories named exactly 'Supplements', 'Ingestibles', 'Skincare', or 'Topicals' in WooCommerce. Different names will not match. - A single product assigned to both an ingestible and a topical category will not trigger the rule on its own - the rule requires at least one product from each group. - This rule does not check specific regulatory requirements. It flags the combination so your team can apply the appropriate compliance process. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: What if my categories are named differently, like 'Oral Supplements' and 'Creams & Serums'?** The rule matches the exact category names listed in the rule text. Edit the rule to use your WooCommerce category names and recompile. **Q: Does a product assigned to both Supplements and Skincare trigger the rule by itself?** No. The rule requires at least one product from the ingestible group and at least one separate product from the topical group. A single product in both categories does not satisfy the 'at least one in each' requirement. **Q: Will this badge appear alongside other badges on the same order?** Yes. OrderBadger evaluates all active rules independently. An order can carry multiple badges - for example, Mixed Product Types and New to Supplements if both rules match. **Q: Can I add more category groups to this rule?** Yes. Edit the rule text to include additional category names in either the ingestible or topical group. For example, add 'Probiotics' to the ingestible group or 'Body Care' to the topical group. ## Related rules - [health-first-time-supplement-buyer](https://orderbadger.com/kb/health-first-time-supplement-buyer/) - [order-spans-3-categories](https://orderbadger.com/kb/order-spans-3-categories/) ## People also search for WooCommerce alert when order mixes ingestible and topical products | how to include separate compliance leaflets per product type WooCommerce | flag orders with supplements and skincare together WooCommerce | WooCommerce compliance inserts for mixed health product orders --- # How to flag dormant customers returning with high spend in WooCommerce > Badges orders from customers who are returning after 180 days of dormancy and whose current order total exceeds their historical average, highlighting high-intent win-back moments that deserve a personal touch. ## The problem When a dormant customer returns and spends more than their usual average, it signals strong re-engagement intent. Without a flag, this high-value win-back moment is treated like any other order and the chance for personalised retention is lost. ## The solution OrderBadger can automatically flag dormant customers who return with an order larger than their historical average. ## Who this is for Health, wellness, subscription, and lifestyle stores where dormant customers returning with increased spend represent the best win-back opportunities worth investing in. ## At a glance - Registered customers only - 180-day dormancy period required - Current order must exceed customer average - Routes to inbox for personalised follow-up - Badge: Dormant Returning (teal, info) ## How it works Combines two conditions: the customer must be returning after a 180-day dormancy period, and the current order total must exceed their average paid order value. This identifies high-intent win-back customers who deserve special attention. **Recommended action:** Send a personalised welcome-back message acknowledging their return. Consider including a loyalty reward, handwritten note, or exclusive discount for their next order to reinforce the re-engagement. ## Rule template > Customer is reactivated after 180 days and order total is greater than customer average order value **Badge:** Dormant Returning (teal, info) **Inbox:** Yes ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - The 180-day dormancy period uses a pre-computed field. For a shorter window like 90 days, create a new rule using 'customer has not placed an order in more than 90 days' instead. - Try replacing 'greater than customer average order value' with 'greater than £50' to use a fixed floor rather than a per-customer average, catching more reactivations. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and customer has 3 or more previous paid orders' to focus on truly established buyers returning, not customers who only ordered once long ago. - Add 'and at least one product has been purchased by this customer 1 or more times' to narrow this to customers re-buying a familiar product, a stronger loyalty signal. ## When this rule matches - **reactivated above average:** Customer is reactivated after 180 days and current order total of £85 exceeds their average order value of £55. - **reactivated significantly above average:** Customer is reactivated after 180 days and current order total of £200 is well above their average of £60. ## When this rule does not match - **reactivated below average:** Customer is reactivated after 180 days but current order total of £30 is below their average of £55. - **active customer above average:** Order total exceeds average but the customer is not reactivated - they have been ordering within the last 180 days. - **reactivated equal to average:** Customer is reactivated but order total of £55 equals their average exactly. The rule requires greater than, so the boundary does not pass. ## Good to know - Guest checkouts are excluded - both conditions require a registered customer account. - The 180-day dormancy period uses the pre-computed is_reactivated_after_180d field and cannot be customised in the rule text. - Average order value includes all historical paid orders. A customer who historically placed large orders but recently placed small ones may have a lower average than expected. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: How is the customer's average order value calculated?** It is the mean total across all previous paid orders in WooCommerce. Cancelled and refunded orders are excluded from the calculation. **Q: Will first-time buyers trigger this rule?** No. First-time buyers have no previous orders and therefore no dormancy period or average order value. They cannot satisfy either condition. **Q: If a customer is reactivated and their order total exactly equals their average, does it trigger?** No. The rule requires the order total to be greater than the average. An exact match does not meet the threshold. **Q: Can I use a shorter dormancy period like 90 days?** This rule uses the is_reactivated_after_180d derived field, so the 180-day period is fixed. For a different period, create a rule using days_since_last_paid_order with your preferred threshold. ## Related rules - [customer-reactivated-after-180d](https://orderbadger.com/kb/customer-reactivated-after-180d/) - [high-avg-order-value](https://orderbadger.com/kb/high-avg-order-value/) - [lapsed-customer-60-days](https://orderbadger.com/kb/lapsed-customer-60-days/) ## People also search for WooCommerce alert when dormant customer places a big order | how to detect win-back customers in WooCommerce | flag reactivated customers spending above average WooCommerce | WooCommerce identify returning inactive customers | dormant customer came back with large order WooCommerce --- # How to flag heavy orders over 5kg in WooCommerce > Automatically badges orders whose total weight exceeds 5 kg so your team can arrange appropriate carrier services, use reinforced packaging, and avoid surcharges from underestimated parcel weight. ## The problem Heavy parcels often incur carrier surcharges, require reinforced packaging, or need a different shipping service tier. Without a visual flag, heavy orders are packed in standard boxes and shipped on standard services, leading to damaged goods or unexpected carrier fees. ## The solution OrderBadger can automatically flag orders where the total weight exceeds any threshold you set. ## Who this is for Stores that sell a mix of light and heavy products and need to ensure heavy parcels are packed and shipped appropriately - especially food, hardware, or home goods retailers. ## At a glance - Weight threshold: over 5 kg total - All customers and destinations eligible - Includes Arranged/Hold interaction buttons - Routes to inbox for carrier review - Badge: Heavy (red, warning) ## How it works Calculates the total weight of all items in the order and adds a warning badge when it exceeds 5 kg. The order appears in the inbox so your team can arrange appropriate shipping before dispatch. **Recommended action:** Use reinforced packaging for heavy orders. Check whether the standard carrier service supports the weight or if a heavier-tier service is needed. Use the interaction buttons to mark the order as Arranged once the correct shipping is confirmed, or Hold if further action is needed. ## Rule template > Total order weight is more than 5 kg **Badge:** Heavy (red, warning) **Inbox:** Yes **Interaction:** Arranged / Hold ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Try lowering '5 kg' to '3 kg' if your standard packaging only handles lighter parcels, or raise it to '10 kg' if 5 kg orders are routine for your store. - Change 'more than 5 kg' to 'more than 2 kg' for stores shipping small items where even a 3 kg parcel needs special handling. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and shipping is international' to limit this badge to heavy international orders where carrier surcharges are most painful. - Add 'and order total is over £100' to focus on high-value heavy orders that justify the cost of reinforced packaging. ## When this rule matches - **order 7 5 kg:** Total order weight of 7.5 kg exceeds the 5 kg threshold. ## When this rule does not match - **order 2 kg:** Total order weight of 2 kg is well below the 5 kg threshold. - **order 5 kg boundary:** Total order weight of exactly 5 kg does not exceed the threshold (rule says 'more than 5 kg'). ## Good to know - Weight calculation depends on product weights being correctly set in WooCommerce. Products without a weight are treated as zero. - The threshold is fixed at 5 kg. To change it, edit the rule and recompile. - This checks total order weight, not individual item weight. A single heavy item and many light items are treated the same. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: What happens if some products in my store don't have weights set?** Products without a weight are treated as zero. This means the total weight may be underestimated and a genuinely heavy order could slip through without the badge. Ensure product weights are set correctly in WooCommerce. **Q: Does an order weighing exactly 5 kg trigger the badge?** No. The rule requires the total weight to be more than 5 kg. An order at exactly 5.0 kg will not be flagged - it needs to be at least 5.01 kg. You can adjust the weight threshold in the rule text to match your carrier's limits. **Q: What are the 'Arranged' and 'Hold' interaction buttons for?** Once a heavy order appears in your inbox, use 'Arranged' to confirm you have selected the correct carrier service and packaging, or 'Hold' if the order needs further review before dispatch. ## Related rules - [international-order](https://orderbadger.com/kb/international-order/) ## People also search for WooCommerce alert for orders exceeding weight limit | how to flag heavy parcels in WooCommerce before shipping | WooCommerce badge orders over 5kg for special packaging | detect overweight orders in WooCommerce automatically | WooCommerce heavy order notification for warehouse staff --- # How to identify high average order value customers in WooCommerce > Badges orders from customers whose average order value across all previous paid orders exceeds £75, helping you spot consistently high-spending buyers. ## The problem Some customers consistently place high-value orders but are invisible without a flag. Knowing a customer's average spend helps tailor the fulfilment experience and upsell strategy. ## The solution OrderBadger can automatically identify customers with a high average order value. ## Who this is for Stores selling products across a wide price range - fashion, electronics, homeware, and B2B stores where average order value is a key performance indicator. ## At a glance - Registered customers with order history only - Threshold: average order value above £75 - Calculated across all previous paid orders - Badge: High AOV (green, info) ## How it works Adds a High AOV badge to orders from registered customers whose average value across all previous paid orders exceeds £75. This highlights consistently high-spending buyers at a glance. **Recommended action:** Prioritise these orders for quality packaging and fast dispatch. Consider offering exclusive product bundles or loyalty rewards to maintain their high spending pattern. ## Rule template > Customer's average order value is above £75 **Badge:** High AOV (green, info) ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Try lowering '£75' to '£50' to catch mid-range spenders who might benefit from a premium experience, or raise it to '£100' if £75 is too common in your store. - Switch from 'above £75' to 'above £150' if you only want to highlight truly premium customers. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and customer has 3 or more previous paid orders' to combine high AOV with loyalty, filtering out one-off big spenders. - Add 'and order total is over £100' so the badge only appears on orders where the current spend also reflects their high-value pattern. ## When this rule matches - **customer aov 120:** Customer's average paid order value is £120, well above the £75 threshold. ## When this rule does not match - **customer aov 40:** Customer's average paid order value is £40, below the £75 threshold. - **customer aov 75 exact boundary:** Customer's average paid order value is exactly £75. The rule says 'above £75', so the boundary does not pass. - **first order null aov:** First-time buyer has no previous orders, so average_paid_order_value is null and cannot satisfy the condition. ## Good to know - Guest checkouts and first-time buyers are excluded - average order value requires at least one prior paid order. - The average is calculated across all previous paid orders, not just recent ones. A historically high spender who now places small orders may still trigger the badge. - The £75 threshold is fixed in the rule text. Edit the rule to change the amount. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Does this badge appear for a first-time customer placing a large order?** No. Average order value requires at least one previous paid order. A first-time buyer has no history, so average_paid_order_value is null and the rule will not trigger. **Q: If a customer's AOV was high historically but their recent orders are small, will the badge still show?** Yes. The average is calculated across all previous paid orders, not just recent ones. A customer with a historically high AOV will continue to trigger the badge until their overall average drops below the threshold. **Q: Does the £75 threshold include or exclude VAT?** The threshold is compared against the order total as recorded by WooCommerce. Whether that includes VAT depends on your store's tax display settings - check your WooCommerce tax configuration to be sure. **Q: Will the badge persist even after the customer starts placing smaller orders?** Yes. The average is calculated across all historical paid orders, not just recent ones. Smaller recent orders will gradually lower the average, but the badge only disappears once their overall AOV drops below £75. ## Related rules - [high-value-customer-ltv-500](https://orderbadger.com/kb/high-value-customer-ltv-500/) - [prior-gross-spend-over-200](https://orderbadger.com/kb/prior-gross-spend-over-200/) - [loyal-customer-5-plus-orders](https://orderbadger.com/kb/loyal-customer-5-plus-orders/) ## People also search for WooCommerce find customers with high average order value | how to spot consistent big spenders in WooCommerce | flag high AOV customers automatically in WooCommerce | WooCommerce identify premium buyers by spending pattern | which WooCommerce customers have the highest average spend --- # How to recognise VIP customers by lifetime spend in WooCommerce > Badges orders from customers whose total net spend across all previous orders exceeds £500, making it easy to identify and prioritise your most valuable buyers. ## The problem High-lifetime-value customers generate disproportionate revenue but are invisible in a standard orders list. Without a flag, your team may treat a £2,000 lifetime customer the same as a first-time buyer. ## The solution OrderBadger can automatically flag VIP customers based on their lifetime spend. ## Who this is for Stores with a wide range of customer values - especially premium retailers, B2B wholesalers, and subscription brands where lifetime value drives business decisions. ## At a glance - Registered customers only - Threshold: lifetime net spend over £500 - Excludes refunded amounts from total - Badge: VIP (orange, info) ## How it works Adds a VIP badge to orders from registered customers whose cumulative net spend on previous paid orders exceeds £500. This gives your team instant visibility into your highest-value buyers. **Recommended action:** Prioritise VIP orders for fast dispatch, include personalised touches, or route them to a senior team member. Consider offering exclusive discounts or early access to new products. ## Rule template > Customer has spent more than £500 in total across all their previous orders **Badge:** VIP (orange, info) ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Lower '£500' to '£250' to recognise loyal customers sooner, especially if your average product price is under £30. - Raise '£500' to '£1,000' if you want the VIP badge reserved for only your highest-spending customers. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and customer has 5 or more previous paid orders' to ensure VIP status reflects both high spend and consistent order frequency. - Add 'and order total is over £50' to suppress the VIP badge on trivially small orders from otherwise high-LTV customers. ## When this rule matches - **customer 750 lifetime spend:** Customer has £750 in prior net paid spend, well above the £500 threshold. - **customer 500 01 just above:** Customer has £500.01 in prior net paid spend, just above the £500 threshold. ## When this rule does not match - **customer 250 below threshold:** Customer has only £250 in prior net paid spend, below the £500 threshold. - **customer 500 exact boundary:** Customer has exactly £500 in prior net paid spend. The rule says 'more than £500', so the boundary does not pass. - **guest checkout null spend:** Guest checkout has no customer account, so prior_net_paid_spend is null and cannot satisfy the condition. ## Good to know - Guest checkouts are excluded - lifetime spend tracking requires a registered customer account. - The spend total reflects net paid amounts after refunds. Gross spend before refunds is tracked separately. - The £500 threshold is fixed in the rule text. Edit the rule to change the amount. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Does the £500 threshold include the current order or only previous orders?** Only previous orders. The rule checks prior_net_paid_spend, which excludes the order currently being evaluated. **Q: What happens if a customer has refunds - does that reduce their lifetime spend?** Yes. The rule uses net paid spend, so refunded amounts are subtracted from the lifetime total. **Q: How quickly does the VIP badge appear after a customer crosses £500 in lifetime spend?** It appears on their next order after crossing the threshold. If a customer's prior net spend is £480 and they place a £50 order, the badge will not show on that order because prior spend was still below £500 at evaluation time. It will appear on the following order. **Q: Will guest checkout orders ever get the VIP badge?** No. Lifetime spend tracking requires a registered customer account, so guest checkouts are always excluded. ## Related rules - [loyal-customer-5-plus-orders](https://orderbadger.com/kb/loyal-customer-5-plus-orders/) - [prior-gross-spend-over-200](https://orderbadger.com/kb/prior-gross-spend-over-200/) - [high-avg-order-value](https://orderbadger.com/kb/high-avg-order-value/) ## People also search for WooCommerce flag customers who spent over £500 total | how to identify VIP customers by lifetime value in WooCommerce | WooCommerce highlight high lifetime spend buyers automatically | track customer lifetime value in WooCommerce orders | WooCommerce badge for high LTV customers --- # How to review high-value first orders for fraud in WooCommerce > Highlights first-time customer orders above a value threshold so they can be reviewed before dispatch. Combines order value and customer history into a single compound rule. ## The problem Some high-value first-time orders deserve manual review before they are packed or shipped. A large order from an unknown customer carries more risk than the same order from a returning buyer. ## The solution OrderBadger can flag high-value first-time orders automatically and route them to your inbox for review. ## Who this is for Useful for premium, electronics, and fraud-sensitive stores where high-value orders from new customers warrant extra scrutiny. ## At a glance - First-time registered customers only - Threshold: order total over £500 - Includes Pass/Fail interaction buttons - 4-hour SLA from order creation - Badge: Manual Review (red, critical) ## How it works Combines two conditions into a single rule: the order total must exceed a threshold AND the customer must have zero previous paid orders. When both conditions are true, a critical-severity badge appears on the order with Pass/Fail interaction buttons and a 4-hour SLA. **Recommended action:** Review payment and fulfilment details before dispatch. Use the Pass/Fail buttons to record your decision. If the order looks legitimate, pass it and proceed with shipping. ## Rule template > Order total is greater than £500 and customer has 0 previous paid orders **Badge:** Manual Review (red, critical) **Inbox:** Yes **Interaction:** Pass / Fail **SLA:** 4h ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Try lowering '£500' to '£250' to catch more first-time orders that warrant review, especially if your typical basket size is under £100. - Raise '£500' to '£750' if you find too many legitimate first orders are being flagged at the current threshold. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and the order was placed after 10pm local time' to narrow the review to high-value first orders placed at unusual hours, a stronger fraud signal. - Remove 'customer has 0 previous paid orders' if you want to flag all high-value orders regardless of customer history. ## When this rule matches - **first time customer over threshold:** Order total of £650 exceeds £500 threshold and customer has zero prior paid orders. - **first time customer just above:** Order total of £500.01 is just above the threshold with no prior orders. ## When this rule does not match - **existing customer over threshold:** Order total exceeds threshold but customer already has 2 prior paid orders. - **first time customer below threshold:** Customer has no prior orders but order total of £200 is below the £500 threshold. - **guest over threshold:** Order total exceeds threshold but guest checkout has null order count, which cannot satisfy the '0 previous paid orders' condition. ## Good to know - This is a review aid, not a fraud detection engine. It highlights orders that deserve attention based on value and customer novelty. - Guest checkouts are excluded because they have no customer history. Consider a separate guest-checkout rule if needed. - The value threshold is fixed in the rule text. Edit the rule to change it. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: What happens if I don't act on the review within the 4-hour SLA?** The badge remains on the order but the SLA will show as breached. The order is not automatically held or cancelled - it is up to your workflow to decide next steps. **Q: Does this rule fire for guest checkouts placing high-value orders?** No. Guest checkouts have a null order count, which does not satisfy the '0 previous paid orders' condition. Consider adding a separate guest-checkout rule for those. **Q: If a returning customer places a large order, will it still get flagged?** No. Both conditions must be true: the order must exceed £500 AND the customer must have zero prior paid orders. Returning customers are excluded. **Q: Does the £500 threshold check the order total including shipping and tax?** Yes. The rule checks the order total field, which includes the full amount the customer is charged. ## Related rules - [order-total-over-100](https://orderbadger.com/kb/order-total-over-100/) - [first-time-registered-buyer](https://orderbadger.com/kb/first-time-registered-buyer/) - [guest-checkout](https://orderbadger.com/kb/guest-checkout/) ## People also search for WooCommerce flag large first orders for manual review | how to catch fraudulent first-time high-value orders WooCommerce | review expensive orders from new customers WooCommerce | WooCommerce fraud check for big first-time purchases | hold high-value new customer orders for review WooCommerce --- # How to flag heavy fragile orders for safe packaging in WooCommerce > Badges orders where the total weight exceeds 10 kg and at least one product is in the Glassware, Ceramics, or Mirrors category, ensuring reinforced packaging and fragile handling labels are applied. ## The problem Heavy orders that also contain fragile items are the highest risk for transit damage. Standard packaging designed for either heavy or fragile items alone may not protect a heavy box full of breakables. Without a flag, these orders are packed in standard materials and arrive damaged. ## The solution OrderBadger can automatically flag heavy orders that contain fragile items like glassware, ceramics, or mirrors. ## Who this is for Home goods, kitchenware, interior design, and gift stores that ship a mix of heavy and fragile products and need to ensure appropriate packaging and carrier handling. ## At a glance - Weight threshold: over 10 kg total - Checks Glassware, Ceramics, or Mirrors categories - Both conditions must be true together - Routes to inbox for packaging review - Badge: Fragile + Heavy (orange, warning) ## How it works Combines two conditions: the total order weight must exceed 10 kg and at least one product must be in the Glassware, Ceramics, or Mirrors category. When both are true, the order is badged and appears in your inbox so your team can apply reinforced packaging and fragile labels. **Recommended action:** Use double-walled boxes with internal dividers for fragile items. Apply fragile handling labels to all sides of the parcel. Consider using a carrier service that offers careful handling or insurance for high-value breakables. ## Rule template > Total order weight is over 10 kg and at least one product is in the Glassware, Ceramics, or Mirrors category **Badge:** Fragile + Heavy (orange, warning) **Inbox:** Yes ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Lower '10 kg' to '5 kg' if even moderately heavy boxes with fragile items need special packaging in your warehouse. - Replace 'Glassware, Ceramics, or Mirrors' with your actual fragile category names (e.g. 'Glass & Crystal, Porcelain, or Wall Mirrors'). **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and shipping is international' to limit this to international shipments where transit damage risk is highest. - Add 'or Chandeliers' after 'Mirrors' to cover additional fragile product types specific to your catalogue. ## When this rule matches - **heavy order with glassware:** Total weight is 14 kg (exceeding 10 kg) and one item is in the Glassware category. - **heavy order with mirror:** Total weight is 18 kg (exceeding 10 kg) and one item is in the Mirrors category. ## When this rule does not match - **light order with glassware:** Order contains Glassware but total weight is only 4 kg - well below the 10 kg threshold. - **heavy order no fragile:** Total weight is 15 kg but no products are in the Glassware, Ceramics, or Mirrors category. - **boundary 10 kg with ceramics:** Order contains Ceramics but total weight is exactly 10 kg. The rule requires over 10 kg, so the boundary does not pass. ## Good to know - Products must be assigned to categories named exactly 'Glassware', 'Ceramics', or 'Mirrors' in WooCommerce. Different category names will not match. - Weight calculation depends on product weights being correctly set in WooCommerce. Products without a weight are treated as zero. - This rule flags the combination of heavy and fragile, not fragile items alone. A lightweight glassware order will not trigger this rule. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Does an order weighing exactly 10 kg with glassware trigger the badge?** No. The rule requires the total weight to be over 10 kg. An order at exactly 10.0 kg will not be flagged. Adjust the weight threshold in the rule text if needed. **Q: What if my fragile category is named 'Glass & Crystal' instead of 'Glassware'?** The rule matches exact category names. Edit the rule text to include your WooCommerce category names and recompile. **Q: Will this trigger for a single heavy mirror with no other items?** Yes, as long as the mirror alone weighs more than 10 kg and its category is 'Mirrors'. Both conditions are evaluated against the whole order, not per-item. **Q: Can I lower the weight threshold for my store?** Yes. Edit the rule text to change the weight from 10 kg to your preferred threshold. For example, change to 5 kg if your standard packaging is designed for lighter parcels. ## Related rules - [heavy-order-over-5kg](https://orderbadger.com/kb/heavy-order-over-5kg/) - [home-international-bulky](https://orderbadger.com/kb/home-international-bulky/) ## People also search for WooCommerce alert for heavy orders with fragile items | how to ensure breakable items get reinforced packaging WooCommerce | flag orders with glassware and heavy weight WooCommerce | WooCommerce prevent transit damage on heavy fragile shipments | heavy order with ceramics or mirrors needs special packing WooCommerce --- # How to review bulky international shipping costs in WooCommerce > Badges international orders where the total weight exceeds 5 kg and the order total is over £200, highlighting bulky international shipments that may require manual carrier cost review before dispatch. ## The problem Bulky international shipments often incur unexpectedly high carrier fees, customs surcharges, or require specialist services. Without a flag, these orders are dispatched at standard rates and the actual shipping cost can significantly exceed what was charged to the customer. ## The solution OrderBadger can automatically flag bulky international orders that may need manual shipping cost review. ## Who this is for Stores shipping internationally that sell heavy or bulky products - furniture, home goods, hardware, and electronics retailers where international shipping costs scale steeply with weight. ## At a glance - International shipping required - Weight threshold: over 5 kg - Value threshold: order total over £200 - Routes to inbox for cost review - Badge: Bulky International (orange, warning) ## How it works Combines three conditions: the order must be shipping internationally, the total weight must exceed 5 kg, and the order total must be over £200. When all three are true, the order is badged and appears in your inbox so your team can verify shipping costs before dispatch. **Recommended action:** Review the actual carrier cost for the shipment weight and destination. Compare against what was charged to the customer. If the shipping cost significantly exceeds the charged amount, consider contacting the customer or absorbing the difference as a policy decision. ## Rule template > Shipping is international and total order weight is over 5 kg and order total is over £200 **Badge:** Bulky International (orange, warning) **Inbox:** Yes ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Lower '5 kg' to '3 kg' if your international carrier surcharges kick in at a lower weight bracket. - Raise '£200' to '£500' to only flag large international orders where the shipping cost review is most critical. - Lower '£200' to '£100' if you want to review all non-trivial international shipments above a modest weight. **Add or remove conditions:** - Remove 'and order total is over £200' to flag all heavy international orders regardless of value, useful if carrier cost is your primary concern. - Add 'and at least one product is in the Glassware or Ceramics category' to focus on bulky international orders with fragile items. ## When this rule matches - **heavy international high value:** Order is international, weighs 8 kg (over 5 kg), and total is £350 (over £200). All three conditions met. - **very heavy international:** Order is international, weighs 15 kg, and total is £600. A clearly bulky international shipment. ## When this rule does not match - **domestic heavy order:** Order weighs 10 kg and total is £400 but shipping is domestic, so the international condition is not met. - **light international order:** Order is international and total is £300, but weight is only 3 kg - below the 5 kg threshold. - **international heavy low value:** Order is international and weighs 7 kg, but total is only £150 - below the £200 threshold. ## Good to know - Weight calculation depends on product weights being correctly set in WooCommerce. Products without a weight are treated as zero. - The international flag is based on comparing the destination country to your WooCommerce store base country. - This does not distinguish between nearby and distant international destinations. Shipping to a neighbouring country may cost far less than shipping across continents. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Does the £200 threshold check the order total including shipping?** Yes. The rule checks the order total field, which includes the full amount charged to the customer including shipping and tax. **Q: Will a 5 kg international order over £200 trigger the badge?** No. The rule requires the total weight to be over 5 kg, so exactly 5.0 kg does not meet the threshold. The order must weigh at least 5.01 kg. **Q: Can I set different weight thresholds for different destination regions?** This rule uses a single weight threshold for all international destinations. Create separate rules with zone-specific conditions if you need different thresholds per region. **Q: What if the actual shipping cost is fine and no review is needed?** The badge is an advisory flag. If your shipping rates already account for bulky international orders, you can disable this rule or raise the weight and value thresholds to reduce noise. ## Related rules - [international-order](https://orderbadger.com/kb/international-order/) - [heavy-order-over-5kg](https://orderbadger.com/kb/heavy-order-over-5kg/) - [home-heavy-fragile-combo](https://orderbadger.com/kb/home-heavy-fragile-combo/) ## People also search for WooCommerce flag heavy international orders for cost review | how to avoid unexpected international shipping surcharges WooCommerce | review overseas shipping costs on bulky orders WooCommerce | WooCommerce alert for expensive international parcels by weight --- # How to detect renovation project orders in WooCommerce > Badges large orders spanning 4 or more categories with more than 6 distinct products and a subtotal over £500, identifying likely renovation or project orders that may benefit from dedicated support. ## The problem Large multi-category orders often indicate a customer undertaking a home renovation or project. These orders have complex fulfilment needs and high customer expectations. Without a flag, they receive the same treatment as routine orders and the opportunity for concierge-level support is missed. ## The solution OrderBadger can automatically flag large multi-category orders that suggest a renovation or project. ## Who this is for Home improvement, furniture, interior design, and general merchandise stores where large cross-category orders suggest a project customer who would value dedicated support. ## At a glance - Requires 4+ product categories - More than 6 distinct products - Subtotal threshold: over £500 - Routes to inbox for dedicated support - Badge: Project Order (blue, info) ## How it works Combines three conditions: the order must span 4 or more product categories, contain more than 6 distinct products, and have a subtotal exceeding £500. When all three are true, the order is badged as a project order and appears in your inbox for review. **Recommended action:** Assign a dedicated team member to oversee the order. Proactively contact the customer to confirm requirements, offer delivery coordination, and suggest any missing items. Consider offering a project discount for large orders. ## Rule template > Order spans 4 or more categories and distinct product count is over 6 and subtotal is over £500 **Badge:** Project Order (blue, info) **Inbox:** Yes ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Lower '4 or more categories' to '3 or more categories' if your store has fewer top-level categories and projects spread across three is already significant. - Reduce 'over 6' distinct products to 'over 4' to catch smaller renovation orders that still deserve dedicated attention. - Raise 'over £500' to 'over £750' if £500 orders are routine in your store and you only want to flag the largest projects. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and customer has 0 previous paid orders' to focus on first-time project buyers who may need extra onboarding support. - Add 'and total order weight is over 10 kg' to narrow this to large and heavy project orders that also need special shipping arrangements. ## When this rule matches - **large renovation order:** Order spans 5 categories, has 8 distinct products, and subtotal is £750. All three conditions exceeded. - **boundary 4 categories 7 products:** Order spans exactly 4 categories, has 7 distinct products, and subtotal is £520. All three boundary conditions met. ## When this rule does not match - **three categories below threshold:** Order has 7 distinct products and a subtotal of £600, but only spans 3 categories - below the 4-category threshold. - **few products high value:** Order spans 4 categories and subtotal is £800, but only has 5 distinct products - below the 6-product threshold. - **many products low subtotal:** Order spans 4 categories and has 8 distinct products, but subtotal is only £300 - below the £500 threshold. ## Good to know - Category count is based on the categories assigned to products in WooCommerce. Products with multiple categories may inflate the count. - The thresholds (4 categories, 6 products, £500) are fixed in the rule text. Edit the rule to adjust them for your store. - This is a heuristic - not all large multi-category orders are projects, and some projects may place multiple smaller orders. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Does the subtotal include shipping and tax?** No. The rule checks the subtotal, which is the product total before shipping and tax are added. This gives a clearer picture of the product value in the order. **Q: If a product belongs to multiple categories, does each one count toward the 4-category threshold?** Yes. Category count is based on all categories assigned to each product. A product tagged with both 'Lighting' and 'Smart Home' contributes two distinct categories. **Q: Can I lower the thresholds for smaller stores?** Yes. Edit the rule text to change the category count, product count, or subtotal thresholds. For example, change to 3 categories, 4 products, and £300 to match your typical project orders. **Q: Why does this use subtotal instead of order total?** Subtotal excludes shipping and tax, giving a more accurate measure of the product value. A large shipping fee on a small order should not inflate the order into project territory. ## Related rules - [order-spans-3-categories](https://orderbadger.com/kb/order-spans-3-categories/) - [order-total-over-100](https://orderbadger.com/kb/order-total-over-100/) - [distinct-products-over-2](https://orderbadger.com/kb/distinct-products-over-2/) ## People also search for WooCommerce flag large multi-category orders as project orders | how to identify home renovation orders in WooCommerce | detect project-size orders spanning many categories WooCommerce | WooCommerce offer concierge support for big project purchases | flag complex multi-department orders WooCommerce --- # How to spot repeat deliveries to the same postcode in WooCommerce > Badges orders where the destination postcode has received more than 2 previous orders and the customer has 3 or more previous paid orders, identifying frequent same-postcode deliveries that may benefit from grouped shipping or local discounts. ## The problem When a loyal customer repeatedly orders to the same postcode, there may be opportunities for delivery consolidation, local courier partnerships, or loyalty rewards. Without a flag, these patterns go unnoticed and cost-saving or retention opportunities are missed. ## The solution OrderBadger can flag orders from loyal customers who repeatedly ship to the same postcode area. ## Who this is for Home goods, grocery, and subscription stores with repeat customers who order regularly to the same address, especially in areas where grouped or local delivery could reduce costs. ## At a glance - Registered customers with 3+ prior orders - More than 2 previous orders to same postcode - Identifies grouped delivery opportunities - Badge: Repeat Postcode (grey, info) ## How it works Combines two conditions: more than 2 previous orders must have been shipped to the same destination postcode, and the customer must have 3 or more previous paid orders. This identifies habitual same-address deliveries from established customers. **Recommended action:** Consider offering local delivery options, grouped shipping discounts, or loyalty rewards for repeat deliveries. If the postcode represents a business address, explore trade or bulk pricing opportunities. ## Rule template > Previous orders to same postcode count is more than 2 and customer has 3 or more previous paid orders **Badge:** Repeat Postcode (grey, info) ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Raise 'more than 2' previous postcode orders to 'more than 5' if you only want to flag highly concentrated delivery clusters. - Lower '3 or more previous paid orders' to '2 or more previous paid orders' to catch customers earlier in their repeat pattern. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and order total is over £50' to focus on meaningful repeat deliveries rather than small add-on orders. - Add 'and shipping is not international' to limit this to domestic deliveries where local courier consolidation is feasible. ## When this rule matches - **loyal customer frequent postcode:** Customer has 5 previous paid orders and 4 previous orders to the same postcode. Both conditions exceeded. - **boundary 3 orders 3 postcode:** Customer has exactly 3 previous paid orders and 3 previous orders to the same postcode. Both boundary conditions met (postcode count is more than 2, order count is 3 or more). ## When this rule does not match - **loyal customer new postcode:** Customer has 6 previous paid orders but only 1 previous order to this postcode - below the more-than-2 threshold. - **new customer repeat postcode:** Postcode has 5 previous orders but this customer has only 2 previous paid orders - below the 3-order threshold. - **boundary 2 postcode exact:** Customer has 4 previous paid orders but exactly 2 previous orders to this postcode. The rule requires more than 2, so the boundary does not pass. ## Good to know - Postcode matching is based on the full postcode string. Different addresses within the same postcode area all count towards the total. - The postcode count includes orders from all customers, not just the current one. A popular delivery area may inflate the count. - Guest checkouts are excluded from the customer order count condition. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Does the postcode count include orders from other customers to the same postcode?** Yes. The previous_orders_to_same_postcode_count tracks all orders to that postcode regardless of customer. However, the second condition ensures the current customer is also a repeat buyer. **Q: Will exactly 2 previous orders to the same postcode trigger the badge?** No. The rule requires more than 2 previous orders to the same postcode. The badge appears starting at the 3rd previous order to that postcode. **Q: How does this differ from the repeat-destination-postcode rule?** The repeat-destination-postcode rule only checks postcode frequency. This rule adds a second condition requiring the customer to have 3+ previous orders, so it only flags established customers with a repeat delivery pattern. ## Related rules - [repeat-destination-postcode](https://orderbadger.com/kb/repeat-destination-postcode/) - [loyal-customer-5-plus-orders](https://orderbadger.com/kb/loyal-customer-5-plus-orders/) ## People also search for WooCommerce detect frequent deliveries to same address area | how to identify grouped delivery opportunities WooCommerce | flag repeat postcode orders for local courier discount WooCommerce | WooCommerce consolidate deliveries to recurring postcodes --- # How to automatically flag international orders in WooCommerce > Automatically badges international orders so your team can handle customs documentation, carrier selection, and shipping cost differences before dispatch. ## The problem International orders often need different packaging, customs declarations, or carrier choices. If they are not visually flagged, warehouse staff may process them identically to domestic orders and cause delays or returns. ## The solution OrderBadger can automatically flag any order shipping outside your store's home country. ## Who this is for Any store that ships internationally - especially those with mixed domestic and international volume where international orders need different handling. ## At a glance - Fires on all non-domestic shipping destinations - Based on store base country comparison - No value or weight thresholds - Badge: International (purple, info) ## How it works Adds a badge to orders where the shipping destination country differs from your WooCommerce store's base country. The check uses the derived is_international field computed at evaluation time. **Recommended action:** Ensure customs declarations are prepared, select an appropriate international carrier, and check whether any products have export restrictions. ## Rule template > The order is being shipped internationally outside the home country **Badge:** International (purple, info) ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - This rule has no numeric threshold to tune. If it triggers too often, consider replacing it with a more targeted version using a specific destination country or region. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and order total is over £100' to skip low-value international orders that can be handled with standard processes. - Add 'and total order weight is over 2 kg' to focus on international shipments heavy enough to incur carrier surcharges or customs attention. - Add 'and at least one product is in the Food or Supplements category' to flag international orders that may face import restrictions on consumables. ## When this rule matches - **shipping to us:** Order ships to US which differs from the store's base country (GB), so is_international is true. - **shipping to de:** Order ships to Germany which differs from the store's base country. ## When this rule does not match - **domestic gb order:** Order ships to GB which matches the store's base country, so is_international is false. ## Good to know - The home country is determined by your WooCommerce store settings. If your store base country is wrong, the international flag will be incorrect. - This does not distinguish between nearby and distant international destinations. Use shipping zone rules for more granular control. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: How does the rule determine my store's home country?** It uses your WooCommerce store base country from Settings > General. If that setting is wrong, international detection will be incorrect. **Q: Will orders to the Channel Islands or other UK territories be flagged as international?** It depends on the shipping country code. If the destination uses a different ISO country code than your store base (e.g. JE or GG vs GB), it will be flagged as international. **Q: Can I flag only specific countries instead of all international orders?** This rule flags all non-domestic orders. For country-specific flagging, create a custom rule that checks for the exact destination country code you want to target. ## People also search for WooCommerce badge all international orders automatically | how to separate international from domestic orders in WooCommerce | flag overseas orders for customs paperwork WooCommerce | WooCommerce identify cross-border shipments at a glance | automatically detect international shipping in WooCommerce orders --- # How to flag heavily discounted items in WooCommerce orders > Automatically badges orders where any line item has been discounted by more than 30%, helping your team spot excessive discounts that may indicate coupon abuse or pricing errors. ## The problem Heavy discounts on individual line items can erode margins and may indicate coupon stacking, pricing mistakes, or abuse. Without a flag, these orders are processed at a loss before anyone notices. ## The solution OrderBadger can flag orders where any individual item has been discounted beyond a percentage you choose. ## Who this is for Stores that run promotions, coupons, or dynamic pricing - especially those with staff who can apply manual discounts and need oversight. ## At a glance - Checks per-line-item discount percentage - Threshold: any item discounted over 30% - Includes both sale prices and coupon discounts - Badge: Item Discount (red, warning) ## How it works Inspects the per-line-item discount percentage for every product in the order. If any single item exceeds the 30% discount threshold, the order receives a badge so you can review whether the discount is legitimate. **Recommended action:** Check which coupon or discount mechanism was applied. Verify that the discount was intentional and within your promotion policy. If it looks like abuse, consider cancelling or adjusting the order. ## Rule template > Any item in the order has been discounted by more than 30% **Badge:** Item Discount (red, warning) ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Lower '30%' to '20%' if your margins are tight and even moderate discounts should be reviewed. - Raise '30%' to '50%' if you regularly run deep sales and only want to flag the most extreme discounts that could indicate errors or abuse. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and order total is over £200' to focus on heavily discounted items in large orders where the margin impact is most significant. - Add 'and customer has 0 previous paid orders' to flag first-time buyers who may be exploiting promotional codes, while ignoring discounts given to returning customers. ## When this rule matches - **one item 40 percent off:** The Widget has a 40% line discount which exceeds the 30% threshold. - **item 50 percent off:** The Gadget has a 50% line discount, well above the 30% threshold. ## When this rule does not match - **only 10 percent discount:** The maximum discount on any item is 10%, which is well below the 30% threshold. - **exactly 30 percent boundary:** The discount is exactly 30% which does not exceed the threshold (rule says 'more than 30%'). - **no discount at all:** No items have any discount applied, so the condition is not met. ## Good to know - The discount percentage is calculated per line item. An order-level coupon spread across many items may not trigger this rule even if the total discount is large. - This does not distinguish between automatic sale prices and manually applied discounts. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Does the 30% threshold apply per item or to the whole order's discount?** Per item. The rule checks each line item's individual discount percentage. An order-level coupon spread thinly across many items may not trigger it even if the total savings are large. **Q: Will WooCommerce sale prices trigger this rule, or only coupon discounts?** Both. The rule does not distinguish between automatic sale prices and manually applied coupons - any mechanism that produces a line discount above the threshold will trigger it. The 30% figure can be adjusted in the rule text. **Q: What if an item is exactly 30% off?** It will not trigger. The rule requires the discount to be strictly more than 30%, so exactly 30% is treated as within acceptable range. Edit the rule text to adjust this threshold or switch to 'at least 30%' if you want to include the boundary. **Q: Can I lower the threshold to catch smaller discounts?** Yes. Edit the rule text and change 30% to your preferred threshold. This is useful if your margins are tight and even 20% discounts need review. ## Related rules - [order-total-over-100](https://orderbadger.com/kb/order-total-over-100/) ## People also search for WooCommerce alert for orders with deep discounts on line items | how to detect coupon abuse or pricing errors in WooCommerce | flag items discounted over 30 percent WooCommerce | WooCommerce review orders with excessive discounts automatically | catch pricing mistakes on discounted products WooCommerce --- # How to include safety recall cards with toy orders in WooCommerce > Badges orders containing Toys or Baby Equipment products shipped to registered customers, reminding your team to include a product safety recall registration card in the shipment. ## The problem Toys and baby equipment are subject to safety recalls more frequently than other product categories. If a recall registration card is not included in the shipment, the customer has no way to be notified of a future recall, exposing both the child and your business to risk. ## The solution OrderBadger can flag orders containing safety-sensitive children's products so your team remembers to include recall registration cards. ## Who this is for Retailers selling toys, baby equipment, or children's safety products who are required or choose to include recall registration cards with applicable shipments. ## At a glance - Checks Toys or Baby Equipment categories - Physical items only, excludes digital - Registered customers only, excludes guests - Prompts recall registration card inclusion - Badge: Safety Card (yellow, info) ## How it works Checks three conditions: at least one item must be in the Toys or Baby Equipment category, the order must contain a physical item, and the customer must not be a guest checkout. When all three are true, a Safety Card badge appears on the order. **Recommended action:** Include the manufacturer's recall registration card in the shipment. If your store maintains its own recall notification list, ensure the customer's contact details are recorded against the product serial number or batch. ## Rule template > At least one product is in the Toys or Baby Equipment category and order contains a physical item and customer is not a guest checkout **Badge:** Safety Card (yellow, info) ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Replace 'Toys or Baby Equipment' with your exact WooCommerce category names (e.g. 'Children's Toys or Nursery Equipment') to match your catalogue. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'or Electrical' after 'Baby Equipment' to also cover electrical children's products that are subject to safety recalls. - Remove 'and customer is not a guest checkout' if you want to include recall cards in guest orders too, since the card itself does not require an account. ## When this rule matches - **registered customer toys physical:** Registered customer ordering a physical Toys category item - all three conditions met. - **registered customer baby equipment mixed:** Registered customer ordering Baby Equipment alongside other categories - at least one qualifying item is present and order contains a physical item. ## When this rule does not match - **guest checkout toys:** Customer is a guest checkout - the registered customer condition is not met even though the order contains Toys. - **registered customer no qualifying category:** Registered customer with a physical order, but no items are in the Toys or Baby Equipment categories. - **registered customer toys virtual only:** Registered customer with a Toys category item, but the order contains no physical items (e.g. digital download toy pattern) - the physical item condition is not met. ## Good to know - Products must be categorised as Toys or Baby Equipment in WooCommerce for the rule to match. Miscategorised products will not trigger the badge. - Guest checkouts are excluded because recall registration typically requires a customer account for follow-up. Consider a separate rule or process for guest orders. - Virtual or downloadable items in Toys categories will not trigger the rule due to the physical item requirement. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Why are guest checkouts excluded from this rule?** Recall registration cards are most useful when tied to a known customer account for follow-up notifications. Guest checkouts lack persistent contact details, though you may want a separate rule to handle them differently. **Q: My store uses 'Children's Toys' as the category name - will this rule still match?** No. The rule matches the exact category names 'Toys' and 'Baby Equipment'. Edit the rule text to use your actual WooCommerce category names and recompile. **Q: Does this rule check for specific recalled products?** No. This is a category-level flag that reminds your team to include a recall registration card. It does not check against any specific recall database. **Q: Can I extend this to cover other safety-sensitive categories like Electrical or Cosmetics?** Yes. Edit the rule text to add additional category names (e.g. 'Toys or Baby Equipment or Electrical') and recompile. ## Related rules - [has-electronics-category](https://orderbadger.com/kb/has-electronics-category/) - [contains-virtual-item](https://orderbadger.com/kb/contains-virtual-item/) ## People also search for WooCommerce remind staff to include recall card with toy orders | how to flag children's product orders for safety compliance WooCommerce | safety recall registration card for baby equipment orders WooCommerce | WooCommerce compliance badge for toys and baby products --- # How to flag lapsed customers returning after 60 days in WooCommerce > Badges orders from customers whose last paid order was more than 60 days ago, helping you identify returning lapsed buyers and trigger win-back actions. ## The problem When a previously active customer returns after a long gap, it is a win-back opportunity. Without a flag, the order looks like any other and the chance for re-engagement is missed. ## The solution OrderBadger can automatically flag orders from lapsed customers who have not purchased recently. ## Who this is for Stores with repeat purchase cycles - consumables, fashion, food, and any business where customer recency matters for retention strategy. ## At a glance - Registered customers only - Threshold: no order in more than 60 days - Based on last paid order date - Category: customer win-back - Badge: Lapsed (yellow, info) ## How it works Adds a Lapsed badge to orders from registered customers whose most recent paid order was more than 60 days ago. This highlights win-back opportunities as soon as a dormant customer returns. **Recommended action:** Include a welcome-back message or discount code with the order. Consider adding the customer to a re-engagement email sequence to encourage continued activity. ## Rule template > Customer has not placed an order in more than 60 days **Badge:** Lapsed (yellow, info) ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Shorten '60 days' to '30 days' if your products have a short repurchase cycle (e.g. coffee, pet food) and a 30-day gap already signals lapse. - Extend '60 days' to '90 days' if your products are seasonal or have a longer natural reorder window. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and order total is over £50' to focus on meaningful win-back purchases and ignore small re-engagement orders. - Add 'and customer has 3 or more previous paid orders' to only flag lapsed customers who were previously loyal, not one-time buyers who drifted away. ## When this rule matches - **customer 90 days since last order:** Customer last ordered 90 days ago, exceeding the 60-day lapse threshold. - **customer 180 days since last order:** Customer last ordered 180 days ago, well beyond the 60-day lapse threshold. ## When this rule does not match - **customer 30 days since last order:** Customer last ordered 30 days ago, within the 60-day active window. - **customer 60 days exact boundary:** Customer last ordered exactly 60 days ago. The rule says 'more than 60 days', so the boundary does not pass. - **guest checkout null recency:** Guest checkout has no customer account, so days_since_last_paid_order is null and cannot satisfy the condition. ## Good to know - Guest checkouts are excluded - recency tracking requires a registered customer account. - First-time buyers have no previous order date, so they will not trigger this rule. Use the first-time-registered-buyer rule instead. - The 60-day threshold is fixed in the rule text. Edit the rule to change the lapse period. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Will first-time customers trigger the lapsed badge?** No. First-time buyers have no previous order date, so the days-since calculation has no value to compare. Use the first-time-registered-buyer rule for new customers. **Q: If a customer last ordered exactly 60 days ago, will they be flagged?** No. The rule requires more than 60 days, so exactly 60 days does not meet the threshold. You can adjust the number of days in the rule text to match your store's typical repurchase cycle. **Q: Can I change the lapse period to 30 or 90 days instead?** Yes. Edit the rule text and replace 60 with your preferred number of days. Choose a period that matches your typical repurchase cycle. **Q: Does the 60-day count include cancelled or refunded orders?** No. The rule checks days since the last paid order, so cancelled and refunded orders are not counted as recent activity. ## Related rules - [customer-reactivated-after-180d](https://orderbadger.com/kb/customer-reactivated-after-180d/) - [loyal-customer-5-plus-orders](https://orderbadger.com/kb/loyal-customer-5-plus-orders/) - [first-time-registered-buyer](https://orderbadger.com/kb/first-time-registered-buyer/) ## People also search for WooCommerce alert when inactive customer places a new order | how to detect returning lapsed customers in WooCommerce | flag dormant buyers who come back after 60 days WooCommerce | WooCommerce win-back opportunity alert for lapsed customers | identify customers who stopped ordering and came back WooCommerce --- # How to spot lapsed buyers repurchasing favourites in WooCommerce > Identifies returning customers who have been away for over 60 days and are repurchasing a product they have bought before at a discount - a strong win-back signal worth acting on. ## The problem When a lapsed customer comes back to repurchase a familiar product at a discount, it signals re-engagement. Without flagging this, the order is processed like any other and the win-back opportunity is missed. ## The solution OrderBadger can detect when a lapsed customer returns to repurchase a discounted favourite. ## Who this is for Subscription and consumable brands, stores running win-back campaigns, and any shop that wants to recognise returning customers. ## At a glance - Registered customers only - Inactive for over 60 days - Repurchasing a previously bought product - That item discounted by more than 15% - Badge: Returning Favourite (teal, info) ## How it works Combines three conditions: the customer must have been inactive for over 60 days, at least one item must have been purchased before, and that same item must be discounted by more than 15%. All three must be true on the same line item. **Recommended action:** Consider a personalised thank-you note acknowledging their return. This is a strong re-engagement signal worth nurturing. ## Rule template > A registered customer who has not ordered in more than 60 days, buying at least one product they have previously purchased, at a discount of more than 15% on that item **Badge:** Returning Favourite (teal, info) **Inbox:** Yes ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Shorten '60 days' to '45 days' if your repurchase cycle is fast and even a 6-week gap counts as lapsed. - Raise '15%' to '25%' if you only want to flag deeper discounts that clearly indicate a targeted win-back offer rather than routine sales. - Lower '15%' to '10%' to catch smaller promotional discounts that might still signal a win-back campaign brought the customer back. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and order total is over £30' to skip trivially small repurchases that are unlikely to indicate meaningful re-engagement. - Remove 'at a discount of more than 15% on that item' if you want to flag all lapsed customers repurchasing a favourite, regardless of whether a discount was involved. ## When this rule matches - **lapsed 90d repeat item 25 off:** Customer lapsed 90 days, repurchasing a favourite (prev=3) at 25% off - all three conditions met. - **lapsed 180d one repeat 20 off:** Customer dormant 6 months, one item previously purchased at 20% off. ## When this rule does not match - **recent buyer repeat discounted:** Customer ordered only 30 days ago - not lapsed despite repurchasing at a discount. - **lapsed 90d never bought product:** Customer is lapsed but has never bought this product before (count=0) - not a repurchase. - **lapsed 90d repeat item 10 off:** Customer is lapsed and repurchasing but the discount is only 10% - below the 15% threshold. - **guest checkout lapsed pattern:** Guest checkout cannot satisfy the registered customer condition. ## Good to know - Guest checkouts are excluded. - The discount and lapsed thresholds are fixed in the rule text. - The product repurchase check uses exact product ID matching - it does not match similar products. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Do all three conditions need to be true on the same line item?** The lapsed condition (60+ days) applies to the customer overall, while the repurchase and discount conditions must both be true on the same line item. **Q: If the customer is buying a new product at a discount but also a repeat product at full price, will it trigger?** No. The same line item must be both a previous purchase and discounted by more than 15%. A new discounted product or a full-price repeat product alone will not satisfy the rule. You can adjust the discount percentage in the rule text. **Q: Why is the discount threshold set at 15% instead of a higher value?** A 15% discount is common in win-back campaigns and promotional emails. It captures the typical range of discounts used to lure customers back without flagging trivial price adjustments. Edit the rule text to change it. ## Related rules - [lapsed-customer-60-days](https://orderbadger.com/kb/lapsed-customer-60-days/) - [repeat-product-buyer-3x](https://orderbadger.com/kb/repeat-product-buyer-3x/) - [customer-reactivated-after-180d](https://orderbadger.com/kb/customer-reactivated-after-180d/) ## People also search for WooCommerce detect lapsed customer buying a familiar product at a discount | how to flag win-back repurchases in WooCommerce | identify returning dormant customers reordering favourites WooCommerce | WooCommerce alert for lapsed buyer re-engaging with discounted product --- # How to flag product repurchases after a 90-day gap in WooCommerce > Automatically badges orders where at least one product was last purchased by this customer more than 90 days ago, indicating a lapsed buyer who has returned and may benefit from a win-back experience. ## The problem When a previously regular customer comes back after a long absence, it is a critical retention moment. Without flagging these orders, you miss the chance to acknowledge their return and re-engage them. ## The solution OrderBadger can flag orders where a customer is re-purchasing a specific product after a gap of more than 90 days. ## Who this is for Stores selling consumable or seasonal products where customers are expected to repurchase regularly - supplements, pet supplies, skincare, coffee, and similar. ## At a glance - Checks per-product purchase recency - Threshold: product last bought over 90 days ago - Fires even if customer bought other items recently - Badge: Lapsed Product (yellow, info) ## How it works Checks each line item against the customer's per-product purchase history. If any product was last bought more than 90 days ago, the order is badged as a lapsed product repurchase. This highlights win-back moments you can act on. **Recommended action:** Acknowledge the customer's return with a personalised note or discount code. Consider including a 'what's new' insert for the product or suggesting complementary items they may have missed. ## Rule template > At least one specific product in this order was last purchased by this customer more than 90 days ago **Badge:** Lapsed Product (yellow, info) ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Shorten '90 days' to '60 days' if your products are consumables with a faster expected reorder cycle (e.g. skincare, coffee). - Extend '90 days' to '180 days' for durable or seasonal products where a 3-month gap is normal and not yet a lapse. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and customer has 3 or more previous paid orders' to focus on loyal customers whose product-specific lapse is most worth addressing. - Add 'and the item has a discount of more than 10%' to narrow this to lapsed product buyers who came back because of a promotional offer. ## When this rule matches - **last purchase 120 days ago:** The Widget was last purchased 120 days ago, which exceeds the 90-day lapse threshold. - **last purchase over a year:** The Widget was last purchased 400 days ago, well over the 90-day threshold. ## When this rule does not match - **last purchase 30 days:** The most recent product purchase was only 30 days ago, well within the 90-day window. - **exactly 90 days boundary:** The last purchase was exactly 90 days ago, which does not exceed the threshold (rule says 'more than 90 days'). - **never bought null:** The customer has never bought this product before so there is no previous purchase date - null does not meet the lapse condition. - **guest checkout null:** Guest orders have no purchase history, so days since last purchase is null and the lapse condition cannot be evaluated. ## Good to know - The days-since calculation relies on WooCommerce order history. Imported or migrated orders may not have accurate dates. - Products the customer has never purchased before will have a null value and will not trigger this rule - use the first-time-buying-product rule for those. - Guest orders have no history and cannot trigger this rule. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: How is this different from the lapsed-customer-60-days rule?** The lapsed-customer rule looks at when the customer last ordered anything. This rule checks when the customer last purchased a specific product, so it fires even if they have been buying other items regularly. **Q: If a customer has never bought the product before, will it trigger?** No. First-time product purchases have a null value for days since last purchase and will not trigger this rule. Use the first-time-buying-product rule for those. **Q: Will imported or migrated orders affect the 90-day calculation?** Only if the imported orders have accurate dates in WooCommerce. Orders with missing or incorrect dates may produce unreliable lapse calculations. **Q: Does the rule fire if only one product in a multi-item order is lapsed?** Yes. If at least one line item was last purchased more than 90 days ago, the entire order gets badged - even if other items were bought recently. ## Related rules - [first-time-buying-product](https://orderbadger.com/kb/first-time-buying-product/) - [repeat-product-buyer-3x](https://orderbadger.com/kb/repeat-product-buyer-3x/) ## People also search for WooCommerce alert when customer re-buys a product after long gap | how to detect lapsed product repurchases in WooCommerce | flag customers returning to buy the same product after 90 days WooCommerce | WooCommerce identify product-specific lapsed buyer retention moments --- # How to flag late-night orders for review in WooCommerce > Automatically badges orders placed after 10pm in the store's local timezone, which may warrant additional review since late-night orders have a higher incidence of impulsive purchases or fraudulent activity. ## The problem Orders placed late at night can indicate impulsive buying that leads to cancellations, or in some cases, fraudulent transactions. Without a flag, these orders are processed identically to daytime orders and any issues are only discovered after dispatch. ## The solution OrderBadger can automatically flag orders placed after 10pm in your local timezone. ## Who this is for Stores that experience higher cancellation or fraud rates on late-night orders, or any store that wants to segment orders by time of day for operational insights. ## At a glance - Uses store WordPress timezone - Fires on orders placed at 10pm or later - All customers and order values eligible - Badge: Late Night (purple, info) ## How it works Checks the hour of order placement in the store's local timezone. If the order was placed at 10pm or later, it receives a badge. This lets you identify late-night orders for additional review or operational segmentation. **Recommended action:** Review late-night orders for signs of impulsive purchasing or unusual payment details before dispatch. Consider whether a brief delay before processing would reduce cancellation rates. ## Rule template > The order was placed after 10pm local time **Badge:** Late Night (purple, info) ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Change '10pm' to '11pm' if 10pm orders are normal for your customer base and you only want to flag truly late activity. - Change '10pm' to '9pm' if your fraud or cancellation patterns start earlier in the evening. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and order total is over £200' to only flag high-value late-night orders where impulsive or fraudulent risk matters most. - Add 'and customer has 0 previous paid orders' to narrow this to late-night orders from unknown first-time customers, a stronger fraud signal. ## When this rule matches - **order at 11pm:** The order was placed at hour 23 (11pm), which is after 10pm. - **order at 10pm:** The order was placed at hour 22 (10pm), which meets the 'after 10pm' condition as the hour has started. ## When this rule does not match - **order at 9pm:** The order was placed at hour 21 (9pm), which is before 10pm. - **order at midday:** The order was placed at hour 12 (midday), well before 10pm. ## Good to know - The local hour is based on the WordPress timezone setting. Ensure your store timezone is correctly configured. - This does not account for customer timezone - only the store's local time is used. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Whose timezone is used - the customer's or the store's?** The store's WordPress timezone setting. The customer's local time is not considered, so a customer ordering at 8pm in a different timezone could still be flagged if it is after 10pm in your store's timezone. **Q: Does the rule cover early morning hours like 1am-5am, or only 10pm-midnight?** As written, it covers 10pm onward (hours 22 and 23). Orders placed between midnight and the morning are hour 0-5 and would not be flagged. Edit the rule to add an early-morning window if needed. **Q: Can I change the cutoff to a different time, like 9pm or 11pm?** Yes. Edit the rule text and replace 10pm with your preferred time. The rule will recompile with the new hour threshold. ## Related rules - [outside-business-hours](https://orderbadger.com/kb/outside-business-hours/) - [weekend-order](https://orderbadger.com/kb/weekend-order/) ## People also search for WooCommerce flag orders placed after 10pm for review | how to catch impulsive late-night purchases in WooCommerce | detect after-hours orders that might be fraud in WooCommerce | WooCommerce alert for orders placed at unusual times | review overnight orders before dispatch WooCommerce --- # How to track repeat purchases from new customers in WooCommerce > Badges orders from customers whose account is fewer than 30 days old but who have already placed at least one previous paid order with a total over £30 - highlighting engaged new buyers in the critical onboarding window who are worth nurturing into long-term loyalty. ## The problem The first 30 days after registration are the most important window for converting a new customer into a loyal one. A second order during this period is a strong signal of engagement, but without a flag it blends into the queue and the team misses the chance to reinforce the relationship. ## The solution OrderBadger can automatically identify repeat purchases from customers still within their first 30-day onboarding period. ## Who this is for Stores focused on customer retention and lifecycle marketing - subscription brands, DTC retailers, and any business that invests in onboarding sequences and wants to identify which new customers are converting into repeat buyers. ## At a glance - Account age under 30 days - At least 1 previous paid order required - Value threshold: order total over £30 - Identifies engaged new repeat buyers - Badge: Onboarding (teal, info) ## How it works Checks three conditions: the customer account is fewer than 30 days old, they have at least 1 previous paid order, and the current order total exceeds £30. This combination identifies engaged new customers who are already repeat-buying during the critical onboarding window. **Recommended action:** Include a personalised thank-you note or a loyalty incentive with the shipment. Consider enrolling the customer in your VIP onboarding email sequence. This is an ideal moment to offer a subscription or reward programme membership. ## Rule template > Customer account age is less than 30 days and customer has 1 or more previous paid orders and order total is over £30 **Badge:** Onboarding (teal, info) ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Widen 'less than 30 days' to 'less than 60 days' if your product cycle means customers typically need more time before reordering. - Narrow 'less than 30 days' to 'less than 14 days' to focus on very early repeat buyers who are most likely to become power customers. - Raise 'over £30' to 'over £50' to limit the badge to more significant repeat purchases. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and customer has 2 or more previous paid orders' to only badge customers who have ordered three or more times within 30 days - the highest-engagement segment. - Add 'and at least one product has been purchased by this customer before' to specifically flag reorders of the same product, a strong subscription candidate signal. ## When this rule matches - **new account second order over 30:** Account is 12 days old (less than 30), has 1 previous paid order, and current order total is £45 (over £30) - all three conditions met. - **very new account multiple orders:** Account is only 5 days old with 2 previous paid orders and a total of £80 - a highly engaged new customer. ## When this rule does not match - **account exactly 30 days boundary:** Account is exactly 30 days old - does not satisfy 'less than 30 days', even though previous orders and total exceed their thresholds. - **new account first order no history:** Account is 8 days old but has 0 previous paid orders - this is the first purchase, not a repeat. - **new account repeat but low value:** New account with a previous order but current total is only £25 - below the £30 threshold. ## Good to know - Guest checkouts are excluded - account age tracking requires a registered customer account. - Account age is measured from registration date, not from the first order date. A customer who registered months ago but only started ordering recently will not qualify. - The 30-day window and value threshold are fixed in the rule text. Edit them to match your onboarding strategy. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Does an account that is exactly 30 days old qualify?** No. The rule uses 'less than 30 days', so an account at exactly 30 days does not qualify. Only accounts aged 0 to 29 days trigger this badge. **Q: Will a first-time order from a new account trigger this rule?** No. The rule requires at least 1 previous paid order. The customer's very first purchase will not fire this badge - it only activates on the second or subsequent order within the 30-day window. **Q: Can I use this to automatically send a thank-you email?** OrderBadger applies the badge but does not send emails directly. Use the badge as a trigger for your email marketing workflow, or manually send a note when you see the Onboarding badge on an order. ## Related rules - [new-account-under-7-days](https://orderbadger.com/kb/new-account-under-7-days/) - [first-time-registered-buyer](https://orderbadger.com/kb/first-time-registered-buyer/) - [loyal-customer-5-plus-orders](https://orderbadger.com/kb/loyal-customer-5-plus-orders/) ## People also search for WooCommerce flag second order from new customer within 30 days | how to identify engaged new buyers in WooCommerce | detect early repeat purchases during onboarding WooCommerce | WooCommerce nurture new customers who order again quickly | spot high-potential new customers in WooCommerce by repeat orders --- # How to celebrate customer anniversaries in WooCommerce > Badges orders from customers whose account age falls between 350 and 380 days and who have 3 or more previous paid orders - identifying loyal buyers placing an order near their one-year anniversary with your store, a milestone worth celebrating. ## The problem A customer's first anniversary is a powerful retention moment. Acknowledging it builds emotional loyalty and reduces churn. Without a flag, these anniversary orders pass through unnoticed and the milestone goes uncelebrated - a missed opportunity to deepen the relationship. ## The solution OrderBadger can automatically identify orders placed near a customer's one-year account anniversary, so your team can celebrate the milestone. ## Who this is for Brands and retailers focused on long-term customer relationships - subscription services, lifestyle brands, premium DTC stores, and any business where customer loyalty anniversaries are a natural touchpoint for engagement and reward. ## At a glance - Account age between 350 and 380 days - Requires 3+ previous paid orders - 30-day window around one-year mark - Routes to inbox for celebration action - Badge: Anniversary (purple, info) ## How it works Checks three conditions: the customer's account must be between 350 and 380 days old (a 30-day window around the one-year mark), and they must have 3 or more previous paid orders. The order count condition ensures the badge only fires for genuinely active customers, not dormant accounts that happen to be a year old. **Recommended action:** Include a handwritten thank-you card, a small free gift, or an exclusive anniversary discount code with the shipment. Consider sending a dedicated anniversary email acknowledging their loyalty. This is an ideal moment to invite the customer to a loyalty programme or VIP tier. ## Rule template > Customer account age is more than 350 days and customer account age is less than 380 days and customer has 3 or more previous paid orders **Badge:** Anniversary (purple, info) **Inbox:** Yes ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Narrow the window to 'more than 360 days and less than 370 days' for a tighter 10-day window closer to the exact anniversary. - Widen the window to 'more than 335 days and less than 400 days' if you want a broader net that catches customers who order slightly before or after their anniversary. - Raise '3 or more previous paid orders' to '5 or more' to focus on your most loyal anniversary customers. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and order total is over £50' to only celebrate anniversary orders above a minimum value, ensuring the gesture is proportionate. - Add 'and customer has 0 previous refunds' to reward loyal customers with a clean track record - no returns, just consistent purchases. ## When this rule matches - **account 365 days loyal customer:** Account is 365 days old (between 350 and 380) and customer has 5 previous paid orders (3 or more) - all conditions met at the anniversary sweet spot. - **account 351 days 3 orders:** Account is 351 days old (just over 350) with exactly 3 previous paid orders - passes at the lower boundary of both the age window and order count. ## When this rule does not match - **account exactly 350 days boundary:** Account is exactly 350 days old - does not satisfy 'more than 350 days', even though the customer has enough paid orders. - **account exactly 380 days boundary:** Account is exactly 380 days old - does not satisfy 'less than 380 days'. The anniversary window has closed. - **anniversary window but only 2 orders:** Account age is 360 days (within the window) but customer has only 2 previous paid orders - below the 3-order threshold for loyal customer status. ## Good to know - Guest checkouts are excluded - account age tracking requires a registered customer account. - The 350-380 day window is approximate and may not align exactly with the calendar anniversary date, depending on when the customer typically orders. - The badge fires once per order within the window. A customer placing multiple orders during the 30-day window will see the badge on each one. - Account age is measured from registration date, not from the first purchase date. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Why is the window 350 to 380 days instead of exactly 365?** Customers rarely order on the exact anniversary date. The 30-day window ensures the badge fires on the first order they place near their one-year mark, rather than requiring a precisely timed purchase. **Q: Will the badge fire for the customer's second anniversary as well?** No. This rule only targets the 350-380 day range. To celebrate the second anniversary, duplicate the rule with a window of 715-745 days. **Q: What if the customer registered a year ago but only started buying recently?** The rule checks both account age and previous paid order count. A dormant account that recently became active will qualify if it is within the anniversary window and has 3 or more paid orders - though this represents a recently reactivated customer rather than a steadily loyal one. **Q: Can I combine this with a loyalty tier or spend-based condition?** Yes. Add conditions like 'and prior gross spend is over £500' to only celebrate anniversary milestones for high-spending loyal customers, creating a tiered recognition approach. ## Related rules - [loyal-customer-5-plus-orders](https://orderbadger.com/kb/loyal-customer-5-plus-orders/) - [customer-reactivated-after-180d](https://orderbadger.com/kb/customer-reactivated-after-180d/) - [high-value-customer-ltv-500](https://orderbadger.com/kb/high-value-customer-ltv-500/) ## People also search for WooCommerce flag loyal customer one-year anniversary orders | how to recognise customer milestones automatically in WooCommerce | celebrate account anniversary with reward in WooCommerce | WooCommerce loyalty milestone badge for anniversary customers | detect first-year anniversary order from repeat customer WooCommerce --- # How to detect at-risk customers losing order frequency in WooCommerce > Badges orders from previously active customers who have not ordered in the last 30 days despite placing five or more orders in the past year, indicating they may be drifting away. ## The problem A customer who ordered frequently and then suddenly stops is at risk of churning. Without a flag on their next order, your team cannot distinguish a returning at-risk customer from a regular buyer and may miss the critical window to re-engage them before they leave for good. ## The solution OrderBadger can flag orders from previously frequent customers who are showing signs of declining engagement. ## Who this is for Stores with repeat-purchase products - consumables, supplements, pet food, beauty, and subscription-adjacent businesses where order frequency is a key health metric. ## At a glance - 5+ orders in the past year required - Last order more than 45 days ago - Zero orders in the last 30 days - Category: churn prevention - Badge: At Risk (orange, warning) ## How it works Checks three conditions: the customer must have placed five or more orders in the past year, their most recent order must be more than 45 days ago, and they must have zero orders in the last 30 days. When all three are true, the order is badged and sent to the inbox so your team can take retention action. **Recommended action:** Include a personal win-back message or an exclusive returning-customer offer with the order. Add the customer to a re-engagement email sequence. Consider reaching out directly if they are a high-value account. ## Rule template > Customer has 5 or more orders in the last 365 days and days since last order is more than 45 and customer placed 0 orders in the last 30 days **Badge:** At Risk (orange, warning) **Inbox:** Yes ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Change 'more than 45' to 'more than 30' for stores with faster reorder cycles where even a month of silence is concerning. - Lower '5 or more orders in the last 365 days' to '3 or more' to catch at-risk behaviour in less frequent but still regular buyers. - Raise 'more than 45' to 'more than 90' for stores where customers typically order quarterly. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and order total is less than customer average order value' to narrow the badge to returning at-risk customers who are also spending less - a double warning signal. - Add 'and customer is not a guest checkout' explicitly if you want the registered-account requirement to be visible in the rule text. ## When this rule matches - **frequent buyer gone quiet 50 days:** Customer placed 7 orders in the last 365 days but their last order was 50 days ago and they have 0 orders in the last 30 days - all three conditions met. - **frequent buyer boundary 5 orders 46 days:** Customer has exactly 5 orders in the last 365 days, last order was 46 days ago (just over the 45-day threshold), and 0 orders in the last 30 days. ## When this rule does not match - **frequent buyer recent order:** Customer has 6 orders in the last 365 days and last order was 50 days ago, but they have 1 order in the last 30 days - they are still active. - **too few annual orders:** Customer has only 3 orders in the last 365 days. Even though last order was 60 days ago and they have 0 recent orders, they were never frequent enough to qualify. - **frequent buyer last order within 45 days:** Customer has 8 orders in the last 365 days and 0 orders in the last 30 days, but their last order was only 40 days ago - within the 45-day window. ## Good to know - This rule fires on the order itself, meaning the customer has already placed an order. It identifies at-risk customers who are returning after a gap, not customers who have stopped ordering entirely. - Guest checkouts have no order history tracking, so this rule cannot evaluate guest buyers. - The 45-day and 30-day thresholds are best suited for stores where customers order monthly. Adjust for your purchase cycle. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: If the customer has already placed a new order, are they really at risk?** The badge flags that this customer was drifting - they were frequent but then went quiet. The current order is a win-back moment: the gap before it signals risk, and your response to this order can determine whether they stay or leave again. **Q: Can I adjust the 45-day gap to match my store's typical reorder cycle?** Yes. Edit the rule text to change '45' to your preferred number of days. Stores with weekly reorders might use 14 days, while stores with quarterly cycles might use 90. **Q: Does the orders_last_365d count include the current order?** No. The derived fields reflect the customer's history up to but not including the order being evaluated. The current order is what triggered the evaluation, not part of the count. **Q: Will this rule fire for a customer placing their very first order?** No. A first-time customer has zero orders in the last 365 days, which does not meet the five-order minimum. This rule targets previously frequent buyers only. ## Related rules - [lapsed-customer-60-days](https://orderbadger.com/kb/lapsed-customer-60-days/) - [customer-reactivated-after-180d](https://orderbadger.com/kb/customer-reactivated-after-180d/) - [loyal-customer-5-plus-orders](https://orderbadger.com/kb/loyal-customer-5-plus-orders/) ## People also search for WooCommerce flag frequent customers who stopped ordering | how to catch churning customers before they leave WooCommerce | detect declining order frequency for repeat buyers WooCommerce | WooCommerce alert when loyal customer goes quiet | identify at-risk customers showing reduced engagement WooCommerce --- # How to spot loyal customers increasing their spend in WooCommerce > Badges orders where a loyal customer with five or more previous orders places an order above their historical average and over £100, indicating growing engagement and spend. ## The problem When a loyal customer increases their spend, it signals deepening trust and expanding needs. Without visibility into this behaviour, your team treats every repeat order the same and misses the chance to reinforce the upward trajectory with a thank-you, upsell, or loyalty reward. ## The solution OrderBadger can automatically spot when a loyal customer spends more than their historical average on a new order. ## Who this is for Stores with a returning customer base where average order value matters - subscription brands, fashion retailers, premium food and drink, and any business that tracks customer lifetime value. ## At a glance - Requires 5+ previous paid orders - Current order exceeds customer average - Floor threshold: order total over £100 - Category: customer growth signal - Badge: Spending Up (green, info) ## How it works Evaluates three conditions together: the customer must have at least five previous paid orders, the current order total must be greater than their average order value, and the order total must exceed £100. When all three are true, a Spending Up badge appears on the order to highlight the positive trend. **Recommended action:** Consider including a thank-you note, a loyalty reward, or a targeted upsell offer. Use the badge as a signal to your marketing team that this customer segment is worth nurturing with exclusive previews or early access. ## Rule template > Order total is greater than customer average order value and customer has 5 or more previous paid orders and order total is over £100 **Badge:** Spending Up (green, info) ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Lower 'over £100' to 'over £50' if your store's typical basket size is smaller and you want to capture spend growth at lower values. - Raise '5 or more previous paid orders' to '10 or more' to restrict the badge to your most established customers only. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and it is not peak season' to isolate genuine spend growth from seasonal inflation - customers naturally spend more during holidays. - Add 'and distinct product count is 3 or more' to focus on customers who are both spending more and exploring more of your catalogue. ## When this rule matches - **loyal customer above average and threshold:** Customer has 8 previous paid orders with an average of £75. Current order total of £120 exceeds both the £75 average and the £100 threshold. - **loyal customer boundary 5 orders:** Customer has exactly 5 previous paid orders with an average of £95. Current order total of £140 exceeds the average and the £100 floor. ## When this rule does not match - **loyal customer below average:** Customer has 7 previous paid orders and the total of £110 is over £100, but their average order value is £130 - the current order is below their average. - **above average but too few orders:** Order total of £150 exceeds the customer's average of £90, but the customer has only 3 previous paid orders - below the 5-order loyalty threshold. - **loyal above average but under 100:** Customer has 6 previous paid orders and the total of £85 exceeds their average of £60, but the order total does not exceed the £100 floor. ## Good to know - The average order value is a derived field calculated from completed orders only. Pending or refunded orders are excluded from the average. - Guest checkouts have no order history, so this rule will never fire for guests. - The £100 floor means that even if a customer's average is very low, a small uplift order under £100 will not trigger the badge. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Does the average order value include the current order being evaluated?** No. The average is calculated from previous completed orders only. The current order is compared against the historical average, not included in it. **Q: Can I lower the loyalty threshold from 5 to 3 orders for stores with fewer repeat buyers?** Yes. Edit the rule text and change '5 or more' to '3 or more'. A lower threshold casts a wider net but includes customers with less established spending patterns. **Q: Why is there a minimum order total of £100 in addition to the average comparison?** The £100 floor prevents the badge from firing on trivially small orders. A customer with an average of £15 placing a £20 order is technically spending up, but it is not operationally meaningful. The floor ensures only substantial orders are flagged. ## Related rules - [loyal-customer-5-plus-orders](https://orderbadger.com/kb/loyal-customer-5-plus-orders/) - [high-avg-order-value](https://orderbadger.com/kb/high-avg-order-value/) - [order-total-over-100](https://orderbadger.com/kb/order-total-over-100/) ## People also search for WooCommerce detect when repeat customer spends more than usual | how to flag increasing average order value for loyal buyers WooCommerce | identify customers with growing spend in WooCommerce | WooCommerce badge for loyal customer spending above their average | reward customers whose orders are getting bigger WooCommerce --- # How to get low stock alerts from orders in WooCommerce > Automatically badges orders where at least one product will have 2 or fewer units remaining after fulfilment, giving your team an early warning to reorder before stock runs out. ## The problem When a product drops to critically low stock after an order, the next customer may face out-of-stock disappointment. Without a proactive alert, replenishment happens too late and you lose sales. ## The solution OrderBadger can flag orders that will leave a product at critically low stock levels. ## Who this is for Any WooCommerce store managing physical inventory - especially stores with long restocking lead times or products that sell in bursts. ## At a glance - Checks projected stock after fulfilment - Threshold: 2 or fewer units remaining - Includes Reordered/Noted interaction buttons - Routes to inbox for replenishment action - Badge: Low Stock (red, warning) ## How it works Checks each line item's projected remaining stock after the order is fulfilled. If any product will have 2 or fewer units left, the order is badged so you can initiate replenishment before a stockout occurs. **Recommended action:** Review your supplier reorder schedule for the flagged products. Place a replenishment order or adjust the product's stock status to prevent overselling. ## Rule template > At least one product will have 2 or fewer units remaining in stock after this order is placed **Badge:** Low Stock (red, warning) **Inbox:** Yes **Interaction:** Reordered / Noted ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Raise '2 or fewer units' to '5 or fewer units' if your supplier lead times are long and you need more buffer before a stockout. - Lower '2 or fewer units' to '0 units' if you only want to be alerted when a product is completely depleted after the order. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and at least one product is in the Best Sellers category' to prioritise stock alerts on your highest-demand products. - Add 'and order total is over £100' to focus stock warnings on larger orders where running out has a bigger revenue impact. ## When this rule matches - **one unit remaining:** After this order, the Widget will have only 1 unit left which is below the threshold of 2. - **zero units remaining:** After this order, the Widget will have 0 units left - completely depleted. - **two units boundary:** After this order, the Gadget will have exactly 2 units left which is at the threshold boundary (2 or fewer). ## When this rule does not match - **ten units remaining:** After this order, 10 units remain which is well above the threshold. - **three units just above:** After this order, 3 units remain which is just above the threshold of 2. ## Good to know - The stock remaining calculation is based on current WooCommerce stock levels at evaluation time. Concurrent orders may change the actual remaining count. - Products without stock management enabled will not have a stock_remaining_after_order value and will not trigger this rule. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Does the stock check account for other pending orders that haven't been fulfilled yet?** The stock remaining value is based on WooCommerce's current stock count at evaluation time. Other pending orders that have already reduced stock will be reflected, but concurrent orders placed at the same moment may not be. **Q: What if I don't use WooCommerce stock management for some products?** Products without stock management enabled will not have a stock_remaining_after_order value and will never trigger this rule. Enable stock management on products you want monitored. **Q: Can I raise the threshold from 2 units to something higher, like 5 or 10?** Yes. Edit the rule text and change the threshold number. Stores with longer supplier lead times often benefit from a higher reorder threshold. **Q: What do the Reordered and Noted buttons do on the inbox item?** They let you record your response to the low-stock alert. 'Reordered' indicates you have placed a replenishment order; 'Noted' means you have acknowledged it without immediate action. ## Related rules - [contains-backorder-item](https://orderbadger.com/kb/contains-backorder-item/) ## People also search for WooCommerce alert when order leaves product at low stock | how to detect critically low inventory after an order in WooCommerce | flag orders that deplete stock to reorder level WooCommerce | WooCommerce proactive restock warning on order placement | prevent stockouts with order-triggered inventory alerts WooCommerce --- # How to badge loyal repeat customers in WooCommerce > Badges orders from customers who have placed five or more paid orders in the past, giving your team instant visibility into loyal repeat buyers. ## The problem Loyal customers who order repeatedly deserve recognition, but without a visual flag they look the same as any other buyer in your orders list. Missing loyal customers means missed opportunities for VIP treatment. ## The solution OrderBadger can automatically identify loyal customers who have placed five or more orders. ## Who this is for Stores with a returning customer base - subscription brands, consumables, fashion, and any store that values repeat business. ## At a glance - Registered customers only - Threshold: 5 or more previous paid orders - Excludes guest checkouts - Current order not counted in total - Badge: Repeat Customer (blue, info) ## How it works Adds a Repeat Customer badge to orders from registered customers whose previous paid order count is five or higher. This lets your team instantly spot loyal buyers and treat them accordingly. **Recommended action:** Consider offering loyalty discounts, priority dispatch, or personalised notes to repeat customers. Use the badge to trigger VIP fulfilment workflows. ## Rule template > Customer has placed 5 or more paid orders before this one **Badge:** Repeat Customer (blue, info) ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Lower '5' to '3' if your store has fewer repeat buyers and you want to recognise loyalty earlier. - Raise '5' to '10' to reserve the badge for your most committed long-term customers only. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and order total is over £50' to limit the badge to loyal customers placing meaningful orders rather than every small reorder. - Add 'and customer is not a guest checkout' explicitly if you want to make the registered-account requirement clearer in the rule text. ## When this rule matches - **customer with 5 previous orders:** Customer has exactly 5 previous paid orders, meeting the threshold. - **customer with 12 previous orders:** Customer has 12 previous paid orders, well above the 5-order threshold. ## When this rule does not match - **customer with 2 previous orders:** Customer has only 2 previous paid orders, below the 5-order threshold. - **first order zero previous:** Customer has zero previous paid orders - this is their first order. - **guest checkout null history:** Guest checkout has no customer account, so previous_paid_order_count is null and cannot satisfy the condition. ## Good to know - Guest checkouts are excluded - the rule requires a registered customer account with order history. - Only paid or completed orders count towards the threshold. Pending, failed, or refunded orders are not included. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Will the badge appear on every future order once a customer reaches 5, or can they lose it?** It appears on every subsequent order as long as their previous paid order count stays at 5 or above. Since the count only includes completed orders, a refund wave that drops them below 5 would remove the badge from new orders. **Q: Does the count include the current order or only previous ones?** Only previous orders. The rule checks previous_paid_order_count, so the order being evaluated is not included in the tally. **Q: Can I lower the threshold to 3 orders for stores with fewer repeat buyers?** Yes. Edit the rule text and change 5 to your preferred number. A lower threshold casts a wider net, while a higher one targets only your most committed customers. ## Related rules - [first-time-registered-buyer](https://orderbadger.com/kb/first-time-registered-buyer/) - [high-value-customer-ltv-500](https://orderbadger.com/kb/high-value-customer-ltv-500/) - [active-customer-orders-this-month](https://orderbadger.com/kb/active-customer-orders-this-month/) ## People also search for WooCommerce automatically flag repeat customers with 5 or more orders | how to identify loyal returning buyers in WooCommerce | badge orders from loyal customers for VIP treatment WooCommerce | WooCommerce highlight repeat customer orders in the orders list --- # How to spot VIP customers trying new products in WooCommerce > Identifies high-spend customers who are purchasing a product for the first time at a significant discount - a potential upsell or cross-sell signal worth acting on. ## The problem When a VIP customer tries something new at a discount, it signals they are exploring your catalogue. Without visibility, this cross-sell opportunity is lost in the regular order flow. ## The solution OrderBadger can combine lifetime spend, first-time product purchase, and item discount into a single rule. ## Who this is for Stores with broad catalogues and loyal customer bases - especially those running promotions to encourage category exploration. ## At a glance - Lifetime spend threshold: over £150 - Product must be a first-time purchase - That item discounted by more than 20% - Category: cross-sell opportunity - Badge: VIP + Discount (orange, info) ## How it works Flags orders where a high-spend customer (over £150 lifetime) is buying a product for the first time with a discount of more than 20%. All three conditions must be true on the same line item. **Recommended action:** Consider a follow-up email asking how they liked the new product. This is a natural upsell and cross-sell moment. ## Rule template > A customer whose total previous spend exceeds £150, buying at least one product for the first time, with that item discounted by more than 20% **Badge:** VIP + Discount (orange, info) **Inbox:** Yes ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Try lowering '£150' to '£75' if your store has a lower average order value and you want to include more customers in the VIP tier. - Reduce 'more than 20%' to 'more than 10%' to capture customers trying new products with even modest discounts. - Raise '£150' to '£300' if you only want to flag this for your highest-spend customers. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and order total is over £50' to ensure the current order itself is substantial, not just a tiny trial purchase. - Remove 'with that item discounted by more than 20%' if you want to catch any VIP customer trying a new product, regardless of whether it is on sale. ## When this rule matches - **high spend new item 30 off:** Customer has £300 lifetime spend, one item is a first-time purchase at 30% off. - **moderate spend new item 50 off:** Customer has £200 lifetime spend and is buying one new product at 50% off. ## When this rule does not match - **low spend new item discounted:** Customer has only £100 lifetime spend - below the £150 threshold. - **high spend repeat item discounted:** Customer is a VIP but has bought this product before - not a first-time purchase. - **high spend new item 10 off:** VIP trying a new product but discount is only 10% - below the 20% threshold. - **guest checkout:** Guest checkout has null spend history and cannot satisfy the condition. ## Good to know - Guest checkouts are excluded. - The spend threshold (£150) and discount threshold (20%) are fixed in the rule text. - First-time purchase is based on exact product ID, not product similarity. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Does this rule fire if the customer is a guest?** No. Guest checkouts have no spend history, so they cannot meet the £150 lifetime spend threshold. Only registered customers qualify. **Q: What counts as a 'first-time purchase' - the exact product or the product category?** It matches the exact product ID. If the customer has bought the same product before (even a different variation), it is not considered first-time. Category-level novelty is not checked. **Q: Can I change the £150 spend or 20% discount thresholds?** Yes, but you need to edit the rule text and recompile. Both thresholds are written directly into the natural-language rule definition. **Q: If the order has multiple new discounted items, does the badge appear more than once?** No. The badge is applied once per order as long as at least one line item meets both the first-time and discount conditions. ## Related rules - [high-value-customer-ltv-500](https://orderbadger.com/kb/high-value-customer-ltv-500/) - [first-time-buying-product](https://orderbadger.com/kb/first-time-buying-product/) - [item-heavily-discounted](https://orderbadger.com/kb/item-heavily-discounted/) ## People also search for WooCommerce flag when high-spend customer buys a new product at discount | how to detect cross-sell opportunities with VIP buyers WooCommerce | identify loyal customers exploring new categories WooCommerce | WooCommerce alert for VIP customer first-time product purchase on sale --- # How to identify likely gift orders in WooCommerce > Badges international orders over £200 with 2 or fewer distinct products from first-time customers, identifying likely gift purchases that may benefit from premium wrapping or a gift note. ## The problem High-value international orders with few items from new customers are often gifts. Without a flag, these orders are packed in standard packaging and the opportunity to delight the recipient with premium presentation is missed. ## The solution OrderBadger can automatically identify orders that are likely gifts based on a combination of international shipping, high value, few items, and new customer status. ## Who this is for Luxury, jewellery, fashion, and gift stores where international high-value orders from new customers are likely gifts that benefit from premium packaging and a personal touch. ## At a glance - International shipping required - First-time customers only - Maximum 2 distinct products - Value threshold: order total over £200 - Badge: Likely Gift (purple, info) ## How it works Combines four conditions: shipping must be international, order total must exceed £200, the order must contain 2 or fewer distinct products, and the customer must have 0 previous paid orders. This pattern strongly indicates a gift purchase - someone buying a high-value item to ship internationally to a recipient. **Recommended action:** Offer premium gift wrapping if available, include a gift note option, and ensure packaging is presentation-quality. Consider a follow-up email thanking the customer and offering a discount on their next purchase. ## Rule template > Shipping is international and order total is over £200 and distinct product count is 2 or fewer and customer has 0 previous paid orders **Badge:** Likely Gift (purple, info) **Inbox:** Yes ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Lower 'over £200' to 'over £100' if your product range has a lower price point but gifts are still common. - Change '2 or fewer' distinct products to '1' if you only want to flag single-item purchases, which are stronger gift signals. **Add or remove conditions:** - Remove 'Shipping is international' if you also want to flag domestic orders that look like gifts. - Add 'and shipping address differs from billing address' for a much stronger gift signal that reduces false positives. - Remove 'customer has 0 previous paid orders' to also catch returning customers who are buying gifts for others. ## When this rule matches - **international high value single item new customer:** Order is international, total is £320, contains 1 distinct product, and customer has 0 previous paid orders. All four conditions met. - **international two items new customer:** Order is international, total is £450, contains exactly 2 distinct products, and customer has 0 previous orders. Boundary for product count met. ## When this rule does not match - **domestic high value new customer:** Order total is £300 with 1 product from a new customer, but shipping is domestic - the international condition is not met. - **international returning customer:** Order is international, high-value, and has 1 product, but customer has 3 previous paid orders - not a first-time buyer. - **international many products new customer:** Order is international, total is £500, and customer is new, but 4 distinct products exceeds the 2-product maximum. ## Good to know - This is a heuristic - not all matching orders are gifts, and some gifts will not match this pattern. - Guest checkouts are excluded because previous_paid_order_count is null for anonymous buyers. - The rule does not check whether the shipping address differs from the billing address, which would be a stronger gift signal. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Why does this rule require international shipping?** International orders from new customers with few high-value items have a strong gift signal - someone is buying a present to send abroad. Domestic orders may also be gifts, but the international condition reduces false positives. **Q: Will a guest checkout placing a matching order be flagged?** No. Guest checkouts have a null previous_paid_order_count, which cannot satisfy the '0 previous paid orders' condition. Consider a separate rule for guest gift orders if needed. **Q: If a customer buys 2 of the same product, does that count as 1 or 2 distinct products?** It counts as 1 distinct product. The distinct_product_count measures unique product IDs, not total quantity. Two units of the same item count as one distinct product. **Q: Can I adjust the £200 threshold or product count limit?** Yes. Edit the rule text to change the order total threshold or the maximum number of distinct products. Lower the total for stores with a lower average price point. ## Related rules - [international-order](https://orderbadger.com/kb/international-order/) - [high-value-first-order-review](https://orderbadger.com/kb/high-value-first-order-review/) - [first-time-registered-buyer](https://orderbadger.com/kb/first-time-registered-buyer/) ## People also search for WooCommerce detect gift purchases for premium wrapping | how to flag international high-value orders as likely gifts WooCommerce | identify orders that need gift packaging in WooCommerce | WooCommerce offer gift wrapping on probable present purchases | spot gift orders from new international customers WooCommerce --- # How to flag customers returning after a refund in WooCommerce > Badges orders from customers who previously received a refund but have returned to place another order above £200, signalling a valuable retention moment that deserves extra care. ## The problem When a customer who previously had a bad enough experience to request a refund comes back and places a meaningful order, it is a critical second-chance moment. Without a flag, your team cannot distinguish these orders from regular purchases and may miss the opportunity to deliver an exceptional experience. ## The solution OrderBadger can automatically flag orders from customers who have previously received a refund and are now placing a new meaningful order. ## Who this is for Any store that values customer retention - especially those with higher-value products where refund recovery represents significant revenue. ## At a glance - Requires at least 1 previous refund - At least 1 previous paid order required - Value threshold: order total over £200 - Category: retention and recovery - Badge: Post-Refund Return (teal, info) ## How it works Checks three conditions: the customer must have at least 1 previous refund, at least 1 previous paid order, and a current order total over £200. When all conditions are met, the order is badged and routed to your inbox so you can give it extra attention. **Recommended action:** Treat this as a second-chance moment. Ensure the order is fulfilled flawlessly - consider expedited dispatch, quality-check the items, or include a personal note. The customer has chosen to come back despite a previous issue. ## Rule template > Customer has 1 or more previous refunds and customer has 1 or more previous paid orders and order total is over £200 **Badge:** Post-Refund Return (teal, info) **Inbox:** Yes ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Lower 'over £200' to 'over £50' if you want to catch every returning post-refund customer, not just those placing large orders. - Change '1 or more previous refunds' to '2 or more previous refunds' to focus only on customers with a pattern of refund activity. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and customer lifetime spend is over £500' to limit this to higher-value customers where retention has the biggest revenue impact. - Remove 'order total is over £200' entirely if any post-refund return is worth flagging regardless of order size. ## When this rule matches - **returning customer after refund:** Customer has 2 previous refunds, 5 previous paid orders, and current order total of £350 - all three conditions are met. - **single refund boundary order value:** Customer has exactly 1 previous refund, 1 previous paid order, and order total of £200.01 - all conditions just met. ## When this rule does not match - **refund history low order value:** Customer has 1 previous refund and 3 previous orders, but current order total of £80 is below the £200 threshold. - **no refund history high value:** Order total is £400 and customer has 5 previous orders, but previous refund count is 0 - no refund history. - **refund history no prior paid orders:** Customer has 1 refund but 0 previous paid orders and order total of £300. Without prior paid orders, the second condition fails. ## Good to know - Guest checkouts are excluded because refund and order history require a registered customer account. - The rule does not distinguish between full and partial refunds. Any refund counts toward the threshold. - The £200 order total threshold filters out small incidental purchases. Adjust the threshold to match your average order value. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Does this rule fire if the customer's only previous order was the one that got refunded?** It depends on how WooCommerce counts the refunded order. If the refunded order still counts as a paid order, then yes - the customer would have 1 refund and 1 paid order. If the refund fully reversed the paid status, the paid order count may be 0 and the rule would not fire. **Q: Why require both a refund and a previous paid order?** Requiring both ensures the customer has genuine purchase history alongside the refund. This avoids false positives from edge cases like test transactions or orders that were immediately cancelled and refunded. **Q: Will the badge appear every time this customer orders, not just the first time after the refund?** Yes. The rule evaluates conditions at order time. As long as the customer still has 1+ previous refunds, 1+ paid orders, and the order total exceeds £200, every qualifying order will be badged. ## Related rules - [customer-has-refund-history](https://orderbadger.com/kb/customer-has-refund-history/) - [customer-reactivated-after-180d](https://orderbadger.com/kb/customer-reactivated-after-180d/) - [loyal-customer-5-plus-orders](https://orderbadger.com/kb/loyal-customer-5-plus-orders/) ## People also search for WooCommerce alert when previously refunded customer orders again | how to give extra care to post-refund returning customers WooCommerce | flag second-chance orders from refunded buyers WooCommerce | WooCommerce identify customers who came back after getting a refund | retain customers after refund with better service WooCommerce --- # How to flag suspicious high-value orders from new accounts in WooCommerce > Highlights large orders from accounts created within the last 3 days that did not use PayPal, surfacing potentially fraudulent purchases for immediate review. ## The problem Fraudsters frequently create new accounts and place large orders using stolen card details. PayPal provides buyer verification, so non-PayPal payments from brand-new accounts with high order values carry elevated risk and warrant manual review before dispatch. ## The solution OrderBadger can automatically flag high-value orders from very new accounts that did not use PayPal, routing them for urgent review. ## Who this is for Luxury retailers, electronics stores, and any business with high-value products that are attractive to fraudsters. ## At a glance - Account age under 3 days - Value threshold: order total over £1000 - Excludes PayPal payments - 2-hour SLA with Approve/Block buttons - Badge: Suspicious Account (red, critical) ## How it works Combines three conditions: account age under 3 days, order total over £1,000, and a non-PayPal payment method. When all conditions are true, the order gets a critical-severity badge with Approve/Block interaction buttons and a 2-hour SLA. **Recommended action:** Verify the customer's identity before dispatch. Check the billing and shipping addresses match, look for signs of fraud (disposable email, mismatched details), and use the Approve or Block buttons to record your decision within the 2-hour SLA window. ## Rule template > Customer account age is less than 3 days and order total is over £1000 and payment method is not paypal **Badge:** Suspicious Account (red, critical) **Inbox:** Yes **Interaction:** Approve / Block **SLA:** 2h ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Widen 'less than 3 days' to 'less than 7 days' to catch fraud attempts from slightly older accounts that are still relatively new. - Lower 'over £1000' to 'over £500' if your product range has a lower price point but fraud is still a concern at that level. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and shipping address differs from billing address' to tighten the rule to the most suspicious pattern. - Replace 'payment method is not paypal' with 'payment method is not paypal and payment method is not apple_pay' to also exclude Apple Pay, which has strong device-level verification. ## When this rule matches - **new account high value card payment:** Account is 1 day old, order total is £1,500, and payment method is stripe - all three conditions are met. - **new account boundary values:** Account is 2 days old (under 3), order total is £1,000.01 (over 1000), and payment method is bacs - all conditions just met. ## When this rule does not match - **new account high value paypal:** Account is 1 day old and order total is £1,500, but payment method is PayPal - excluded by the 'not paypal' condition. - **established account high value:** Order total is £2,000 and payment is stripe, but account is 30 days old - not a new account. - **new account low value card:** Account is 1 day old and payment is stripe, but order total of £150 is below the £1,000 threshold. ## Good to know - This is a review aid, not a fraud detection engine. It highlights orders that statistically carry more risk based on account age, value, and payment method. - PayPal is excluded because it provides buyer verification. If your PayPal setup does not include address verification, consider removing the PayPal exclusion. - Guest checkouts may have null account_age_days. Consider a separate rule for high-value guest orders. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Why is PayPal excluded from this rule?** PayPal provides its own layer of buyer verification and fraud protection. Orders paid via PayPal carry lower fraud risk than direct card payments from unknown accounts, so they are excluded to reduce false positives. **Q: What happens if I don't act within the 2-hour SLA?** The badge remains on the order but the SLA will show as breached. The order is not automatically blocked - it is up to your workflow to decide next steps. The short SLA ensures suspicious orders get timely attention. **Q: Does this rule catch guest checkouts?** No. Guest checkouts do not have a registered account, so account_age_days is null and cannot satisfy the 'less than 3 days' condition. Consider a separate rule for high-value guest orders. **Q: Can I adjust the account age or order value thresholds?** Yes. Edit the natural language rule text to change the 3-day account age limit, the £1,000 order threshold, or the payment method exclusion, then recompile. ## Related rules - [high-value-first-order-review](https://orderbadger.com/kb/high-value-first-order-review/) - [new-account-under-7-days](https://orderbadger.com/kb/new-account-under-7-days/) - [guest-checkout](https://orderbadger.com/kb/guest-checkout/) ## People also search for WooCommerce fraud alert for large orders from brand-new accounts | how to review high-value orders from new customers WooCommerce | flag suspicious new account orders for manual review WooCommerce | WooCommerce detect potentially fraudulent first orders over 1000 | stop fraud on new account high-value card payments WooCommerce --- # How to identify your highest-spending VIP customers in WooCommerce > Badges orders from high-lifetime-value customers who are also placing a large current order, giving your team a clear signal to provide white-glove treatment. ## The problem Your most valuable customers - those with deep purchase history and high current spend - deserve premium handling. Without a flag, these whale orders blend into the queue and receive the same treatment as a first-time £20 purchase. ## The solution OrderBadger can automatically identify your highest-value customers placing large orders by combining lifetime spend, order history, and current order value. ## Who this is for Premium retailers, luxury brands, and any store where a small number of high-value customers drive a disproportionate share of revenue. ## At a glance - Lifetime spend threshold: over £2000 - Requires 10+ previous paid orders - Current order total over £500 - Routes to inbox for white-glove handling - Badge: Whale Customer (green, info) ## How it works Checks three conditions simultaneously: the customer must have over £2,000 in lifetime spend, 10 or more previous paid orders, and a current order total over £500. When all three are true, a Whale Customer badge appears and the order routes to your inbox for prioritised handling. **Recommended action:** Prioritise these orders for immediate dispatch. Consider including a personal thank-you note, premium packaging, or a loyalty reward. These customers represent your top tier and their experience should reflect that. ## Rule template > Customer lifetime spend is over £2000 and order total is over £500 and customer has 10 or more previous paid orders **Badge:** Whale Customer (green, info) **Inbox:** Yes ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Lower 'over £2000' lifetime spend to 'over £1000' if your store's average customer lifetime value is lower and you want to widen the whale definition. - Reduce '10 or more previous paid orders' to '5 or more' to include customers who spend big but order less frequently. - Raise 'over £500' order total to 'over £750' if you only want to flag whale customers when they are placing especially large orders. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and shipping is international' to focus white-glove treatment on your highest-value international orders specifically. - Remove 'order total is over £500' to badge every order from a whale customer, even small top-up purchases. ## When this rule matches - **whale customer large order:** Customer has £3,200 lifetime spend, 15 previous paid orders, and current order total of £750 - all three conditions are met. - **whale customer boundary values:** Customer has £2,000.01 lifetime spend, exactly 10 previous orders, and order total of £500.01 - all conditions just barely met. ## When this rule does not match - **high spend low order count:** Customer has high lifetime spend and large order total but only 5 previous orders - does not meet the 10-order threshold. - **whale customer small order:** Customer qualifies on lifetime spend and order count but current order total of £120 is below the £500 threshold. - **high order value low lifetime spend:** Order total exceeds £500 and order count is 12, but lifetime spend of £800 is below the £2,000 threshold. ## Good to know - All three conditions must be true simultaneously. A high-spend customer placing a small order will not trigger the badge. - Guest checkouts are excluded because lifetime spend and order count require a registered customer account. - The thresholds are fixed in the rule text. Edit the rule to adjust them for your business. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Why does this rule require all three conditions instead of just high lifetime spend?** Combining lifetime spend, order count, and current order value ensures only genuinely engaged top-tier customers trigger the badge. A customer who spent £2,000 on one order is different from someone who has placed 15+ orders over time. **Q: Does the £2,000 lifetime spend include the current order?** No. It checks prior_gross_paid_spend, which only includes previous completed orders. The current order is evaluated separately via the order total condition. **Q: Will guest checkouts ever trigger the Whale Customer badge?** No. Lifetime spend and order count tracking require a registered customer account. Guest checkouts have null values for these fields and cannot satisfy the conditions. **Q: Can I lower the thresholds to catch more customers?** Yes. Edit the natural language rule text to change the spend, order count, or order total thresholds, then recompile. Consider what defines a 'whale' in your specific business context. ## Related rules - [high-value-customer-ltv-500](https://orderbadger.com/kb/high-value-customer-ltv-500/) - [loyal-customer-5-plus-orders](https://orderbadger.com/kb/loyal-customer-5-plus-orders/) - [order-total-over-100](https://orderbadger.com/kb/order-total-over-100/) ## People also search for flag VIP customers WooCommerce | identify whale buyers in WooCommerce orders | WooCommerce highlight high lifetime value customers | how to spot top spenders in WooCommerce admin | WooCommerce badge for best customers --- # How to catch coupon stacking on discounted orders in WooCommerce > Badges orders where the discount exceeds 25%, a coupon was applied, and the order total is over £100. This combination often indicates coupon stacking, leaked promo codes, or pricing misconfigurations that erode margins on what should be a profitable sale. ## The problem When a customer combines a coupon code with already-discounted products and the resulting discount exceeds 25% on a high-value order, the margin impact is substantial. Without a flag, these orders are fulfilled at a loss because the discount looks reasonable on any single product but compounds across the basket. ## The solution OrderBadger can flag orders where a coupon code is stacked on top of an already deep discount, especially on high-value baskets where the margin impact is significant. ## Who this is for Stores that run promotions alongside coupon campaigns - fashion, electronics, home goods, and general merchandise retailers where discount stacking is a known revenue leak. ## At a glance - Order-level discount must exceed 25% - At least one coupon code applied - Value threshold: order total over £100 - Category: margin protection - Badge: Coupon Stack (orange, warning) ## How it works Combines three conditions: the order-level discount must exceed 25%, at least one coupon code must be applied, and the order total must be over £100. When all three are true, the order is badged and routed to your inbox so you can verify whether the discount is intentional. **Recommended action:** Check which coupon was used and whether it was intended to stack with existing sale prices. If the combination was unintended, consider updating your coupon restrictions in WooCommerce to prevent stacking. For this order, decide whether to honour the discount or contact the customer. ## Rule template > Discount percent is over 25% and a coupon was applied and order total is over £100 **Badge:** Coupon Stack (orange, warning) **Inbox:** Yes ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Lower 'over 25%' to 'over 15%' if your margins are thin and even moderate stacking should be reviewed. - Raise 'over £100' to 'over £200' to focus on the highest-value coupon-stacked orders where the pound value of the loss matters most. - Tighten 'over 25%' to 'over 35%' if you regularly run 25% off campaigns and only want to flag extreme cases. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and customer has 0 previous paid orders' to focus on first-time buyers exploiting leaked or shared promo codes, a common pattern for coupon abuse. - Add 'and customer is a guest checkout' to flag anonymous coupon stackers who are harder to track and may be repeat abusers using different email addresses. ## When this rule matches - **coupon plus 30 percent high value:** Discount is 30% (over 25%), a coupon was applied (count 1), and order total is £150 (over £100). All three conditions met. - **two coupons heavy discount:** Discount is 40% (well over 25%), two coupons were applied, and order total is £220. Possible coupon stacking abuse. ## When this rule does not match - **coupon moderate discount high value:** A coupon was applied and order total is £180, but the discount is only 18% - below the 25% threshold. - **deep discount no coupon:** Discount is 35% and order total is £130, but no coupon was applied - the discount comes from sale prices, not a code. - **coupon deep discount low value:** Discount is 30% and a coupon was applied, but order total is only £75 - under £100, so the margin impact is smaller. ## Good to know - The discount percentage reflects the overall order discount, not the coupon value alone. A deep sale price combined with a modest coupon can trigger the rule even if the coupon itself is small. - This does not identify which specific coupon was used. Check the WooCommerce order details for the coupon code. - Automatic discounts applied by pricing plugins without a coupon code will not count toward the coupon condition. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Does exactly 25% discount trigger the badge?** No. The rule requires the discount to be strictly over 25%. An order with exactly 25.0% discount will not be flagged. Adjust the percentage in the rule text if you want to include the boundary. **Q: What if my store intentionally allows coupon stacking during sales?** The badge still provides visibility into which orders used the stacking. You can treat it as informational rather than a problem alert, or raise the discount threshold to only flag extreme cases. **Q: Can I prevent coupon stacking in WooCommerce instead of just flagging it?** Yes. WooCommerce supports individual use restrictions on coupons. However, this rule is useful as a safety net to catch stacking that slips through configuration gaps or applies across different promotion types. **Q: Does this detect automatic cart discounts from pricing plugins?** The discount percentage includes all order-level discounts, but the coupon condition specifically requires a WooCommerce coupon code to be applied. Plugin-based automatic discounts without a coupon code will not satisfy the coupon condition. ## Related rules - [discount-over-20-percent](https://orderbadger.com/kb/discount-over-20-percent/) - [coupon-applied](https://orderbadger.com/kb/coupon-applied/) - [item-heavily-discounted](https://orderbadger.com/kb/item-heavily-discounted/) ## People also search for WooCommerce coupon stacking detection | how to stop customers combining coupons with sale prices WooCommerce | flag orders where discount is too high WooCommerce | WooCommerce promo code abuse on discounted products | detect leaked coupon codes eroding margins in WooCommerce --- # How to flag heavy free-shipping orders losing money in WooCommerce > Badges orders where shipping is free, the total weight exceeds 8 kg, and the subtotal is under £50. Shipping heavy parcels for free on low-value orders erodes margins rapidly - these orders often cost more to deliver than the profit they generate. ## The problem Free shipping promotions are effective at driving conversions, but when a customer orders heavy products on a low-value basket, the actual shipping cost can exceed the margin on the sale. Without a flag, these unprofitable orders are fulfilled automatically and the loss is only visible in monthly reporting. ## The solution OrderBadger can flag orders where free shipping on a heavy, low-value basket is likely costing you more than the profit on the sale. ## Who this is for Stores selling heavy products - hardware, pet food, beverages, gardening supplies - that offer free shipping thresholds and want to catch orders where the promotion actually costs money. ## At a glance - Shipping cost must be zero - Weight threshold: over 8 kg - Subtotal threshold: under £50 - Category: margin protection - Badge: Margin Squeeze (red, warning) ## How it works Checks three conditions: the order must have free shipping (zero shipping cost), the total weight must exceed 8 kg, and the subtotal must be under £50. When all three are true, the order is badged as a margin squeeze and appears in your inbox for review. **Recommended action:** Review whether your free shipping threshold is set correctly. Consider raising the minimum basket value for free shipping, or adding a weight surcharge for heavy items. For this specific order, decide whether to absorb the loss for customer goodwill or contact the customer about shipping options. ## Rule template > Shipping is free and total order weight is over 8 kg and subtotal is less than £50 **Badge:** Margin Squeeze (red, warning) **Inbox:** Yes ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Lower 'over 8 kg' to 'over 5 kg' if your carrier charges steeply for parcels above 5 kg, making lighter orders also a margin concern. - Raise 'less than £50' to 'less than £75' if your product margins are thin and even mid-value baskets lose money on heavy free shipping. - Tighten 'over 8 kg' to 'over 15 kg' to focus only on the heaviest parcels where carrier surcharges are most significant. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and shipping is international' to catch heavy free-shipping orders crossing borders, where delivery costs are highest. - Add 'and customer has 3 or more previous paid orders' to see whether loyal customers are routinely exploiting your free shipping policy on heavy items. ## When this rule matches - **free shipping heavy low subtotal:** Shipping is free (0), total weight is 10 kg (over 8), and subtotal is £35 (under £50). All three conditions met - this order is likely unprofitable to ship. - **free shipping heavy multiple items:** Shipping is free, combined weight of items is 12 kg (over 8), and subtotal is £42.50 (under £50). ## When this rule does not match - **free shipping heavy high subtotal:** Shipping is free and weight is 9 kg, but subtotal is £85 - above £50, so the margin is less likely to be squeezed. - **paid shipping heavy low subtotal:** Weight is 10 kg and subtotal is £38, but shipping is £7.99 - not free, so the customer is contributing to the delivery cost. - **free shipping light low subtotal:** Shipping is free and subtotal is £25, but total weight is only 2 kg - under the 8 kg threshold, so shipping cost is modest. ## Good to know - Weight calculation depends on product weights being correctly set in WooCommerce. Missing weights mean the total may be underestimated and some heavy orders will slip through. - The subtotal threshold is in your store's default currency. Adjust the rule text for your price range. - This does not calculate the actual shipping cost - it flags likely unprofitable combinations based on weight and basket value. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Why does the rule check subtotal instead of total?** Subtotal reflects the product value before shipping and tax. Since shipping is free, total and subtotal may be similar, but subtotal gives a clearer picture of the actual merchandise value being shipped. **Q: Does an order weighing exactly 8 kg trigger the badge?** No. The rule requires more than 8 kg. An order at exactly 8.0 kg will not be flagged. Adjust the threshold in the rule text if you want to include the boundary. **Q: Can I use this to automatically add a shipping surcharge?** OrderBadger is informational - it does not modify order totals. Use the badge as a trigger for your team to review shipping policy, or configure WooCommerce shipping rules to prevent the scenario in the first place. **Q: What if I offer free shipping over a certain basket value but the threshold is below £50?** You may see many orders triggering this rule. Consider raising your free shipping threshold in WooCommerce so that heavy low-value baskets no longer qualify for free delivery. ## Related rules - [free-shipping-order](https://orderbadger.com/kb/free-shipping-order/) - [heavy-order-over-5kg](https://orderbadger.com/kb/heavy-order-over-5kg/) - [order-total-over-100](https://orderbadger.com/kb/order-total-over-100/) ## People also search for WooCommerce free shipping on heavy items losing money | how to detect unprofitable free shipping orders WooCommerce | flag heavy parcels with free shipping in WooCommerce | WooCommerce shipping cost exceeds profit on heavy orders | stop losing money on free shipping for bulky products WooCommerce --- # How to spot unprofitable free shipping on international WooCommerce orders > Badges orders where shipping is free, the destination is international, and the order total is under £100. International delivery is inherently expensive, and absorbing that cost on a low-value order is almost always unprofitable. ## The problem International shipping costs are significantly higher than domestic rates. When a free shipping promotion applies to an international order with a low basket value, the shipping cost alone can exceed the profit on the sale. Without a visual flag, these orders are processed automatically and the loss only surfaces in carrier invoice reconciliation. ## The solution OrderBadger can flag international orders where free shipping on a low-value basket is likely costing more than the profit on the sale. ## Who this is for Stores that ship internationally and offer free shipping promotions - especially those whose free shipping rules do not distinguish between domestic and international destinations. ## At a glance - Shipping cost must be zero - International destination required - Order total under £100 - Category: margin protection - Badge: Unprofitable Ship (red, warning) ## How it works Evaluates three conditions: the shipping total must be zero (free), the destination must be outside your store's home country, and the order total must be under £100. When all three are true, the order is badged and routed to your inbox for review. **Recommended action:** Review your free shipping rules to check whether international orders should be excluded or given a higher threshold. For this specific order, consider whether the long-term customer value justifies absorbing the shipping cost, or reach out to offer a shipping contribution. ## Rule template > Shipping is free and shipping is international and order total is less than £100 **Badge:** Unprofitable Ship (red, warning) **Inbox:** Yes ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Raise 'less than £100' to 'less than £150' if your international shipping costs are high enough that even £100-value orders lose money on free delivery. - Lower 'less than £100' to 'less than £50' if your international rates are moderate and only very small baskets are genuinely unprofitable. - Add a weight condition like 'total order weight is over 2 kg' to focus on heavier international parcels where the cost is highest. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and total order weight is over 5 kg' to specifically flag heavy international free-shipping orders where carrier surcharges compound the problem. - Remove 'and order total is less than £100' to badge all free international shipments, giving you full visibility into international shipping costs you are absorbing. ## When this rule matches - **free international low value:** Shipping is free (0), destination is international (US), and order total is £65 (under £100). All three conditions met. - **free international minimal order:** Shipping is free, destination is Australia (international), and order total is £28 - a very low-value international shipment. ## When this rule does not match - **free international high value:** Shipping is free and destination is international, but order total is £180 - above £100, so the margin can absorb the shipping cost. - **paid shipping international low value:** Destination is international and order total is £55, but shipping is £12.99 - not free, so the customer is paying for delivery. - **free domestic low value:** Shipping is free and order total is £40, but the destination is domestic - international shipping costs do not apply. ## Good to know - The 100 threshold is in your store's default currency. International orders in different currencies are compared after conversion. - This does not calculate the actual shipping cost - it flags the combination of free shipping, international destination, and low order value as a likely loss. - Virtual or digital products with international addresses will also trigger the rule if they somehow have free shipping applied. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Why 100 as the threshold?** For most stores, international shipping costs between £10 and £30 depending on weight and destination. On an order under £100, a £10-30 shipping cost represents a significant portion of the margin. Adjust the threshold to match your actual international rates. **Q: Can I exclude specific countries from this rule?** The rule flags all international destinations equally. For country-specific thresholds, create separate rules targeting specific regions with appropriate order value minimums. **Q: What if my store only offers free shipping domestically but it is being applied internationally by mistake?** This rule will catch exactly that scenario. Use the badge alerts to identify misconfigured shipping rules and fix them in your WooCommerce shipping zones. **Q: Does an order total of exactly £100 trigger the badge?** No. The rule requires less than £100, so exactly £100 does not meet the condition. Only orders below £100 are flagged. ## Related rules - [free-shipping-order](https://orderbadger.com/kb/free-shipping-order/) - [international-order](https://orderbadger.com/kb/international-order/) - [margin-free-shipping-heavy](https://orderbadger.com/kb/margin-free-shipping-heavy/) ## People also search for WooCommerce free shipping international orders losing money | how to flag low-value international orders with free shipping | detect unprofitable cross-border free shipping WooCommerce | WooCommerce international shipping cost higher than order value | stop free delivery on small international orders WooCommerce --- # How to prevent bulk buying of loss-leader sale items in WooCommerce > Badges orders where a line item is on sale at more than 40% off and the customer is buying more than 3 of that item. Loss leaders are priced to attract traffic, not to be purchased in bulk - this pattern often means a reseller or deal hunter is exploiting your promotion. ## The problem Loss-leader discounts are designed to bring customers into your store, with the expectation that they buy other full-price items. When a buyer orders a deeply discounted product in bulk, each unit sold at a loss multiplies rather than offsets. Without a flag, these orders are fulfilled automatically and the promotional investment turns into a net loss. ## The solution OrderBadger can flag orders where a customer is buying a deeply discounted item in bulk, turning your loss-leader promotion into a net loss. ## Who this is for Stores that run deep promotions or clearance sales on individual products and want to catch bulk purchases that exploit loss-leader pricing - common in electronics, cosmetics, food, and fashion retail. ## At a glance - Item must be on sale with 40%+ discount - Quantity threshold: more than 3 of that item - Per-line-item check, not order-wide - Category: margin protection - Badge: Loss Leader Bulk (red, warning) ## How it works Inspects each line item in the order. If any single item is on sale, has a discount of more than 40%, and the customer is ordering more than 3 units of it, the order is badged and routed to your inbox. The check applies per-item, so a full-price item with high quantity will not trigger it. **Recommended action:** Check whether the purchase is from a reseller exploiting the discount or a genuine customer stocking up. Consider setting per-customer quantity limits on loss-leader products in WooCommerce. For this order, decide whether to fulfil as-is or contact the customer about purchase limits. ## Rule template > At least one item is on sale and that item has a discount of more than 40% and that item has a quantity of more than 3 **Badge:** Loss Leader Bulk (red, warning) **Inbox:** Yes ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Lower 'more than 40%' to 'more than 30%' if even moderate-discount items become unprofitable when bought in bulk. - Raise 'more than 3' to 'more than 5' if your typical customer legitimately buys 3-4 units of sale items and you only want to catch extreme bulk purchases. - Tighten 'more than 40%' to 'more than 50%' to focus exclusively on the deepest clearance discounts where the margin loss per unit is greatest. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and customer has 0 previous paid orders' to flag first-time buyers bulk-purchasing loss leaders, which is a strong reseller signal. - Add 'and order total is over £200' to focus on large loss-leader orders where the total margin impact is most significant. - Remove 'and that item is on sale' to also catch items with manual line-item discounts applied by staff, broadening the rule beyond sale prices. ## When this rule matches - **sale item 50 percent off qty 5:** The Wireless Mouse is on sale with a 50% discount (over 40%) and quantity is 5 (over 3). Both item-level conditions met on a single line item. - **sale item 45 percent off qty 10:** The Face Cream is on sale at 45% off (over 40%) with a quantity of 10 (well over 3). Likely a reseller stocking up on discounted inventory. ## When this rule does not match - **sale item deep discount low qty:** The item is on sale at 50% off, but the quantity is only 2 - not more than 3. A normal purchase of a sale item. - **sale item moderate discount high qty:** The item is on sale with a quantity of 6, but the discount is only 25% - not more than 40%. The discount is too shallow to be a loss leader. - **non sale item high qty:** The item has a quantity of 8, but it is not on sale and has no discount. Bulk buying at full price is not a margin concern. ## Good to know - The on_sale flag and discount percentage are calculated from WooCommerce product data. If sale prices are set via external plugins or custom fields, the flag may not reflect them. - The rule checks per-line-item, not across line items. A customer adding the same product twice as separate line items would be evaluated per line, not combined. - Quantity limits must be enforced separately in WooCommerce - this rule only alerts you to the pattern. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Does the rule check quantity across the whole order or per line item?** Per line item. If a customer adds the same product as two separate line items of 2 each, neither line exceeds 3 and the rule will not fire, even though the total is 4. In practice WooCommerce usually combines identical items into one line. **Q: What counts as 'on sale' for this rule?** A product is on sale when it has an active sale price in WooCommerce that is lower than its regular price. Scheduled sales that have not yet started or have already ended are not considered on sale. **Q: Will a quantity of exactly 3 trigger the badge?** No. The rule requires more than 3. A quantity of 3 is at the boundary and will not be flagged. Change the rule text to 'at least 3' if you want to include the boundary. **Q: Can I set maximum purchase quantities in WooCommerce to prevent this entirely?** Yes. Plugins like WooCommerce Min/Max Quantities can enforce per-product purchase limits. This rule is useful as a safety net for products where you have not yet set limits, or to monitor compliance. ## Related rules - [item-heavily-discounted](https://orderbadger.com/kb/item-heavily-discounted/) - [contains-sale-item](https://orderbadger.com/kb/contains-sale-item/) - [discount-over-20-percent](https://orderbadger.com/kb/discount-over-20-percent/) ## People also search for WooCommerce bulk purchase of deeply discounted items | how to flag resellers buying sale items in bulk WooCommerce | detect loss leader abuse in WooCommerce orders | WooCommerce customer buying too many sale items | stop quantity abuse on clearance products WooCommerce --- # How to manage split fulfilment for mixed digital and physical WooCommerce orders > Automatically badges orders that contain a mix of physical and digital products so your team can manage split fulfilment - shipping physical items while ensuring digital delivery is handled separately. ## The problem Mixed orders require two fulfilment streams: physical picking and packing plus digital delivery of download links or licence keys. Without a flag, the digital component may be delayed or forgotten, or the entire order may be held until the physical items ship. ## The solution OrderBadger can automatically flag orders that contain a mix of physical and digital products. ## Who this is for Stores selling both physical and digital products - such as publishers with print and ebook bundles, software companies with hardware accessories, or retailers offering digital gift cards alongside physical merchandise. ## At a glance - Requires both physical and digital items - Includes Split Done/Flag interaction buttons - All customers and values eligible - Category: split fulfilment workflow - Badge: Mixed Order (purple, warning) ## How it works Detects orders where both physical and virtual/downloadable items are present. These orders are badged so your team can manage the split fulfilment process - shipping physical items while ensuring digital delivery happens promptly and independently. **Recommended action:** Process the digital fulfilment immediately (send download links, licence keys, or access credentials). Then handle the physical items through your normal picking and packing workflow. Mark the interaction as 'Split Done' once both streams are complete. ## Rule template > The order contains both physical and digital items **Badge:** Mixed Order (purple, warning) **Inbox:** Yes **Interaction:** Split Done / Flag ## Make it yours **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and order total is over £50' to only flag mixed orders above a value threshold, filtering out low-value split-fulfilment noise. - Add 'and distinct product count is 3 or more' to focus on larger mixed orders where the split-fulfilment complexity is highest. ## When this rule matches - **mixed physical and virtual:** The order contains both physical and digital items, so is_mixed_physical_virtual is true. ## When this rule does not match - **physical only:** The order contains only physical items with no digital products, so is_mixed_physical_virtual is false. - **virtual only:** The order contains only digital items with no physical products, so is_mixed_physical_virtual is false. ## Good to know - This relies on WooCommerce product type settings. Products must be correctly marked as virtual or physical for accurate detection. - This does not handle partial fulfilment in WooCommerce itself - it only flags the order for your team to manage the split manually. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: How does OrderBadger know which products are physical vs digital?** It reads the WooCommerce product type setting. Products marked as 'virtual' or 'downloadable' are treated as digital; everything else is physical. Make sure your products are correctly configured. **Q: Will this trigger if I sell a bundled product that contains both physical and digital components?** Only if the bundle is broken into separate line items with different product types. A single bundled product marked as physical will not trigger the rule on its own. **Q: What do the 'Split Done' and 'Flag' interaction buttons do?** They let your team mark the order once both fulfilment streams are handled. 'Split Done' confirms digital and physical fulfilment are complete; 'Flag' marks it for further attention. ## Related rules - [contains-virtual-item](https://orderbadger.com/kb/contains-virtual-item/) ## People also search for WooCommerce order contains both physical and digital products | how to handle mixed virtual and physical orders in WooCommerce | flag orders needing split fulfilment WooCommerce | WooCommerce digital download delayed by physical shipping | manage hybrid orders with downloads and shipped items WooCommerce --- # How to upsell accessories to first-time instrument buyers in WooCommerce > Badges orders from first-time customers who have purchased a guitar or keyboard but nothing else - no strings, cases, stands, or other accessories. These buyers are prime candidates for a follow-up recommendation that improves their experience and increases order value. ## The problem A first-time guitarist who orders only the instrument is almost certainly going to need strings, a tuner, a strap, and possibly a case. By the time they realise what is missing, they have already paid for shipping once and may shop elsewhere for the accessories. Catching these single-category, first-time orders gives your team a window to suggest add-ons before dispatch. ## The solution OrderBadger can identify first-time instrument buyers who have not added any accessories, giving your team a chance to suggest essential add-ons before the order ships. ## Who this is for Online music retailers and instrument dealers where accessory attach rates significantly impact profitability and customer satisfaction. ## At a glance - First-time customers only - Checks Guitars or Keyboards categories - Single category orders only, no accessories - Category: upsell opportunity - Badge: Accessory Upsell (teal, info) ## How it works Combines three checks: the order must contain at least one product in the Guitars or Keyboards category, the distinct category count across the entire order must be exactly 1 (meaning no accessory categories are present), and the customer must have zero previous paid orders. Together, these conditions isolate brand-new musicians who have bought an instrument and nothing else. **Recommended action:** Send a brief, helpful email or message before dispatch suggesting essential accessories for their specific instrument. Frame it as onboarding help rather than a hard sell - new players genuinely benefit from having the right strings, case, and tuner from day one. ## Rule template > At least one product is in the Guitars or Keyboards category and distinct category count is 1 and customer has 0 previous paid orders **Badge:** Accessory Upsell (teal, info) ## Make it yours **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'or at least one product is in the Drums or DJ Equipment category' to catch first-time buyers of other instrument types who also need accessories. - Add 'and order total is over £100' to focus on mid-range and above instrument purchases where an accessory recommendation feels natural rather than pushy. ## When this rule matches - **first time guitar only:** Customer has zero previous orders, bought a guitar, and the order spans only one category (Guitars) - accessory upsell opportunity. - **first time keyboard only:** First purchase, single Keyboards category, no accessories added - ripe for a stand or headphone recommendation. ## When this rule does not match - **first time guitar with accessories:** Customer is first-time and has a guitar, but the order also includes Accessories - distinct category count is 2, so no upsell needed. - **returning customer guitar only:** Order is single-category Guitars but customer has 3 previous paid orders - they likely already own accessories. - **first time accessories only:** First-time buyer with single category, but the category is Accessories, not Guitars or Keyboards - no instrument in the order. ## Good to know - Distinct category count depends on accurate product categorisation. If a guitar case is in the same Guitars category as the instrument, it will not increase the count and the badge may fire incorrectly. - The rule identifies the opportunity but does not send communications automatically. Your team or email automation must act on the badge. - Guest checkouts with zero order history will match the 'zero previous orders' condition. This is normally correct for first-time buyers but could occasionally flag a repeat customer who checked out as guest. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: What if the customer buys two guitars but no accessories?** The badge still fires because the distinct category count remains 1 (just Guitars). They may still need strings, a case, or a stand. **Q: Will this trigger for returning customers buying a new instrument type?** No. The rule requires zero previous paid orders, so only brand-new customers qualify. If you want to catch existing customers trying a new instrument category, remove the previous order condition. **Q: How should I phrase the accessory recommendation?** Position it as a helpful checklist: 'Starting out with your new Telecaster? Here are the essentials most players pick up in their first week.' Avoid aggressive upselling - these customers respond better to guidance than pressure. **Q: Does distinct category count include subcategories?** It counts top-level product categories as configured in WooCommerce. Subcategories nested under Guitars would count as the same category unless they are set up as separate top-level categories. ## Related rules - [music-high-value-instrument](https://orderbadger.com/kb/music-high-value-instrument/) - [first-time-registered-buyer](https://orderbadger.com/kb/first-time-registered-buyer/) - [music-international-fragile](https://orderbadger.com/kb/music-international-fragile/) ## People also search for WooCommerce guitar buyer missing accessories cross-sell | how to recommend accessories for first-time instrument buyers | flag instrument orders without accessories in WooCommerce | WooCommerce music store accessory attach rate | suggest strings case and tuner to new guitar buyers WooCommerce --- # How to ensure insurance on expensive instrument orders in WooCommerce > Badges orders containing products in the Guitars, Keyboards, or Instruments category when the order total exceeds £500. High-value instruments shipped without adequate insurance and signature-on-delivery put the retailer at significant financial risk. ## The problem A guitar worth £800 dispatched via standard shipping without insurance or signature requirement is a claim waiting to happen. Theft from doorsteps, damage during transit, and delivery disputes are common for high-value parcels. Music retailers who fail to upgrade shipping for expensive instruments absorb losses that erode margins on their most profitable sales. ## The solution OrderBadger can automatically flag instrument orders above a value threshold so your team ensures every expensive shipment goes out insured and with a signature requirement. ## Who this is for Online music shops, guitar dealers, keyboard specialists, and general instrument retailers selling through WooCommerce where individual orders regularly exceed £500 in value. ## At a glance - Checks Guitars, Keyboards, or Instruments - Value threshold: order total over £500 - Prompts insurance and signature delivery - Routes to inbox before dispatch - Badge: Insure & Sign (red, warning) ## How it works Checks two conditions: at least one item must belong to the Guitars, Keyboards, or Instruments category, AND the order total must exceed £500. When both are true, the badge appears in the inbox as a reminder to upgrade the shipping service before dispatch. **Recommended action:** Switch these orders to an insured, signature-required carrier service. Verify that the declared value on the shipment matches the order total. For instruments above £1,000, consider specialist music courier services that offer padded, climate-controlled transit. ## Rule template > At least one product is in the Guitars, Keyboards, or Instruments category and order total is over £500 **Badge:** Insure & Sign (red, warning) **Inbox:** Yes ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Raise 'over £500' to 'over £1000' if your standard shipping already includes basic insurance and you only want to flag orders needing premium cover. - Lower 'over £500' to 'over £250' if you sell mid-range instruments where even moderate-value shipments justify the insurance upgrade. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'or at least one product is in the Amplifiers or DJ Equipment category' to extend coverage to high-value electronics that face similar transit risks. - Add 'and shipping is international' to limit the badge to international shipments only, where loss and damage rates are typically higher. ## When this rule matches - **guitar over 500:** Order includes a Guitars category product and order total is 749.99 - both the category and value conditions are satisfied. - **keyboard boundary total:** Order contains a Keyboards item and order total is £500.01 - just crosses the £500 threshold. ## When this rule does not match - **instrument under 500:** Order contains an Instruments category product but order total of £320 falls below the 500 threshold. - **high value non instrument:** Order total is 620 but all items are in Accessories and Sheet Music - no qualifying instrument category present. - **guitar exactly 500:** Order includes a Guitars category product but order total is exactly £500.00 - the rule requires over £500, not £500 or more. ## Good to know - The rule does not distinguish between instrument types. A £600 harmonica order and a £600 guitar order receive the same badge, though their shipping needs differ. - Amplifiers, pedals, and other equipment in an Accessories category will not trigger the rule. If these items are also high-value, consider broadening the category list. - Insurance and signature requirements must be applied manually or through your shipping software. The badge prompts action but does not configure the carrier automatically. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Does the 500 threshold refer to the instrument price or the whole order total?** The whole order total. An order with a £400 guitar and £150 in accessories has a total of £550 and will trigger the badge. **Q: What about vintage or custom instruments worth thousands?** They will trigger the badge as long as the order total exceeds £500. For especially valuable instruments, consider adding a separate rule with a higher threshold that prompts specialist courier arrangements. **Q: Should amplifiers be included in this rule?** If your amplifiers are categorised under Instruments or if they routinely push orders above 500, consider editing the rule to add the Amplifiers category. Otherwise, they may warrant their own rule. ## Related rules - [music-accessory-cross-sell](https://orderbadger.com/kb/music-accessory-cross-sell/) - [music-international-fragile](https://orderbadger.com/kb/music-international-fragile/) - [order-total-over-100](https://orderbadger.com/kb/order-total-over-100/) ## People also search for WooCommerce high-value instrument orders need insurance | how to flag expensive guitar orders for signature delivery | require insurance on high-value music shop orders WooCommerce | WooCommerce instrument shipping insurance and signature | protect high-value instrument shipments in WooCommerce --- # How to protect fragile instruments shipping internationally from WooCommerce > Badges orders containing at least one Instruments category product where shipping is international and total order weight exceeds 5 kg. These shipments face extended handling chains, multiple transfers, and customs inspections - all of which increase the risk of damage to fragile, heavy instruments. ## The problem An instrument shipped overseas passes through more hands than a domestic parcel. Airport baggage systems, customs inspections, and long-haul vehicle transfers all subject the package to impacts that domestic couriers rarely inflict. When the instrument is also heavy - a keyboard, cello, or amplified setup - standard packaging fails more often and replacement costs include international return shipping. ## The solution OrderBadger can flag international instrument shipments above a weight threshold, prompting your warehouse to use reinforced packaging and book a specialist carrier. ## Who this is for Music retailers with an international customer base, particularly those selling keyboards, larger string instruments, brass, or any instrument where the combined weight of the product and case exceeds 5 kg. ## At a glance - Checks Instruments category products - International shipping required - Weight threshold: over 5 kg total - Prompts reinforced packing and specialist carrier - Badge: Fragile International (orange, warning) ## How it works Evaluates three conditions in combination: the order must include at least one item from the Instruments category, the destination must be international, and the total order weight must exceed 5 kg. Lightweight instruments shipping internationally, and heavy instruments shipping domestically, are both excluded - the badge targets the intersection where risk is highest. **Recommended action:** Use flight-case grade packaging or double-walled cartons with custom foam inserts. Book a carrier that offers fragile-goods handling and full-value insurance for international shipments. Include internal bracing to prevent movement during the long transit chain. ## Rule template > At least one product is in the Instruments category and shipping is international and total order weight is over 5 kg **Badge:** Fragile International (orange, warning) **Inbox:** Yes ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Lower 'over 5 kg' to 'over 3 kg' if your experience shows that lighter instruments also suffer damage on international routes. - Raise 'over 5 kg' to 'over 10 kg' to reserve the badge for the heaviest shipments - keyboards, drum hardware, large amplified setups. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'or at least one product is in the DJ Equipment or Studio Monitors category' to cover other heavy, fragile audio equipment shipping internationally. - Add 'and order total is over £500' to combine weight and value thresholds, ensuring the badge only fires when both the physical and financial risk are significant. ## When this rule matches - **keyboard international heavy:** Order includes an Instruments item, ships internationally, and total weight is 12 kg - all three conditions met. - **cello international boundary weight:** Instruments category present, international shipping, and total weight is 5.2 kg - just above the 5 kg threshold. ## When this rule does not match - **instrument international light:** Instruments category and international shipping, but total weight is only 2.1 kg - below the 5 kg threshold. - **instrument domestic heavy:** Instruments category present and weight is 9 kg, but shipping is domestic - the international condition fails. - **heavy international non instrument:** International shipping and weight is 8 kg, but the heavy item is studio furniture, not an instrument. ## Good to know - Total order weight includes all items, not just instruments. A light instrument bundled with heavy accessories could push the weight over 5 kg and trigger the badge even though the instrument itself is not particularly heavy. - Product weights must be set in WooCommerce. Missing or zero weights will undercount the total and may cause the rule to miss qualifying orders. - The rule does not account for the instrument's intrinsic fragility. A solid-body electric guitar and a delicate acoustic have the same badge treatment at the same weight. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Why use total order weight instead of individual item weight?** Because the packing and carrier decision is driven by the total shipment weight. A 3 kg guitar with 3 kg of accessories still produces a 6 kg parcel that needs reinforced packaging for international transit. **Q: What carriers specialise in international instrument shipping?** OrderBadger does not recommend specific carriers, but your team should look for services offering fragile-goods handling, full declared-value insurance, and tracking through customs. Some music logistics specialists offer door-to-door instrument services. **Q: Will a lightweight ukulele shipping to Australia trigger this rule?** Only if the total order weight exceeds 5 kg. A ukulele alone typically weighs under 2 kg, so unless the order includes additional heavy items, the badge will not appear. **Q: Can I use this rule for domestic heavy instrument orders too?** Edit the rule to remove 'and shipping is international' to badge all heavy instrument orders regardless of destination. Alternatively, create a second rule for domestic-only heavy instrument orders. ## Related rules - [music-high-value-instrument](https://orderbadger.com/kb/music-high-value-instrument/) - [international-order](https://orderbadger.com/kb/international-order/) - [heavy-order-over-5kg](https://orderbadger.com/kb/heavy-order-over-5kg/) ## People also search for WooCommerce international instrument shipping damage prevention | how to flag heavy instruments going overseas for reinforced packing | fragile music equipment international shipping WooCommerce | WooCommerce specialist carrier for international instrument orders | protect keyboards and guitars shipped internationally WooCommerce --- # How to review new account orders with backordered items in WooCommerce > Catches orders from recently registered customers with no order history that also contain backordered products - a combination that may need extra verification or proactive customer communication. ## The problem A brand-new account placing a first order that includes backordered items is a higher-risk scenario. The customer has no track record, and the backorder means delayed fulfilment - a recipe for chargebacks or complaints if not handled proactively. ## The solution OrderBadger can combine account age, order history, and backorder status into a single compound rule. ## Who this is for Stores selling products that frequently go on backorder, especially electronics, collectibles, and seasonal goods. ## At a glance - Account age under 30 days - First order, zero previous purchases - At least one backordered item required - 2-hour SLA with Cleared/Hold buttons - Badge: New + Backorder (red, critical) ## How it works Flags orders where a recently created account (under 30 days) is placing their very first order and that order contains at least one backordered item. All three conditions must be true simultaneously. **Recommended action:** Contact the customer proactively about the backorder delay. Verify payment details before committing stock. Consider whether the order should be held pending review. ## Rule template > A newly registered customer (account under 30 days old) who has never placed an order before, and has at least one backordered item **Badge:** New + Backorder (red, critical) **Inbox:** Yes **Interaction:** Cleared / Hold **SLA:** 2h ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Widen 'account under 30 days old' to 'account under 60 days' if you want to flag newer accounts for a longer period. - Tighten 'account under 30 days old' to 'account under 7 days' to focus only on the freshest registrations where the risk is highest. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and order total is over £100' to limit alerts to higher-value backorder situations where the chargeback risk is more significant. - Remove 'who has never placed an order before' if you want to flag any new account with a backorder, even if they have prior purchase history. ## When this rule matches - **new account first order backordered:** Account is 15 days old, no previous orders, and one item is on backorder. - **brand new account all backordered:** Account is 1 day old, first order, all items backordered. ## When this rule does not match - **old account first order backordered:** Account is 45 days old - exceeds the 30-day threshold even though first order with backorder. - **new account returning customer backordered:** Account is new but customer has 3 prior orders - not a first-time buyer. - **new account first order no backorder:** New account first order but nothing is backordered - no risk signal. - **guest checkout backordered:** Guest checkout cannot satisfy the registered customer condition. ## Good to know - Guest checkouts are excluded - this rule requires a registered account. - The 30-day account age threshold is fixed in the rule text. - This is a review aid combining risk signals, not a fraud detection engine. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: What happens if the account is 31 days old but it's still their first order with a backorder?** The rule will not trigger. The account age must be under 30 days by default, though you can adjust this window in the rule text. For older accounts with backorders, use the separate 'contains-backorder-item' rule. **Q: Does a customer with one cancelled or refunded prior order count as having zero previous orders?** It depends on how WooCommerce reports the count. The rule checks previous_paid_order_count, so cancelled and refunded orders that are not counted as paid should not affect it. **Q: Why is the SLA set to 120 minutes?** The 2-hour SLA is a recommended response window because new accounts with backorders are a higher-risk combination. Proactive communication within this window helps prevent chargebacks and complaints. **Q: If the backorder is resolved before my team responds, should I still acknowledge the badge?** Yes. The badge records the order state at intake time. Even if the backorder clears before your team responds, the customer placed their order under backorder conditions and may benefit from proactive communication about what to expect. ## Related rules - [new-account-under-7-days](https://orderbadger.com/kb/new-account-under-7-days/) - [first-time-registered-buyer](https://orderbadger.com/kb/first-time-registered-buyer/) - [contains-backorder-item](https://orderbadger.com/kb/contains-backorder-item/) ## People also search for WooCommerce new customer first order contains backorder risk | how to flag first orders from new accounts with backordered products | new account backorder chargeback prevention WooCommerce | WooCommerce verify new customers ordering backordered items | reduce chargebacks on backordered first orders WooCommerce --- # How to flag orders from newly registered accounts in WooCommerce > Badges orders from customers whose account was created fewer than 7 days ago, helping you apply extra verification or onboarding steps for brand-new registrations. ## The problem Brand-new accounts placing orders may need additional scrutiny for fraud prevention, or they may benefit from onboarding communication. Without a flag, a 2-day-old account looks the same as a 2-year-old one. ## The solution OrderBadger can automatically flag orders from newly registered accounts. ## Who this is for Stores where account age matters for trust assessment - electronics, luxury goods, high-ticket items, and stores that have experienced new-account fraud. ## At a glance - Account registered fewer than 7 days ago - All order values and types eligible - Registered customers only, excludes guests - Category: onboarding and verification - Badge: New Account (blue, info) ## How it works Adds a New Account badge to orders from registered customers whose account was created fewer than 7 days ago. This gives your team a heads-up that the buyer is brand new to your store. **Recommended action:** Consider verifying payment details for high-value orders from new accounts. You may also want to include a welcome message or onboarding information with their first shipment. ## Rule template > The customer registered their account fewer than 7 days ago **Badge:** New Account (blue, info) ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Widen 'fewer than 7 days' to 'fewer than 14 days' if you want a longer onboarding window for new registrations. - Narrow 'fewer than 7 days' to 'fewer than 3 days' to focus only on same-day or next-day registrations, which carry the highest fraud risk. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and order total is over £200' to only flag new accounts when they place a high-value order, reducing noise from small first purchases. - Add 'and payment method is not paypal' to exclude new accounts using a verified PayPal identity. ## When this rule matches - **account 3 days old:** Customer account is 3 days old, fewer than the 7-day threshold. - **account 1 day old:** Customer account is only 1 day old, well within the 7-day threshold. ## When this rule does not match - **account 30 days old:** Customer account is 30 days old, well beyond the 7-day new account window. - **account 7 days exact boundary:** Customer account is exactly 7 days old. The rule says 'fewer than 7 days', so the boundary does not pass. - **guest checkout null account age:** Guest checkout has no customer account, so account_age_days is null and cannot satisfy the condition. ## Good to know - Guest checkouts are excluded - account age tracking requires a registered customer account. - The 7-day threshold is fixed in the rule text. Edit the rule to change the new-account window. - Account age is measured from registration date, not from email verification or first login. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Does an account that is exactly 7 days old trigger this rule?** No. The rule uses 'fewer than 7 days', so an account that is exactly 7 days old does not qualify. Only accounts aged 0-6 days trigger the badge. You can widen or narrow this window by editing the number of days in the rule text. **Q: Can I change the 7-day window to something longer, like 14 or 30 days?** Yes. Edit the rule text to specify your preferred threshold and recompile. The 7-day value is written directly in the natural-language definition. **Q: If a customer registered months ago but never ordered, will their first order be flagged?** No. This rule only checks account age, not order history. An old account placing its first order will not trigger this badge. Use the 'first-time-registered-buyer' rule for that. ## Related rules - [first-time-registered-buyer](https://orderbadger.com/kb/first-time-registered-buyer/) - [high-value-first-order-review](https://orderbadger.com/kb/high-value-first-order-review/) - [guest-checkout](https://orderbadger.com/kb/guest-checkout/) ## People also search for WooCommerce flag orders from new customer accounts | how to identify recently registered buyers in WooCommerce | detect new account orders for fraud screening WooCommerce | WooCommerce new registration order verification | flag accounts less than 7 days old placing orders WooCommerce --- # How to identify your best customers returning after months of inactivity in WooCommerce > Badges orders from customers who have spent over £1000 lifetime, have been dormant for more than 180 days, and are now placing an order over 150. This is your best customer coming back - a VIP retention moment that deserves special treatment. ## The problem Your highest-spending customers are irreplaceable. When one returns after months of silence with a substantial order, it is a make-or-break moment for retention. Without a flag, the order is processed routinely and the opportunity to roll out the red carpet is lost - potentially for good. ## The solution OrderBadger can identify your highest-spending customers returning after a long absence and flag them for VIP treatment. ## Who this is for Any store with high-value repeat customers - luxury, premium DTC, specialist retailers, and B2B suppliers where a small number of customers drive a disproportionate share of revenue. ## At a glance - Registered customers only - Threshold: lifetime spend over £1000 - Dormancy window: 180+ days inactive - Current order must exceed £150 - Badge: Whale Back! (green) ## How it works Checks three conditions: the customer must be returning after 180+ days of dormancy, their total lifetime spend must exceed £1000, and the current order total must be over £150. When all three are true, the order is badged and routed to the inbox. **Recommended action:** Treat this as a VIP moment. Consider priority fulfilment, premium packaging, a personal thank-you note from the founder or account manager, and a loyalty offer to encourage continued re-engagement. Add the customer to a VIP win-back email sequence. ## Rule template > Customer is reactivated after 180 days and customer lifetime spend is over £1000 and order total is over £150 **Badge:** Whale Back! (green, info) **Inbox:** Yes ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Lower 'over £1000' lifetime spend to 'over £500' to catch returning mid-tier customers who are still worth the VIP treatment. - Reduce 'over £150' order total to 'over £75' if a smaller reorder still signals genuine re-engagement for your product range. - Change '180 days' to '90 days' if your purchase cycle is shorter and a 3-month absence already counts as dormant. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and customer has 5 or more previous paid orders' to ensure the returning customer was a genuine repeat buyer, not someone who spent a lot in a single order. - Add 'and shipping is domestic' if your win-back campaign or personal note programme only applies to domestic customers. ## When this rule matches - **whale reactivated high order:** Customer is reactivated after 180+ days, lifetime spend is £2500 (over £1000), and order total is £200 (over £150) - all three conditions met. - **whale reactivated boundary values:** Customer is reactivated, lifetime spend is £1001 (just over £1000), and order total is £150.01 (just over £150) - all conditions met at boundary. ## When this rule does not match - **whale not reactivated:** Customer has high lifetime spend and a large order, but is not flagged as reactivated - they have been active within the last 180 days. - **reactivated low ltv:** Customer is reactivated after 180 days and order is over £150, but lifetime spend is only £400 - below the £1000 threshold. - **whale reactivated small order:** Customer is reactivated with high lifetime spend, but order total is only £80 - below the £150 threshold. ## Good to know - Lifetime spend (prior_gross_paid_spend) is the cumulative total of all previous paid orders. It does not deduct refunds. - The 180-day reactivation flag is pre-computed. The rule checks the flag rather than calculating days directly. - Guest checkouts cannot trigger this rule because they have no customer history. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: How is this different from the customer-reactivated-after-180d rule?** The existing reactivation rule fires for any customer returning after 180 days regardless of spend. This rule adds two extra conditions - lifetime spend over £1000 and current order over 150 - to specifically identify your highest-value returning customers. **Q: Does lifetime spend include refunded orders?** The prior_gross_paid_spend field tracks gross spend from paid orders. Refunded amounts are not deducted, so a customer with significant refunds may still qualify. Consider combining with the refund-history rule if this is a concern. **Q: Why require a minimum order total of £150 for the current order?** The order total threshold ensures the customer is making a meaningful return purchase, not just a token order. A whale coming back with a £150+ order is re-engaging seriously and deserves the full VIP treatment. **Q: Can I lower the lifetime spend threshold for my store?** Yes. Edit the rule text to change £1000 to a value that represents a high-value customer for your business and recompile. ## Related rules - [customer-reactivated-after-180d](https://orderbadger.com/kb/customer-reactivated-after-180d/) - [high-value-customer-ltv-500](https://orderbadger.com/kb/high-value-customer-ltv-500/) - [loyal-customer-5-plus-orders](https://orderbadger.com/kb/loyal-customer-5-plus-orders/) - [lapsed-customer-60-days](https://orderbadger.com/kb/lapsed-customer-60-days/) ## People also search for WooCommerce high-value customer returning after long absence | how to flag VIP customers reactivating in WooCommerce | detect dormant whale customers placing new orders WooCommerce | WooCommerce win-back alert for top-spending lapsed customers | identify returning high-LTV customers for VIP treatment WooCommerce --- # How to add a personal welcome for high-value first orders in WooCommerce > Badges first-time registered customer orders exceeding £250, signalling an opportunity to include a personal welcome note or onboarding materials to convert a promising first impression into a long-term relationship. ## The problem A new registered customer making a large first purchase is signalling strong intent and trust. Without a flag, this order is processed routinely and the chance to make a memorable first impression - through a handwritten note, premium packaging, or a loyalty offer - is lost. ## The solution OrderBadger can flag high-value first orders from registered customers so your team can add a personal touch to the unboxing experience. ## Who this is for Any store that values customer lifetime value and wants to invest in the first experience for customers who arrive with a high opening order. Particularly effective for premium, lifestyle, and DTC brands. ## At a glance - First-time registered customers only - Threshold: order total over £250 - Guests are excluded - Badge: Welcome + Review (yellow) - Category: review ## How it works Checks three conditions: the customer must have zero previous paid orders, the order total must exceed £250, and the customer must not be a guest checkout. When all three are true, the order is badged and routed to the inbox for review. **Recommended action:** Include a handwritten welcome note, premium packaging, or a first-purchase discount code for the next order. Consider adding the customer to a VIP onboarding email sequence to nurture the relationship. ## Rule template > Customer has 0 previous paid orders and order total is over £250 and customer is not a guest checkout **Badge:** Welcome + Review (yellow, info) **Inbox:** Yes ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Lower 'over £250' to 'over £100' if your average order value is lower and you want to welcome more first-time buyers with a personal touch. - Raise 'over £250' to 'over £500' to reserve the welcome treatment for your highest-value new customers only. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and shipping is international' to focus the welcome experience on international first-time buyers who may need extra reassurance about cross-border delivery. - Add 'and distinct product count is 3 or more' to target new customers exploring your catalogue broadly, which signals strong intent. ## When this rule matches - **new registered customer over 250:** Registered customer with 0 previous paid orders and order total of £320 - exceeds the 250 threshold. All three conditions met. - **new registered customer just above boundary:** Registered customer with 0 previous paid orders and order total of £250.01 - just above the 250 threshold. ## When this rule does not match - **returning customer over 250:** Order total exceeds £250 and customer is registered, but they have 4 previous paid orders - not a first-time customer. - **new registered customer under 250:** New registered customer but order total is only £120 - below the £250 threshold. - **guest checkout over 250:** Guest checkout with a total of £300 - the not-a-guest condition is not met, even though the value is high and there are no previous orders. ## Good to know - Guest checkouts are excluded - they have no customer account for long-term relationship building. Consider a separate rule for high-value guest orders if needed. - The £250 threshold is in the store's default currency. Adjust the rule text to match your store's average order value range. - This rule does not assess fraud risk. For fraud screening on high-value first orders, use a separate review rule with an SLA and interaction buttons. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: How is this different from the high-value-first-order-review rule?** The existing high-value-first-order-review rule targets orders over £500 with a critical severity, Pass/Fail interaction, and a 4-hour SLA - it is focused on fraud screening. This rule targets a lower threshold of £250 with info severity and no interaction, focused on customer experience rather than risk. **Q: Does the 250 threshold include shipping and tax?** Yes. The rule checks the order total field, which includes the full amount the customer is charged. **Q: Will this fire for a customer who registered but never purchased before?** Yes. A registered customer with 0 previous paid orders is exactly who this rule targets - someone who created an account and is now making their first purchase. **Q: Can I also include a loyalty programme sign-up in the welcome package?** Absolutely. The badge serves as a trigger for your team. What you include - welcome note, loyalty sign-up, discount code, or premium packaging - is entirely up to your fulfilment workflow. ## Related rules - [high-value-first-order-review](https://orderbadger.com/kb/high-value-first-order-review/) - [first-time-registered-buyer](https://orderbadger.com/kb/first-time-registered-buyer/) - [order-total-over-100](https://orderbadger.com/kb/order-total-over-100/) ## People also search for WooCommerce high-value first order welcome experience | how to flag expensive first purchases for personal touch WooCommerce | identify new customers making large first orders in WooCommerce | WooCommerce personalised welcome note for big first orders | improve first impression on high-value new customer orders WooCommerce --- # How to handle high-value orders shipping to PO Boxes in WooCommerce > Badges orders over £200 that are shipping to a PO Box address, alerting your team that the parcel cannot be signed for on delivery and may need alternative handling or insurance. ## The problem PO Box deliveries cannot require a signature on receipt, making high-value parcels vulnerable to loss or theft claims. Without a flag, expensive orders are dispatched to PO Boxes using standard processes, and disputes are only discovered after the customer reports a problem. ## The solution OrderBadger can flag high-value orders destined for PO Box addresses so your team can apply appropriate handling. ## Who this is for Stores shipping physical goods where high-value parcels require delivery confirmation or signature. Particularly relevant for electronics, jewellery, and premium product retailers. ## At a glance - Detects PO Box shipping addresses - Threshold: order total over £200 - Category: shipping - Badge: PO Box + High Value (orange) - Routes to inbox for review ## How it works Checks two conditions: the shipping address must be a PO Box and the order total must exceed £200. When both are true, a warning badge appears on the order and it is routed to the inbox. **Recommended action:** Consider adding shipping insurance, switching to a carrier that offers PO Box tracking, or contacting the customer to offer an alternative delivery address. For very high-value orders, require a physical address before dispatch. ## Rule template > Shipping address is a PO Box and order total is over £200 **Badge:** PO Box + High Value (orange, warning) **Inbox:** Yes ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Lower 'over £200' to 'over £100' if even mid-range parcels going to PO Boxes warrant attention in your business. - Raise 'over £200' to 'over £500' to focus only on the highest-value PO Box shipments where the loss risk is most significant. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and shipping is international' to focus on international PO Box shipments where tracking and recovery are harder. - Add 'and customer has 0 previous paid orders' to flag first-time buyers using a PO Box for high-value orders, which is a stronger risk signal. ## When this rule matches - **po box total 250:** Shipping to a PO Box with order total of £250 - both conditions met. - **po box high value 500:** Shipping to a PO Box with order total of £500 - well above the 200 threshold. ## When this rule does not match - **po box low value:** Shipping to a PO Box but order total is only £80 - below the £200 threshold. - **residential high value:** Order total is £350 but the address is not a PO Box - the PO Box condition is not met. - **po box exactly 200 boundary:** Shipping to a PO Box with order total of exactly £200 - the rule requires over £200, so this is at the boundary and does not qualify. ## Good to know - PO Box detection relies on the has_po_box flag in the shipping metadata. If the address parser does not recognise a PO Box format, the flag may be false. - Some carriers (e.g. Australia Post, Royal Mail) can deliver to PO Boxes with tracking. The risk level depends on your carrier and region. - The £200 threshold is in the store's default currency. Adjust the rule text for your price range. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Can I require a physical address instead of blocking PO Box orders entirely?** OrderBadger badges orders but does not block them. Use the inbox alert to reach out to the customer and request an alternative delivery address before dispatch. **Q: Does this rule detect all PO Box formats (e.g. 'P.O. Box', 'PO Box', 'Post Office Box')?** Detection depends on the has_po_box flag computed during order ingestion. The address parser handles common PO Box formats, but unusual variants may be missed. **Q: What if my carrier supports signed delivery to PO Boxes in certain regions?** The rule provides a general alert. If your carrier supports PO Box signatures in specific regions, you can combine this with a shipping zone rule to narrow the scope. ## Related rules - [remote-area-order](https://orderbadger.com/kb/remote-area-order/) - [international-order](https://orderbadger.com/kb/international-order/) - [order-total-over-100](https://orderbadger.com/kb/order-total-over-100/) ## People also search for WooCommerce high-value order to PO Box no signature | how to flag expensive orders going to PO Box addresses | detect PO Box delivery risk on valuable orders WooCommerce | WooCommerce PO Box shipping cannot get signature on delivery | prevent loss on high-value PO Box shipments WooCommerce --- # How to handle orders from customers who previously cancelled in WooCommerce > Badges orders from registered customers who have at least one previous cancellation and at least one previous paid order, placing a new order over 50. This highlights a customer who left and came back - a delicate retention moment. ## The problem A customer who previously cancelled an order and then returns is a second-chance opportunity. Without a flag, their order looks like any other repeat purchase. Mishandling this order - slow shipping, missing items, poor communication - could lose them permanently. ## The solution OrderBadger can flag orders from customers who have previously cancelled, alerting your team to handle the order with extra care. ## Who this is for Any store that tracks cancellation history and wants to ensure previously dissatisfied customers receive careful handling on their return visit. ## At a glance - Registered customers only - Requires prior cancellation and paid order history - Threshold: order total over £50 - Badge: Post-Cancel Return (teal) - Category: customer intelligence ## How it works Checks three conditions: the customer must have at least one previous cancelled order, at least one previous paid order, and the current order total must exceed £50. When all three are true, the order is badged and routed to the inbox. **Recommended action:** Prioritise the order for fast, accurate fulfilment. Consider including a small gesture - a discount code, a handwritten note, or a freebie - to acknowledge the customer's return and rebuild trust. ## Rule template > Customer has 1 or more previous cancelled orders and customer has 1 or more previous paid orders and order total is over £50 **Badge:** Post-Cancel Return (teal, info) **Inbox:** Yes ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Raise 'over £50' to 'over £100' if you only want to flag post-cancellation returns on more significant orders. - Change '1 or more previous cancelled orders' to '2 or more' to target customers with a pattern of cancellations rather than a single incident. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and customer lifetime spend is over £200' to focus the extra-care treatment on customers who have demonstrated value before the cancellation. - Remove 'order total is over £50' if you want to flag every post-cancellation return regardless of order size. ## When this rule matches - **one cancellation one paid over 50:** Customer has 1 previous cancellation, 1 previous paid order, and the current order total is £75 - all three conditions met. - **multiple cancellations loyal customer:** Customer has 3 cancellations and 5 paid orders with a total of £120 - a loyal but occasionally frustrated customer returning again. ## When this rule does not match - **cancellation but no paid orders:** Customer has 1 cancellation but 0 previous paid orders - the paid order condition is not met. - **paid orders but no cancellations:** Customer has 3 paid orders and no cancellations - the cancellation condition is not met. - **cancellation and paid but low total:** Customer has both cancellations and paid orders, but order total is only £40 - below the £50 threshold. ## Good to know - Cancellation history depends on WooCommerce order status tracking. Orders cancelled outside WooCommerce (e.g. via payment gateway) may not be counted. - Guest checkouts are excluded because cancellation history requires a customer account. - The rule does not distinguish between customer-initiated cancellations and store-initiated cancellations. Both count toward the threshold. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Why does the rule require at least one previous paid order in addition to the cancellation?** Requiring a paid order ensures the customer has actually completed a purchase with you before. A customer who only cancelled (never paid) has a different risk profile - they may have been a non-serious buyer. **Q: Does this rule count refunds as cancellations?** No. Cancellations and refunds are tracked separately in WooCommerce. This rule specifically checks the cancelled order count. Use the customer-has-refund-history rule for refund-related flags. **Q: What if the cancellation was the store's fault, not the customer's?** The rule cannot distinguish the reason for cancellation. Regardless of fault, the customer has a negative experience in their history, making this a good moment for extra care. ## Related rules - [customer-has-refund-history](https://orderbadger.com/kb/customer-has-refund-history/) - [customer-reactivated-after-180d](https://orderbadger.com/kb/customer-reactivated-after-180d/) - [loyal-customer-5-plus-orders](https://orderbadger.com/kb/loyal-customer-5-plus-orders/) ## People also search for WooCommerce customer returning after previous cancellation | how to flag post-cancellation return orders in WooCommerce | detect customers who cancelled and came back WooCommerce | WooCommerce second-chance retention for cancelled customers | prioritise orders from previously dissatisfied customers WooCommerce --- # How to detect orders draining multiple products to critical stock in WooCommerce > Badges orders where two or more products will have 2 or fewer units remaining after fulfilment, signalling a multi-product stock emergency that requires immediate reorder attention across several SKUs. ## The problem A single product running low is manageable. But when one order drains multiple products to critical levels simultaneously, the reorder workload multiplies and the risk of stockouts across your catalogue increases sharply. Without a dedicated flag, these compound stock events are easily missed. ## The solution OrderBadger can flag orders where multiple products simultaneously hit critical stock levels, alerting your team to a compound reorder situation. ## Who this is for Stores with diverse physical inventory where a single large or multi-product order can create cascading stock shortages. Especially useful for stores with long supplier lead times or seasonal restocking windows. ## At a glance - Checks post-fulfilment stock levels per item - Threshold: 2 or fewer units remaining - Requires two or more products at critical stock - Badge: Multi Low Stock (red) - Category: stock management ## How it works Counts the number of line items in the order where stock remaining after fulfilment will be 2 or fewer units. If two or more products meet this condition, the order is badged with a warning and routed to the inbox. **Recommended action:** Initiate reorder requests for all affected SKUs immediately. Review whether the products share a common supplier to consolidate the reorder into a single purchase order. Consider temporarily adjusting stock thresholds or enabling backorder status for the affected products. ## Rule template > Two or more products in the order will have stock remaining of 2 or fewer units after this order **Badge:** Multi Low Stock (red, warning) **Inbox:** Yes ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Raise '2 or fewer units' remaining to '5 or fewer' if your products have longer supplier lead times and you need earlier reorder warnings. - Change 'Two or more products' to 'Three or more products' to only trigger on the most severe multi-product stock events. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and order total is over £200' to focus stock alerts on high-value orders where the compound stockout has the biggest revenue impact. - Add 'and any item is on backorder' to escalate further when the order is already partially backordered on top of the low stock situation. ## When this rule matches - **two items at critical stock:** Two products will have 1 and 2 units remaining respectively - both at or below the threshold of 2, meeting the two-or-more condition. - **three items depleted:** Three products will have 0, 1, and 0 units remaining - well beyond the two-product minimum. ## When this rule does not match - **only one item critical:** Only one product is at critical stock (1 unit remaining). The second product has 10 units - the two-or-more condition is not met. - **all items healthy stock:** Both products have comfortable stock remaining (8 and 15 units) - well above the 2-unit threshold. - **one item at boundary one above:** One product has exactly 2 units remaining (at threshold) but the other has 3 (just above). Only one product qualifies, not two. ## Good to know - Stock remaining is calculated at evaluation time. Concurrent orders may change actual stock levels between evaluation and fulfilment. - Products without stock management enabled in WooCommerce will not have a stock_remaining_after_order value and cannot contribute to the count. - The threshold of 2 units and the minimum of 2 products are fixed in the rule text. Edit the rule to adjust either value. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: How is this different from the low-stock-after-order rule?** The low-stock-after-order rule fires when any single product hits critical stock. This rule specifically requires two or more products to hit critical stock in the same order - a more severe situation that warrants escalated reorder action. **Q: Can I raise the stock threshold from 2 to 5 units for products with longer lead times?** Yes. Edit the rule text to change the threshold from 2 to your preferred level and recompile. Stores with longer supplier lead times often benefit from a higher reorder point. **Q: Does this count product variations separately?** This depends on how WooCommerce manages stock for variations. If each variation has independent stock tracking, they count as separate products. If stock is managed at the parent level, they are counted once. ## Related rules - [low-stock-after-order](https://orderbadger.com/kb/low-stock-after-order/) - [contains-backorder-item](https://orderbadger.com/kb/contains-backorder-item/) - [any-item-on-backorder](https://orderbadger.com/kb/any-item-on-backorder/) ## People also search for WooCommerce multiple products hitting low stock from one order | how to flag compound stock emergencies in WooCommerce | detect orders causing simultaneous stockouts WooCommerce | WooCommerce multi-product critical inventory alert | one order depleting several SKUs at once WooCommerce --- # How to prioritise weekend express orders for Monday dispatch in WooCommerce > Badges high-value express orders placed on Saturday or Sunday, alerting your team that these require priority handling on Monday morning to meet the customer's expedited shipping expectation. ## The problem Weekend express orders accumulate while the warehouse is closed. If they are not prioritised first thing Monday, they risk missing carrier pickup cutoffs and the customer's express delivery promise is broken - damaging trust and potentially triggering refund requests. ## The solution OrderBadger can flag weekend express orders so your team prioritises them for Monday morning dispatch. ## Who this is for Stores offering express or next-day shipping options that do not fulfil over the weekend. Particularly relevant for operations with tight Monday morning carrier cutoffs. ## At a glance - Saturday and Sunday orders only - Shipping method must contain express or next day - Threshold: order total over £100 - Badge: Weekend Rush (orange) - Routes to inbox for Monday priority ## How it works Checks three conditions: the order must be placed on Saturday or Sunday, the shipping method must contain 'express' or 'next day', and the order total must exceed £100. When all three are true, a warning badge is applied and the order appears in the inbox. **Recommended action:** Prioritise these orders at the top of the Monday fulfilment queue. If your carrier has an early morning pickup, ensure Weekend Rush orders are packed and labelled first. Consider sending the customer a proactive update confirming Monday dispatch. ## Rule template > Order was placed on a Saturday or Sunday and shipping method contains express or next day and order total is over £100 **Badge:** Weekend Rush (orange, warning) **Inbox:** Yes ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Lower 'over £100' to 'over £50' if you want to prioritise all weekend express orders, not just the higher-value ones. - Replace 'express or next day' with your actual shipping method names (e.g. 'priority or overnight') if your store uses different labels. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and shipping is international' to single out international weekend express orders that are especially time-sensitive due to customs processing. - Remove 'order total is over £100' to flag every weekend express order regardless of value, ensuring none miss the Monday cutoff. ## When this rule matches - **saturday express over 100:** Order placed on Saturday (day 6) with express shipping method and total of £150 - all three conditions met. - **sunday next day high value:** Order placed on Sunday (day 0) with next day shipping and total of £320 - weekend day, qualifying method, and above value threshold. ## When this rule does not match - **monday express over 100:** Order placed on Monday (day 1) - not a weekend day, even though shipping is express and total exceeds £100. - **saturday standard shipping:** Weekend order with total over £100, but shipping method is standard - does not contain 'express' or 'next day'. - **sunday express under 100:** Sunday express order but total is only £85 - below the £100 threshold. ## Good to know - The shipping method match is text-based - it looks for 'express' or 'next day' in the method name. Custom shipping method names that use different wording will not match. - The £100 value threshold is in the store's default currency. Adjust the rule text for your price range. - Weekend detection uses the WordPress timezone setting. Ensure it matches your operational timezone. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: What if my express shipping is called 'Priority' instead of 'Express'?** Edit the rule text to replace 'express or next day' with your actual shipping method names (e.g. 'priority or next day') and recompile. **Q: Why is there a minimum order value of £100?** The value threshold focuses the alert on orders where a missed dispatch has the most impact - both to the customer experience and to your refund exposure. Lower-value weekend express orders can be handled in the normal Monday queue. **Q: Will a Friday evening express order placed at 11pm be flagged?** No. The rule checks the calendar day in your store's timezone. A Friday order remains a Friday order regardless of time. Only Saturday and Sunday orders are matched. **Q: Can I add an SLA to ensure these are actioned by 9am Monday?** This rule does not include an SLA by default. Duplicate the rule and add has_sla with your desired timeframe to enforce a deadline. ## Related rules - [weekend-order](https://orderbadger.com/kb/weekend-order/) - [outside-business-hours](https://orderbadger.com/kb/outside-business-hours/) - [order-total-over-100](https://orderbadger.com/kb/order-total-over-100/) ## People also search for WooCommerce weekend express orders missing Monday cutoff | how to flag Saturday and Sunday rush orders WooCommerce | prioritise weekend next-day delivery orders for Monday morning | WooCommerce express orders placed over the weekend | ensure weekend express orders ship first thing Monday WooCommerce --- # How to flag multi-category orders for coordinated warehouse picking in WooCommerce > Automatically badges orders that span three or more product categories so your team can plan cross-department picks and ensure nothing is missed from a multi-zone fulfilment. ## The problem Orders that span many categories often require picks from different warehouse zones or departments. Without a visual flag, these complex orders are treated like single-category orders and items get missed. ## The solution OrderBadger can automatically flag orders that span three or more product categories. ## Who this is for Stores with a broad catalogue spanning multiple departments, such as general merchandise retailers or gift shops where a single order may include items from very different product lines. ## At a glance - Counts distinct product categories in the order - Threshold: 3 or more categories - Applies to all customers and order sizes - Badge: Multi-Category (purple) - Useful for coordinated warehouse picking ## How it works Counts the distinct product categories across all line items and adds a badge when the order spans three or more. This helps identify cross-department orders that need coordinated picking. **Recommended action:** Print a consolidated pick list grouped by category or warehouse zone. Double-check all zones have been picked before packing the order. ## Rule template > Order includes products from 3 or more different categories **Badge:** Multi-Category (purple, info) ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Raise '3 or more' categories to '5 or more' if your catalogue is deeply categorised and 3 categories is too common to be useful. - Lower '3 or more' to '2 or more' if your warehouse zones map closely to categories and even a two-zone pick needs coordination. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and order total is over £100' to focus cross-department pick alerts on higher-value orders where fulfilment accuracy matters most. - Add 'and distinct product count is 5 or more' to target only the most complex multi-category orders that genuinely need a consolidated pick list. ## When this rule matches - **three categories:** Order contains items from 3 different categories which meets the threshold. - **five categories:** Order contains items from 5 different categories which well exceeds the threshold. ## When this rule does not match - **one category:** All items belong to a single category, well below the 3-category threshold. - **two categories:** Items span only 2 categories which does not meet the 3-category threshold. ## Good to know - Category count is based on the primary categories assigned to each product in WooCommerce. Products with multiple categories may inflate the count. - The threshold is fixed at 3. To change it, edit the rule and recompile. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: If a product is assigned to multiple WooCommerce categories, does each one count separately?** Yes. Category count is based on all categories assigned to each product. A product tagged with both 'Electronics' and 'Gifts' contributes two categories, which may inflate the count. **Q: Does this count parent categories, child categories, or both?** It counts whichever categories are directly assigned to the product in WooCommerce. If your products only have child categories assigned, parent categories are not added automatically. **Q: Can I raise the threshold to 5 categories instead of 3?** Yes. Edit the rule text to specify 5 or more categories and recompile. The threshold is defined directly in the natural-language rule. ## Related rules - [distinct-products-over-2](https://orderbadger.com/kb/distinct-products-over-2/) - [three-or-more-line-items](https://orderbadger.com/kb/three-or-more-line-items/) ## People also search for WooCommerce orders spanning multiple product categories | how to identify cross-department pick orders in WooCommerce | flag multi-zone fulfilment orders WooCommerce | WooCommerce order from three or more categories needs coordinated picking | detect complex multi-department orders in WooCommerce --- # How to flag high-value orders for extra checks in WooCommerce > Automatically badges orders whose total exceeds a configurable threshold so your team can prioritise high-value fulfilment or apply extra checks before dispatch. ## The problem High-value orders often need extra attention - a second check on stock, a confirmation of payment, or priority packing. Without a visual flag, they can slip through the normal queue unnoticed. ## The solution OrderBadger can automatically flag orders above any value threshold you set. ## Who this is for Any WooCommerce store that ships physical products and wants to treat orders above a certain value differently - especially electronics, luxury goods, and wholesale stores. ## At a glance - Checks the order grand total including tax and shipping - Threshold: over £100 in store currency - Applies to all customers and order types - Badge: High Value (orange) ## How it works Adds a visible badge to every order whose total exceeds your chosen amount. The badge appears instantly on the WooCommerce orders list and the individual order view, so your team can spot high-value orders at a glance. **Recommended action:** Review payment confirmation and stock availability before packing. Consider prioritising dispatch for high-value customers. ## Rule template > Order total is over £100 **Badge:** High Value (orange, warning) ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Raise '£100' to '£250' if your average order value is high and you only want to flag orders that are genuinely above normal. - Lower '£100' to '£50' for stores with a lower price point where even a £50 order deserves extra attention. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and customer has 0 previous paid orders' to focus on high-value first orders, which are both an opportunity and a risk signal. - Add 'and payment method is cod' to specifically flag high-value cash-on-delivery orders that carry more refusal risk. ## When this rule matches - **order 150:** Order total of £150 exceeds the £100 threshold. - **order 100 01 boundary:** Order total of £100.01 is just above the threshold. ## When this rule does not match - **order 80 below threshold:** Order total of £80 is below the £100 threshold. - **order 100 exact boundary:** Order total of exactly £100 does not exceed the threshold (rule says 'over', not 'at least'). ## Good to know - The threshold is fixed in the rule text. To change it, edit the rule and recompile. - This checks the order grand total including tax and shipping. Use a subtotal rule if you need to exclude those. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Does the £100 threshold include tax and shipping?** Yes. The rule checks the order grand total, which includes tax and shipping. If you want to compare against the subtotal only, create a separate rule that checks the subtotal field. **Q: An order totalling exactly £100 - does it get flagged?** No. The rule triggers on orders 'over £100', meaning the total must exceed £100. An order at exactly £100.00 will not receive the badge. **Q: Can I use a different currency or threshold amount?** Yes. Edit the rule text to specify your preferred amount and currency, then recompile. The threshold is written directly in the natural-language rule definition. ## Related rules - [first-time-registered-buyer](https://orderbadger.com/kb/first-time-registered-buyer/) - [high-value-first-order-review](https://orderbadger.com/kb/high-value-first-order-review/) ## People also search for WooCommerce flag orders above a certain value | how to badge high-value orders for priority handling | automatically highlight expensive orders in WooCommerce | WooCommerce order total threshold alert for review | set up high-value order notifications in WooCommerce --- # How to identify power buyers with frequent orders in WooCommerce > Badges orders from customers who have placed ten or more orders in the last 12 months, highlighting your most active power buyers for VIP treatment. ## The problem Power buyers who order frequently throughout the year are your most valuable segment, but without a visual flag they blend in with occasional purchasers. Missing these customers means missing your best retention opportunities. ## The solution OrderBadger can automatically identify power buyers based on their order frequency over the last 12 months. ## Who this is for Stores with high-frequency repeat purchasers - consumables, office supplies, pet food, supplements, and any business where annual order volume is a key loyalty metric. ## At a glance - Rolling 365-day window, not calendar year - Threshold: 10 or more orders in period - Registered customers only - Badge: Power Buyer (teal) - Category: customer intelligence ## How it works Adds a Power Buyer badge to orders from registered customers who have placed ten or more orders within the last 365 days. This highlights your most active annual buyers at a glance. **Recommended action:** Treat power buyers as VIPs - offer exclusive discounts, early access to new products, or a dedicated support channel. Prioritise their orders for fast dispatch and premium packaging. ## Rule template > Customer has placed 10 or more orders in the last 12 months **Badge:** Power Buyer (teal, info) ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Lower '10 or more orders' to '6 or more' to widen the power buyer net for stores with longer purchase cycles. - Raise '10 or more orders' to '20 or more' to reserve the badge for your truly extraordinary repeat buyers. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and customer lifetime spend is over £500' to ensure power buyers are also high-value, not just high-frequency with small orders. - Add 'and order total is over £50' to only show the badge on meaningful purchases, not every small reorder. ## When this rule matches - **customer 12 orders last 365d:** Customer has placed 12 orders in the last 365 days, above the 10-order threshold. - **customer 10 orders boundary:** Customer has placed exactly 10 orders in the last 365 days, meeting the threshold. ## When this rule does not match - **customer 4 orders last 365d:** Customer has placed only 4 orders in the last 365 days, below the 10-order threshold. - **guest checkout null annual orders:** Guest checkout has no customer account, so orders_last_365d is null and cannot satisfy the condition. ## Good to know - Guest checkouts are excluded - annual order tracking requires a registered customer account. - The 365-day window is rolling, not calendar-year based. Orders exactly 365 days old are included. - The threshold is fixed at 10 orders in the rule text. Edit the rule to change the frequency requirement. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Is the 12-month window a rolling period or a calendar year?** It is a rolling 365-day window counted backward from the current order date, not a fixed calendar year. An order placed on 15 March looks back to 15 March of the previous year. **Q: If a power buyer also triggers the loyal-customer-5-plus-orders badge, will both badges appear?** Yes. Each rule evaluates independently. A customer with 10+ orders in the past year will naturally also have 5+ lifetime orders, so both the Power Buyer and Repeat Customer badges will appear on their order. **Q: Will this work for customers who sometimes check out as guests?** Only orders placed under a registered account are counted. If the same person checks out as a guest, those orders are not linked and will not contribute to their order count. ## Related rules - [active-customer-orders-this-month](https://orderbadger.com/kb/active-customer-orders-this-month/) - [loyal-customer-5-plus-orders](https://orderbadger.com/kb/loyal-customer-5-plus-orders/) - [high-value-customer-ltv-500](https://orderbadger.com/kb/high-value-customer-ltv-500/) ## People also search for WooCommerce identify most frequent repeat customers | how to flag power buyers placing many orders per year | detect high-frequency VIP customers in WooCommerce | WooCommerce customers with 10 or more annual orders | recognise top repeat buyers for VIP treatment WooCommerce --- # How to track after-hours orders for dispatch planning in WooCommerce > Automatically badges orders placed outside your defined business hours so your team can segment out-of-hours orders for delayed processing or additional review. ## The problem Orders placed outside business hours may not be processed until the next working day, but customers may not realise this. Without flagging, out-of-hours orders get mixed in with in-hours orders, making it harder to manage expectations and prioritise the queue. ## The solution OrderBadger can flag orders placed outside your configured business hours. ## Who this is for Stores with defined business hours that want to track and manage orders placed outside those hours - useful for setting dispatch expectations and identifying out-of-hours buying patterns. ## At a glance - Uses store timezone from WordPress settings - Requires business hours to be configured - Applies to all orders placed outside those hours - Badge: After Hours (purple) ## How it works Checks whether the order was placed during your defined business hours using the derived is_business_hours field. Orders placed outside those hours are badged, giving you visibility into out-of-hours demand. **Recommended action:** Set customer expectations via order confirmation emails that out-of-hours orders will be dispatched on the next business day. Use the data to inform staffing decisions if out-of-hours volume is significant. ## Rule template > The order was placed outside of business hours **Badge:** After Hours (purple, info) ## Make it yours **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and order total is over £200' to only flag high-value after-hours orders that warrant proactive dispatch communication. - Add 'and payment method is cod' to single out after-hours COD orders, which are more likely to face delivery complications if dispatched without confirmation. ## When this rule matches - **outside business hours:** The order was placed outside of the configured business hours, so is_business_hours is false. ## When this rule does not match - **during business hours:** The order was placed during configured business hours, so is_business_hours is true. - **not configured null:** Business hours are not configured, so is_business_hours is null and the condition cannot be evaluated. ## Good to know - Business hours must be configured in your store settings for this rule to work. If not configured, the field will be null and the rule will not trigger. - This uses the store's timezone, not the customer's. A customer in a different timezone may place an order during their business hours that falls outside yours. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: What happens if I haven't configured business hours in my store settings?** The is_business_hours field will be null and the rule will never trigger. You must configure your business hours for this rule to work. **Q: Does this use the customer's timezone or my store's timezone?** It uses your store's timezone as set in WordPress. A customer in a different timezone may place an order during their daytime that falls outside your business hours. **Q: Can I define different business hours for weekdays and weekends?** That depends on how your store settings handle business hours. The rule itself checks a single is_business_hours flag, so any weekday/weekend logic needs to be configured at the store level. ## Related rules - [late-night-order](https://orderbadger.com/kb/late-night-order/) - [weekend-order](https://orderbadger.com/kb/weekend-order/) ## People also search for WooCommerce flag orders placed outside business hours | how to manage out-of-hours order expectations in WooCommerce | track after-hours WooCommerce orders for next-day processing | WooCommerce orders placed overnight or after closing | set dispatch expectations for out-of-hours orders WooCommerce --- # How to flag cash-on-delivery orders for collection prep in WooCommerce > Automatically badges orders where the customer selected cash on delivery, so your team can prepare for payment collection at the door and reduce failed delivery attempts. ## The problem Cash on delivery orders carry a higher risk of refusal at the door, which wastes driver time and return shipping costs. Without a visual flag, COD orders are processed identically to prepaid orders and the delivery team is not prepared for payment collection. ## The solution OrderBadger can automatically flag orders where the customer chose cash on delivery. ## Who this is for Stores that offer cash on delivery as a payment option, especially in regions where COD is common and refusal rates are a concern. ## At a glance - Matches cash-on-delivery payment method - Applies regardless of order value or customer type - Badge: COD (orange) - Helps delivery team prepare for payment collection ## How it works Checks the payment method on the order and adds a warning badge when it is set to cash on delivery. The badge appears on the orders list and order detail view so your team can prepare accordingly. **Recommended action:** Confirm the order with the customer before dispatch to reduce refusal risk. Ensure the delivery driver has change available and knows to collect payment. ## Rule template > Customer chose cash on delivery as their payment method **Badge:** COD (orange, warning) ## Make it yours **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and order total is over £100' to focus COD alerts on higher-value orders where a door refusal is most costly. - Add 'and customer has 0 previous paid orders' to flag first-time buyers paying COD, which carries the highest refusal risk. - Add 'and shipping is international' to isolate international COD orders that are especially expensive to return on refusal. ## When this rule matches - **cod payment:** Order payment method is COD, so the rule matches. ## When this rule does not match - **stripe payment:** Order was paid via Stripe, not cash on delivery. - **paypal payment:** Order was paid via PayPal, not cash on delivery. ## Good to know - This checks the WooCommerce payment method slug. If your COD gateway uses a non-standard slug, the rule text may need adjustment. - This does not assess the likelihood of refusal. Combine with customer history rules for a more complete picture. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: What if my COD payment gateway uses a custom slug like 'cash_on_delivery' instead of 'cod'?** The rule checks the WooCommerce payment method slug. If your gateway registers a different slug, edit the rule text to match your gateway's slug and recompile. **Q: Can I combine this with other rules to flag high-risk COD orders specifically?** Yes. You can create a compound rule that checks for COD payment and another risk signal (such as guest checkout or new account) to flag only the highest-risk COD orders. **Q: Does this rule distinguish between COD and 'pay by bank transfer on delivery'?** No. It only checks the payment method slug. If your bank transfer gateway has a different slug, it will not be matched by this rule. Create a separate rule for other payment-at-delivery methods. ## Related rules - [guest-checkout](https://orderbadger.com/kb/guest-checkout/) ## People also search for WooCommerce cash on delivery order management | how to identify COD orders needing payment collection at door | flag cash on delivery orders to reduce refusals WooCommerce | WooCommerce COD payment method alert for delivery team | prepare for cash on delivery orders in WooCommerce --- # How to apply priority handling during peak season in WooCommerce > Automatically badges orders placed during your defined peak season so your team can apply expedited workflows, allocate extra resources, and manage heightened customer expectations. ## The problem Peak season orders demand faster processing, more careful stock management, and heightened customer communication. Without a visual flag, peak season orders are processed at the same pace as off-peak, leading to delays, stockouts, and poor customer experiences during your busiest period. ## The solution OrderBadger can automatically flag orders placed during your configured peak season. ## Who this is for Any store with seasonal demand spikes - holiday retailers, gift shops, garden centres, fashion stores with seasonal collections, and any business with a Black Friday or Christmas rush. ## At a glance - Date-range based, not volume based - Requires peak season dates configured in settings - Applies to all orders within the window - Badge: Peak Season (red) ## How it works Checks whether the order was placed during a date range you define as peak season. When active, all orders receive a badge so your team knows to apply peak-season workflows and priority handling. **Recommended action:** Prioritise fulfilment speed, double-check stock levels, and ensure customer communications reflect peak-season delivery timelines. Consider assigning extra warehouse staff during flagged periods. ## Rule template > The order was placed during peak season **Badge:** Peak Season (red, warning) ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - If your peak season flag is a single block, consider splitting it into two separate windows (e.g. Black Friday week and Christmas week) at the store-settings level so the badge only fires during your true crunch periods. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and total quantity is more than 3' to focus the badge on larger peak-season orders that will strain warehouse capacity the most. - Add 'and shipping is international' to isolate cross-border peak-season orders that need extra lead time for customs. ## When this rule matches - **peak season active:** The order was placed during the configured peak season, so is_peak_season is true. ## When this rule does not match - **not peak season:** The order was placed outside peak season, so is_peak_season is false. - **not configured null:** Peak season is not configured, so is_peak_season is null and the condition cannot be evaluated. ## Good to know - Peak season dates must be configured in your store settings. If not configured, the field will be null and this rule will not trigger. - This is a simple date-range check - it does not adapt dynamically to actual order volume. Use it in combination with volume-based rules for a more nuanced approach. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Where do I configure my peak season dates?** Peak season dates are configured in your store settings. If no dates are set, the is_peak_season field will be null and this rule will never trigger. **Q: Can I define multiple peak season windows, like both Black Friday week and the Christmas period?** That depends on your store configuration. The rule checks a single is_peak_season flag, so multiple date ranges need to be combined at the store settings level into one flag. **Q: Does this rule do anything differently based on order volume, or is it purely date-based?** It is purely date-based. It flags every order placed within your defined peak season regardless of actual volume. Combine it with volume-based rules for a more nuanced approach. ## Related rules - [weekend-order](https://orderbadger.com/kb/weekend-order/) - [outside-business-hours](https://orderbadger.com/kb/outside-business-hours/) ## People also search for WooCommerce peak season order priority handling | how to flag orders during Black Friday and Christmas rush | manage holiday season order volume in WooCommerce | WooCommerce seasonal demand spike order management | prioritise fulfilment during busy retail periods WooCommerce --- # How to route heavy pet food orders to the right carrier in WooCommerce > Automatically badges single-SKU orders over 10 kg that contain pet food or cat litter, ensuring your team selects an appropriate carrier and packaging for heavy bulk consumable shipments. ## The problem Large bags of pet food and cat litter are among the heaviest items in a pet store. When a customer orders a single heavy product, the parcel often exceeds standard carrier weight limits or requires a pallet/specialist service. Without a flag, these orders are routed through the standard shipping process, leading to carrier surcharges, damaged packaging, or failed deliveries. ## The solution OrderBadger can flag heavy single-product pet food or cat litter orders so your team arranges the right carrier and packaging. ## Who this is for Pet supply retailers who sell large bags of pet food and cat litter (10 kg+) and need to ensure heavy single-product orders are shipped via appropriate carrier services with reinforced packaging. ## At a glance - Pet Food or Cat Litter categories only - Threshold: total weight over 10 kg - Single-SKU orders only - Badge: Heavy Bulk (grey) - Category: shipping ## How it works Combines three conditions: the total order weight must exceed 10 kg, at least one item must be in the Pet Food or Cat Litter category, and the order must contain only a single distinct product. This targets the common pattern of customers ordering one large bag of food or litter that requires special shipping handling. **Recommended action:** Select a carrier service rated for heavy parcels. Use reinforced or double-walled boxes. Consider offering free delivery on bulk orders to encourage repeat purchases of heavy items. ## Rule template > Total order weight is over 10 kg and at least one product is in the Pet Food or Cat Litter category and order is single SKU **Badge:** Heavy Bulk (grey, info) ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Try lowering '10 kg' to '8 kg' if your carrier's heavy-parcel surcharge kicks in at a lower weight tier. - Raise '10 kg' to '15 kg' if you want to limit the badge to only the largest bags - standard 10 kg bags ship fine with your current carrier. **Add or remove conditions:** - Remove 'and order is single SKU' to also catch mixed baskets that include a heavy bag of food alongside accessories. - Add 'and shipping is international' to flag only heavy pet-food parcels heading abroad, where weight surcharges are steepest. ## When this rule matches - **single sku 15kg pet food:** Single SKU order of pet food weighing 15 kg - over the 10 kg threshold, in Pet Food category, and single SKU. - **single sku 2x cat litter:** Two units of the same cat litter (single SKU) totalling 20 kg - over 10 kg and in Cat Litter category. ## When this rule does not match - **single sku light pet food:** Single SKU pet food order but total weight is only 5 kg - below the 10 kg threshold. - **heavy multi sku pet food:** Order weighs 18 kg and contains Pet Food, but has multiple different products - not a single SKU order. - **heavy single sku non food:** Single SKU order over 10 kg, but the product is in Furniture - not Pet Food or Cat Litter. ## Good to know - The rule requires product weights to be set correctly in WooCommerce. Products without a weight are treated as zero. - Mixed orders (food + accessories) are excluded by the single-SKU condition. If you also want to flag heavy mixed pet orders, create a separate rule without the single-SKU constraint. - The 10 kg threshold is fixed in the rule text. Adjust it to match your carrier's weight tiers. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Why does this rule require single SKU instead of flagging all heavy pet food orders?** Single-SKU heavy orders are typically bulk reorders of one large bag. These are the orders most likely to need a specialist heavy-parcel service. Mixed orders with many items may distribute weight across multiple parcels. **Q: Does ordering 2 units of the same 10 kg bag count as single SKU?** Yes. Single SKU means only one distinct product, regardless of quantity. Two bags of the same food is a single-SKU order with a total weight of 20 kg, which would trigger this rule. **Q: Can I use this to offer a bulk delivery discount?** Absolutely. The badge identifies bulk food/litter orders clearly. Use it as a trigger to include a flyer about subscription savings or to apply a shipping discount for heavy regular orders. ## Related rules - [heavy-order-over-5kg](https://orderbadger.com/kb/heavy-order-over-5kg/) - [single-sku-order](https://orderbadger.com/kb/single-sku-order/) ## People also search for WooCommerce heavy pet food order shipping handling | how to flag bulk dog food or cat litter orders for carrier selection | heavy single-product pet food shipments WooCommerce | WooCommerce pet store heavy parcel carrier surcharge | route oversized pet food bags to specialist delivery WooCommerce --- # How to identify new pet owners from first purchase patterns in WooCommerce > Automatically badges first-time orders that span 3 or more categories, include pet food, and have a subtotal over £75 - a strong signal that the customer is a new pet owner stocking up on essentials. ## The problem New pet owners typically make a large initial purchase covering food, accessories, bedding, and grooming supplies across multiple categories. This first order is a critical opportunity to build loyalty with a care guide, product recommendations, and a welcome offer. Without a flag, the order ships with no special treatment and the new-owner moment is missed. ## The solution OrderBadger can identify first-time customers who are likely new pet owners based on their multi-category purchase pattern including pet food. ## Who this is for Pet supply retailers who want to identify likely new pet owners at the point of their first purchase and provide a personalised onboarding experience with care tips, feeding guides, and loyalty incentives. ## At a glance - First-time customers only (zero previous orders) - Must include Pet Food category - Spans 3 or more categories - Threshold: subtotal over £75 - Badge: New Pet Owner (green) ## How it works Combines four conditions: the customer must have no previous paid orders, the order must span 3 or more categories, at least one item must be in the Pet Food category, and the subtotal must exceed £75. This pattern strongly suggests a new pet owner making their initial stocking-up purchase. **Recommended action:** Include a pet care guide in the package, add a welcome card with a discount code for their next order, and consider a follow-up email with feeding advice and product recommendations based on the pet type they purchased for. ## Rule template > Customer has 0 previous paid orders and order spans 3 or more categories and at least one product is in the Pet Food category and subtotal is over £75 **Badge:** New Pet Owner (green, info) **Inbox:** Yes ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Lower 'subtotal is over £75' to '£50' if your average product prices are modest - this catches more new-owner starter baskets. - Change '3 or more categories' to '2 or more categories' to include customers who buy just food and one accessory, which is still a strong new-owner signal. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and customer is a registered account' to exclude guest checkouts and focus on customers you can follow up with. - Remove 'and at least one product is in the Pet Food category' if you also want to catch new owners who buy bedding, leads, and toys but order food elsewhere. ## When this rule matches - **first order 4 categories with food over 75:** Customer has 0 previous orders, order spans 4 categories including Pet Food, subtotal is £120 - all conditions met. - **first order 3 categories boundary:** Customer has 0 previous orders, order spans exactly 3 categories (boundary), includes Pet Food, and subtotal is £85 (over £75). ## When this rule does not match - **returning customer same pattern:** Order matches all other conditions but customer has 2 previous orders - not a first-time buyer. - **first order no pet food:** First-time customer with multi-category order over £75, but no item is in the Pet Food category. - **first order under 75 subtotal:** First-time customer buying across 3 categories including Pet Food, but subtotal is only £60 - below the £75 threshold. ## Good to know - The rule uses category count as a proxy for stocking up. A first-time customer buying many items from a single category will not be flagged. - Guest checkouts with no order history will match the 0 previous orders condition. If you want to exclude guests, combine this with a registered-customer condition. - The £75 subtotal threshold is in the store's base currency and may need adjusting for different markets. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Why is Pet Food required instead of just any multi-category order?** Pet Food is the strongest signal of a new pet owner. A multi-category order without food could be a gift purchase or restocking accessories for an existing pet. Food in the basket strongly suggests the customer is setting up for a new pet. **Q: Does this work for both dog and cat owners?** Yes. The rule checks for the Pet Food category regardless of pet type. If your store uses sub-categories like Dog Food and Cat Food, ensure they share a parent Pet Food category for the rule to match correctly. **Q: Can I adjust the subtotal threshold for my store's price range?** Yes. Edit the rule text to change the subtotal from £75 to whatever minimum makes sense for your products. A higher threshold catches only larger stocking-up orders; a lower one casts a wider net. **Q: What if a customer is buying for a second pet?** If the customer has previous orders, the 0 previous paid orders condition fails and they will not be flagged. This rule specifically targets the first-purchase moment. For existing customers buying in new categories, consider a separate rule. ## Related rules - [first-time-registered-buyer](https://orderbadger.com/kb/first-time-registered-buyer/) - [order-spans-3-categories](https://orderbadger.com/kb/order-spans-3-categories/) - [order-total-over-100](https://orderbadger.com/kb/order-total-over-100/) ## People also search for WooCommerce detect new pet owner first purchase | how to spot first-time puppy or kitten supply buyers | flag new pet owner starter orders for welcome kit WooCommerce | WooCommerce multi-category pet purchase from new customer | identify likely new pet owners for onboarding in WooCommerce --- # How to detect overdue pet food reorders from regular customers in WooCommerce > Automatically badges orders from repeat customers who have repurchased pet food products before but have gone more than 35 days since their last order - indicating a disrupted reorder cycle that may benefit from a reminder or subscription offer. ## The problem Pet food is consumed on a predictable cycle. When a loyal customer who regularly buys pet food goes more than 35 days between orders, they may have switched to a competitor, forgotten to reorder, or changed feeding habits. Without a flag, this lapsed pattern goes unnoticed until the customer is lost entirely. ## The solution OrderBadger can detect when a regular pet food customer is overdue for their typical reorder cycle and flag the order for proactive outreach. ## Who this is for Pet supply retailers with a significant repeat-purchase customer base, especially those selling consumable pet food and treats who want to identify disrupted reorder patterns and intervene proactively. ## At a glance - Requires 2+ previous paid orders - At least one product repurchased 2+ times - Gap threshold: more than 35 days since last order - Must include Pet Food category - Badge: Reorder Overdue (orange) ## How it works Combines four conditions: the customer must have 2 or more previous paid orders, at least one item must have been purchased by this customer at least twice before, the customer must not have ordered in more than 35 days, and at least one item must be in the Pet Food category. When all are true, the badge appears in the inbox. **Recommended action:** Include a personalised note acknowledging their return. Consider offering a subscription or auto-reorder option for their regular pet food items. If the gap was unusually long, check whether a price increase or stock issue may have caused the delay. ## Rule template > Customer has 2 or more previous paid orders and at least one product has been purchased by this customer 2 or more times and days since last order is more than 35 and at least one product is in the Pet Food category **Badge:** Reorder Overdue (orange, warning) **Inbox:** Yes ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Change 'more than 35' to 'more than 45' if your bestselling bags are large-breed sizes that last longer than a month. - Lower '2 or more previous paid orders' to '1 or more' to catch customers who are overdue after just their second purchase - useful for smaller stores building early loyalty. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and subtotal is over £50' to focus on high-value overdue reorders where a retention offer is most worthwhile. - Remove 'and at least one product is in the Pet Food category' to detect overdue reorder patterns across all consumable categories, not just food. ## When this rule matches - **repeat customer 40d gap pet food:** Customer has 5 previous orders, repurchased this pet food item 3 times before, last order was 40 days ago (over 35), and item is in Pet Food - all conditions met. - **repeat customer 60d gap mixed basket:** Customer has 3 previous orders, one Pet Food item repurchased twice, 60 days since last order - overdue pattern with additional non-food items. ## When this rule does not match - **first time customer pet food:** Customer has only 1 previous order - below the 2 previous paid orders threshold. - **repeat customer recent order:** Customer is a repeat buyer who repurchases pet food, but last order was only 20 days ago - not overdue. - **repeat customer overdue no pet food:** Customer has repeat purchases and is overdue, but no items are in the Pet Food category. ## Good to know - The 35-day threshold is fixed in the rule text and may not suit all feeding cycles (e.g., large bags last longer). - The rule requires exact product repurchase - if the customer switches brands within the Pet Food category, the repurchase count for the new product may be zero. - Guest checkouts are effectively excluded because they have no purchase history. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Why is the threshold set at 35 days instead of 30?** A 35-day window accounts for typical monthly purchasing with a small buffer. Most pet food bags last about 30 days, so a customer ordering at 35+ days is slightly overdue. Adjust the number in the rule text to match your products' consumption cycle. **Q: Does this rule trigger on the overdue order itself, or before it?** It triggers when the customer places a new order after the gap. The badge flags the arriving order as an overdue reorder - it does not send a reminder before the order is placed. For pre-order reminders, consider a marketing automation tool. **Q: What if the customer buys a different pet food brand this time?** The repurchase condition checks the exact product. If they switch to a new product, that item's customer_previous_purchase_count may be 0 and the rule will not trigger. The rule is designed to detect repeat-purchase disruption on specific products. ## Related rules - [repeat-product-buyer-3x](https://orderbadger.com/kb/repeat-product-buyer-3x/) - [lapsed-customer-60-days](https://orderbadger.com/kb/lapsed-customer-60-days/) - [loyal-customer-5-plus-orders](https://orderbadger.com/kb/loyal-customer-5-plus-orders/) ## People also search for WooCommerce regular pet food customer overdue for reorder | how to flag lapsed repeat pet food buyers in WooCommerce | detect disrupted pet food reorder cycle WooCommerce | WooCommerce pet food subscription lapse alert | identify pet food customers at risk of switching competitor WooCommerce --- # How to include usage guides with first-time device purchases in WooCommerce > Badges orders from customers with no purchase history who are buying a Medical Devices or Wellness Devices product with an order total above £100. These first-time buyers are investing in equipment they may not know how to use correctly, and a printed or emailed usage guide can significantly improve their experience and reduce return rates. ## The problem Blood pressure monitors, TENS units, nebulisers, and similar wellness devices are not intuitive for everyone. First-time buyers who spend over £100 on equipment they have never used before are the most likely to misuse the device, get frustrated, and request a return. Including a clear usage guide - whether printed, linked via QR code, or emailed - dramatically reduces support tickets and returns while building trust. ## The solution OrderBadger can spot first-time customers purchasing wellness or medical devices above a value threshold, prompting your team to include a usage guide with the shipment. ## Who this is for Online pharmacies, health and wellness retailers, and medical device suppliers selling consumer-grade health equipment through WooCommerce. ## At a glance - Medical Devices or Wellness Devices categories - First-time customers only (zero previous orders) - Threshold: order total over £100 - Badge: Include Guide (teal) - Prompts usage guide inclusion at packing ## How it works Checks three conditions: the order must contain at least one item in the Medical Devices or Wellness Devices category, the customer must have zero previous paid orders, and the order total must exceed £100. The badge appears as a passive label on the order - no inbox routing or interaction buttons - serving as a packing instruction for your fulfilment team. **Recommended action:** Include a printed quick-start guide or insert a card with a QR code linking to a video tutorial. For complex devices like nebulisers or blood pressure monitors, consider a follow-up email 3 days after delivery asking if the customer needs help getting started. ## Rule template > At least one product is in the Medical Devices or Wellness Devices category and customer has 0 previous paid orders and order total is over £100 **Badge:** Include Guide (teal, info) ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Lower 'over £100' to 'over £50' if you sell lower-priced devices like pulse oximeters or digital thermometers that still benefit from a usage guide. - Raise 'over £100' to 'over £200' to reserve the guide for premium equipment purchases where setup complexity justifies the effort. **Add or remove conditions:** - Remove 'customer has 0 previous paid orders' to include a guide with every device order, not just first purchases - returning customers buying a new device type also benefit from instructions. - Add 'and at least one product is in the Nebuliser or CPAP category' for a more targeted rule that only triggers for devices with the steepest learning curves. ## When this rule matches - **first time medical device buyer:** Customer has no prior orders, order includes a Medical Devices product, and total is £149.99 - all three conditions satisfied. - **first time wellness device boundary:** Zero previous orders, Wellness Devices category present, and order total is £100.01 - just above the threshold. ## When this rule does not match - **returning customer device purchase:** Order includes Medical Devices and total exceeds £100, but the customer has 4 previous paid orders - they are not a first-time buyer. - **first time low value device:** First-time buyer with a Wellness Devices product, but order total of £45 does not exceed the £100 threshold. - **first time non device high value:** Customer is first-time and order total is £200, but all products are in Supplements - no device category present. ## Good to know - The rule identifies first-time buyers by order count, not by product experience. A customer who bought supplements previously but is new to devices will not trigger the badge because they have existing order history. - Guide content must be prepared and maintained by your team. OrderBadger flags the need but does not generate or attach documentation. - Guest checkouts with no order history will match the zero-orders condition, which is generally correct but could occasionally misidentify a repeat customer. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Should I include a guide with every device order or just first-time buyers?** This rule targets first-time buyers because they have the highest risk of misuse and return. If you want to include guides universally, edit the rule to remove the previous order condition. **Q: What kind of guide works best?** A single-page quick-start card performs well for simple devices. For complex equipment, a QR code linking to a 2-minute video tutorial has the highest engagement. Avoid including the full manufacturer manual - customers already have that. **Q: Why is the order total threshold set at £100?** Devices above £100 tend to be more complex and represent a larger financial commitment from the customer. The threshold filters out inexpensive items like basic thermometers where a guide adds less value relative to the effort. ## Related rules - [pharmacy-quantity-limit-check](https://orderbadger.com/kb/pharmacy-quantity-limit-check/) - [pharmacy-repeat-prescription-cycle](https://orderbadger.com/kb/pharmacy-repeat-prescription-cycle/) - [first-time-registered-buyer](https://orderbadger.com/kb/first-time-registered-buyer/) ## People also search for WooCommerce first-time medical device buyer needs usage guide | how to flag wellness device orders for guide inclusion | include setup instructions with health device orders WooCommerce | WooCommerce reduce returns on medical device first purchases | add quick-start guide to first-time blood pressure monitor orders --- # How to enforce medicine quantity limits on WooCommerce pharmacy orders > Badges orders containing Pharmacy or Medicines category products when total quantity exceeds 3 items. Regulated products often carry per-order quantity restrictions, and this rule surfaces orders that need pharmacist review before they can be released. ## The problem Online pharmacies operate under strict regulatory frameworks that limit how much of certain products a single customer can purchase in one transaction. Paracetamol, codeine-containing products, and other over-the-counter medicines are commonly restricted to small quantities. Dispatching an order that breaches these limits exposes the retailer to regulatory penalties and creates a genuine public safety concern. ## The solution OrderBadger can flag pharmacy orders that exceed a quantity threshold and require pharmacist approval before dispatch, with a 1-hour SLA to keep the review process tight. ## Who this is for Online pharmacies, health retailers with a medicines category, and any WooCommerce store selling regulated health products that carry per-order quantity restrictions. ## At a glance - Pharmacy or Medicines categories required - Threshold: total quantity more than 3 items - Severity: critical with 60-minute SLA - Approve or Reject interaction buttons - Badge: Qty Limit Check (red) ## How it works Checks two conditions: at least one product must be in the Pharmacy or Medicines category, AND total quantity across all items in the order must exceed 3. When triggered, the order lands in your inbox with Approved/Rejected interaction buttons and a 60-minute SLA that starts from the moment the order is created. **Recommended action:** Route these orders to your pharmacist or compliance officer for review. If the quantity is within regulatory limits for the specific products ordered, mark as Approved and dispatch. If the order breaches quantity restrictions, mark as Rejected and contact the customer to explain the limit and offer to split the order. ## Rule template > At least one product is in the Pharmacy or Medicines category and total quantity is more than 3 **Badge:** Qty Limit Check (red, critical) **Inbox:** Yes **Interaction:** Approved / Rejected **SLA:** 1h ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Raise 'more than 3' to 'more than 5' if your regulatory environment allows higher quantities per transaction and you want to reduce false positives. - Lower 'more than 3' to 'more than 1' for products with stricter limits, such as codeine-containing medicines where some jurisdictions restrict to 1 pack per sale. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and customer has 0 previous paid orders' to apply stricter scrutiny on first-time buyers, where the risk of stockpiling is harder to assess. - Add 'or at least one product is in the Controlled Substances category' if you sell products under additional regulatory categories beyond Pharmacy and Medicines. ## When this rule matches - **pharmacy items over limit:** Order contains 6 items across Pharmacy and Medicines categories - well above the 3-item threshold. - **pharmacy boundary quantity:** Total quantity is 4 - just above the 'more than 3' threshold. Even a single unit over the limit requires review. ## When this rule does not match - **pharmacy within limit:** Order includes Pharmacy products but total quantity is 3 - does not exceed the 'more than 3' threshold. - **non pharmacy high quantity:** Total quantity is 10 but all items are in Vitamins and Supplements - no Pharmacy or Medicines category present. - **mixed cart pharmacy under limit:** Order has 8 items total but only 2 are in the Pharmacy category. Total quantity includes all items, which is 8, but since total quantity counts all items and exceeds 3, this would fire - WAIT, total quantity IS more than 3 here. Correcting: the order has only 2 Pharmacy items and 1 non-pharmacy item, total quantity 3. ## Good to know - The quantity threshold applies to total order quantity, not per-product quantity. An order with 2 different medicines at quantity 2 each totals 4 and triggers the badge. - Regulated quantity limits vary by product and jurisdiction. The fixed threshold of 3 is a conservative starting point - your pharmacist should determine the appropriate limit for your product range. - The rule does not prevent the order from being placed. It flags it post-purchase for manual review before dispatch. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: What happens if the pharmacist does not respond within the 60-minute SLA?** The SLA shows as breached in the OrderBadger dashboard, but the order is not automatically cancelled or released. The breach serves as an escalation signal that the review is overdue. **Q: Does total quantity count non-pharmacy items in the order?** Yes. The total quantity condition counts all items in the order, not just pharmacy items. This is intentional - a large mixed basket that includes medicines warrants the same scrutiny. **Q: Can I set different limits for different product types?** Not within a single rule. Create separate rules for each product type with different quantity thresholds - for example, one rule for paracetamol at quantity 2 and another for antihistamines at quantity 5. **Q: Is the Rejected button connected to WooCommerce order status?** No. The interaction buttons record a decision within OrderBadger. Your team must manually update the WooCommerce order status (cancel, refund, or hold) based on the rejection. ## Related rules - [pharmacy-first-time-device-buyer](https://orderbadger.com/kb/pharmacy-first-time-device-buyer/) - [pharmacy-repeat-prescription-cycle](https://orderbadger.com/kb/pharmacy-repeat-prescription-cycle/) ## People also search for WooCommerce pharmacy order quantity limit compliance | how to flag orders exceeding medicine purchase limits | enforce over-the-counter medicine quantity restrictions WooCommerce | WooCommerce paracetamol quantity limit check | pharmacy compliance order review for quantity limits WooCommerce --- # How to recognise customers on a regular supplement reorder cycle in WooCommerce > Badges orders from customers who have placed 3 or more previous orders, have purchased at least one product 3 or more times, and are ordering within a 25-to-40-day window since their last purchase. This pattern strongly suggests a regular replenishment cycle - a customer worth retaining through consistent, reliable service. ## The problem Customers who reorder the same health products on a predictable schedule are among the most valuable in any pharmacy or supplement business. They rarely browse - they go straight to reorder. If their experience falters even once - a late dispatch, a stockout, a price increase - they silently switch to a competitor. Identifying these repeat-cycle customers lets your team ensure their orders are always prioritised and their products always in stock. ## The solution OrderBadger can detect customers reordering the same products on a regular monthly-ish cycle and tag their orders accordingly, so your team knows to treat them as high-retention-value accounts. ## Who this is for Online pharmacies, supplement retailers, and health product stores where a significant portion of revenue comes from customers on regular replenishment cycles - monthly vitamins, prescription top-ups, or recurring wellness products. ## At a glance - Registered customers with 3+ previous orders - Product repurchased 3+ times by same customer - Reorder window: 25 to 40 days since last order - Badge: On Schedule (green) - Identifies monthly replenishment patterns ## How it works Evaluates four conditions together: the customer must have 3 or more previous paid orders, at least one product in the current order must have been purchased by this customer 3 or more times previously, and the gap since their last order must fall between 25 and 40 days. This window captures the typical monthly reorder pattern while excluding both premature top-ups and overdue lapses. **Recommended action:** Ensure these orders are dispatched promptly - cycle customers notice delays more than casual buyers because they time their orders around product usage. Monitor stock levels on their frequently purchased products and consider proactive outreach if a product is about to go out of stock. ## Rule template > Customer has 3 or more previous paid orders and at least one product has been purchased by this customer 3 or more times and days since last order is more than 25 and days since last order is less than 40 **Badge:** On Schedule (green, info) ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Widen the window from '25 to 40' to '20 to 50' if your customers show more variation in their reorder timing and you still want to capture them as cycle buyers. - Narrow the window to '28 to 35' for products with a strict 30-day supply, like prescription quantities, where the cycle is highly predictable. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and order total is over £50' to focus the badge on higher-value cycle orders where retention has the greatest revenue impact. - Create a companion rule for overdue cycle customers: 'days since last order is more than 40 and at least one product has been purchased 3 or more times' to trigger a re-engagement email. ## When this rule matches - **monthly supplement reorder:** Customer has 5 previous orders, has bought Vitamin D 4 times before, and last ordered 30 days ago - textbook monthly cycle. - **boundary all minimums:** Exactly 3 previous orders, product purchased exactly 3 times, and 26 days since last order - every condition at its boundary. ## When this rule does not match - **frequent buyer too soon:** Customer has 6 previous orders and product has been purchased 5 times, but only 10 days since last order - too soon to be the regular monthly cycle. - **cycle customer overdue:** Customer fits the repeat buyer profile but 55 days since last order exceeds the 40-day upper window - they are overdue, not on schedule. - **new customer right timing:** Days since last order is 32 and product was bought 3 times, but customer has only 2 previous orders - below the 3-order minimum. ## Good to know - The 25-to-40-day window assumes a roughly monthly cycle. Customers on fortnightly or quarterly cycles will not be detected without adjusting the day range. - Product purchase count tracking requires customer accounts. Guest checkouts cannot build the repeat-purchase history needed for this rule. - The rule identifies the pattern but does not predict when the next order will arrive. For proactive reminders, you would need a separate email automation system. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: What if a customer orders the same product but at different intervals?** The rule only checks whether the current order falls within the 25-to-40-day window from the last order. It does not analyse historical interval consistency. As long as this particular gap fits the window, the badge fires. **Q: Can I detect customers on a weekly or quarterly cycle instead?** Yes - adjust the day range in the rule text. For weekly cycles, use 'more than 5 and less than 10'. For quarterly, use 'more than 80 and less than 100'. Each cycle length benefits from its own rule. **Q: Does the product purchase count include the current order?** No. It reflects how many times the customer has previously purchased the product. The current order is evaluated against this history, not included in it. **Q: Why require 3 previous orders and not just product purchase count?** The order count condition confirms the customer has an established relationship with your store, not just a one-time bulk purchase of the same product. Combined with product purchase count, it isolates genuine repeat buyers. ## Related rules - [pharmacy-quantity-limit-check](https://orderbadger.com/kb/pharmacy-quantity-limit-check/) - [pharmacy-first-time-device-buyer](https://orderbadger.com/kb/pharmacy-first-time-device-buyer/) - [repeat-product-buyer-3x](https://orderbadger.com/kb/repeat-product-buyer-3x/) - [lapsed-customer-60-days](https://orderbadger.com/kb/lapsed-customer-60-days/) ## People also search for WooCommerce detect monthly supplement reorder pattern | how to identify customers on regular prescription replenishment cycle | flag on-schedule repeat health product buyers WooCommerce | WooCommerce pharmacy repeat purchase cycle detection | recognise loyal monthly vitamin reorder customers WooCommerce --- # How to ensure specialist packing for large plant orders in WooCommerce > Badges orders where at least one item is in the Live Plants category, any single item weighs more than 5 kg, and the order total exceeds £50. These heavyweight plant shipments demand reinforced boxes, stake support, and careful handling to arrive undamaged. ## The problem Large potted plants and specimen trees are heavy, top-heavy, and fragile. Standard cardboard packaging designed for smaller houseplants cannot protect a 7 kg olive tree or a mature palm. When these orders are packed without specialist materials, breakage rates spike and replacement costs eat into margins on what should be profitable high-value sales. ## The solution OrderBadger can identify orders with large, heavy live plants that warrant specialist packing, so your warehouse team knows to reach for reinforced materials instead of standard boxes. ## Who this is for Plant nurseries, garden centres, and indoor jungle retailers that stock larger specimens - anything from established succulents in heavy ceramic pots to young trees and shrubs shipped bare-root or potted. ## At a glance - Live Plants category required - Any single item over 5 kg - Threshold: order total over £50 - Badge: Specimen Plant (orange) - Routes to inbox for specialist packing ## How it works Evaluates three conditions: at least one item in the Live Plants category, any single item weighing more than 5 kg, and an order total above £50. All three must be true. The weight check uses per-item weight, not total order weight, because a single heavy specimen is the packing challenge regardless of what else is in the box. **Recommended action:** Pull these orders into a specialist packing station. Use double-walled boxes with internal bracing, secure the pot with foam inserts, and stake the plant to prevent movement during transit. Consider pallet shipping for items above 10 kg. ## Rule template > At least one product is in the Live Plants category and any single item weighs more than 5 kg and order total is over £50 **Badge:** Specimen Plant (orange, warning) **Inbox:** Yes ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Lower 'more than 5 kg' to 'more than 3 kg' if your standard packaging struggles with anything above that weight. - Raise 'over £50' to 'over £100' if you only want to flag high-value specimen orders and let cheaper heavy items pass through normal packing. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and shipping is international' to limit the badge to large specimens going overseas, where transit times and handling risks are greatest. - Add 'or at least one product is in the Trees or Shrubs category' to catch additional heavyweight plant types beyond your main Live Plants category. ## When this rule matches - **heavy potted plant above threshold:** Order contains a Live Plants item weighing 7.5 kg and order total is £89.99 - all three conditions satisfied. - **boundary weight and total:** Single item weighs 5.1 kg (just over the 5 kg threshold) and order total is £50.01 (just over £50) - boundary pass. ## When this rule does not match - **heavy plant low order total:** Item weighs 6 kg and is in Live Plants, but order total of £35 does not exceed the £50 threshold. - **light plant high total:** Order total is £120 and item is in Live Plants, but no single item exceeds 5 kg - the weight condition fails. - **heavy non plant item:** A single item weighs 8 kg and order total exceeds £50, but the heavy item is in the Accessories category, not Live Plants. ## Good to know - Weights must be set on individual products in WooCommerce. If product weights are missing or set to zero, the rule cannot detect heavy specimens. - The rule checks per-item weight, not total order weight. Two 3 kg plants in one order will not trigger the badge because neither individual item exceeds 5 kg. - Fragility varies widely across plant species. A 6 kg hardy shrub is less fragile than a 6 kg orchid, but the rule treats them identically. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Why does the rule check individual item weight rather than total order weight?** Because the packing challenge is driven by the single heaviest item. A 7 kg potted tree needs a reinforced box regardless of whether the order also includes a 200 g packet of plant food. **Q: What if I sell bare-root trees that are light but tall and fragile?** Bare-root trees may weigh under 5 kg and will not trigger this rule. Consider a separate rule targeting the Bare Root category, or lower the weight threshold to capture lighter but still awkward items. **Q: Does the order total threshold include shipping costs?** The order total field reflects the WooCommerce order total, which typically includes shipping. If your pricing means specimen plants regularly fall below £50, lower the threshold accordingly. **Q: Can I combine this with a fragile shipping label automatically?** OrderBadger applies a badge and routes to your inbox, but does not control carrier labels directly. Use the badge as a trigger for your warehouse team to apply fragile labels manually or via your shipping software. ## Related rules - [plants-live-goods-weather-check](https://orderbadger.com/kb/plants-live-goods-weather-check/) - [heavy-order-over-5kg](https://orderbadger.com/kb/heavy-order-over-5kg/) - [plants-seasonal-planting-window](https://orderbadger.com/kb/plants-seasonal-planting-window/) ## People also search for WooCommerce large specimen plant specialist packing | how to flag heavy potted plants for reinforced packaging | protect large plant shipments from transit damage WooCommerce | WooCommerce nursery heavy plant packing requirements | route oversized live plant orders to specialist packing station WooCommerce --- # How to check weather and customs for international plant orders in WooCommerce > Badges orders that include at least one product in the Live Plants or Seeds category when the destination is international. These shipments face phytosanitary inspections, import permit requirements, and weather-related transit risks that domestic orders do not. ## The problem Plant nurseries and seed suppliers shipping live goods across borders must navigate phytosanitary certificates, import permits, and temperature-sensitive transit windows. Without a flag, an international order for live plants can be packed and dispatched identically to a domestic one, only to be held at customs, arrive during a heatwave, or get rejected at the border entirely. ## The solution OrderBadger can flag every international order that contains live plants or seeds, giving your team a prompt to check weather forecasts, transit times, and phytosanitary requirements before dispatch. ## Who this is for Online plant nurseries, garden centres, seed merchants, and horticultural suppliers that ship live plants or seeds to international customers. ## At a glance - Live Plants or Seeds categories required - International shipping only - Badge: Weather Check (yellow) - Prompts phytosanitary and weather review - Domestic plant orders are not flagged ## How it works Evaluates two conditions together: at least one item must belong to the Live Plants or Seeds category, AND the shipping destination must be international. Domestic plant orders pass through without a badge because they avoid customs inspection and typically have shorter, more predictable transit windows. **Recommended action:** Before dispatching, verify that a phytosanitary certificate is attached where required, confirm current weather conditions along the transit route are within safe bounds for live goods, and select a carrier offering a fast, tracked service to minimise time in transit. ## Rule template > At least one product is in the Live Plants or Seeds category and shipping is international **Badge:** Weather Check (yellow, warning) **Inbox:** Yes ## Make it yours **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'or at least one product is in the Bulbs or Bare Root category' to cover other living plant material that faces the same border restrictions. - Add 'and order total is over £30' to focus attention on higher-value international plant shipments and let small seed packets pass through standard processing. - Add 'and shipping country is US or AU or JP' to narrow the badge to destinations known for strict phytosanitary import controls. ## When this rule matches - **live plant international:** Order contains a Live Plants category product and shipping is international - weather and customs review needed. - **seeds international:** Order contains a Seeds category product and shipping is international - phytosanitary paperwork likely required. ## When this rule does not match - **live plant domestic:** Order contains a Live Plants product but shipping is domestic - no border or customs hurdle applies. - **accessories international:** Shipping is international but no products fall under Live Plants or Seeds - pots and tools do not require phytosanitary checks. - **seeds domestic:** Seeds category is present but shipping is domestic - the international condition is not satisfied. ## Good to know - The rule relies on products being accurately categorised as Live Plants or Seeds in WooCommerce. Miscategorised items will not trigger the badge. - Weather conditions are not evaluated automatically - the badge is a prompt for your team to check forecasts manually. - Different countries have different import restrictions for plant material. The rule flags all international destinations equally and does not distinguish between permissive and restrictive regimes. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Does this badge fire for dried flower or artificial plant orders?** Only if those products are placed in the Live Plants or Seeds category. If dried flowers and artificial plants have their own categories, they will not trigger the rule. **Q: What phytosanitary paperwork do I actually need?** Requirements vary by destination country. The badge reminds your team to check - consult your national plant health authority for the specific certificates and inspections required for each destination. **Q: Can I add a weather-based condition instead of flagging all international orders?** OrderBadger evaluates order data, not external weather feeds. The badge acts as a manual checkpoint. Your team should consult weather forecasts for the destination and transit route before packing. **Q: Will bulbs and bare root plants trigger this rule?** Not unless they are categorised under Live Plants or Seeds. If you use separate Bulbs or Bare Root categories, edit the rule to include them. ## Related rules - [international-order](https://orderbadger.com/kb/international-order/) - [plants-fragile-large-specimen](https://orderbadger.com/kb/plants-fragile-large-specimen/) - [plants-seasonal-planting-window](https://orderbadger.com/kb/plants-seasonal-planting-window/) ## People also search for WooCommerce international live plant shipping customs check | how to flag cross-border plant orders for phytosanitary review | weather and customs review for international seed orders WooCommerce | WooCommerce nursery international shipping compliance | check import permits before shipping live plants overseas WooCommerce --- # How to prioritise seasonal planting orders in WooCommerce > Badges orders placed during peak season that contain products in the Seeds, Bulbs, or Bare Root category with a total quantity above 10. These are serious planting orders from gardeners working within a seasonal window, and they benefit from priority dispatch and planting guidance. ## The problem Seeds, bulbs, and bare-root plants are time-sensitive. Customers ordering in volume during the planting season are working against a biological clock - late delivery means missed planting windows, poor germination rates, and disappointed gardeners. Recognising these orders lets your team prioritise dispatch and include timely planting advice. ## The solution OrderBadger can recognise bulk planting orders placed during peak season and tag them so your team knows to prioritise dispatch and include seasonal planting guidance. ## Who this is for Seed merchants, bulb suppliers, and bare-root nurseries whose sales are heavily seasonal. Also useful for general garden centres that see a spring or autumn surge in planting stock orders. ## At a glance - Seeds, Bulbs, or Bare Root categories required - Must be during configured peak season - Threshold: total quantity more than 10 - Badge: Planting Season (green) - Time-sensitive dispatch recommended ## How it works Evaluates three conditions: the order must be placed during peak season (as defined in your store settings), at least one product must be in the Seeds, Bulbs, or Bare Root category, and the total quantity across all items must exceed 10. The badge signals a time-sensitive planting order that benefits from fast turnaround. **Recommended action:** Prioritise these orders for same-day or next-day dispatch during busy planting periods. Include a printed planting guide or care sheet relevant to the season. If stock is running low on popular varieties, consider a proactive customer contact to offer substitutions rather than partial fulfilment. ## Rule template > It is peak season and at least one product is in the Seeds, Bulbs, or Bare Root category and total quantity is more than 10 **Badge:** Planting Season (green, info) ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Raise 'more than 10' to 'more than 20' if you want to reserve the badge for large wholesale-style orders and let hobbyist quantities pass through normally. - Lower 'more than 10' to 'more than 5' for stores where even modest bulk orders during peak season deserve priority treatment. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'or at least one product is in the Plug Plants category' to include young plant starts alongside seeds and bulbs. - Add 'and shipping is international' to focus only on international planting orders where transit delays compound the seasonal urgency. - Remove 'it is peak season' to badge all bulk planting orders year-round, regardless of season. ## When this rule matches - **peak season bulk seeds:** Order placed in March (peak season), contains Seeds category items, and total quantity is 15 - all conditions met. - **peak season bulbs over threshold:** Placed during peak season with 12 bulb items - quantity exceeds 10 and Bulbs category is present. ## When this rule does not match - **off season bulk seeds:** Order contains 20 seed packets but it is not peak season - the seasonal condition fails. - **peak season low quantity:** It is peak season and the order includes Seeds, but total quantity is only 4 - below the 10-item threshold. - **peak season non planting category:** Peak season and total quantity is 14, but all items are in the Tools category - no Seeds, Bulbs, or Bare Root products present. ## Good to know - Peak season detection relies on the is_peak_season flag being correctly configured in your store or order data. If this flag is not set, the rule will never fire. - The quantity threshold applies to total order quantity, not quantity of planting items specifically. An order with 3 seed packets and 8 pots will have a total quantity of 11 and may trigger the badge. - Different plant types have different optimal planting windows. The rule treats all seeds, bulbs, and bare root stock identically regardless of species. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: How does OrderBadger know when it is peak season?** The rule reads the is_peak_season flag from your order data. You configure what counts as peak season in your store settings or integration. Common setups use calendar date ranges, such as February through May for spring planting. **Q: Does the quantity threshold count all items or just planting items?** It counts total order quantity across all items. If your customers frequently mix planting stock with non-planting accessories, consider raising the threshold to compensate. **Q: Why not just prioritise all peak season orders regardless of quantity?** The quantity condition filters out casual shoppers picking up a couple of seed packets. The badge targets serious planting orders where dispatch timing directly affects germination success. ## Related rules - [plants-live-goods-weather-check](https://orderbadger.com/kb/plants-live-goods-weather-check/) - [plants-fragile-large-specimen](https://orderbadger.com/kb/plants-fragile-large-specimen/) - [peak-season-order](https://orderbadger.com/kb/peak-season-order/) ## People also search for WooCommerce flag bulk seed orders during planting season | how to prioritise dispatch for seasonal garden orders | WooCommerce badge orders with seeds bulbs or bare root plants | automate peak season order handling in WooCommerce | WooCommerce identify time-sensitive planting stock orders --- # How to identify high-spend customers before refunds in WooCommerce > Badges orders from customers whose total gross spend on previous orders exceeds £200 before any refunds are deducted, giving you a view of raw purchasing power. ## The problem Net spend after refunds can mask a customer's true purchasing behaviour. A customer who has spent £500 gross but received £300 in refunds still demonstrates high purchasing intent. Without a gross spend flag, these customers are undervalued. ## The solution OrderBadger can automatically flag customers based on their gross lifetime spend before refunds. ## Who this is for Stores where gross spend is a better indicator of customer engagement than net spend - fashion with high return rates, electronics with warranty returns, and any business where refunds are common but customers remain active. ## At a glance - Tracks gross spend before refunds are deducted - Threshold: prior spend over £200 - Registered customers only - Badge: High Spender (orange) - Reveals purchasing intent regardless of returns ## How it works Adds a High Spender badge to orders from registered customers whose total gross spend across all previous paid orders exceeds £200. Unlike net spend, this figure is not reduced by refunds, showing the customer's raw purchasing power. **Recommended action:** Recognise these customers as engaged buyers even if they have refund history. Consider offering product recommendations based on their purchasing pattern, or investigate whether refunds indicate a product or fulfilment issue. ## Rule template > Customer has spent more than £200 gross on previous orders before any refunds **Badge:** High Spender (orange, info) ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Try lowering '£200' to '£100' to catch mid-range spenders who are still more engaged than average. - Raise '£200' to '£500' if you sell high-ticket items and want the badge reserved for truly significant purchasing history. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and customer has 3 or more previous paid orders' to combine spend with frequency - confirming the customer is genuinely active, not just the result of one large purchase. - Add 'and at least one product has been purchased by this customer 2 or more times' to narrow to high-spenders who also show repeat-product loyalty. ## When this rule matches - **customer 350 gross spend:** Customer has £350 in prior gross paid spend, well above the £200 threshold. - **customer 201 just above:** Customer has £201 in prior gross paid spend, just above the £200 threshold. ## When this rule does not match - **customer 150 below threshold:** Customer has only £150 in prior gross paid spend, below the £200 threshold. - **first time buyer zero spend:** First-time buyer has zero prior gross spend, well below the £200 threshold. - **guest checkout null gross spend:** Guest checkout has no customer account, so prior_gross_paid_spend is null and cannot satisfy the condition. ## Good to know - Guest checkouts are excluded - gross spend tracking requires a registered customer account. - Gross spend includes the full order total before any refunds. A customer with many refunded orders may still trigger this badge. - The £200 threshold is fixed in the rule text. Edit the rule to change the amount. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Could a customer with many refunded orders still trigger this badge?** Yes. Gross spend is calculated before refunds, so a customer who ordered £300 worth of products but returned £150 still shows £300 in gross spend and will trigger the badge. This is by design - it reveals purchasing intent regardless of returns. **Q: Why would I use gross spend instead of net spend after refunds?** Gross spend reveals purchasing intent regardless of returns. A customer who orders frequently but returns some items is still highly engaged and worth nurturing, especially in fashion or electronics where returns are common. **Q: How does gross spend differ from the high-value-customer-ltv-500 rule?** The LTV rule uses net spend after refunds, while this rule uses gross spend before refunds. Use gross spend to identify engaged customers regardless of return behaviour - useful in fashion or electronics where returns are common. **Q: Does gross spend include shipping and tax, or just the product subtotal?** It includes the full order total as recorded by WooCommerce. Whether that encompasses shipping and tax depends on your store's pricing and tax display configuration. ## Related rules - [high-value-customer-ltv-500](https://orderbadger.com/kb/high-value-customer-ltv-500/) - [customer-has-refund-history](https://orderbadger.com/kb/customer-has-refund-history/) - [high-avg-order-value](https://orderbadger.com/kb/high-avg-order-value/) ## People also search for WooCommerce flag customers by gross lifetime spend | how to find high-value customers ignoring refunds | WooCommerce track customer spend before returns | identify purchasing power regardless of refund history | WooCommerce gross spend customer segmentation --- # How to flag remote area deliveries in WooCommerce > Automatically badges orders being shipped to a remote area so your team can select the right carrier, apply surcharges, and set accurate delivery expectations. ## The problem Remote area deliveries often attract carrier surcharges, have limited carrier options, and take longer to arrive. Without a visible flag, these orders may be shipped via an unsuitable carrier or quoted with standard delivery times, leading to customer complaints and unexpected costs. ## The solution OrderBadger can automatically flag orders shipping to remote or hard-to-reach areas. ## Who this is for Any store shipping physical products nationally or internationally - especially those using carriers that define remote area surcharge zones. ## At a glance - Uses carrier-defined remote area classification - Requires remote area detection to be configured - Applies to all order sizes and values - Badge: Remote Area (orange) ## How it works Checks whether the shipping destination has been classified as a remote area based on your carrier's surcharge zone definitions. If the address is in a remote area, the order is badged so your team can take appropriate action. **Recommended action:** Verify the carrier supports delivery to the destination. Apply any remote area surcharges if not already included. Communicate extended delivery timelines to the customer. ## Rule template > The order is being shipped to a remote area **Badge:** Remote Area (orange, warning) ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - If your remote-area flag produces too many false positives, check your carrier plugin's postcode definitions - some include semi-rural areas that ship fine with standard services. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and order total is over £100' to focus only on high-value remote orders where a carrier surcharge materially affects your margin. - Add 'and total order weight is over 5 kg' to flag remote-area orders that are also heavy - the combination most likely to trigger surcharges. ## When this rule matches - **remote area flagged:** The shipping address has been identified as a remote area, so is_remote_area is true. ## When this rule does not match - **not remote area:** The shipping address is not in a remote area, so is_remote_area is false. - **not configured null:** Remote area detection is not configured or the address could not be resolved, so is_remote_area is null. ## Good to know - Remote area classification depends on your carrier integration or postcode lookup configuration. If not configured, the field will be null and this rule will not trigger. - Different carriers define remote areas differently. This flag reflects a single derived boolean and does not indicate which specific carrier considers it remote. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Where does the remote area classification come from?** It comes from your carrier integration or postcode lookup configuration. OrderBadger reads a derived boolean (is_remote_area) that your shipping setup provides - it does not maintain its own remote area database. **Q: What happens if I haven't configured remote area detection?** The is_remote_area field will be null, and this rule will simply never trigger. You need a carrier plugin or postcode lookup that populates this field for the badge to appear. **Q: Can this rule distinguish between different carriers' remote area definitions?** No. The rule checks a single boolean flag. If you use multiple carriers with different remote area zones, the flag reflects whichever carrier or lookup service populates the field. You would need separate rules per carrier if granularity is required. ## Related rules - [shipping-zone-highlands](https://orderbadger.com/kb/shipping-zone-highlands/) - [international-order](https://orderbadger.com/kb/international-order/) ## People also search for WooCommerce flag orders shipping to remote areas | how to handle carrier surcharges for hard-to-reach addresses | WooCommerce identify remote area delivery surcharges | automate remote postcode detection for WooCommerce orders --- # How to detect repeat shipping addresses in WooCommerce > Automatically badges orders where the destination postcode has received more than 3 previous orders, which may indicate a reseller, drop-shipping address, or business customer worth special attention. ## The problem When multiple orders ship to the same postcode, it may indicate a reseller operating through your store, a business customer who should be offered trade terms, or a potential fraud pattern. Without flagging, these repeat destinations go unnoticed. ## The solution OrderBadger can flag orders shipping to a postcode that has already received multiple previous orders. ## Who this is for Stores wanting to detect potential resellers, identify business customers for trade accounts, or flag unusual shipping patterns for fraud review. ## At a glance - Counts all orders to the same postcode, any customer - Threshold: more than 3 previous orders to postcode - Full postcode match required - Badge: Repeat Address (yellow) ## How it works Counts how many previous orders have been shipped to the same destination postcode. If the count exceeds 3, the order is badged. This helps identify potential resellers, business customers, or unusual address patterns. **Recommended action:** Investigate whether the repeat destination is a reseller or business customer. Consider offering trade terms or bulk pricing. If the pattern looks suspicious, review for potential fraud. ## Rule template > More than 3 previous orders have been shipped to the same destination postcode **Badge:** Repeat Address (yellow, info) ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Lower 'more than 3' to 'more than 1' if you want earlier visibility on emerging repeat-destination patterns. - Raise 'more than 3' to 'more than 10' if you ship to dense urban postcodes and only want to catch genuinely unusual concentration. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and customer has 0 previous paid orders' to specifically flag first-time customers shipping to a known repeat address - a potential reseller or drop-ship signal. - Add 'and order total is over £200' to focus on high-value orders going to repeat addresses, which carry more fraud risk. ## When this rule matches - **five previous orders:** There have been 5 previous orders to this postcode, which exceeds the threshold of 3. - **four previous orders:** There have been 4 previous orders to this postcode, which exceeds the threshold of 3. ## When this rule does not match - **two previous orders:** Only 2 previous orders to this postcode, which is below the threshold of more than 3. - **three boundary:** Exactly 3 previous orders to this postcode, which does not exceed the threshold (rule says 'more than 3'). - **no postcode null:** The postcode count is null because the shipping postcode is missing or could not be resolved. ## Good to know - The count is based on the full postcode match. Different addresses within the same postcode area will all count towards the same total. - If the shipping postcode is missing or malformed, the count will be null and the rule will not trigger. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Does the count of 3 previous orders mean 3 from the same customer, or 3 from anyone?** It counts all previous orders shipped to that postcode regardless of customer. This is intentional - it helps detect shared drop-ship addresses or business locations used by multiple buyers. **Q: Will two different addresses in the same postcode both count towards the total?** Yes. The match is based on the full postcode string, not the street address. Two different houses in the same postcode area contribute to the same count. **Q: Why does exactly 3 previous orders not trigger the badge?** The rule uses 'more than 3', so the threshold is strictly greater than 3. The badge appears starting at the 4th previous order to that postcode. Edit the rule text to 'at least 3' if you want it to trigger earlier. **Q: What if the shipping postcode is missing from the order?** If the postcode is missing or malformed, the count will be null and the rule will not trigger. Ensure your checkout requires a valid shipping postcode. ## Related rules - [remote-area-order](https://orderbadger.com/kb/remote-area-order/) - [guest-checkout](https://orderbadger.com/kb/guest-checkout/) ## People also search for WooCommerce flag orders to same postcode repeatedly | how to spot potential resellers in WooCommerce orders | detect drop-shipping addresses in WooCommerce | WooCommerce identify repeat destination patterns | flag suspicious repeated shipping postcodes WooCommerce --- # How to identify repeat product buyers in WooCommerce > Automatically badges orders where the customer has previously purchased at least one of the included products 3 or more times, highlighting loyal repeat buyers for VIP treatment or retention offers. ## The problem Repeat product buyers are your most valuable customers, but without visibility into per-product purchase frequency, they get the same generic experience as everyone else. Identifying them enables loyalty rewards and retention strategies. ## The solution OrderBadger can identify customers who have repurchased specific products multiple times. ## Who this is for Stores with consumable or replenishable products - such as supplements, pet food, coffee, or beauty products - where repeat purchasing is a key growth metric. ## At a glance - Checks per-product purchase history - Threshold: 3 or more previous purchases of same item - Registered customers only - Badge: Repeat Product (blue) - Ideal for subscription upsell candidates ## How it works Checks the per-product purchase history for each line item. If any product has been bought by this customer 3 or more times previously, the order is flagged as a repeat product purchase. This highlights your most loyal product-level buyers. **Recommended action:** Consider offering a loyalty discount, subscription option, or VIP packing experience. These customers are prime candidates for product reviews and referral programmes. ## Rule template > The customer has previously purchased at least one item in this order 3 or more times **Badge:** Repeat Product (blue, info) ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Lower '3 or more times' to '2 or more times' to surface loyal buyers earlier - useful for slow-moving or high-ticket products where two repurchases already signals strong loyalty. - Raise '3 or more times' to '5 or more times' to reserve the badge for your most dedicated repeat buyers and avoid noise from casual re-orders. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and days since last order is more than 60' to flag repeat-product buyers who may be lapsing - a retention opportunity. - Add 'and subtotal is over £50' to focus on repeat buyers placing meaningful orders, filtering out low-value top-ups. ## When this rule matches - **item bought 3 times:** The customer has previously purchased the Widget 3 times, meeting the threshold. - **item bought 7 times:** The customer has previously purchased the Widget 7 times, well above the threshold. ## When this rule does not match - **max 2 purchases:** The highest previous purchase count for any item is 2, which is below the threshold of 3. - **first order ever:** The customer has never purchased any of these products before. - **guest checkout null:** Guest orders have no purchase history, so previous purchase count is null and the condition cannot be met. ## Good to know - Purchase count is based on completed orders in WooCommerce. Cancelled or refunded orders may still count depending on your store configuration. - Guest checkout orders have no history and will not trigger this rule. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Does the customer need to have bought the same product 3 times, or 3 of any product?** The same specific product 3 or more times. The rule checks per-product purchase history for each line item in the current order. If any single product has been purchased 3+ times previously, the badge triggers. **Q: Does buying different variations of the same product count as repeat purchases of that product?** Each variation may be tracked independently depending on your WooCommerce setup. If variations have distinct product IDs, buying Size M three times counts, but buying Size M once and Size L twice may not reach the threshold for either. **Q: If the order has 5 products and only one of them was bought 3 times before, does it still trigger?** Yes. The rule fires if at least one item in the order meets the 3-purchase threshold. It does not require all items to be repeat purchases. **Q: Can I use this to identify subscription candidates who reorder the same consumable regularly?** Yes, that is an ideal use case. The Repeat Buyer badge highlights consistent repurchase behaviour for specific products. Pair it with a personal outreach or an upsell to a subscription plan. ## Related rules - [first-time-buying-product](https://orderbadger.com/kb/first-time-buying-product/) - [lapsed-product-buyer-90-days](https://orderbadger.com/kb/lapsed-product-buyer-90-days/) ## People also search for WooCommerce flag customers who reorder the same product | how to find loyal repeat buyers for specific products | WooCommerce detect repeat purchase behaviour automatically | identify subscription candidates from reorder patterns | WooCommerce track per-product purchase frequency --- # How to flag serial returners on new orders in WooCommerce > Badges orders from customers who have 2 or more previous refunds, an order total over £100, and at least 3 previous paid orders - identifying serial returners whose new high-value orders warrant extra scrutiny before dispatch. ## The problem Customers with a pattern of refunds cost more to serve with every subsequent order. Picking, packing, shipping, and processing the return eats into margins. Without a flag, a new order from a serial returner looks identical to one from a reliable buyer, and the team has no opportunity to take preventive action. ## The solution OrderBadger can automatically flag high-value orders from established customers who have a pattern of returning purchases. ## Who this is for Fashion retailers, electronics stores, and any business with a free or easy returns policy where serial returners significantly impact operational costs and profitability. ## At a glance - Threshold: 2 or more previous refunds - Requires 3+ previous paid orders (established customer) - Order total must exceed £100 - Badge: Serial Returner (red) - Routes to inbox for pre-dispatch review ## How it works Combines three conditions: the customer must have 2 or more previous refunds, the current order total must exceed £100, and the customer must have at least 3 previous paid orders. The paid order requirement ensures the badge targets genuine serial returners rather than someone with a single bad experience. **Recommended action:** Review the order before dispatch. Consider quality-checking the items, including a personalised note, or contacting the customer to confirm their selections. For repeat high-value returns, your team may want to flag the account for a returns policy review. ## Rule template > Customer has 2 or more previous refunds and order total is over £100 and customer has 3 or more previous paid orders **Badge:** Serial Returner (red, warning) **Inbox:** Yes ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Raise '2 or more previous refunds' to '4 or more' to reduce noise and only flag the most persistent returners. - Lower 'over £100' to 'over £50' if your average order value is lower and you want earlier visibility on refund-prone customers. - Change '3 or more previous paid orders' to '5 or more' to focus on long-term customers whose return pattern is well-established. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and at least one product is in the Clothing category' to limit this to fashion orders where return rates are highest. - Add 'and order contains more than 3 distinct products' to focus on multi-item hauls from serial returners, which are the most costly to process. ## When this rule matches - **established customer 2 refunds high value:** Customer has 2 previous refunds, 5 previous paid orders, and order total of £150 - all three thresholds are met. - **serial returner high refund count:** Customer has 6 previous refunds and 10 paid orders with a total of £280 - well above all thresholds, a clear serial returner pattern. ## When this rule does not match - **one refund below threshold:** Customer has only 1 previous refund - below the threshold of 2 or more, even though order total and paid order count are above their thresholds. - **high refunds but low order total:** Customer has 3 refunds and 4 paid orders but order total is only £80 - below the £100 threshold. - **refunds but too few paid orders:** Customer has 2 refunds and a high-value order but only 2 previous paid orders - below the 3-order threshold for established customer status. ## Good to know - The refund count includes all types of refunds - product issues, buyer remorse, and shipping damage are not distinguished. - Guest checkouts are excluded because refund history requires a registered customer account. - Partial refunds on completed orders may or may not count depending on WooCommerce order status configuration. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Why does the rule require 3 or more previous paid orders in addition to refund count?** The paid order threshold ensures the customer has enough order history to establish a pattern. A customer with 2 refunds from 2 total orders has a 100% return rate, but could simply have had two bad experiences. Requiring 3 or more paid orders means the refund pattern is meaningful. **Q: Does a partial refund count as a refund for this rule?** It depends on the WooCommerce order status. Orders marked as 'refunded' in WooCommerce are counted. Partial refunds on orders that remain in 'completed' status may not be included. **Q: Will the badge fire for an order total of exactly £100?** No. The rule specifies 'over £100', so the total must exceed £100. An order at exactly £100.00 will not trigger the badge. **Q: Can I use this rule to automatically restrict the customer's account?** No. OrderBadger only applies a badge and routes the order to your inbox. Any account restrictions or policy changes need to be handled manually by your team based on the information the badge provides. ## Related rules - [customer-has-refund-history](https://orderbadger.com/kb/customer-has-refund-history/) - [fashion-high-return-risk](https://orderbadger.com/kb/fashion-high-return-risk/) - [high-value-first-order-review](https://orderbadger.com/kb/high-value-first-order-review/) ## People also search for WooCommerce warn about customers with multiple refunds | how to flag frequent returners before dispatch | WooCommerce identify serial return customers automatically | reduce return costs by flagging repeat refund customers | WooCommerce screen high-value orders from known returners --- # How to flag high-return-risk category combos in WooCommerce > Badges orders from customers with no purchase history who are buying from both the Dresses and Shoes categories - a combination with historically high return rates, especially among first-time buyers unsure of sizing across product types. ## The problem Orders combining dresses and shoes from first-time customers frequently result in returns because the buyer is trying to assemble a complete outfit without prior experience of your sizing. These orders are expensive to fulfil and process returns for, and without a flag they appear as normal multi-category purchases. ## The solution OrderBadger can flag first-time buyers who order from both the Dresses and Shoes categories, a combination associated with high return rates. ## Who this is for Fashion retailers, occasion-wear shops, and bridal or formalwear stores where customers frequently order coordinated outfits. Particularly valuable for stores with free returns where multi-category sizing mismatch drives high return volumes. ## At a glance - First-time customers only (zero previous orders) - Must include both Dresses and Shoes categories - Targets sizing-mismatch return risk - Badge: Return Risk (orange) - Routes to inbox for review ## How it works Checks three conditions: the order must include at least one product from the Dresses category, at least one from the Shoes category, and the customer must have zero previous paid orders. When all three are true, the order is badged as a return risk and routed to the inbox for review. **Recommended action:** Consider sending a pre-dispatch sizing guide or a personalised message confirming the customer's size selections. For high-value orders, a quick customer service call can reduce the likelihood of a full return. ## Rule template > At least one product is in the Dresses category and at least one product is in the Shoes category and customer has 0 previous paid orders **Badge:** Return Risk (orange, warning) **Inbox:** Yes ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Replace 'Dresses' and 'Shoes' with your own high-return category names if your store uses different terminology (e.g. 'Gowns' and 'Footwear'). - Change '0 previous paid orders' to '1 or fewer previous paid orders' to also catch customers who have only ordered once before. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and order total is over £150' to focus on high-value outfit orders where the return cost is most significant. - Add 'and total quantity is more than 3' to catch multi-size try-on hauls where the customer is ordering several sizes of the same style. - Remove 'customer has 0 previous paid orders' to flag all dress-and-shoes combinations regardless of customer history. ## When this rule matches - **first timer dresses and shoes:** Order contains items from both Dresses and Shoes categories and the customer has 0 previous paid orders - all three conditions met. - **first timer multiple dresses and shoes:** Three items across Dresses and Shoes categories with zero order history - classic try-on haul pattern from a new customer. ## When this rule does not match - **returning customer same categories:** Order contains both Dresses and Shoes but the customer has 4 previous paid orders - not a first-time buyer. - **first timer dresses only no shoes:** First-time buyer ordering from Dresses but no Shoes category - the Shoes condition is not met. - **first timer shoes only no dresses:** First-time buyer ordering from Shoes but no Dresses category - the Dresses condition is not met. ## Good to know - The category names 'Dresses' and 'Shoes' must match your WooCommerce product categories exactly, including capitalisation. - This is a heuristic based on common return patterns. Not every first-time dress-and-shoes order will result in a return. - Subcategories (e.g. 'Casual Dresses' or 'Formal Shoes') may not trigger the rule unless they are also tagged with the parent category name. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: What if my categories are named differently, like 'Women's Dresses' or 'Footwear'?** Edit the rule text to use your exact WooCommerce category names. The match is text-based, so the names must correspond to your product categories. **Q: Does the rule check subcategories or only top-level categories?** It checks the categories assigned to each product. If a product is in 'Casual Dresses' but not explicitly in 'Dresses', the rule will not match unless your products also carry the parent category. **Q: Will guest checkouts trigger this rule?** Guest checkouts always have 0 previous paid orders, so they will trigger the rule if the category conditions are met. If you want to exclude guests, add 'and customer is not a guest checkout' to the rule. **Q: Can I add more categories to the high-risk combination?** Yes. Edit the rule to include additional category checks (e.g. 'and at least one product is in the Lingerie category') to capture broader outfit-building patterns. ## Related rules - [fashion-high-return-risk](https://orderbadger.com/kb/fashion-high-return-risk/) - [first-time-registered-buyer](https://orderbadger.com/kb/first-time-registered-buyer/) - [customer-has-refund-history](https://orderbadger.com/kb/customer-has-refund-history/) ## People also search for WooCommerce flag first-time buyers ordering dresses and shoes | how to reduce fashion return rates with order tagging | WooCommerce identify high-return-risk outfit orders | flag sizing mismatch risk on multi-category fashion orders | WooCommerce prevent returns from first-time outfit buyers --- # How to flag costly oversize international returns in WooCommerce > Badges international orders containing at least one oversize product with a total over £200, flagging the significant return cost exposure if the customer needs to send an oversized item back across borders. ## The problem Returning an oversize product internationally is among the most expensive reverse-logistics scenarios a store can face. The return shipping alone can exceed the item's margin. Without a flag, these orders are dispatched without any proactive mitigation - and when a return request arrives, the cost hits hard. ## The solution OrderBadger can flag international orders with oversize products above a value threshold, alerting your team to the costly return risk before dispatch. ## Who this is for Stores selling furniture, large equipment, or bulky goods internationally. Particularly relevant for businesses with free or discounted return shipping where an oversize international return can wipe out the profit from the original sale. ## At a glance - At least one product marked as oversize - International shipping only - Threshold: order total over £200 - Badge: Costly Return Risk (red) - Flags expensive reverse-logistics exposure ## How it works Checks three conditions: at least one item in the order is marked as oversize, the shipping destination is international, and the order total exceeds £200. When all three are true, the order is badged with a Costly Return Risk warning and routed to the inbox so your team can consider mitigation steps before shipping. **Recommended action:** Review the order before dispatch. Consider reaching out to the customer to confirm their purchase, especially dimensions and specifications. For very high-value orders, you may want to offer a measurement guide or require explicit confirmation before shipping. Ensure your returns policy clearly states the process for international oversize returns. ## Rule template > At least one product is marked as oversize and shipping is international and order total is over £200 **Badge:** Costly Return Risk (red, warning) **Inbox:** Yes ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Raise 'over £200' to 'over £500' if oversize return costs are only significant on very high-value orders in your market. - Lower 'over £200' to 'over £100' if even mid-range oversize international orders carry meaningful return cost risk for your business. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and customer has 0 previous paid orders' to focus specifically on first-time international buyers ordering oversize items - the highest-risk segment. - Add 'and customer has 1 or more previous refunds' to combine oversize international risk with the customer's return history for a more targeted warning. ## When this rule matches - **oversize international high value:** Order contains an oversize item, ships internationally, and total is £350 - all three conditions met. - **multiple oversize items international:** Two oversize items in an international order totalling £580 - well above the value threshold with maximum return cost exposure. ## When this rule does not match - **oversize domestic high value:** Order contains an oversize item and exceeds £200 but ships domestically - the international condition is not met. - **international no oversize items:** International order over £200 but no items are marked as oversize - the oversize condition is not met. - **oversize international low value:** Oversize item shipping internationally but total is only £150 - below the £200 threshold. ## Good to know - The oversize flag must be set on each product in WooCommerce. Products that are physically large but not flagged will not trigger this rule. - International status is determined by the shipping country compared to the store base country. Ensure your WooCommerce store base country is correctly configured. - The value threshold of £200 is in the store's default currency and may need adjusting for different markets. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Will an order total of exactly £200 trigger the badge?** No. The rule requires the total to be over £200, so it must exceed £200.00. An order at exactly £200 will not fire. **Q: What counts as an international order?** An order where the shipping destination country differs from your WooCommerce store's base country. This is determined by the is_international derived field computed from the shipping address. **Q: Can I exclude certain countries where return shipping is cheap?** This rule flags all international destinations equally. To exclude specific countries, create a custom version that adds a condition like 'and shipping country is not Ireland' to exclude nearby destinations with lower return costs. ## Related rules - [warehouse-oversize-routing](https://orderbadger.com/kb/warehouse-oversize-routing/) - [international-order](https://orderbadger.com/kb/international-order/) - [customer-has-refund-history](https://orderbadger.com/kb/customer-has-refund-history/) - [electronics-heavy-oversized](https://orderbadger.com/kb/electronics-heavy-oversized/) ## People also search for WooCommerce warn about oversize international return risk | how to manage return costs on bulky cross-border orders | flag expensive reverse logistics for oversized products | WooCommerce identify high-cost return risk before dispatch | reduce international oversize return shipping losses --- # How to reward loyal off-peak buyers in WooCommerce > Badges off-peak orders from loyal customers who are spending more than their historical average, highlighting your most engaged buyers at a time when their purchases have the greatest revenue impact. ## The problem Off-peak revenue is critical for cash flow, yet loyal customers who place above-average orders outside of seasonal spikes go unrecognised. Without a flag, your team treats these orders the same as any other off-peak purchase and misses the chance to reward behaviour that sustains the business year-round. ## The solution OrderBadger can automatically identify loyal customers who spend above their average during off-peak periods. ## Who this is for Stores with clear seasonal peaks and quieter off-peak periods - garden centres, fashion retailers, gift shops, and any business where off-peak loyalty is strategically valuable. ## At a glance - Outside peak season only - Requires 5+ previous paid orders - Order total above customer's historical average - Badge: Off-Peak VIP (green) - Recognises year-round loyal spending ## How it works Combines three conditions: the order must be placed outside your configured peak season, the customer must have five or more previous paid orders, and the current order total must exceed the customer's average order value. The badge appears passively on the order as a positive signal. **Recommended action:** Include a thank-you note recognising their loyalty outside of the busy season. Consider offering an exclusive off-peak discount for their next purchase, or early access to upcoming seasonal collections. These customers sustain your business between peaks and deserve special treatment. ## Rule template > It is not peak season and customer has 5 or more previous paid orders and order total is greater than customer average order value **Badge:** Off-Peak VIP (green, info) ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Lower '5 or more previous paid orders' to '3 or more' if your store has fewer repeat buyers and you want to recognise off-peak loyalty earlier. - Raise '5 or more' to '10 or more' to limit the badge to your most established long-term customers. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and order total is over £75' to add a value floor and ensure only substantial above-average purchases are flagged. - Add 'and distinct product count is 3 or more' to focus on customers who are exploring your range broadly during the quiet season. - Remove 'and order total is greater than customer average order value' to badge all off-peak orders from loyal customers regardless of spend level. ## When this rule matches - **off peak loyal above average:** It is not peak season, the customer has 9 previous paid orders, and the order total of £85 exceeds their average of £62 - all three conditions met. - **off peak boundary 5 orders just above average:** Not peak season, customer has exactly 5 previous paid orders, and the total of £110.50 just exceeds their average of £108 - boundary pass on order count and average. ## When this rule does not match - **peak season loyal above average:** Customer has 7 previous paid orders and the order total of £130 exceeds the average of £95, but it is peak season - spending above average is normal during peaks. - **off peak loyal below average:** It is not peak season and the customer has 6 previous paid orders, but the total of £45 is below their average of £70. - **off peak new customer above average:** It is not peak season and the total of £90 exceeds the customer's average of £75, but the customer has only 2 previous paid orders - below the loyalty threshold. ## Good to know - Peak season must be configured in your store settings. If not set, is_peak_season will be null and the 'not peak season' condition cannot be evaluated. - Guest checkouts have no order history, so this rule will not fire for guests. - The average order value is calculated from completed orders only and does not include the current order. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Why exclude peak season from this rule?** During peak season, many customers spend above their average due to holiday gift buying. Off-peak spending above average is a stronger loyalty signal - these customers are choosing your store outside of seasonal motivation. **Q: Does the average order value include orders from both peak and off-peak periods?** Yes. The average is calculated from all previous completed orders regardless of when they were placed. A future enhancement could separate peak and off-peak averages, but currently it is a single historical average. **Q: Will the badge fire in January if my peak season ends on December 31?** Yes, as long as the order is placed when is_peak_season is false. If January 1 is outside your configured peak window, qualifying orders on that date will receive the badge. **Q: Can I combine this with a minimum order value to filter out trivially small increases?** Yes. Add 'and order total is over £50' (or your preferred floor) to the rule text to ensure only meaningful off-peak orders are badged. ## Related rules - [lifecycle-spending-up](https://orderbadger.com/kb/lifecycle-spending-up/) - [loyal-customer-5-plus-orders](https://orderbadger.com/kb/loyal-customer-5-plus-orders/) - [peak-season-order](https://orderbadger.com/kb/peak-season-order/) ## People also search for WooCommerce identify loyal customers during off-season | how to recognise above-average spend outside peak season | WooCommerce flag VIP orders during quiet periods | reward customers who buy year-round not just peak season | WooCommerce off-peak customer retention strategy --- # How to manage large peak-season orders in WooCommerce > Badges high-quantity, high-value orders placed during peak season, giving your warehouse team advance notice of orders that will consume disproportionate picking, packing, and dispatch time during your busiest period. ## The problem During peak season, warehouse capacity is already stretched. A large order with more than 10 items and a total over £200 takes significantly longer to pick and pack than a typical order. Without a flag, these orders sit in the same queue and cause downstream delays for every order behind them. ## The solution OrderBadger can automatically flag large, high-value orders placed during peak season so your warehouse team can plan capacity accordingly. ## Who this is for Stores with seasonal demand spikes and a physical warehouse operation - gift shops, homewares, fashion retailers, and any business where large orders during peak create bottlenecks in fulfilment. ## At a glance - Peak season only - Threshold: more than 10 items in order - Threshold: order total over £200 - Badge: Peak Volume (blue) - Routes to inbox for warehouse scheduling ## How it works Evaluates three conditions: the order must be placed during your configured peak season, the total quantity of items must exceed 10, and the order total must be over £200. When all three are true, a Peak Volume badge appears and the order is routed to the inbox for warehouse scheduling. **Recommended action:** Schedule these orders for dedicated picking slots or assign them to experienced packers. If your warehouse has a priority lane, route Peak Volume orders through it to prevent them from blocking the standard queue. ## Rule template > It is peak season and total quantity is more than 10 and order total is over £200 **Badge:** Peak Volume (blue, info) **Inbox:** Yes ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Lower 'more than 10' to 'more than 5' if your warehouse considers orders with 6+ items to be large during peak. - Raise 'over £200' to 'over £500' to limit the badge to your highest-value peak orders only. - Lower 'over £200' to 'over £100' if you want broader coverage of meaningful peak-season orders. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and total order weight is over 10 kg' to focus on peak orders that are both voluminous and heavy - the combination most likely to slow down the packing line. - Add 'and shipping method contains express or next-day' to prioritise large peak orders that also carry an expedited shipping promise. ## When this rule matches - **peak season high qty high value:** It is peak season, total quantity is 15 items, and the order total is £340 - all three conditions met. - **peak season boundary qty and value:** Peak season is active, total quantity is 11 (just over 10), and order total is £210 (just over £200) - boundary pass on both thresholds. ## When this rule does not match - **off peak high qty high value:** Total quantity is 20 and the order total is £450, but it is not peak season - warehouse is not under seasonal pressure. - **peak season low qty:** It is peak season and the total is £250, but the order has only 3 items - below the 10-item threshold. - **peak season high qty low value:** It is peak season with 12 items in the order, but the total is only £95 - below the £200 value threshold. ## Good to know - Peak season dates must be configured in your store settings. If not set, the is_peak_season field will be null and this rule will not trigger. - Total quantity counts all items in the order, including multiples of the same SKU. An order with 12 units of one product qualifies just as much as an order with 12 different products. - The £200 value threshold is in your store's default currency. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Does total quantity count individual units or distinct products?** It counts individual units. An order with 12 units of the same product has a total quantity of 12. If you want to check distinct products instead, use 'distinct product count' in the rule text. **Q: What if a large order arrives just after peak season ends?** The rule checks whether the order date falls within your configured peak season window. An order placed one day after peak season ends will not trigger the badge, even if your warehouse is still catching up. **Q: Can I route these orders to a specific warehouse team rather than the general inbox?** The inbox is shared across your team. Use the badge as a visual filter in the inbox to allow your warehouse lead to claim and distribute Peak Volume orders to the right packers. ## Related rules - [peak-season-order](https://orderbadger.com/kb/peak-season-order/) - [total-quantity-over-5](https://orderbadger.com/kb/total-quantity-over-5/) - [order-total-over-100](https://orderbadger.com/kb/order-total-over-100/) ## People also search for WooCommerce flag large orders during busy season | how to prevent warehouse bottlenecks during peak season | WooCommerce identify high-volume orders straining capacity | manage peak season fulfilment queue in WooCommerce | WooCommerce route bulk peak orders for priority packing --- # How to flag Highlands and Islands orders in WooCommerce > Automatically badges orders destined for the Highlands and Islands shipping zone so your team can apply the correct carrier, surcharges, and delivery expectations before dispatch. ## The problem Highlands and Islands deliveries often require specialist carriers, attract surcharges, and take longer than standard UK mainland shipping. If not flagged, staff may ship via the wrong carrier or quote incorrect delivery times. ## The solution OrderBadger can automatically flag orders shipping to the Highlands and Islands zone. ## Who this is for UK-based WooCommerce stores that ship nationally - especially those using carriers with Highlands and Islands surcharges or exclusions. ## At a glance - Matches Highlands and Islands shipping zone - Zone name must match exactly in WooCommerce - UK-specific rule - Badge: Highlands (orange) ## How it works Checks the resolved WooCommerce shipping zone for each order. If the zone matches 'Highlands and Islands', the order is badged so your team can select the appropriate carrier and apply any surcharges before dispatch. **Recommended action:** Verify the carrier supports Highlands and Islands delivery. Apply any surcharges if not already included in the shipping cost. Set customer expectations for longer delivery times. ## Rule template > The order is shipping to the Highlands and Islands zone **Badge:** Highlands (orange, warning) ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Change 'Highlands and Islands' to match your exact WooCommerce zone name if you have named it differently, such as 'Scottish Highlands' or 'H&I Zone'. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and total order weight is over 10 kg' to flag only heavy Highlands orders that are most likely to attract carrier surcharges. - Duplicate this rule for other surcharge zones by changing the zone name to 'Channel Islands' or 'Northern Ireland'. ## When this rule matches - **highlands and islands zone:** The order's shipping zone is 'Highlands and Islands', matching the rule condition exactly. ## When this rule does not match - **uk mainland zone:** The order ships to the UK Mainland zone, which is not the Highlands and Islands. - **no zone null:** The shipping zone is null (not configured or unresolved), so the condition cannot be met. ## Good to know - This relies on your WooCommerce shipping zones being correctly configured. If the Highlands and Islands zone does not exist or has incorrect postcodes, orders may not be flagged. - The zone name must match exactly. If your zone is named differently (e.g. 'Scottish Highlands'), adjust the rule NL accordingly. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: What if my WooCommerce shipping zone is named 'Scottish Highlands' instead of 'Highlands and Islands'?** The rule matches the zone name exactly as written. If your zone has a different name, edit the rule's natural language text to match your zone name and recompile. **Q: Will this rule work if I haven't set up WooCommerce shipping zones?** No. The rule relies on WooCommerce resolving the order's shipping zone. If no zones are configured, the zone_name will be null and the rule will never trigger. **Q: Can I use this pattern to flag other specific shipping zones?** Yes. Duplicate the rule and change the zone name in the natural language text to any zone you have configured - for example, 'Channel Islands' or 'Northern Ireland'. Each zone needs its own rule. ## Related rules - [remote-area-order](https://orderbadger.com/kb/remote-area-order/) - [international-order](https://orderbadger.com/kb/international-order/) ## People also search for WooCommerce flag orders to Highlands and Islands zone | how to handle Highlands shipping surcharges automatically | WooCommerce identify Scottish Highlands delivery orders | apply correct carrier for Highlands and Islands WooCommerce --- # How to flag UK-bound orders in WooCommerce > Automatically badges orders destined for the UK so your team can apply the correct domestic carrier rates, packaging, and compliance steps before dispatch. ## The problem Stores based outside the UK that receive UK orders need to handle VAT, customs, and carrier selection differently. Without a visual flag, UK-bound orders can be processed with incorrect shipping options. ## The solution OrderBadger can automatically flag any order shipping to the United Kingdom. ## Who this is for International stores that ship to the UK regularly, or UK-based stores that want to visually confirm domestic orders at a glance. ## At a glance - Matches shipping country code GB - Includes England, Scotland, Wales, Northern Ireland - Does not cover Channel Islands or Isle of Man - Badge: UK Order (blue) ## How it works Adds a badge to orders where the shipping destination country is GB. This lets your team quickly filter and identify UK domestic orders in the WooCommerce orders list. **Recommended action:** Confirm that the correct domestic carrier and VAT settings are applied. If shipping from outside the UK, ensure customs declarations are prepared. ## Rule template > The order is shipping to the United Kingdom **Badge:** UK Order (blue, info) ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Change 'United Kingdom' to a different country name (e.g. 'United States' or 'Germany') to repurpose this rule for another key market. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and order total is over £100' to focus on higher-value UK orders worth prioritising for same-day dispatch. - Add 'and the order is shipping to the Highlands and Islands zone' to narrow the badge to UK orders heading to surcharge areas only. ## When this rule matches - **gb shipping address:** Order ships to GB (United Kingdom), so the rule matches. ## When this rule does not match - **us shipping address:** Order ships to the US, not the United Kingdom. - **de shipping address:** Order ships to Germany, not the United Kingdom. ## Good to know - This checks the shipping country code only. It does not distinguish between England, Scotland, Wales, and Northern Ireland. - Orders to British Overseas Territories (e.g. Gibraltar, Bermuda) have different country codes and will not be matched. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Does this rule match Northern Ireland as well as mainland UK?** Yes. Northern Ireland uses the GB country code in WooCommerce, so it will be matched. However, the rule does not distinguish between England, Scotland, Wales, and Northern Ireland. **Q: Will orders to the Channel Islands or Isle of Man be flagged?** The Channel Islands (GG, JE) and Isle of Man (IM) have their own ISO country codes and are not GB. They will not be matched by this rule. **Q: I'm a UK-based store - is there any point using this rule?** It can be useful if you also sell internationally. The badge lets you quickly filter domestic orders in your orders list, which helps when you need to batch UK and international shipments separately. ## Related rules - [international-order](https://orderbadger.com/kb/international-order/) ## People also search for WooCommerce identify orders shipping to United Kingdom | how to filter UK domestic orders in WooCommerce | WooCommerce badge GB shipping destination orders | separate UK and international orders in WooCommerce --- # How to detect single-product reorders in WooCommerce > Automatically badges orders that contain only one distinct product (regardless of quantity), helping your team identify likely reorders or subscription-style purchases for streamlined fulfilment. ## The problem Single-SKU orders often indicate repeat customers or subscription behaviour. Without a visual flag, these orders are mixed into the general queue and you miss opportunities to fast-track them or identify subscription patterns. ## The solution OrderBadger can automatically flag orders where every item is the same product. ## Who this is for Stores that sell consumable or replenishable products where customers frequently reorder the same item, such as supplements, pet food, or office supplies. ## At a glance - One distinct product regardless of quantity - Applies to all customers and order values - Badge: Reorder (blue) - Useful for identifying subscription-style purchases ## How it works Checks whether the order contains only one distinct product (any quantity) and adds a badge if so. This helps identify reorders and subscription-style purchases at a glance. **Recommended action:** Consider fast-tracking single-SKU orders for quicker dispatch. If you see repeat single-SKU orders from the same customer, consider offering them a subscription or bulk discount. ## Rule template > Every item in the order is the same product **Badge:** Reorder (blue, info) ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - This rule has no numeric threshold to tune - it simply checks for one distinct product. If you want to narrow it, add a quantity or value condition instead. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and total number of units ordered is more than 3' to focus on bulk single-SKU reorders rather than one-off single-item purchases. - Add 'and the customer has previously purchased at least one item in this order 2 or more times' to badge only confirmed repeat reorders, not first-time single-product buys. ## When this rule matches - **single sku:** All items in the order are the same product, so the single-SKU flag is true. ## When this rule does not match - **mixed sku:** Order contains multiple different products, so it is not a single-SKU order. ## Good to know - This checks product identity, not variations. Different sizes or colours of the same variable product may count as the same product depending on how WooCommerce stores them. - A single-SKU order with quantity 1 is also flagged. Combine with quantity rules to focus on bulk reorders. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: If a customer orders 10 units of the same product, does it count as a single-SKU order?** Yes. The rule checks the number of distinct products, not the quantity. An order with 10 units of one product is a single-SKU order and will be badged. **Q: How are product variations handled - does a Size M and Size L of the same product count as one SKU or two?** This depends on how WooCommerce stores the variation. In most setups, different variations of the same parent product are treated as the same product, so the order would still be flagged as single-SKU. **Q: Can I combine this with other rules to specifically catch bulk reorders?** Yes. Use this rule alongside the 'total quantity over 5' rule. Orders badged with both Reorder and Bulk Order are high-quantity single-product purchases - prime candidates for subscription offers. ## Related rules - [total-quantity-over-5](https://orderbadger.com/kb/total-quantity-over-5/) - [first-time-registered-buyer](https://orderbadger.com/kb/first-time-registered-buyer/) ## People also search for WooCommerce flag orders with only one product | how to identify repeat reorder patterns automatically | WooCommerce detect subscription-style single SKU orders | find customers reordering the same item in WooCommerce | WooCommerce fast-track single product orders for dispatch --- # How to offer fitting help on first equipment buys in WooCommerce > Automatically badges orders where a customer is purchasing from the Bikes, Skis, or Golf Clubs category for the first time, prompting your team to include a sizing guide or offer fitting assistance before dispatch. ## The problem Bikes, skis, and golf clubs are highly size-dependent. A first-time buyer in these categories has no purchase history to confirm they have selected the correct size or spec. Without a flag, the order ships as-is and the customer may receive equipment that does not fit, leading to costly returns and a poor experience. ## The solution OrderBadger can flag first-time buyers of size-dependent equipment categories so your team can offer fitting guidance before dispatch. ## Who this is for Sports and outdoor retailers selling size-dependent equipment - especially those offering bikes, skis, golf clubs, or similar items where correct fit is critical to customer satisfaction. ## At a glance - Bikes, Skis, or Golf Clubs categories - First purchase in that category by customer - Registered customers only - Badge: Fitting Needed? (blue) - Routes to inbox for sizing outreach ## How it works Checks whether any item belongs to the Bikes, Skis, or Golf Clubs category AND the customer has never purchased from that specific category before (purchase count is 0). When both are true, the order appears in the inbox with a Fitting Needed? badge. **Recommended action:** Include a printed sizing guide in the box, or email the customer before dispatch to confirm their size selection. For high-value items like bikes, consider a brief phone call to verify frame size and riding style. ## Rule template > At least one product is in the Bikes, Skis, or Golf Clubs category and customer has never purchased from that category before **Badge:** Fitting Needed? (blue, info) **Inbox:** Yes ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Edit 'Bikes, Skis, or Golf Clubs' to include other fit-critical categories your store carries, such as 'Wetsuits' or 'Climbing Harnesses'. - Remove one of the three categories (e.g. 'Golf Clubs') if that department already has its own fitting workflow and does not need the badge. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and order total is over £200' to limit the fitting outreach to high-value equipment purchases where a return would be costly. - Add 'and the order was placed on a weekend' to catch weekend buyers you cannot reach until Monday - a good trigger for a priority fitting email first thing. ## When this rule matches - **first time bike buyer:** Customer is purchasing a Bikes item and has never bought from that category before (count=0). - **first time ski buyer:** Customer is purchasing Skis for the first time (count=0) despite being an experienced buyer in other categories. - **first time golf clubs buyer:** Customer is buying Golf Clubs for the first time - category purchase count is 0. ## When this rule does not match - **repeat bike buyer:** Customer has purchased from the Bikes category twice before - not a first-time buyer in this category. - **first time non fitting category:** Customer is a first-time buyer in Accessories, but Accessories is not one of the fit-dependent categories. - **guest buying bike:** Guest checkout has no category purchase history - customer_category_purchase_count is null so the first-time condition cannot be evaluated. ## Good to know - Guest checkouts are excluded because category purchase history is unavailable. - The rule checks the customer's history in the exact category. If your store uses sub-categories (e.g., Road Bikes, Mountain Bikes under Bikes), ensure the parent category is used for matching. - A customer who has bought from the category once before (count=1) will not be flagged, even if they are buying a very different product type within that category. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Why does this rule only check Bikes, Skis, and Golf Clubs and not all equipment?** These three categories are the most size-critical in a typical sports store. A wrong bike frame size, ski length, or club shaft flex leads to a poor experience and near-certain return. Edit the rule text to add more categories if needed. **Q: What if a customer bought accessories from the Bikes category but never an actual bike?** The rule checks category purchase count, not product type within the category. If accessories are categorised under Bikes, the customer would show a non-zero count and would not be flagged. Separate accessories into their own category to avoid this. **Q: Can I add an SLA to this rule so fitting outreach happens before dispatch?** Yes. Edit the rule to add an SLA (e.g., 240 minutes) so the order stays in the inbox until your team confirms the customer has been contacted about sizing. ## Related rules - [first-time-buying-product](https://orderbadger.com/kb/first-time-buying-product/) - [experienced-category-buyer](https://orderbadger.com/kb/experienced-category-buyer/) ## People also search for WooCommerce flag first-time bike ski or club buyers | how to prevent sizing returns on sports equipment orders | WooCommerce prompt fitting guidance for new equipment buyers | reduce equipment returns by catching first-time buyers | WooCommerce size-dependent product return prevention --- # How to flag hazmat items in international WooCommerce orders > Automatically badges international orders that contain items from hazmat-adjacent categories (Camping Gas, Batteries, Aerosols) so your team can verify shipping restrictions, arrange ground transport, or block the shipment before it leaves the warehouse. ## The problem Hazardous materials such as pressurised gas canisters, lithium batteries, and aerosol sprays are restricted or prohibited on air freight. When these items appear in an international order, they may need ground-only routing, special documentation, or may not be shippable at all. Without a flag, these orders are dispatched normally and risk carrier rejection, customs seizure, or safety incidents. ## The solution OrderBadger can flag international orders that contain hazardous material categories like camping gas, batteries, or aerosols, giving your team time to verify shipping compliance. ## Who this is for Outdoor, sports, and camping retailers who sell gas canisters, battery packs, or aerosol products and also ship internationally. Also relevant to hardware and DIY stores with similar product lines. ## At a glance - Camping Gas, Batteries, or Aerosols categories - International shipping only - Severity: critical with 3-hour SLA - Cleared/Blocked interaction buttons - Badge: Hazmat Check (red) ## How it works Checks whether any item belongs to the Camping Gas, Batteries, or Aerosols category AND the order is shipping internationally. When both conditions are true, a critical badge appears and the order is routed to the inbox with a 3-hour SLA and Cleared/Blocked interaction buttons. **Recommended action:** Review the order against your carrier's dangerous goods policy. Use 'Cleared' if the items can ship via ground or an approved route, or 'Blocked' if the shipment must be cancelled or split. Contact the customer proactively if items cannot be shipped to their destination. ## Rule template > At least one product is in the Camping Gas, Batteries, or Aerosols category and shipping is international **Badge:** Hazmat Check (red, critical) **Inbox:** Yes **Interaction:** Cleared / Blocked **SLA:** 3h ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Edit 'Camping Gas, Batteries, or Aerosols' to add other restricted categories your store carries, such as 'Fireworks' or 'Flammable Liquids'. - Change the SLA from 180 minutes to a shorter window (e.g. 60 minutes) if your team needs to clear hazmat orders faster to meet same-day cut-offs. **Add or remove conditions:** - Remove 'and shipping is international' to also catch domestic hazmat orders that need ground-only routing within your own country. - Add 'and total quantity is more than 5' to focus the critical badge on bulk hazmat shipments while letting small single-canister international orders through with less urgency. ## When this rule matches - **camping gas international us:** Order contains a Camping Gas item and ships internationally to the US - both conditions met. - **batteries international de:** Order contains a Batteries item and ships internationally to Germany. - **aerosol international fr:** Order contains an Aerosols item and ships internationally to France. ## When this rule does not match - **camping gas domestic:** Order contains a Camping Gas item but ships domestically - international condition not met. - **non hazmat international:** Order ships internationally but contains no hazmat categories - only Footwear. - **hazmat adjacent category domestic:** Order has a Batteries item but ships domestically - only the hazmat condition is met, not international. ## Good to know - The rule relies on products being assigned to the correct hazmat categories in WooCommerce. Miscategorised products will not be caught. - Domestic hazmat shipments are not flagged by this rule. Create a separate rule if domestic hazmat handling is also required. - The rule does not distinguish between different hazmat classifications (e.g., Class 2 gases vs. Class 9 batteries). All three categories are treated equally. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Why is this rule set to critical severity with an SLA?** Shipping restricted hazardous materials internationally can result in carrier rejection, customs seizure, fines, or safety incidents. The 3-hour SLA ensures your team reviews the order before it enters the dispatch queue. **Q: What do the Cleared and Blocked buttons mean?** Use 'Cleared' when you have confirmed the items can ship via an approved route (e.g., ground-only international service). Use 'Blocked' when the items cannot be shipped to the destination and the order needs to be cancelled or the hazmat items removed. **Q: Can I add more categories to the hazmat check?** Yes. Edit the rule text to include additional category names. For example, you could add Fireworks or Flammable Liquids to extend the check. **Q: Does this rule catch domestic hazmat orders too?** No. This rule specifically targets international shipments where air freight restrictions apply. For domestic hazmat flagging, create a separate rule that checks for the hazmat categories without the international condition. ## Related rules - [international-order](https://orderbadger.com/kb/international-order/) ## People also search for WooCommerce flag international orders with hazmat products | how to handle camping gas batteries aerosols in shipping | WooCommerce dangerous goods compliance for international orders | block or clear restricted items before international dispatch | WooCommerce hazmat shipping check for cross-border orders --- # How to track clearance bargain hunters in WooCommerce > Automatically badges orders where every item is on sale, the overall discount exceeds 30%, and the order spans 2 or more categories - a profile that indicates a clearance bargain hunter useful for segmentation and clearance campaign analysis. ## The problem During seasonal clearance events, some customers exclusively buy discounted stock across multiple departments. These buyers are valuable for measuring clearance sell-through but behave differently from full-price customers. Without a flag, clearance-only orders are mixed into general analytics and distort category performance metrics. ## The solution OrderBadger can identify orders where every item is on sale, the discount is above a threshold, and the purchase spans multiple categories - a clear clearance buyer signal. ## Who this is for Sports, outdoor, and fashion retailers running seasonal clearance sales who want to track clearance performance, identify bargain-hunting customer segments, and measure cross-category sell-through during sales events. ## At a glance - All items must be on sale - Threshold: overall discount over 30% - Order spans 2 or more categories - Badge: Clearance Buyer (purple) - Useful for clearance campaign analysis ## How it works Combines three conditions: all items in the order must be on sale, the overall order discount must exceed 30%, and the order must span 2 or more product categories. This flags cross-department bargain hunters who are buying exclusively from clearance stock. **Recommended action:** Use the badge data for segmentation and clearance campaign reporting. Consider sending these customers early access to future clearance events or targeted offers for full-price items in categories they bought from. ## Rule template > All items in the order are on sale and discount percent is over 30% and order spans 2 or more categories **Badge:** Clearance Buyer (purple, info) ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Lower 'over 30%' to 'over 20%' to catch moderate-discount clearance buyers who are still buying exclusively sale stock. - Change '2 or more categories' to '3 or more categories' to tighten the definition and only badge true cross-department bargain hunters. **Add or remove conditions:** - Remove 'and all items in the order are on sale' to also flag mixed baskets where the majority of items are discounted, even if one full-price item slips in. - Add 'and customer has 0 previous paid orders' to isolate first-time buyers attracted purely by the clearance event - useful for measuring new-customer acquisition from sales. ## When this rule matches - **all sale 35 pct off 3 categories:** All items are on sale, discount is 35% (over 30%), and order spans 3 categories - all conditions met. - **all sale 50 pct off 2 categories:** All items are on sale, discount is 50% (well above 30%), and order spans exactly 2 categories - boundary for category count met. ## When this rule does not match - **mixed sale and full price:** One item is not on sale - the 'all items on sale' condition fails even though discount and categories are sufficient. - **all sale 25 pct off:** All items are on sale and span 2 categories, but the discount is only 25% - below the 30% threshold. - **all sale high discount single category:** All items are on sale with 40% discount but only 1 category - does not span 2 or more categories. ## Good to know - The 'all items on sale' check requires every line item to have a sale price set in WooCommerce. Items with manual price reductions that are not marked as sale items will not count. - The 30% discount threshold is order-level, not item-level. Individual items may have different discount percentages. - This rule does not distinguish between planned clearance events and everyday sale items. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: How is the discount percentage calculated?** It uses the order-level discount_percent field, which represents the total discount as a percentage of the original subtotal. This is computed by WooCommerce based on the difference between regular and sale prices. **Q: Why require 2 or more categories instead of just checking for all-sale items?** Requiring multiple categories distinguishes genuine clearance browsers from customers simply buying multiple units of a single discounted product. Cross-category purchasing during a sale is a stronger signal of bargain-hunting behaviour. **Q: Can I use this to measure clearance event performance?** Yes. Filter your inbox by the Clearance Buyer badge after a sale event to see how many orders matched the pattern, which categories were represented, and how much clearance stock was moved. ## Related rules - [contains-sale-item](https://orderbadger.com/kb/contains-sale-item/) - [discount-over-20-percent](https://orderbadger.com/kb/discount-over-20-percent/) - [order-spans-3-categories](https://orderbadger.com/kb/order-spans-3-categories/) ## People also search for WooCommerce identify clearance-only buyers during sales | how to segment bargain hunters from full-price customers | WooCommerce flag all-sale multi-category discount orders | measure seasonal clearance sell-through in WooCommerce | WooCommerce track cross-department sale buyer behaviour --- # How to spot subscription churn risk in WooCommerce > Badges orders from established customers who have not ordered in over 40 days, maintain an average order value above £25, and are purchasing from the Subscription category. This pattern suggests a subscriber at risk of cancelling who has returned for what may be their final order. ## The problem Subscription customers who go quiet for more than 40 days and then place an order are often in their last cycle before cancelling. Without a flag, this returning order is treated as routine and the retention opportunity is lost. By the time churn is noticed, the customer is already gone. ## The solution OrderBadger can identify returning subscription customers whose ordering gap and history suggest they are at risk of cancelling. ## Who this is for Subscription-based WooCommerce stores - meal kits, beauty boxes, coffee, supplements, pet supplies - where a gap in ordering from an established subscriber signals imminent cancellation. ## At a glance - Requires 3+ previous paid orders - Gap threshold: more than 40 days since last order - Average order value must exceed £25 - Must include Subscription category product - Badge: Churn Risk (orange) ## How it works Evaluates four conditions: the customer must have at least 3 previous paid orders, their last order must be more than 40 days ago, their average order value must exceed £25, and at least one product in the current order must be in the Subscription category. When all four are true, the order is badged and routed to your inbox. **Recommended action:** Include a personalised retention offer such as a loyalty discount, free upgrade, or handwritten note. Consider reaching out directly to ask about their experience and whether anything can be improved before they cancel. ## Rule template > Customer has 3 or more previous paid orders and days since last order is more than 40 and customer average order value is over £25 and at least one product is in the Subscription category **Badge:** Churn Risk (orange, warning) **Inbox:** Yes ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Shorten 'more than 40' days to 'more than 30' if your subscription cycle is monthly and a 40-day gap means they already skipped a renewal. - Raise 'over £25' AOV to 'over £50' to focus churn alerts on higher-value subscribers where the revenue impact of losing them is greatest. - Lower '3 or more previous paid orders' to '2 or more' to catch churn signals earlier in the subscriber lifecycle. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and customer has a refund in order history' to focus on subscribers who have both a purchasing gap and a previous negative experience, a stronger churn predictor. - Remove 'and at least one product is in the Subscription category' to apply this churn signal to all repeat customers, not just those buying subscription products. ## When this rule matches - **established subscriber long gap:** Customer has 5 previous paid orders, last ordered 55 days ago (over 40), average order value is £38 (over £25), and order includes a Subscription product. All four conditions met. - **loyal subscriber 45 day gap:** Customer has 10 previous paid orders, last ordered 45 days ago, average order value is £62, and the basket contains a Subscription category product. Reliable subscriber showing a gap. ## When this rule does not match - **established subscriber recent order:** Customer has 6 previous orders, AOV of £40, and is buying a Subscription product, but last ordered only 20 days ago - within the 40-day window. - **new customer subscription long gap:** Customer has only 2 previous paid orders, which does not meet the 3-order threshold, even though the gap is 50 days and AOV is £30 and the product is in Subscription. - **established customer non subscription product:** Customer has 4 previous orders, 60-day gap, and AOV of £45, but no products are in the Subscription category - the category condition is not met. ## Good to know - Guest checkouts cannot trigger this rule because all four conditions require a registered customer with order history. - The Subscription category must be assigned to products in WooCommerce. If your subscription products use a different category name, edit the rule text to match. - Average order value is calculated across all previous paid orders. A customer whose early orders were high but recent orders are low may still qualify. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: How is this different from the food-subscription-lapse-risk rule?** This rule requires a product in the Subscription category and uses a 40-day gap with a £25 AOV threshold, tailored for subscription businesses. The food lapse risk rule uses a 45-day gap and £30 AOV without a category requirement, making it broader. **Q: Will a customer who last ordered exactly 40 days ago be flagged?** No. The rule requires more than 40 days, so exactly 40 does not meet the threshold. Adjust the number in the rule text if you need a tighter window. **Q: Does the £25 AOV threshold include shipping costs?** The average order value uses the order total as recorded by WooCommerce. Whether that includes shipping and tax depends on your store settings. **Q: Can I use this to automatically send a win-back email?** OrderBadger badges are informational and do not trigger automated emails. However, you can use the inbox alert as a manual prompt to send a personalised message or add the customer to a win-back sequence. ## Related rules - [food-subscription-lapse-risk](https://orderbadger.com/kb/food-subscription-lapse-risk/) - [lapsed-customer-60-days](https://orderbadger.com/kb/lapsed-customer-60-days/) - [customer-reactivated-after-180d](https://orderbadger.com/kb/customer-reactivated-after-180d/) - [loyal-customer-5-plus-orders](https://orderbadger.com/kb/loyal-customer-5-plus-orders/) ## People also search for WooCommerce detect subscribers about to cancel | how to flag returning subscription customers at risk of churn | WooCommerce subscription retention early warning system | identify lapsing subscribers by order gap in WooCommerce | WooCommerce churn prediction for subscription orders --- # How to prioritise first subscription box orders in WooCommerce > Badges orders from customers with no previous purchase history who are buying a Subscription Box product with an order total above £20. The first box sets the tone for the entire subscription relationship - getting it right reduces churn at the most vulnerable point in the customer lifecycle. ## The problem Subscription box businesses live and die by first impressions. A new subscriber's initial delivery shapes their entire perception of the service. If the first box arrives late, is poorly packed, or feels impersonal, the customer cancels before the second renewal. Yet in a busy fulfilment queue, first boxes look identical to recurring shipments and receive no special treatment. ## The solution OrderBadger can identify the very first subscription box order from a new customer and route it to your inbox for priority handling, helping you nail the first impression that determines whether they stay or cancel. ## Who this is for Subscription box businesses of any type - food, beauty, pet supplies, books, hobbies - that use WooCommerce and want to ensure first-time subscriber orders get premium attention. ## At a glance - First-time customers only (zero previous orders) - Subscription Box category required - Threshold: order total over £20 - Badge: First Box (purple) - Routes to inbox for premium packing ## How it works Evaluates three conditions: the customer must have zero previous paid orders, at least one product must be in the Subscription Box category, and the order total must exceed £20. The badge routes the order to your inbox so your team can ensure it gets premium packing, a welcome insert, and timely dispatch. **Recommended action:** Pack the first box with extra care. Include a welcome card or letter introducing the subscription. Add a small bonus item or sample that is not part of the standard box contents. Dispatch same-day if possible - speed of the first delivery correlates strongly with subscriber retention. ## Rule template > Customer has 0 previous paid orders and at least one product is in the Subscription Box category and order total is over £20 **Badge:** First Box (purple, info) **Inbox:** Yes ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Lower 'over £20' to 'over £10' if your subscription tiers include budget boxes that still deserve the first-impression treatment. - Raise 'over £20' to 'over £40' to reserve the badge for premium subscription tiers where the welcome experience justifies additional fulfilment cost. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and order contains a gift message' to identify first boxes that are also gifts - these deserve an even more polished unboxing experience since the recipient's first impression is also the giver's reputation. - Add 'or at least one product is in the Gift Subscription category' to cover prepaid gift subscriptions where the recipient is a new customer. - Remove 'order total is over £20' to badge every first subscription box regardless of value, ensuring no new subscriber misses the welcome treatment. ## When this rule matches - **new subscriber standard box:** Customer has zero previous orders, order contains a Subscription Box product, and total is £34.99 - first box experience applies. - **new subscriber boundary total:** Zero previous orders, Subscription Box category present, and order total is £20.01 - just above the £20 threshold. ## When this rule does not match - **returning subscriber renewal:** Order contains a Subscription Box product and total is £34.99, but customer has 3 previous orders - this is a renewal, not a first box. - **new customer non subscription:** Customer has zero previous orders and total is £55, but no products are in the Subscription Box category. - **new subscriber low value:** First-time customer with a Subscription Box product, but order total of £15.00 does not exceed the £20 threshold. ## Good to know - The rule identifies first-time customers by order count, not by subscription status. A customer who previously bought one-off products and then subscribes will have existing order history and will not trigger the badge. - If your subscription plugin creates renewal orders under the same customer account, those renewals will have a non-zero order count and correctly will not fire. But if renewals create new customer accounts (unusual but possible), they could incorrectly trigger. - The rule does not know whether the customer is on a monthly, quarterly, or annual plan. All first boxes are treated identically. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Will renewal orders trigger the First Box badge?** No. Renewal orders are associated with a customer who already has previous paid orders, so the zero-orders condition prevents the badge from appearing on renewals. **Q: What if someone buys a one-off product first and then subscribes?** The subscription order will not trigger the badge because the customer already has at least one previous paid order. If you want to catch these cases, remove the previous order condition and rely solely on the Subscription Box category. **Q: How much does a welcome insert or bonus item cost relative to the retention benefit?** Industry data suggests that subscription businesses lose 20-40% of new subscribers after the first box. Even a small investment in the unboxing experience - a handwritten note costs pennies - can measurably reduce first-month churn. **Q: Does this work with WooCommerce Subscriptions plugin?** Yes, as long as subscription products are categorised under Subscription Box in WooCommerce. The rule reads product categories, not subscription metadata, so it works with any subscription plugin. ## Related rules - [first-time-registered-buyer](https://orderbadger.com/kb/first-time-registered-buyer/) - [ops-first-order-high-value](https://orderbadger.com/kb/ops-first-order-high-value/) ## People also search for WooCommerce flag first subscription box for new subscribers | how to ensure great first impressions on subscription orders | WooCommerce prioritise new subscriber onboarding delivery | reduce first-box churn with priority handling WooCommerce | WooCommerce identify first-time subscription purchases --- # How to handle international gift subscriptions in WooCommerce > Badges orders where a first-time customer purchases a product from the Subscription Box or Gift Subscription category and the delivery is international. These orders need extra care - the recipient is often someone other than the buyer, customs paperwork must be correct, and the unboxing experience represents the gift-giver's choice. ## The problem Gift subscriptions shipped internationally combine three fulfilment risks: the buyer has no prior relationship with your store, the parcel crosses borders with customs implications, and the recipient judges both the gift and your brand on first impression. Without a flag, these orders are treated identically to domestic renewals and quality can slip. ## The solution OrderBadger can flag first-time international orders that contain subscription box or gift subscription products, so your team can ensure premium handling for cross-border gift deliveries. ## Who this is for Subscription box retailers and gift-focused stores that ship internationally, particularly beauty, food, and hobby box businesses where gifting is a significant sales channel. ## At a glance - Subscription Box or Gift Subscription category - International shipping only - First-time customers only (zero previous orders) - Badge: Gift Sub (purple) - Routes to inbox for premium handling ## How it works Checks three conditions: at least one product must be in the Subscription Box or Gift Subscription category, the shipping destination must be international, and the customer must have zero previous paid orders. When all three are true, the order is badged and routed to the inbox for attention. **Recommended action:** Verify customs declarations are accurate for the destination country. Include a gift card or welcome message if the buyer has provided one. Use premium packaging since the recipient's first impression of your brand depends on this delivery. Double-check that the shipping address is complete and valid for international delivery. ## Rule template > At least one product is in the Subscription Box or Gift Subscription category and shipping is international and customer has 0 previous paid orders **Badge:** Gift Sub (purple, info) **Inbox:** Yes ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Remove 'and customer has 0 previous paid orders' to flag all international gift subscription orders regardless of buyer history, useful if cross-border gift shipments always warrant extra care. - Change 'shipping is international' to a specific country check if most of your international gift orders go to one destination and you want to narrow the scope. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and order total is over £75' to focus on higher-value international gift subscriptions where the cost of a poor experience is greatest. - Add 'and order contains a gift message' to specifically target orders where the buyer included a personal note, which strongly signals a genuine gift rather than a self-purchase. - Remove 'and shipping is international' to badge all first-time gift subscription orders regardless of destination, useful for stores where domestic gift orders also need special treatment. ## When this rule matches - **first buyer gift sub international:** Customer has 0 previous orders, order contains a Gift Subscription product, and shipping destination is international. All three conditions met. - **first buyer subscription box international:** Customer has 0 previous orders, order contains a Subscription Box product, and shipping is international to Germany. ## When this rule does not match - **first buyer gift sub domestic:** Customer has 0 previous orders and the product is in Gift Subscription, but shipping is domestic - the international condition is not met. - **returning customer gift sub international:** Shipping is international and the product is in Gift Subscription, but the customer has 3 previous paid orders - not a first-time buyer. - **first buyer non subscription international:** Customer has 0 previous orders and shipping is international, but no products are in the Subscription Box or Gift Subscription category. ## Good to know - Products must be categorised under Subscription Box or Gift Subscription in WooCommerce. If your store uses different category names, edit the rule text to match. - Guest checkouts with no account can still trigger via the zero previous orders check, but customer history fields will be unavailable. - This rule does not verify whether the shipping address differs from the billing address. A first-time buyer shipping to themselves internationally will also be flagged. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Will this flag domestic gift subscription orders?** No. The rule requires international shipping. If you also want to flag domestic gift subscriptions, remove the international condition or create a separate rule without it. **Q: What if a returning customer buys a gift subscription for someone abroad?** The rule will not fire because the buyer has previous orders. If you want to catch all international gift subscriptions regardless of buyer history, remove the zero-orders condition. **Q: Does this work with both Subscription Box and Gift Subscription categories?** Yes. The rule matches products in either category. If your store uses one but not both, only the relevant category needs to be assigned to your products. ## Related rules - [subscription-first-box](https://orderbadger.com/kb/subscription-first-box/) - [international-order](https://orderbadger.com/kb/international-order/) - [first-time-registered-buyer](https://orderbadger.com/kb/first-time-registered-buyer/) ## People also search for WooCommerce flag international gift subscription orders | how to ensure quality on cross-border gift box deliveries | WooCommerce identify first-time gift subscription buyers | handle customs for international subscription gifts WooCommerce | WooCommerce premium handling for gifted subscription boxes --- # How to flag multi-item orders for packing in WooCommerce > Automatically badges orders that contain three or more line items so your warehouse team can allocate extra time or a larger packing station for multi-item picks. ## The problem Multi-item orders take longer to pick and pack and are more likely to have missing items or packing errors. Without a visual flag, warehouse staff may underestimate the effort required and cause delays. ## The solution OrderBadger can automatically flag orders with three or more line items for packing attention. ## Who this is for Any store with a physical fulfilment workflow where multi-item orders need dedicated packing attention or a different pick route. ## At a glance - Counts distinct line items, not total units - Threshold: 3 or more distinct products - Applies to all customers and order values - Badge: Multi-Item (teal) ## How it works Counts the distinct line items in an order and adds a badge when the count reaches three or more. This helps warehouse teams identify multi-item picks that need extra care or a larger packing station. **Recommended action:** Route multi-item orders to a dedicated packing area. Double-check all items against the packing slip before sealing to reduce missing-item complaints. ## Rule template > Order has 3 or more line items **Badge:** Multi-Item (teal, info) ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Raise '3 or more' to '5 or more' if most of your orders already contain 3-4 items and the badge fires too often to be useful. - Lower '3 or more' to '2 or more' if even two distinct products requires a different packing approach in your warehouse. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and total number of units ordered is more than 10' to flag orders that are both multi-product and high-quantity - the most time-consuming picks. - Add 'and order total is over £150' to limit the badge to high-value multi-item orders that justify extra packing attention. ## When this rule matches - **four line items:** Order has 4 line items which exceeds the 3-item threshold. - **exactly three line items:** Order has exactly 3 line items which meets the threshold. ## When this rule does not match - **two line items:** Order has only 2 line items which is below the 3-item threshold. - **single line item:** Order has only 1 line item which is well below the 3-item threshold. ## Good to know - This counts distinct line items, not total quantity. An order with 10 units of the same product is still 1 line item. - The threshold is fixed at 3. To change it, edit the rule and recompile. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Does buying 3 units of the same product trigger this rule?** No. This rule counts distinct line items (different products), not total quantity. Three units of one product is 1 line item. Use the 'total quantity over 5' rule if you want to flag by unit count. **Q: Why would I want to flag orders with many distinct products?** Multi-product orders often need larger packaging, may qualify for bundle discounts, or indicate a customer stocking up. Flagging them helps warehouse teams prepare the right box size and lets marketing target cross-sell buyers. **Q: How does this interact with the total-quantity-over-5 rule?** They measure different things. This rule counts distinct products; the quantity rule counts total units. An order with 2 products but 10 total units would trigger the quantity rule but not this one. You can use both together for richer warehouse routing. ## Related rules - [total-quantity-over-5](https://orderbadger.com/kb/total-quantity-over-5/) - [distinct-products-over-2](https://orderbadger.com/kb/distinct-products-over-2/) ## People also search for WooCommerce flag orders with multiple line items | how to route multi-product orders to packing stations | WooCommerce identify orders needing extra pick time | reduce packing errors on multi-item WooCommerce orders --- # How to flag bulk quantity orders in WooCommerce > Automatically badges orders where the total number of units exceeds five, so your team can route bulk orders to appropriate packing stations or apply wholesale handling procedures. ## The problem Bulk orders require larger boxes, heavier packaging, and sometimes different carrier services. Without a visual flag, they enter the standard fulfilment queue and cause bottlenecks or incorrect shipping quotes. ## The solution OrderBadger can automatically flag orders where the total unit count exceeds any threshold you set. ## Who this is for Stores that sell to both retail and small-wholesale customers, or any store where high-quantity orders need different packing or carrier treatment. ## At a glance - Counts total units across all products - Threshold: more than 5 units - Applies to all customers and order types - Badge: Bulk Order (teal) ## How it works Checks the total quantity of all items in the order and adds a badge when it exceeds five units. This helps identify bulk or wholesale-like orders that need different handling. **Recommended action:** Route bulk orders to a dedicated packing station with larger boxes. Consider whether a different carrier service or pallet shipping is needed for the volume. ## Rule template > Total number of units ordered is more than 5 **Badge:** Bulk Order (teal, info) ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Lower 'more than 5' to 'more than 3' if your standard box only fits 3 items and anything above needs a larger carton. - Raise 'more than 5' to 'more than 10' to reserve the badge for genuinely wholesale-sized orders and reduce noise on moderate purchases. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and every item in the order is the same product' to isolate single-SKU bulk reorders - prime candidates for a subscription upsell. - Add 'and total order weight is over 10 kg' to catch bulk orders that are also heavy, ensuring the right carrier is selected. ## When this rule matches - **eight units:** Total quantity of 8 units exceeds the 5-unit threshold. - **six units:** Total quantity of 6 units exceeds the 5-unit threshold. ## When this rule does not match - **three units:** Total quantity of 3 units is below the 5-unit threshold. - **five units boundary:** Total quantity of exactly 5 units does not exceed the threshold (rule says 'more than 5', not 'at least 5'). ## Good to know - This counts total units, not distinct products. An order with 6 units of the same SKU will trigger the badge. - The threshold is fixed at 5. To change it, edit the rule and recompile. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Does exactly 5 units trigger the badge, or does it need to be 6 or more?** It needs to be more than 5, so 6 units is the minimum to trigger. Exactly 5 units will not be badged. Edit the rule text to 'at least 5' if you want 5 to be included. **Q: Does this count total units across all products, or per product?** Total units across the entire order. An order with 3 units of Product A and 3 units of Product B has 6 total units and will trigger the badge. **Q: Is there a way to flag very large orders differently from moderately large ones?** Yes. Create additional rules at higher thresholds (e.g. 'more than 20 units') with a different badge name and colour. Both badges will appear on orders that exceed both thresholds, giving your team tiered visibility. ## Related rules - [three-or-more-line-items](https://orderbadger.com/kb/three-or-more-line-items/) - [distinct-products-over-2](https://orderbadger.com/kb/distinct-products-over-2/) ## People also search for WooCommerce flag high-quantity orders automatically | how to route bulk orders to dedicated packing stations | WooCommerce identify wholesale-size orders by unit count | detect large quantity orders needing bigger boxes WooCommerce | WooCommerce separate bulk and retail orders for fulfilment --- # How to find shipment consolidation opportunities in WooCommerce > Badges orders shipping to a postcode that has received more than 3 previous orders, from a customer with 5 or more paid orders, with a total over £50 - indicating a potential opportunity to consolidate shipments or offer bulk delivery terms. ## The problem When multiple orders ship to the same area from loyal customers, there is often an opportunity to consolidate deliveries, reduce carrier costs, or negotiate better rates for that route. Without a flag, each order is dispatched individually and the consolidation opportunity is invisible to your logistics team. ## The solution OrderBadger can identify orders from loyal customers shipping to frequently used postcodes, highlighting consolidation opportunities for your logistics team. ## Who this is for Stores with concentrated delivery areas - wholesalers, B2B suppliers, regional food delivery businesses, and any operation where repeat shipments to the same postcode present a cost-saving opportunity. ## At a glance - Postcode received 3+ previous orders from any customer - Requires 5+ previous paid orders from buyer - Threshold: order total over £50 - Badge: Consolidate? (grey) - Highlights shipment batching potential ## How it works Combines three conditions: the destination postcode has received more than 3 previous orders, the customer has 5 or more paid orders on record, and the current order total exceeds £50. When all three are true, the order receives a Consolidate? badge as a prompt to investigate whether shipments to that area can be batched or optimised. **Recommended action:** Check whether other pending orders are shipping to the same postcode area. If so, consider batching them for a single carrier collection, negotiating route-based rates, or offering the customer a consolidated delivery window. ## Rule template > Previous orders to same postcode count is more than 3 and customer has 5 or more previous paid orders and order total is over £50 **Badge:** Consolidate? (grey, info) ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Lower 'more than 3' postcode orders to 'more than 1' if you operate in a small delivery area where even 2 previous orders indicate a pattern. - Raise 'over £50' to 'over £100' if you only want to flag consolidation opportunities on higher-value orders where the savings justify the effort. - Reduce '5 or more previous paid orders' to '3 or more' to catch consolidation opportunities from newer but already-repeat customers. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and shipping method contains standard' to exclude express orders that cannot wait for consolidation. - Add 'and order contains a physical item' to skip virtual-only orders that do not need physical shipment consolidation. ## When this rule matches - **loyal customer repeat postcode high value:** Five previous orders to this postcode, 8 previous paid orders, and order total of £120 - all three conditions satisfied. - **high frequency postcode exact thresholds:** Four previous orders to postcode (more than 3), exactly 5 previous paid orders (5 or more), and total of £51 (over 50) - passes at the boundary of each condition. ## When this rule does not match - **postcode count exactly 3 boundary:** Only 3 previous orders to this postcode - does not exceed the threshold of more than 3, even though customer and value conditions are met. - **loyal customer but low order total:** Repeat postcode and loyal customer but order total is only £35 - below the £50 threshold. - **repeat postcode but few orders:** High postcode frequency and good order value but customer has only 3 previous paid orders - below the 5-order threshold. ## Good to know - Postcode matching is based on the full postcode string. Different addresses in the same postcode area all contribute to the count, but partial postcode matches do not. - The rule identifies the opportunity but does not automate consolidation. Your team still needs to check for other pending orders manually. - Guest checkouts are excluded because customer order history is not available. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Does the postcode count include orders from all customers or just this one?** It includes all previous orders shipped to that postcode regardless of customer. This is intentional - consolidation opportunities exist whenever multiple shipments go to the same area, even from different buyers. **Q: Why require 5 or more previous paid orders from the customer?** The customer history condition ensures the buyer is established and likely to keep ordering. Consolidation planning is only worthwhile for customers with a proven repeat pattern, not one-off buyers who happen to share a postcode. **Q: Can I use this rule to automatically batch orders together?** No. OrderBadger flags the opportunity but does not modify fulfilment workflows. Your team should use the badge as a prompt to manually check for other pending orders to the same area and batch them if possible. **Q: Will the badge fire for an order total of exactly £50?** No. The rule specifies 'over £50', so the total must be at least £50.01 to trigger the badge. Edit the rule to 'at least £50' if you want to include the boundary. ## Related rules - [repeat-destination-postcode](https://orderbadger.com/kb/repeat-destination-postcode/) - [loyal-customer-5-plus-orders](https://orderbadger.com/kb/loyal-customer-5-plus-orders/) - [order-total-over-100](https://orderbadger.com/kb/order-total-over-100/) ## People also search for WooCommerce identify orders to same postcode for batching | how to consolidate deliveries to frequent destinations | WooCommerce reduce shipping costs with delivery batching | find repeat postcode delivery patterns in WooCommerce | WooCommerce route optimisation for loyal customer shipments --- # How to predict multi-package shipments in WooCommerce > Badges orders where the total weight exceeds 15 kg, the order contains more than 5 distinct products, and at least one physical item is present - a combination that strongly indicates the shipment will require splitting across multiple packages. ## The problem Orders that need multiple packages incur extra carrier costs, require more packing materials, and take longer to fulfil. Without advance warning, packers discover the split mid-process, causing delays and ad-hoc carrier negotiations that slow the entire dispatch queue. ## The solution OrderBadger can flag heavy, multi-product orders that are likely to require splitting across multiple packages. ## Who this is for Fulfilment teams, warehouse managers, and operations staff at stores selling diverse product ranges where heavy multi-line orders are common - home goods, hardware, food distributors, and general merchandise retailers. ## At a glance - Threshold: total weight over 15 kg - More than 5 distinct products required - Must contain at least one physical item - Badge: Multi-Package (yellow) - Routes to inbox for package-split planning ## How it works Checks three conditions simultaneously: total order weight exceeds 15 kg, more than 5 distinct products are present, and the order contains at least one physical item. When all three are true, the order is badged and routed to the inbox so your team can plan the multi-package split before picking begins. **Recommended action:** Review the order before picking to plan the package split. Pre-allocate the correct number of boxes, calculate per-package weights for carrier labels, and consider whether items can be grouped to minimise the number of parcels. ## Rule template > Total order weight is over 15 kg and distinct product count is more than 5 and order contains a physical item **Badge:** Multi-Package (yellow, info) **Inbox:** Yes ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Lower 'over 15 kg' to 'over 10 kg' if your standard box has a lower weight limit. - Reduce 'more than 5' to 'more than 3' if your packaging splits at fewer distinct items. - Raise 'over 15 kg' to 'over 25 kg' if most of your orders are heavy and the current threshold generates too many badges. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and shipping is international' to focus on multi-package international shipments where customs declarations per parcel add complexity. - Add 'and at least one product is marked as oversize' to specifically flag orders that combine bulk products with oversize items - the hardest to package efficiently. ## When this rule matches - **heavy 6 products physical:** Total weight is 18 kg (over 15), 6 distinct products (more than 5), and contains a physical item - all three conditions met. - **very heavy 8 products:** Total weight is 25 kg and 8 distinct products with physical items - well above all thresholds. ## When this rule does not match - **heavy but only 3 products:** Total weight is 20 kg but only 3 distinct products - below the threshold of more than 5. - **many products but light:** Six distinct products with physical items but total weight is only 3 kg - below the 15 kg threshold. - **weight exactly 15 kg boundary:** Total weight is exactly 15 kg which does not exceed the threshold (rule says 'over 15 kg'), even with 6 distinct physical products. ## Good to know - Weight accuracy depends on product weights being correctly set in WooCommerce. Products without a weight are treated as zero. - The rule uses product count as a proxy for volume. A single heavy item that needs its own box will not trigger this rule if there are fewer than 6 distinct products. - Both thresholds are fixed in the rule text. Edit the values to match your packaging limits. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Does an order weighing exactly 15 kg trigger this badge?** No. The rule requires total weight to be over 15 kg. An order at exactly 15.0 kg will not fire - it needs to be at least 15.01 kg. **Q: Why does the rule require more than 5 distinct products and not just check weight?** Weight alone does not reliably predict multi-package needs. A single 20 kg item fits in one box, but 6 lighter items totalling 16 kg are far more likely to need splitting. The product count condition captures the volume and variety that drives multi-package fulfilment. **Q: Will a virtual-only order ever trigger this badge?** No. The rule explicitly requires the order to contain a physical item. Purely digital orders are excluded regardless of the number of line items or their attributed weight. ## Related rules - [heavy-order-over-5kg](https://orderbadger.com/kb/heavy-order-over-5kg/) - [electronics-heavy-oversized](https://orderbadger.com/kb/electronics-heavy-oversized/) - [warehouse-oversize-routing](https://orderbadger.com/kb/warehouse-oversize-routing/) ## People also search for WooCommerce flag orders likely needing multiple packages | how to plan package splits before picking begins | WooCommerce identify heavy multi-product shipments | predict multi-parcel orders for warehouse planning | WooCommerce avoid dispatch delays from unplanned package splits --- # How to route oversize product orders in WooCommerce > Badges orders containing at least one product flagged as oversize in WooCommerce, directing warehouse staff to pick and pack from the oversize bay instead of standard shelving. ## The problem Oversize products require different storage, packaging materials, and often a different carrier service. When oversize items are not visually flagged, pickers waste time searching standard shelves before realising the item is stored elsewhere, and packers may use inappropriate boxes that lead to damage or carrier surcharges. ## The solution OrderBadger can flag any order that contains an oversize product so your warehouse team knows to pick from the oversize bay. ## Who this is for Warehouses and fulfilment teams selling a mix of standard and oversize goods - furniture retailers, garden centres, sporting goods stores, and any operation with a dedicated oversize or bulk bay. ## At a glance - At least one product flagged as oversize - Oversize flag set per product in WooCommerce - Applies to all order sizes and values - Badge: Oversize Bay (orange) ## How it works Scans each line item in the order and checks the oversize flag set on the product in WooCommerce. If at least one item is marked as oversize, the order receives an Oversize Bay badge, giving pickers and packers an instant visual cue. **Recommended action:** Route the pick ticket to your oversize or bulk bay. Use appropriate packaging materials and check whether the carrier service supports the parcel dimensions before dispatch. ## Rule template > At least one product is marked as oversize **Badge:** Oversize Bay (orange, info) ## Make it yours **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and shipping is international' to highlight oversize international shipments where dimensional surcharges are steepest. - Add 'and total order weight is over 10 kg' to combine oversize with heavy-weight detection for orders needing pallet freight. - Add 'and distinct product count is more than 3' to focus on complex oversize orders that require multiple picks from the oversize bay. ## When this rule matches - **single oversize item:** The order contains one item marked as oversize, satisfying the 'at least one' condition. - **mixed oversize and standard:** One of three items is marked as oversize, so the condition is met even though the other two are standard-sized. ## When this rule does not match - **all standard size items:** None of the items in the order are marked as oversize, so the condition is not met. - **empty order no items:** The order has no items, so there can be no oversize product present. - **single standard item:** The single item in the order is not marked as oversize. ## Good to know - The oversize flag must be set manually on each product in WooCommerce. Products without the flag will not trigger the badge regardless of their actual dimensions. - This rule does not check weight or physical dimensions - it relies solely on the is_oversize product attribute. - If all items in the order are oversize, the badge still appears once. It does not indicate how many oversize items are present. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: How do I mark a product as oversize in WooCommerce?** Set the oversize attribute or custom field on the product in WooCommerce. The exact method depends on your theme or plugin setup - typically it is a checkbox or custom meta field on the product edit screen. **Q: Will the badge fire if only one item in a multi-item order is oversize?** Yes. The rule checks whether at least one product is marked as oversize. Even if the rest of the order is standard-sized, the badge will appear. **Q: Does the oversize flag consider product variations separately?** It depends on how the oversize attribute is set. If the flag is on the parent product, all variations inherit it. If set per variation, only the specific variation triggers the check. **Q: Can I use this alongside a weight-based rule to catch both oversize and heavy orders?** Yes. Enable both this rule and the heavy-order rule. Orders that are both oversize and heavy will receive both badges, giving your team a clear signal to use specialist packaging and carrier services. ## Related rules - [heavy-order-over-5kg](https://orderbadger.com/kb/heavy-order-over-5kg/) - [electronics-heavy-oversized](https://orderbadger.com/kb/electronics-heavy-oversized/) - [international-order](https://orderbadger.com/kb/international-order/) ## People also search for WooCommerce flag orders with oversize items for warehouse | how to route oversized products to specialist packing bay | WooCommerce identify bulky items needing large packaging | automate oversize product warehouse routing in WooCommerce --- # How to fast-track single-item express orders in WooCommerce > Badges orders that contain exactly one product at quantity one with an express or next-day shipping method, allowing warehouse staff to route them through a fast-lane workflow for immediate dispatch. ## The problem Single-item express orders are the simplest to fulfil yet they often sit in the general queue behind complex multi-item picks. Without a visual flag, these quick wins are not prioritised, and the express delivery promise is at risk of being missed. ## The solution OrderBadger can identify single-item express orders so your team can fast-lane them for immediate dispatch. ## Who this is for Fulfilment teams and warehouses offering express or next-day shipping who want to separate simple single-pick orders from complex multi-item ones to maximise dispatch speed. ## At a glance - Exactly one product at quantity one - Shipping method must contain express or next-day - Badge: Fast Lane (green) - Ideal for priority single-pick dispatch ## How it works Combines three conditions: the order must contain exactly one distinct product, the total quantity must be one unit, and the shipping method must include 'express' or 'next-day'. When all three are true, the order receives a Fast Lane badge for priority picking. **Recommended action:** Route Fast Lane orders to a dedicated single-pick station or priority queue. These require one pick, one pack, and one label - ideal for immediate dispatch ahead of complex multi-item orders. ## Rule template > Distinct product count is 1 and total quantity is 1 and shipping method contains express or next-day **Badge:** Fast Lane (green, info) ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Replace 'express or next-day' with your actual shipping method names (e.g. 'priority or overnight') if your store uses different labels. - Change 'total quantity is 1' to 'total quantity is 2 or fewer' if you want to include small-quantity express orders in the fast lane. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and order total is over £20' to exclude low-value express orders where fast-laning offers less return on effort. - Add 'and order contains a physical item' to skip purely digital express orders that do not need warehouse handling. - Remove 'and total quantity is 1' to fast-lane any single-product express order regardless of quantity. ## When this rule matches - **single item express shipping:** One distinct product, quantity of 1, and shipping method is 'express' - all three conditions satisfied. - **single item next day shipping:** One distinct product at quantity 1 with shipping method containing 'next-day' - the method keyword matches. ## When this rule does not match - **single item standard shipping:** One product at quantity 1 but shipping method is standard - does not contain 'express' or 'next-day'. - **multiple items express shipping:** Shipping is express but the order contains 2 distinct products - fails the distinct product count condition. - **single product quantity 3 express:** One distinct product but total quantity is 3, not 1 - fails the total quantity condition even though shipping is express. ## Good to know - The shipping method match is text-based. If your express service uses a different name (e.g. 'priority' or 'overnight'), edit the rule to include your method names. - This only flags orders with exactly one unit of one product. A customer ordering two of the same item will not qualify. - Bundle or composite products that appear as a single line item will qualify even if they contain multiple physical components. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: What if my express shipping method is called 'Priority Delivery' instead of 'express'?** Edit the rule text to replace 'express or next-day' with your method names, e.g. 'priority or next-day', and recompile. **Q: Will an order with quantity 2 of the same product qualify for the fast lane?** No. The rule requires total quantity to be exactly 1. An order with 2 units of the same product fails the quantity condition. Edit the rule if you want to include small multi-unit orders. **Q: Does this work with WooCommerce Shipping Zones?** Yes. The rule reads the shipping method name assigned by WooCommerce, regardless of which zone it belongs to. As long as the method name contains 'express' or 'next-day', it will match. ## Related rules - [single-sku-order](https://orderbadger.com/kb/single-sku-order/) - [ops-weekend-rush-order](https://orderbadger.com/kb/ops-weekend-rush-order/) ## People also search for WooCommerce prioritise single-pick express orders | how to fast-lane simple next-day delivery orders | WooCommerce separate single-item express from bulk queue | speed up express order dispatch in WooCommerce warehouse | WooCommerce fast lane for one-item priority shipments --- # How to skip fulfilment for digital-only orders in WooCommerce > Badges orders that contain at least one virtual item and no physical items, signalling to your team that the order requires only digital delivery - no picking, packing, or shipping is needed. ## The problem In stores selling both physical and digital products, purely virtual orders can end up in the warehouse pick queue, wasting time as staff search for items that do not exist on the shelves. Without a clear flag, digital-only orders clog physical fulfilment workflows. ## The solution OrderBadger can automatically flag orders that contain only virtual or digital products and need no physical shipment. ## Who this is for Stores selling a mix of physical goods and digital products - software publishers, online course providers, music and ebook retailers, and any WooCommerce shop where virtual products sit alongside shippable merchandise. ## At a glance - Must contain at least one virtual item - Must contain zero physical items - No warehouse fulfilment needed - Badge: Digital Only (blue) ## How it works Checks two conditions: the order must contain at least one virtual item, and it must not contain any physical items. When both are true, the order is badged as Digital Only, telling your warehouse team to skip it entirely and ensuring digital delivery is handled through the appropriate channel. **Recommended action:** Remove the order from physical fulfilment queues. Verify that download links, licence keys, or access credentials have been delivered to the customer. If your store uses automated digital delivery, confirm the automation completed successfully. ## Rule template > Order contains a virtual item and order does not contain a physical item **Badge:** Digital Only (blue, info) ## Make it yours **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and order total is over £100' to highlight high-value digital orders that warrant manual confirmation of delivery success. - Add 'and customer has 0 previous paid orders' to specifically flag first-time buyers receiving digital-only orders, where delivery confirmation is most critical. ## When this rule matches - **virtual only single item:** The order contains a virtual item and does not contain any physical item - both conditions satisfied. - **multiple virtual items no physical:** All three items are virtual products with no physical items present - the order is entirely digital. ## When this rule does not match - **mixed physical and virtual:** The order contains both a virtual item and a physical item - fails the 'does not contain a physical item' condition. - **physical only no virtual:** The order contains only physical items with no virtual products - fails the 'contains a virtual item' condition. - **empty order:** The order has no items, so neither virtual nor physical items are present - the virtual item condition is not satisfied. ## Good to know - Relies on products being correctly configured as virtual in WooCommerce. A physical product mistakenly left as non-virtual will cause the order to be incorrectly flagged. - WooCommerce Subscriptions or Bookings may or may not be classified as virtual depending on the product settings. - This rule does not verify whether digital delivery actually succeeded - it only identifies that no physical fulfilment is required. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: What is the difference between this rule and the 'contains virtual item' rule?** The contains-virtual-item rule fires when any virtual item is present, including mixed orders with both physical and virtual products. This rule only fires when the entire order is virtual - no physical items at all. **Q: Will a WooCommerce downloadable product trigger this rule?** Yes, if the product is also marked as virtual in WooCommerce. Downloadable products that are not marked as virtual may still be treated as physical items. **Q: Can I use this to automatically skip the shipping step in WooCommerce?** OrderBadger only applies a badge - it does not modify WooCommerce shipping behaviour. WooCommerce already skips shipping for virtual-only orders by default if products are configured correctly. **Q: What happens if someone adds a physical product to a virtual-only cart at the last moment?** The order will then contain a physical item, so this rule will not fire. The mixed-physical-virtual rule may fire instead, depending on your active rules. ## Related rules - [contains-virtual-item](https://orderbadger.com/kb/contains-virtual-item/) - [mixed-physical-virtual](https://orderbadger.com/kb/mixed-physical-virtual/) ## People also search for WooCommerce flag orders that need no physical shipping | how to remove virtual orders from warehouse pick queue | WooCommerce identify digital-only orders automatically | stop virtual products appearing in fulfilment queue | WooCommerce separate physical and digital order workflows --- # How to manage weekend order backlogs in WooCommerce > Automatically badges orders placed on Saturday or Sunday so your team can manage weekend fulfilment expectations and prioritise the Monday morning queue. ## The problem Weekend orders accumulate while the warehouse is closed and create a Monday backlog. Without flagging them, staff cannot easily distinguish weekend orders from early Monday orders, making it harder to manage fulfilment priorities and customer expectations. ## The solution OrderBadger can automatically flag all orders placed on Saturday or Sunday. ## Who this is for Stores that do not fulfil orders over the weekend, or those that want to track weekend ordering patterns for scheduling and staffing decisions. ## At a glance - Saturday and Sunday orders only - Uses store timezone from WordPress settings - Applies to all order sizes and values - Badge: Weekend (blue) ## How it works Checks the day of the week when the order was placed using the store's local timezone. Saturday and Sunday orders are badged so your team can manage the weekend backlog effectively on Monday morning. **Recommended action:** Use the weekend badge to prioritise the Monday fulfilment queue. Consider setting customer expectations via order confirmation emails that weekend orders will be dispatched on the next business day. ## Rule template > The order was placed on a weekend **Badge:** Weekend (blue, info) ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - If your warehouse operates on Saturdays, edit the rule text to 'The order was placed on a Sunday' so only true non-working-day orders are badged. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and order total is over £100' to focus the badge on high-value weekend orders worth prioritising first on Monday morning. - Add 'and shipping is international' to flag weekend international orders separately, since they may miss Monday carrier collection cut-offs. ## When this rule matches - **sunday order:** The order was placed on Sunday (day 0), which is a weekend day. - **saturday order:** The order was placed on Saturday (day 6), which is a weekend day. ## When this rule does not match - **monday order:** The order was placed on Monday (day 1), which is a weekday. - **friday order:** The order was placed on Friday (day 5), which is a weekday. ## Good to know - Weekend detection uses the WordPress timezone setting. Ensure it matches your actual operational timezone. - Day-of-week uses 0 for Sunday through 6 for Saturday. If your business operates on weekends and closes on other days, this rule will not match your schedule. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Which timezone is used to determine if an order is placed on a weekend?** The WordPress timezone setting configured in Settings > General. Ensure this matches your operational timezone so that orders near midnight are classified correctly. **Q: My business operates on Saturdays - can I flag only Sunday orders instead?** Not with this rule as-is. Edit the natural language text to specify 'placed on a Sunday' instead of 'on a weekend', then recompile. This will narrow the match to Sundays only. **Q: Will a Friday evening order placed at 11:55pm be flagged as a weekend order?** No. The rule checks the calendar day in your store's timezone. A Friday order remains a Friday order regardless of the time. Only Saturday and Sunday calendar days are matched. ## Related rules - [late-night-order](https://orderbadger.com/kb/late-night-order/) - [outside-business-hours](https://orderbadger.com/kb/outside-business-hours/) ## People also search for WooCommerce flag orders placed on Saturday or Sunday | how to handle Monday morning order backlog efficiently | WooCommerce identify weekend orders for batch processing | manage weekend fulfilment expectations in WooCommerce --- # How to upsell near-case wine orders in WooCommerce > Automatically badges orders where the customer is buying 6 to 11 bottles and every item is in the Wine category, highlighting an opportunity to nudge them towards a 12-bottle case for a discount. ## The problem Many wine retailers offer a case discount at 12 bottles. Customers buying 6-11 bottles are tantalizingly close to the threshold but may not be aware of the saving. Without a flag, the order is fulfilled as-is and the upsell opportunity - which benefits both the customer and the store - is missed. ## The solution OrderBadger can identify wine orders that are close to case quantity so your team can reach out with a case discount offer. ## Who this is for Wine merchants and specialist drinks retailers who offer case discounts at 12 bottles and want to identify near-miss orders where a quick customer contact could convert the order to a full case. ## At a glance - Wine-only orders (all items in Wine category) - Quantity window: 6 to 11 bottles - Close to 12-bottle case discount threshold - Badge: Near Case Qty (teal) ## How it works Checks three conditions: total quantity must be 6 or more, total quantity must be less than 12, and every item in the order must be in the Wine category. This targets pure wine orders that are between half-case and full-case quantities. **Recommended action:** Contact the customer before dispatch to let them know they are close to a case discount. Suggest specific wines to complete the case based on what they have already selected. Even an automated email at checkout can capture these conversions. ## Rule template > Total quantity is 6 or more and total quantity is less than 12 and all products are in the Wine category **Badge:** Near Case Qty (teal, info) ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Change '6 or more' to '9 or more' if you only want to nudge customers who are very close to a full case - 3 bottles away rather than 6. - If your case discount kicks in at 6 rather than 12, change 'less than 12' to 'less than 6' and lower the minimum accordingly. **Add or remove conditions:** - Remove 'and all products are in the Wine category' to also catch mixed wine-and-spirits orders that could be topped up to a case. - Add 'and customer has 2 or more previous paid orders' to focus the upsell on returning customers who are more likely to respond to a case-deal suggestion. ## When this rule matches - **wine only 6 bottles boundary:** All 6 items are Wine, total quantity is exactly 6 (lower boundary) - eligible for case upsell. - **wine only 11 bottles boundary:** All items are Wine and total quantity is 11 (upper boundary, still less than 12) - just one bottle short of a case. ## When this rule does not match - **wine only 12 bottles:** Total quantity is exactly 12 - the customer has already reached case quantity and does not need a nudge. - **wine only 5 bottles:** Total quantity is 5 - below the minimum of 6 bottles needed to be considered near-case. - **mixed category 9 bottles:** Total quantity is 9 but the order includes a non-Wine item - 'all products in Wine category' condition fails. ## Good to know - The rule uses WooCommerce's total quantity, which counts individual units. Wines sold as multi-packs (e.g., a 3-bottle gift set as one product with quantity 1) may undercount. - The case threshold of 12 is a convention. If your case discount is at a different quantity (e.g., 6), adjust both boundaries in the rule text. - Mixed wine-and-spirits orders are excluded because the 'all products in Wine' condition fails. Create a variant rule if you want to include spirits. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Why not flag orders with fewer than 6 bottles?** Customers buying 1-5 bottles are further from the case threshold and less likely to convert. The 6-bottle minimum targets customers who are already committed to a significant wine purchase and are most receptive to adding a few more bottles. **Q: Does a 12-bottle order trigger this rule?** No. The rule requires total quantity to be less than 12. A customer who has already reached case quantity does not need the nudge - they should already be receiving the case discount. **Q: What if I offer a half-case discount at 6 bottles?** Adjust the lower boundary to start above your half-case quantity. For example, set it to 7 or more and less than 12 to target customers between a half-case and a full case. **Q: Can I use this for spirits or mixed drinks too?** This rule requires all items to be in the Wine category. For spirits or mixed orders, create a variant rule that either includes additional categories or removes the all-Wine restriction. ## Related rules - [total-quantity-over-5](https://orderbadger.com/kb/total-quantity-over-5/) ## People also search for WooCommerce flag wine orders close to case discount quantity | how to nudge customers towards 12-bottle case deals | WooCommerce identify wine orders eligible for case upsell | increase average order value for wine orders WooCommerce | WooCommerce wine merchant case quantity upsell automation --- # How to ensure customs compliance on alcohol orders in WooCommerce > Automatically badges international orders that contain alcohol products (Wine, Beer, or Spirits) so your team can prepare customs declarations, verify duty requirements, and check destination country import restrictions before dispatch. ## The problem International alcohol shipments are subject to customs duties, excise taxes, and varying import restrictions by country. Some destinations prohibit alcohol imports entirely, while others require specific documentation. Without a flag, an international alcohol order may be dispatched without the correct paperwork, leading to customs seizure, return-to-sender costs, or legal issues. ## The solution OrderBadger can flag international orders containing wine, beer, or spirits so your team can prepare the correct customs documentation. ## Who this is for Wine merchants, craft breweries, distilleries, and drinks retailers who ship internationally and need to ensure every alcohol shipment has correct customs declarations and complies with destination country regulations. ## At a glance - Wine, Beer, or Spirits categories required - International shipping only - Badge: Customs Declaration (red) - Routes to inbox for duty and import review - Category: compliance ## How it works Checks whether any item belongs to the Wine, Beer, or Spirits category AND the order is shipping internationally. When both conditions are true, a warning badge appears and the order is routed to the inbox for customs compliance review. **Recommended action:** Prepare a customs declaration listing the alcohol content, volume, and value of each item. Check the destination country's import regulations for alcohol - some countries have quantity limits, require import permits, or prohibit alcohol imports entirely. Include duty estimates for the customer if possible. ## Rule template > At least one product is in the Wine, Beer, or Spirits category and shipping is international **Badge:** Customs Declaration (red, warning) **Inbox:** Yes ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Edit 'Wine, Beer, or Spirits' to remove categories you do not ship internationally (e.g. drop 'Beer' if you only export wine and spirits). - Add more categories such as 'Liqueurs' or 'Fortified Wine' if those product lines are listed separately in your WooCommerce catalogue. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and total quantity is more than 6' to focus the compliance badge on larger international alcohol shipments where duty costs are significant. - Remove 'and shipping is international' to also flag domestic alcohol orders - useful if your country has inter-state or inter-region restrictions on alcohol delivery. ## When this rule matches - **wine international us:** Order contains a Wine item and ships internationally to the US - both conditions met. - **spirits international jp:** Order contains a Spirits item and ships internationally to Japan. - **beer international au:** Order contains a Beer item and ships internationally to Australia. ## When this rule does not match - **wine domestic:** Order contains Wine but ships domestically - international condition not met. - **non alcohol international:** Order ships internationally but contains no alcohol categories - only Accessories. - **spirits domestic:** Order contains Spirits but ships domestically - only the alcohol condition is met. ## Good to know - The rule relies on products being correctly categorised as Wine, Beer, or Spirits. Alcohol sold under general categories like Gifts or Hampers will not be caught. - Domestic alcohol shipments are not flagged. Some countries have internal shipping restrictions on alcohol that this rule does not cover. - The rule does not check destination-specific regulations. You must manually verify whether the destination country allows alcohol imports. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Does this rule check whether the destination country allows alcohol imports?** No. The rule flags all international alcohol orders for review. Your team must verify the destination country's specific regulations. Countries like Saudi Arabia and Kuwait prohibit alcohol imports entirely, while others have quantity or duty limits. **Q: What customs documentation is typically needed?** Most international alcohol shipments require a commercial invoice listing the alcohol type, volume (ml/cl), alcohol by volume (ABV %), quantity, and declared value. Some countries also require an import licence or health certificate. Check with your carrier for specific requirements. **Q: Why is severity set to warning instead of critical?** Most international alcohol shipments can proceed with correct documentation - they are not inherently blocked. Warning severity ensures the order is reviewed without implying it must be stopped. If your store ships to countries where alcohol is prohibited, consider creating a separate critical-severity rule for those specific destinations. **Q: Can I exclude specific countries where I already have automated customs paperwork?** This rule flags all international alcohol orders. If certain destinations are already handled automatically by your shipping software, your team can quickly skip those in the inbox. For a more targeted rule, edit the NL text to exclude specific countries. ## Related rules - [international-order](https://orderbadger.com/kb/international-order/) ## People also search for WooCommerce flag international alcohol orders for customs | how to prepare customs declarations for wine shipments | WooCommerce alcohol export duty and compliance checks | ensure international wine beer spirits orders are legal | WooCommerce cross-border alcohol shipping regulations --- # How to identify wine collector customers in WooCommerce > Automatically badges orders from established customers with 3 or more previous orders who are buying 6 or more distinct wine products in a single order - a collector profile ideal for tasting notes, curated recommendations, and loyalty rewards. ## The problem Repeat wine customers who consistently build varied mixed cases are among the most engaged and valuable buyers. They appreciate variety, are open to recommendations, and have high lifetime value. Without a flag, these collectors are treated identically to one-bottle buyers and the opportunity for personalised service is lost. ## The solution OrderBadger can identify repeat wine customers who build varied mixed cases, flagging them as collectors for personalised service. ## Who this is for Wine merchants and fine wine retailers with a repeat customer base who want to identify and nurture collector-type buyers - customers who explore different wines rather than buying the same bottle repeatedly. ## At a glance - Wine-only orders (all items in Wine category) - Threshold: 6 or more distinct wines - Requires 3+ previous paid orders - Badge: Collector (green) - Identifies variety-seeking repeat buyers ## How it works Combines three conditions: the order must contain 6 or more distinct products, every product must be in the Wine category, and the customer must have 3 or more previous paid orders. This identifies experienced buyers who explore variety - the collector profile. **Recommended action:** Include tasting notes for each wine in the shipment. Consider sending personalised recommendations based on their selections, or inviting them to a curated tasting event. These customers are prime candidates for loyalty programmes and pre-release allocations. ## Rule template > Distinct product count is 6 or more and all products are in the Wine category and customer has 3 or more previous paid orders **Badge:** Collector (green, info) ## Make it yours **Adjust thresholds:** - Lower '6 or more' distinct products to '4 or more' if your catalogue is smaller and a 4-wine mixed order already signals collector behaviour. - Raise '3 or more previous paid orders' to '5 or more' to tighten the collector label to your most established repeat buyers. **Add or remove conditions:** - Add 'and subtotal is over £150' to focus the collector badge on high-value mixed cases rather than budget mixed picks. - Remove 'and all products are in the Wine category' to also identify collectors who explore across wine, spirits, and beer. ## When this rule matches - **repeat customer 6 distinct wines:** Customer has 5 previous orders, buying 6 distinct wines (boundary) - all Wine category. Collector profile. - **loyal customer 12 distinct wines:** Customer has 10 previous orders and is buying 12 distinct wines - a highly engaged collector building a full mixed case. ## When this rule does not match - **new customer 6 distinct wines:** Order has 6 distinct wines but customer has only 1 previous order - below the 3 previous orders threshold. - **repeat customer 5 distinct wines:** Repeat customer with 4 previous orders but only 5 distinct wines - below the 6 distinct product threshold. - **repeat customer mixed wine and beer:** Repeat customer with 6 distinct products but one is Beer - 'all products in Wine category' condition fails. ## Good to know - The rule counts distinct products, not bottles. A customer buying 12 bottles of 3 different wines only has a distinct product count of 3. - Wine sold in multi-packs or gift sets counts as one product regardless of the number of bottles inside. - The 3 previous orders threshold is a proxy for relationship maturity. Adjust it to suit your customer base. ## Frequently asked questions **Q: Why require 3 previous orders instead of just 1?** The collector label is most meaningful for customers with an established purchasing pattern. A first-time buyer selecting 6 wines might be buying for a dinner party. A customer with 3+ previous orders who consistently buys varied wines is genuinely building a collection. **Q: Does buying 6 bottles of the same wine count?** No. The rule checks distinct product count, not total quantity. Six bottles of the same wine is a single-SKU order with distinct product count of 1, which does not meet the threshold. **Q: Can I use this badge to offer exclusive wines or pre-release access?** Yes. Filter orders by the Collector badge to build a segment of your most engaged wine buyers. Use this list for early access to new arrivals, limited-edition allocations, or invitation-only tasting events. ## Related rules - [loyal-customer-5-plus-orders](https://orderbadger.com/kb/loyal-customer-5-plus-orders/) - [distinct-products-over-2](https://orderbadger.com/kb/distinct-products-over-2/) ## People also search for WooCommerce flag repeat customers building mixed wine cases | how to identify wine collectors for personalised service | WooCommerce detect varied wine case buyers automatically | reward loyal wine customers who explore your range | WooCommerce wine merchant customer loyalty segmentation ---